Home

Quantum Hardware Reference Guide

1. VOXC VEVA 323130 292827 2625 2722222 2720 9 1817 1861574 137271 TT 97 9 T T ALAA OVC 3733730 x25 242327 212 TET Peters pos 9 T T IEEE 8 0 in lt 203 2 mm gt 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 765 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following shows the 140CFC03200 wiring for the following input modules for Input 140DA135300 140DA145300 140DA155300 14000135300 14000185300 Modules Field Side Connections 5S 3 Typical 2 wire fi ti oaii 2 ez configuration Input 1 SABER D e 944 e 5 e 6 gt 7 e 8 Module Input 9 gt Typical 1 wire Module Input 10 _ s p MIDI configuration e2 24 o s e 2 1 4 14 15 ug 16 17 8 18 EE T 0 8 A Fuse Part Numbers Ser Modicon 140CFU08000 tS Qty 10 gae 5 y 23 34 Wickman 3700800041
2. Grounding Field Side Connections Jumper 140 ACO 020 00 140 AVO 020 00 1 See jumper information below Signals Signals 1 Monitor 1 Output 1 q Field I Sink CQ Device 140 ACO 020 00 Current Out i Sinking T Jumper Source 1 Common 1 S Monitor 2 Output 2 Qe Field CO2 Device I Sink 2 Q 140 AVO 020 00 V 2 Voltage Out e e 2 I Source 2 2 53 Monitor 3 Output 3 3 Fed I Sink 3 c9 3 Device V3 Jumper 140 ACO 020 00 e Current Out 3 Sourcing oe Source 3 Common 3 gt Sg v9 cg 4 Jumper Part Number 140CFX001 10 Var V4 Jumper Connections S1 to V1 to 1 e S2 to V2 GND S3 to v3 t COS to V3 For 140 ACO 020 00 V operation only i 812 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When used with the 140AVO02000 analog voltage out module the master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I O connector 2 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 3 For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000 and the AVO02000 see wiring diagrams in 140ACO02000 Quantum I O Analog Current Out Module p 505andthe 140AVO02000 Quantum I O Analog Voltage Out Module p 513 4 The GND ground
3. VOLTAGE SOURCE sc CoL aurmur iiA RELAY 1 COMMON 4 ouTPuT 1 N C RN N C 6 5 OUTPUT 2 N O ELAY 2 COMMON 7 BUTPUTANC N C N C N C 12 OUTPUTS N O RELAY 3 COMMON OUTPUT 3 N C N OUTPUT 4 N O RELAY 4 COMMON 17 OUTPUT 4 N C N C N C we D OUTPUT 5 N O RELAY 5 COMMON G3 OUTPUT 5 N C N C 5 OUTPUT 6 N O S 6 Q7 SUIPUTSNC J E N C N C QureuT Y 7 COMMON T RELAY 7 69 OUTPUT 7 N C N C 65 OUTPUT 8 N O COMMON RELAY 8 COMMON 67 OUTPUT 8 N C One of Eight Typical N C N C Note 1 When switching DC voltages it is recommended that the source be connected to the common pin and the load be connected to the N O or N C contact 2 For 125 Vdc inductive loads external clamping is recommended to extend relay contact life 1N 4004 or equivalent 3 N C Not Connected N O Normally Open N C Normally Closed 654 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 18 7 Discrete Verified Output Module At a Glance Overview This section provides information on the discrete verified output module the 140DVO85300 a 32 point output module What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page I O Configurat
4. door Part 31002249 lt Battery D Key Switch O asci T H sSlide 27 o Switch LO Modbus im Connector 2 Comm 1 Modbus B Connector 3 S e Modbus Plus B Connector m Network lt n 156 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412A Controller module Specifications User Logic Reference Capacity 984 Ladder Discrete Register Extended IEC Logic Register Application 64kwords 64k 57k 96 k 896 k 57 766 4XX registers max Only if OXXX 16 and 1XXX 16 and 3XXX 16 Reference Capacity Discrete 64 k any mix Local I O Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Requires Expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out System Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31 Distributed I O Maximum Number of Networks per 91 Maximum Words per Network for every DIO drop there is a minimum of words input of overhead 500 In and 500 Out Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I O For each word of register I O configured one word must be subtracted from the total available The sam
5. CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components Model Number Module Description LED Area t Color Code Removable door Customer Identification Label Part 043513804 Fold label and place it inside door Part 31000226 a Battery ale Qi er Key Switch Dr l Slide Switch Modbus ss 7 Mati Connector 15 lt Modbus 2 e Connector 38 B Modbus Plus 2 B Connector 2 Neto lt 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 145 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU43412 CONTROLLER module Specifications User Logic Reference Capacity 984 Discrete Register Extended Ladder Register Logic 64kwords 64k 57k 96k 57 766 4XX registers max Only if OXXX 16 1XXX 16 and 16 Reference Capacity Discrete 64 k any mix Local I O Main Backplane Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Requires expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out System Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31 Distributed I O Maximum Number of Networks 3 Maximum Words per Network for every DIO drop there is a minimum of wor
6. Front Panel Two three position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU The left Switches switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions The three position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 ports The following figure shows the three options that are available mem ASCII pt d I off uu Lm not used em Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed The following table shows the ASCII communication port parameters ASCII Communication Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Communication Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits
7. Si J d S J S n m 11 00000099 020000099 000 0009 en 9999 LLALA The following are the application notes for the 140CFE03200 module 1 Configuration Arranged in four groups of eight I O points Two terminals per point prevent disruption of service due to a single point failure 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides individual 32 point 0 8 A fusing for the 140DD035300 and the 140DDO35301 modules The following shows the dimensions for the 140CFE03200 module FUEL E Hmmm m TT P FP TT ff m m T pai nnmn BEBE nn gni enc 3 3 in 83 8 l suty Y 9 3 in I 48 9 4 4 in 236 2 mm la mm P 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 775 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFE03200 module Field Side Connections eet Typical 2 wire e 924 configuration e 34 ed 944 e 954 27 8
8. Noe sen Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 96 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Specifications supply module The following table shows the specifications for the CPS51100 125 Vdc power Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 100 150 Vdc including ripple Input Current 0 4A Inrush Current 10A Input Power Interruption 1 0 ms max Fusing external 1 5 A slo blo recommended Part 043502515 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 3A Minimum Current 0 3 A Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506325 Internal Power Dissipation 2 0 3 x lout Watts where lout is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone LED Indicator and Description Pwr ok The following figure shows the CPS51100 LED indicator The following table shows the CPS51100 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 97 Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The followi
9. Z O Bw gt 3 e w m 9 z lt m 9 z e 9 z pa m e 4 O NODICON BEBI 0529129 C550 65 692519 6510969056903 09 mmm 5 Front View Side View S Remote I O Tap The following figure shows the remote I O network tap part number MA 0185 100 704 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Misc Components Remote I O Splitter RG 6 Remote F Connector Remote I O BNC Connectors RG 11 Remote F Connector The following figure shows the remote network I O splitter part number MA 0186 100 MODICON AN AEG COMPANY TRUNK SPLITTER MA 0331 000 RCV A OUT OUT The following figure shows the remote I O network F connector part number MA 0329 001 This is the F connector for quad shield RG 6 cable The following figure shows the remote I O network BNC connectors part number 043509446 BNC connector for quad shield RG 6 cable and 52 0487 000 BNC connector for non quad shield RF 6 cable a
10. Fiber Optic Cable Note The distance between nodes on fiber is limited by the maximum allowable power loss from end to end 3 km over 62 5 mm fiber Power loss includes the fiber optic cable attenuation connector losses at the Fiber Optic Receiver and Transmitter ports and the system margin of 3 dB The end NOM25200 in this configuration will have the FRNGoff LED active and will display the Cable B Framing error in the MBPSTAT in ladder logic 262 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Tree and Star The use oftree and star configurations can provide flexibility in the layout of Modbus Configurations Plus and NOM 25200 networks The following illustrations show examples of tree and star configurations Additional repeaters can be connected in order to extend communication between electrical links Tree Configuration Example Legend Node 1 P S CPUNOM MES Eo arc Fiber Optic Q Cable MB Tap with i Terminator Tap uk 490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeaters D ood Node 2 Node 3 Node 6 Node 7 P S CPUNOM
11. Field Side Grounding Connections 140 ACO 02000 140 AVO 020 00 Signals Signals Monitor 1 Output 1 V Field I Sink C Device 140 ACO 020 00 V Current Out VI Sinking Jumper Source 1 Common 1 t Modicon 140 CFX 001 10 s Monitor 2 Output 2 Vo 2 Field Device Sink 2 cg 140 AVO 020 00 e ye Voltage Out V2 eo Source 2 Common 2 Monitor 3 Output 3 Tor eo WOES 9 Field I Sink 3 Jumper Device V 3 Modicon 140 ACO 020 00 e 140CFX00110 Current Out Sourcing 4 Source 3 Common 3 s V8 4 4 V 4 e e V 4 e 9 4 e GND e RET For 140 ACO 020 00 b i operation only 810 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When used with the 140AVO02000 analog voltage out module the master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I O connector 2 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 3 For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000 see wiring diagram in 140ACO02000 Quantum I O Analog Current Out Module p 505 4 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 811 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 instrument grounding Instrument module
12. The following figure shows the wiring instrument grounding for the 140CFH00800 module Current IN Loop Power Required UL Source Current IN Instrument Powered 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 789 CableFast Cabling Note e When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points e For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVI03000 see the wiring diagrams in 140AC103000 I O Analog In Module 479 and 140AVI03000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module p 495 e The GND ground terminal point is not connected 790 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram Chassis Grounding module Jumper See jumper information below Module Input 1 Module Input 1 Module Input 2 Module Input 2 Module Input 3 Module Input 3 Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140 CFU 006 00 Qty 10 Wickman 3700063041 Field Side Connections UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 Jumper Part Number 140CFX00110 Jumper Connections S1 to S2 to S3 to S4 to S5 to S6 to S7 to S8 Shield The following figure shows the wiring chassis grounding for the 140CFH00800 Current IN Loop Power Required
13. 5 Q CableFast 140 CFG 016 00 16 99 99 99 99 000 2 SHIELD 9999 99900202 000 000000 GY WANY Swm UL FILE E123528 The following are the application notes for the 140CFG01600 module 1 Configuration Arranged in 16 isolated I O points 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides individual 16 point 4 A fused connection points for the following modules 140DAI34000 1400 144000 140DAI54000 140DAO84000 140DA084010 140DAO84210 140DAO84220 14000084300 The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFG01600 module 2 4 in Ne qe 44A in lt 111 8 mm iq 8in 147 3 mm 777 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CFG01600 wiring for the input isolated AC input for Isolated AC mode modules 140DAI34000 140DAI44000 and 140DAI54000 Input Mode Field Side P F1 4A Connections Module I
14. E 63 with repeater Local I O e e e e e e Trunk Cable Tap Up to 31 Nodes Tap AN Trunk Cable Up to 31 Nodes lap 010 yo o yo DIO yo vo vo Drop Drop O ILo o Io o Quantum Drop m Quantum Drop n Drop Cables Drop Cables A MODBUS Plus tap plastic Part 990NAD23000 ruggedized Part 990NAD23010 is required for every participant on the network A drop cable 8 ft 2 4 m Part 990NAD21110 20 ft 6 m Part 990NAD21 130 is required for each drop from the MODBUS Plus tap Cables are not included with the modules and need to be ordered Note The dual cable option is provided for systems that require added protection against cable breaks or damaged connectors With two cables connected between the host and each node no single cable break will disrupt communications 26 840 U SE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Configurations Part Numbers MODBUS Plus taps that can be used for single and dual cable DIO configurations include Part Number 990NAD23000 plastic and Part Number 990NAD23010 ruggedized The following MODBUS Plus trunk cables can be used with these DIO configurations Part Number 490NAA27101 100 ft 30 m Part Number 490NAA27102 500 ft 152 m Part Number 490NAA27103 1000 ft 304 m Part Number 490NAA27104 1500 ft 456 m Part Number 490NAA27105 5000
15. RIO Heads and The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability Drops for the RIO Heads and Drops of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140CRA93100 V 140CRA93200 Y Y Y 140CRP93100 N N N N N N 140CRP93200 N V V N 140CRA93101 Field Bus The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability Modules for the Field Bus modules of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140CRP81100 140 1 92100 140NOA61100 N N N N N 140NOA61110 V 14030191100 V 14030191110 V V 140NOL91120 Y 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 829 Agency Approvals NOEs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the NOEs of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA222 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140NOE21100 N N N N
16. Spare Part Number Description 043503356 Field Wiring Terminal Block Jumpers 043503416 Module Mounting Screw 043505125 Field Wiring Terminal Block Terminal Screw 31000207 40 Position Wiring Terminal Block Door Label 31000221 NOE Door Label 31000226 x34 1x CPU Door Label 31000264 Hot Standby Door Label 31002249 x34 1xA CPU Door Label Fuses The following table shows the fuses for the Quantum modules Part Number Fuse Type Fuse Value Fuse Holder 042701994 8 A SloBlo Not required 043502405 5 A SloBlo Wickman 820 Holder Wickman 835 Flush Cap 043502515 1 5 A SloBlo Wickman 5700000000 Holder Wickman 5750000100 Cover 043502516 2 5 A SloBlo Wickman 5700000000 Holder Wickman 5750000100 Cover 043503948 25A Not required 043508930 1 25A 57 001 000 57 0078 000 3 4A 57 001 000 57 0089 000 2 A SloBlo 57 001 000 3 AG Fast Acting 1 16 A 250 V 1 116 A 3 AG Fuse Type Panel Mount 708 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation At a Glance Introduction This section provides information on selecting backplanes selecting mounting brackets space requirements for the Quantum system and mounting Quantum modules What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Hardware Installation Selecting Backplanes 710 Hardware Installation Mounting Brackets 717 Hardware Installation Space Re
17. 8 2 amp 2 9 CO CO C3 9 9 OO 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 583 I O Modules 18 6 Discrete Output Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum discrete output modules What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page I O Configuration for Discrete Output Modules 585 140DAO84000 I O AC Output 24 230 Vac 16x1 Module 594 140DAO84010 I O AC Output 24 115 Vac 16x1 Module 598 140DAO84210 Quantum I O AC Output 100 230 Vac 4x4 Module 603 140DAO84220 Quantum I O AC Output 24 48 Vac 4x4 Module 608 140DAO85300 Quantum I O AC Output 24 230 Vac 4x8 Module 613 14000015310 I O DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink Module 618 140DDO35300 Quantum I O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module 622 14000035301 I O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module 627 14000035310 I O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 631 14000036400 I O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module 636 14000084300 Quantum I O DC Output 10 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module 641 14000088500 Quantum I O DC Output 24 125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module 644 140DRA84000 Quantum I O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module 649 140DRC83000 Quantum I O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open Normally 652 Closed Module 584 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Configuration for Discrete Output Modules Ove
18. x ia gl ee efefe o esee Gy Agency Approvals CENELEC Zone 1 Gas Group IIC IIB and IIA CSA Class 1 Div 1 Gas groups A B C and D FM Class 1 Div 1 Gas groups A B C and D UL Class 1 Div 1 Gas groups A B C and D 378 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Intrinsically Safe Wiring Diagram Questions Regarding Intrinsically Safe Wiring Practices The following diagram illustrates a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module using a separate raceway to isolate its external wiring to the hazardous area This is just one of the possible ways of field wiring the module Other methods would include bundling and laying the intrinsically safe wires in the same wiring trough with the bundled non intrinsically safe wires with each bundle tied down and separated by minimum of two inches of air space through out the wiring runs B BACKPLANE PS C STDISTDISTD LS Intrinsically Safe H VO M M O A S p A 2 D U U L L D STANDARD b E WIRING u No 9 SO INTRINSICALLY SAFE WIRING IN SEPARATE BLUE RACEWAY A Z E INTRINSICALLY A SAFE WIRING LABELS The information concerning intrinsic safety wiring practices is general in nature and is not intended to cover installation requireme
19. 749 Ata Glance i anse P he AR t reb e ure E SiS reds 749 Features of the CableFast Cabling System 750 140CFA04000 CableFast Cabling 757 140CFB03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 760 140CFC03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 764 140CFD03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 773 140CFE03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 775 140CFG01600 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 777 140CFH00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 785 140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 793 140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 800 140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 808 CableFast Cables 816 CableFast Accessories 821 Error Stopped 823 Error Stopped Codes eccccecceo des vu beak Ou UT n 823 Agency lt 827 Agency 2 2 nee 827 LUNG a apaun ata E w uei Wk dose abs xiii viii Safety Information Important Information NOTICE Read these instructions carefully and look at the equipment to become familiar wi
20. GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON ED n ELE m OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT2__ 2 NES OUTPUT4 4 eeu Po WW 1 6 6 5 OUTPUTS OUTPUT 8 7 ourPur 7075 GROUP A SUPPLY 9 GROUP OUTPUT 10 02 Gp OUTPUT OUTPUT py 00 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT12 14 13 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 G is Siu ke XE OUTPUT 16 G GROUP SUPPLY GROUP COMMON for each point These d odes shown above will OUTPUT 18 gg gi OUTPUT 17 Sot nigra of ie pale OUTPUT 20 amp OUTPUT 19 is commanded ON OUTPUT 22 gg OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 24 67 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 26 62 67 OUTPUT 25 OUTPUT 28 D OUTPUT 27 OUTPUT 30 GS OUTPUT 29 OUTPUT 32 7 OUTPUT 31 664 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 18 8 Discrete Supervised Input Module Ata Glance Overview This section provides information on the discrete supervised input module the 14005135300 a 32 point input module What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page I O Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module 14005135300 666 140DS135300 I O DC 24V Supervised Input Module 667 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 665 I O Modules Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module 14005135300 Ove
21. Group to Group 1000 Vac rms for 1 minute galvanically isolated Output to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Bus Current Required 350 mA Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 V x Total Module Load Current External Power rms 85 258 Vac 604 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal 5 A fuse for each group Part 043502405 or equivalent For the location of the fuses see figure below External User discretion WARNING Possible injury to personnel or equipment First turn off the power to the module to remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO84210 module Fuse Locations Points 5 8 Points 9 12 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 605 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the DAO84210 module N C N C N C N C GROUP A HOT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 N C N C N C N C GROUP B HOT GROUP A COMMON e OUTPUT 5
22. CableFast 140 CFA 040 00 UL FILE E123528 220o0 2200 2200 2200 200 200 SG Je poss Standard DIN rail mounting for quick installation Field side wiring terminals accommodate 12 AWG to 24 AWG 2 5 mm to 0 2 mm wire The following figure and table show the stacking convention used by CableFast terminal blocks Layer 3 Layer 2 Layer 1 Signal Positive igna igna 756 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling 140CFA04000 CableFast Cabling Block Overview CFA04000 Terminal Block Application Notes The A block is a straight through point to point connection on the terminal block Wiring of this block is identical to wiring the Quantum I O connector 140XTS00200 See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for a description of the common features and specifications of CableFast Cabling blocks The following terminal block is unique to the CFA04000 module 8 o eoooooooo CableFast 140 CFA 040 00 UL FILE E123528 The following are the application notes for the 140CFA04000 terminal block 1 Configuration Two columns 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides straight through
23. 336 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Controlling the Hardware inputs from the field can be used to Module Increment decrementthe input counters with serial pulses from encoders or other square wave sources Set direction of count Reset the outputs Hardware inputs from the field and software commands are used together to Enable the count input Hardware inputs from the field or software commands can be used to Preset the input counter to zero or maximum count Software commands can be used to Configure the counters for pulse tachometer or quadrature mode Configure for 16 or 32 bit counters with or without output assertion Configure the module to operate in either count or rate sample mode Option for outputs to operate or not operate if backplane bus communication is lost i e a fault condition Option for outputs to switch on when setpoint and or maximum values are reached Define the setpoint and maximum count values Define ON time for outputs Disable outputs Read the input counter totalizing or rate sample values Retrieve the old previous input counter value after the counter has been preset 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 337 Intelligent Special Purpose Timing Diagrams This section includes timing diagrams and parameters for the 140EHC20200 and Parameters counter modules Timing diagrams and a timing parameter table for
24. Modules The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In Out modules Discrete In Out Type Part Number Type Part Points Points Buscurrent Special Number channels per required features group 140DAM59000 115 Vac 16 In 8 250 mA 0 5 A per point 8 Out 4 on outputs grouped fused 140DDM39000 24 Vdc 16 In 8 330 mA 0 5 A per point 8 Out 4 on outputs grouped fused 140DDM69000 125 4 In 4 350 mA Inputs 4 Out N A Grouped Outputs 4 A per point isolated 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 57 Hardware Specifications Modules Analog In Out The following table shows specifications for the Analog In Out module Type PartNumber Function Points Points Bus Special Channels per Current Features group Required 140AMM09000 Inputs 4 In N A 350 mA Mixed inputs Vdc current or 10 voltage 5 0 10 0 5 1 5 mA 20 0 20 4 20 Outputs 2 Out N A Isolated 4 20 Modules The following table shows specifications for the Analog In modules Analog in Type Part Number Function Points Points Bus Special Channels per Current Features Group Required 140ACIO3000 4 20 mA 8 1 240 mA Mixed inputs 1 5 Vdc current or voltage 140ACIO4000 0 25 mA 16 16 360 mA High density 0 20 mA 4 20 mA 140ARI03010 RTD Pt Ni 8 1 200 mA IEC American
25. F adapters Coaxial Cable adapters Coaxial Cable Splitter MA 0186 100 52 0411 000 i for quad shield cable MA 01 ped 52 0399 000 for non quad shield RIO Drop 2 cable eu C u uw Line Trunk A Line B Drop Cabl Tap Last RIO Drop rop Vable MA 0185 100 PS RIO VO VO VO 4 P di Trunk Terminator 52 0422 000 Trunk Terminator Drop Cable 52 0422 000 24 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Configurations Quantum Distributed I O DIO Overview Related Documentation Single Cable DIO Configuration Quantum DIO can be set up in standard single or dual cable configurations refer to the following two figures The Quantum DIO architecture is based on Modicon s Modbus Plus technology When DIO is utilized the Quantum system may support up to three distributed networks of up to 64 drops using a repeater each Communication between the various nodes and the Modbus Plus head in both single and dual cable DIO configurations is done by twisted pair cabling from the head to the DIO adapters at the drops For detailed information concerning the Quantum DIO systems refer to the MODBUS Plus I O Servicing User Guide part number 840USE10400 The following figure is an ex
26. Chassis N C Ground Output 3 N C Output 4 N C Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections N C Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to N C chassis ground at the ground Screws on the backpalne N C Note 2 All negative output terminals Output 1 thru Output B are internally connected to 1 5 ground Output 5 N C Output 6 Note 3 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically N C connected to the module Output 7 Note 4 Only Quantum 140 XBP oX oo backplanes should be used for mounting this module N C Output 8 N C N C I S Module DIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 31001366 Rev 00 140DIO33000 Wiring Diagram 426 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION 1 5 24 Vdc NO LOAD Output 1 S Output 1 Output 2 i9 Output 2 N C I N C Output 3 Output 3 N C N C Output 4 Output 4 N C N C N C Output 5 Output 5 N C GE N C Output 6 4 Output 6 N C BHE N C Output 7 Output 7 1 5 Module DIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 31001366 Rev 00 Chassis Ground HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS I DIV I GROUP A B C D CLASS II DIVI GROUP E F G CLASS III DIVI Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device
27. N N Memory Protect and men ASCII Comm parameter xim Slide Switches Mee 9 Modbus Modbus 2 Connector B PII Modbus Modbus 8 Connector 899 m D Pus Modbus Plus Modus Connector Pus oH um 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 167 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specification for the 140CPU53414 CONTROLLER module Specifications User Logic Reference Capacity 984 Ladder Discrete Register Extended Logic Register 64 k words 64k 57k 96k 57 766 4XX registers max Only if OXXX 2 16 and 1XXX 16 and 16 Reference Capacity Discrete 64 k any mix Local I O Main Backplane Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Requires Expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31 Distributed I O Maximum Number of Networks per System 3 Maximum Words per Network For every DIO drop there is a minimum of words input of overhead 500 In and 500 Out Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out Maximum Number of Option Module Interfaces Supports up to six network modules i e Modbus Plus Ethernet and Multi Axis Motion option modules using the option module interface technique Note Only two Modbus Plus modules can have
28. Table indicating cable color coding for all input groups 1 white 2 brown 3 green 4 yellow 5 gray 6 pink 7 blue 8 red 9 black 10 purple 11 gray pink 12 red blue 13 white green 14 brown green 15 white yellow 16 yellow brown 17 white gray 18 gray brown 19 white pink 20 pink brown 572 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Compatible The following tables shows the compatible connections sub bases See Quantum Connection Sub Modicon Telemecanique Automation Platform Discrete I O Chapter Telefast 2 pre Bases wire system connector cables FOR Quantum PLCs section for more detailed information Channels Type 8 ABE 7H08Rxx 8 ABE 7H08821 16 ABE 7H16Rxx H16Cxx 16 ABE 7H16S21 16 ABE 7H16R23 16 ABE 7H16S43 With the splitter sub base ABE 7ACCO2 Compatiblelnput 16 Channels ABE 7S16E2xx 7P16F3xx Adapter Sub Base 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 573 I O Modules 14000167300 Quantum I O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module Overview Specifications The DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink module accepts 125 Vdc inputs and is for use with source output devices The module has software selectable response time to provide additional input filtering The following table shows the specifications for the DDI67300 125 VDC IN module Specifications Numb
29. The following table shows specifications for the Hot Standby module Part Number Communication Bus Current Special Features Channel Required 140CHS11000 Fiber Optic 700 mA Use kit P N 140 CHS21000 The following table shows specifications for the high speed Counter modules Part Number Function Points Bus Special Features Channels Current Required 140EHC10500 High Speed 5 250 mA 35 kHz 24 Vdc 100 Counter 100 kHz 5 Vdc kHz 140EHC20200 High Speed 2 650 mA 500 kHz Incremental Counter 500 or Quadrature kHz The following table shows specifications for the ASCII Interface Module Part Numbers Function Communication Bus Special Features Channels Current Required 140ESI06210 Intelligent Bi 2 300 mA 1 Port 19 2 kbps directional ASCII Interface 54 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Specifications High Speed Interrupt Module Single Axis Motion Modules The following table shows specifications for the High Speed Interrupt module Interrupt Part Number Function Points Bus Current Channels Required 140HLI34000 High Speed Latch and 16 400 mA The following table shows specifications for the Single Axis Motion modules Part Numbers Function Channels Bus Special Current
30. Channel 1 out of range or short circuit Channel 2 out of range or short circuit Channel 3 out of range or short circuit L_ Channel 4 out of range or short circuit Channel 5 out of range or short circuit Channel 6 out of range or short circuit Channel 7 out of range or short circuit Channel 8 out of range or short circuit Modsoft Module Push Enter to display and select the overall module and channel configuration Zoom Selections Resolution Output unit CELSIUS FAHRENHEIT Value Type TEMPERATURE RAW VALUE 468 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules The following figure shows the channel X configuration selection Channel Enable Disable 4 Wire 3 Wire 2 Wire RTD TYPE Pt Ni R A Pt ENABLE DISABLE 4 WIRE 3 WIRE 2 WIRE Pt100 200 850 Pt200 200 850 Pt500 200 850 Pt1000 200 850 Ni100 60 180 Ni200 60 180 Ni500 60 180 Ni1000 60 180 R 0 766 66 OHM R 0 4000 OHM APt100 100 450 APt200 100 450 APt500 100 450 APt1000 100 450 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 469 I O Modules 140 103000 Map Register Assignments The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ATI03000 Analog Input
31. Grounding Field Side Jumper Connections See jumper information below 1 Monitor 1 PE Field I Sink 1 CQ urrent Out 1 6 Vg Sinking F1 V 1 1 Jumper Source 1 2 Monitor 2 Q 2 I Sink 2 d 5 1 16 V 2 ov e F2 V 2 eo 2 Source 2 3 3 Monitor 3 lt Field I Sink 3 116A Jumper Current Out b Sourcing F3 V3 Source 3 Fuse Part Numbers Shield j Modicon 140CFU00600 Qty 10 vg4 Wickman 3700063041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 cg 4 V 4 Jumper Part Number E 140CFX00110 ee Jumper Connections GRE S1 to S2 to S3 to S4 e V1 to 1 RET to V3 V e 806 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 Forthe required jumper options for the 140ACO02000 see the wiring diagrams in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram p 507 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 807 CableFast Cabling 140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The K block is used for analog outputs This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast
32. 3X 1 to 3X 4 echoes 4X 1 to 4X 4 register contents 3X45 Configure or Load Values Command Byte 16 15 14 1 Field Power Lost The following figure shows the 4X register for Command 3 READ INPUT COUNTER output register format 4X 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 211 L 1 Preset Counter 1 1 Enable Counter 1 1 Disable Counter 1 1 Preset Counter 2 1 Enable Counter 2 1 Disable Counter 2 Read Counter Inputs Com mand Bits 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 313 Intelligent Special Purpose Command 3 Response Format Command 4 READ RATE SAMPLE or READ LAST COUNT VALUE BEFORE MOST RECENT PRESET Output Register Format 4X 04XX hex The following figure shows the Command 3 response format 3X 16 15 14 13 1 i2 H 30 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 72 1 Read Counter Inputs Command Byte 3X 1 and 3X 2 Counter 1 s 16 or 32 bit Current Count 3X 3 and 3X 4 Counter 2 s 16 or 32 bit Current Count 3X 5 16 15 14 13 12111109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Field Power Lost The following figure shows the 4x counters for Command 4 4X 16 15 14113 12 11 109 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
33. lt a Seven Segment Display Reset Push Button RS 232C Port InterBus Port 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 201 Quantum Field Bus Modules Specifications The following table shows the InterBus specifications Specifications Data Interface InterBus RS 485 isolated 500 V test voltage RS 232C maximum cable length As per DIN 66 020 non isolated 20 m shielded Data Transfer Frequency 500 kbaud Connection Styles Interbus RS 232C Use cable part number 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 Bus Current Required 700 mA Power Dissipation Max 3 7 W typically 2 5 W Installation Local backplane only LED Indicators The following figure shows the NOA611X0 LED indicators and Descriptions for NOA611X0 R Active F IB S Run Master RBUS LBUS Slave DEA202 Memory Start Up The following table shows the NOA61 1X0 LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Function R Green Reagy The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for service Active Green Bus communication is active F Red Fault A fault occurred on the module IB S Run Green The InterBus is functioning normally and carrying data BS Off Yellow One or more bus segments are shut down
34. Count Frequency 100 kHz max 5Vdc 35 kHz max 24Vdc Input Thresholds On Off 3 1 5V 0 1 15V 5 15 30V 8 5V 24 Input Current 7 mA Duty Cycle T4 Data Formats 16 Bit Counter 65 535 Decimal 32 Bit Counter 2 147 483 647 Decimal Operation Modes Discrete incremental counter Max Continuous Input 30 Vdc Voltage Discrete Inputs VREF Supply 24 Vdc On State Vdc Off State Vdc 3 0 5 0 15 0 30 0 Input Current typical 5mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 299 Intelligent Special Purpose Specifications Discrete Outputs FET Switch ON 20 30 Vdc FET Switch OFF 0 Vdc ground reference Max Load Current each output 210 mA max Output Off State Leakage 0 1 mA max 30 Vdc Output On State Voltage Drop 1 25 Vdc 0 5 A Miscellaneous Isolation Channel to Bus 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Loss of output field power output short circuit Power Dissipation lt 6 W Bus Current Required 250 mA External 24 Vdc Power Supply 19 2 30 Vdc 24 Vdc nominal 60 mA required plus the load current for each output External Fusing User discretion Compatibility Programming Software Modsoft V2 32 or Concept 2 0 at a minimum Quantum Controllers All V2 0 at a minimum 300 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose LED Indi
35. Module Output 1 F1 0 8A V 6 7 8 Module Output9 F90 8A Typical 1 wire configuration Module Output 10 F19 0 8A e je je 2 E 9 dNOY9 M 9 dNOYD e24 9244 Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU08000 Qty 10 72 925 Wickman 3700800041 26 26 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 M H q dnous Module Group A VAT E Common Power Module 4 Group B Group A Supply e VCH VC Group C Power Power Module VD vD Group D Power Group B Common Module Group B Supply Group A Note The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 QTY 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 776 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling 140CFG01600 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview Terminal Block Application Notes Dimensions The G block is a high power output block used on both AC and DC circuits requiring up to 2 A Individual fusing is provided and may be used in both 1 and 2 wire installations It is also used for isolated AC modules See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks The following figure shows the 140CFG01600 terminal block
36. RIO NOM NOE Hgad VO VO IO VO Modbus Plus Cable Modbus Plus DIO Twisted Pair Cable DIO Drop M Tap RIO Coaxial mcs s MB RIO Drop 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Overview Quantum Power Supplies Overview Quantum power supplies are used to supply system power to all modules inserted into the backplane including e Quantum CPU modules e Quantum Interface modules e Quantum I O modules Depending upon the system configuration the option exists of using the power supply in three different modes Power Supply The following table shows the power supply modes Modes Power Supply Type Usage Standalone For 3A 8 or 11 A configurations that do not require fault tolerant or redundant capabilities Standalone Summable For configurations consuming more than the rated current of one supply two summing power supplies can be installed in the same backplane Redundant For configurations requiring power for uninterrupted system operation Two redundant power supplies are required for redundancy CAUTION damage System Safety Exercise caution when considering a combination of power supplies in a backplane Use only like power supplies with the exceptions noted in System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies p 739 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equi
37. 148 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm state trn_asc 623 bad comm state trn_rtu 624 bad comm state rcv_rtu 625 bad comm state rcv_asc 626 bad modbus state tmrO evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 149 CPU Modules Front Panel Two three position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU The left Switches switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protecti
38. 558 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI74000 wiring diagram RETURN 1 RETURN 2 RETURN 3 RETURN 4 N C RETURN 5 RETURN 6 RETURN 7 RETURN 8 N C RETURN 9 RETURN 10 RETURN 11 RETURN 12 N C RETURN 13 RETURN 14 RETURN 15 RETURN 16 N C INPUT 3 INPUT 4 N C INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 9 9 CO O N G INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 N C INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 G G G amp G6 6 amp 6 INPUT 1 L 7 N INPUT 2 Note e This module is not polarity sensitive e N C Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 559 Modules 140DA175300 Quantum I O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 module accepts 230 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI75300 AC 230 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50 Hz Typical Input Impeda
39. 671 140DAM59000 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 676 140DDM39000 I O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source vii Appendices Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G orti suwas waqya ai e NOR RC ee TS de ray aja LUE C OR OR DPA Rad 695 Ata Glance tay sa e i hoe alvo ces eo qa et d uites 695 Miscellaneous Components 697 Miscellaneous Components 697 Spare u eu eae Scene coe inca aR aca det ss 707 Spare PANS ds gerere OPE ee SO 707 Hardware 709 Ata Glance is ee EN pr eiiis 709 Hardware Installation Selecting Backplanes 710 Hardware Installation Mounting Brackets 717 Hardware Installation Space Requirements for the Quantum System 721 Hardware Installation Mounting Quantum Modules 723 Power and Grounding Guidelines 729 Ata Glance ios tare Ra Wesen RE doe eR ER SAR Sta dw M Rad 729 Power and Grounding Considerations for DC Powered Systems 730 System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies 739 Grounding 3 a tbe eren be eet bd aus 745 Closed System Installation 747 CableFast
40. Internal Power Dissipation 2 0 V 9 0 V x Ilgus Watts where Ipus is in Amperes 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 217 DIO Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram lon 1 NOT USED a NOT USED os NOT USED Lu Fs NOT USED bu A R K5 ACN Ti E Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 218 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 DIO LED Indicators The following figure shows the LED panel and Descriptons Ready Pwr ok Modbus Fault Error A Error B The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed power up diagnostics Fault Red A communications error exists between the DIO module and one or more I O modules or an output module is not being written to over the Modbus Plus network Pwr ok Green Bus power is present Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Error A Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel A dual cable only Error B Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel B dual cable only 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 219 DIO
41. Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 86 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Specifications supply The following table shows the specifications for the 24 Vdc 8 A DC redundant power Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 20 30 Vdc Input Current 3 8A max Inrush Current 25 A 24 Vdc 14 A 20 Vdc Input Ripple 2 4 Vdc max 94 189 Hz Input Power Interruption 1 ms max 24 Vdc Fusing external 5 0 A slo blo recommended Part 043502405 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Current 8A Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Surge Withstand 2 8 x Maximum Rated Input Voltage for 1 3 ms Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip Part 043503328 Internal Power Dissipation 6 0 1 8 x lout Watts where lout is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone Redundant LED Indicator and Description Pwr ok The following figure shows the CPS22400 LED indicator The following table shows the CPS22400 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 87 Power Supplies Wiring Diagram and Tim
42. STER ER TER YES n nn 58 4 mm 5 0 in a 3 0 in lt 127 0 mm 76 2 mm P 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 793 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFI00800 source grounding Source module Grounding Module Input 1 Module Input 1 Module Input 2 Module Input 2 Module Input 3 Module Input 3 Field Side Connections v3 5 e Oya ss 95 LIS LAE 6 5 9c 9c Ove 95 7 e 955 9 s Ove GND 4 20mA Source Current IN Loop Power Required m Current IN Instrument Powered 794 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 Fo
43. The following table describes the meaning of each NOE3X100 indicator LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Module is communicating with backplane Ready Green Module has passed internal diagnostic tests Run Green Flashes during normal operation Link Green Ethernet connection is made Kernel Amber On during download Fault Red An error condition has occurred Collision Red If steady an error condition exists If flashing packet collisions are occurring on the network during data transmission Appl Amber A fatal error has occurred SY MAX Be sure that the module is assigned a unique SY MAX drop number during Addressing configuration WARNING Personal injury or equipment damage Failure to assign a unique SY MAX drop number during configuration can cause severe personal injury or equipment damage Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 278 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules 140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules Overview The section includes information for the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modules NOE51100 and NOE55100 The Quantum MMS Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to MMS devices via Ethernet Ethernet MMS The following figure shows the NOE5X100 MMS Ethernet modu
44. 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 473 I O Modules Module Zoom Push lt Enter gt to display and select the configuration parameters Selections 1 0DE Resolution 0 1 DEG Output Unit CENTIGRADE FAHRENHEIT On board Cold Junction Compensator Channel 1 CHANNEL X CONFIGURATION Undefined J gain 25 Thermocouple Type K gain 25 E gain 25 T gain 100 Note S gain 100 Undefined Linear Range R gain 100 B gain 100 The next two entries are for undefined type Open Circuit Test Millivolt Range This channel installed NO YES 25 100 YES NO 474 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AVI03000 module The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AVI03000 Analog Input I O Map Register This module requires nine contiguous input registers Assignments Map Register Assignment Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Channel 5 data Register 6 Channel 6 data Register 7 Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data The following figures shows the assignment registers and the input status warnings 840 USE 10
45. IBM XT Quantum 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male SHIELD 1 9 1 SHIELD TX 2 2 RX RX 3 3 TX RIS 4 4 DTR CTS 5 5 GRND DSR 6 6 DSR GRND 7 7 ATS NC 8 L 8 CTS DTR 20 9 NC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 133 CPU Modules Modbus Ports The follwing figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin portable Pinout computers Connections for IBM AT Quantum 9 Pin Femal 9 Pin Mal Computers Pin Female Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 TX 3 DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR DSR RTS 7 RTS CTS CTS NC g The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 134 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules 140CPU42402 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the140CPU42402 Controller module CPU 2 M MATH 2xModbus Plus Max IEC Program 570 K CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU module and its components Model Number 140 pem CPU 424 02 Module Description LED Area T 1 Color Code Removable door Part 043513804 Customer Identification Label Fol
46. X Top of Cabinet 2 x 2 Maximum 50 80 x 50 80 mm Wire Duct Bottom of Cabinet 722 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Hardware Installation Mounting Quantum Modules Overview Quantum modules with the exception of power supply modules can be inserted into any slot of any backplane and with the added exception of CPU modules can be removed under power hot swapped without damaging modules or the backplane power supply modules must be installed in the first or last slots of the backplane Refer to the following figures and procedure when mounting modules CAUTION Possible danger to personnel or equipment An module can only be hot swapped with the field side terminal strip removed Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 723 Hardware Installation Mounting The following figure shows a step by step procedure for mounting Quantum Quantum modules Modules 1 frequired for the application select and install a 20 mm or 125 mm mounting bracket to the 1 rack using standard hardware 2 Select and install the appropriate backplane to the mounting bracket using standard hardware and remove the plastic backplane connector dust covers Power Supply Mount the module at an angle on to the two hooks located near the top of the backplane b Swing the module down
47. 12 bits to 6000 rpm utput The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog input output The following table shows the electrical specifications for the resolver interface 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 361 Intelligent Special Purpose Resolver Interface Accuracy dependent 10 arc minutes typical resolver input The following table shows the electrical specifications for the motor temperature Motor Temperature Input Normal State Short circuit 2 mA sink max Fault State Open circuit Isolation 500 Vac to system bus The following table shows the electrical specifications for the encoder feedback interface Encoder Feedback Interface Input Range 0 7 7 Input Impedance 145 nominal Differential Signals High 2 V differential min Differential Signals Low 2 V differential min Maximum Encoder Frequency 200 kHz square wave 55 4596 with less than 15 degrees of quadrature error Isolation 500 Vac to system bus with external power supply Minimum Encoder Pulse Width 1 ms The following table shows the electrical specifications for the drive interface Drive Interface Drive Fault Input True high TTL compatible relative to remote common 10 K internal pull up resistor Drive Enable Relay Form C contacts 120 Vac 9 0 1 A
48. Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140XSM002 Y 140XSM010 Y The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the intrinsically safe I O modules of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL 508 CSA222 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class 1 Div 1 Availabilty 140 1133000 Y Y 140 1133010 Y y 14041033000 Y 14001133000 Y Y 14001033000 Y Y The following table provides the agency approvals conformal coating availability for the Battery module of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers peated UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140XCP90000 y d E y y 832 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Agency Approvals 1 0 The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the I O of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Numbers Conformally Coated Version Availabilty Agency Approval Status UL 508 CSA 22 2 142 C UL Factory Mutual Class I Div 2 140 103000 140 104000 140ACO02000 140ACO13000 140AMM09000
49. Internally connected Do not connect any external wiring to these points Install jumper for 115 VAC J operation only ACL ACN _ coiere Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 76 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies 140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply 115 230 Vac 11 A Module The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply 115 230 Vac Overview 11 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module N 740 Model Number een Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door RR i Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring SA Connector Cover Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 77 Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS12420 PS 115 230 VAC power supply module Sp
50. 140CPS12420 V 140CPS21100 140CPS21400 140CPS22400 140CPS41400 V 140CPS42400 V 140CPS51100 V 140CPS52400 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 827 Agency Approvals CPUs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the CPUs of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140CPU11302 V N N N N V 140CPU11303 V N N N N V 140CPU21304 V y y N N N 140CPU42402 140CPU43412 V y N y v V 140CPU43412A 140CPU53414 N N N N V 140CPU53414A DIO Drops The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the DIO drops of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA222 C UL FactoryMutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140CRA21110 N N N N V N 140CRA21210 N N N N N N 140CRA21120 N N N N N 140CRA21220 V 828 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Agency Approvals
51. 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 351 Intelligent Special Purpose 140HL134000 High Speed Interrupt Module Overview Related Documentation High Speed Interrupt Module The High Speed Latch and Interrupt 24 Vdc 16x1 Sink Source Input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with 24 Vdc sink source input devices For more detailed information on the use of a Quantum High Speed Interrupt module refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module User Guide part number 840USE1 1200 The following figure shows the components of the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module Model Number a Module Description Mun SEDES Color Code Customer Identification Label LED Area Fold label and place it inside the door Field Wiring Part 31000207 Terminal Removable Door lt if AAAAA eee ee eeeee egel e ee e efe IV k lt 19 EESEE ES gleba sia 352 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module Specifications Number of Input Points 16 isolated points LEDs Active 1 16
52. 486 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140ARI03010 I O RTD Input 8 Channel Module Overview Specifications The RTD Input 8 Channel module accepts input from up to eight 2 3 and 4 wire RTD sensors and provides temperature measurement data to the Quantum CPU The following table shows the ARIO30010 RTD IN specifications Specifications Number of Channels LEDs 8 Active F 1 8 Red Indicated channel is out of range This includes broken wire and short circuit conditions R Module has passed power up diagnostics Required Addressing 10 Words In RTD Types Range degrees C IEC Platinum 200 to 850 PT 100 PT200 PT500 PT1000 American Platinum 100 to 450 PT 100 PT200 PT500 PT1000 Nickel 60 to 180 N100 N200 N500 N1000 Measurement Current PT100 PT200 N100 N200 2 5 mA PT500 PT1000 N500 N1000 0 5 mA Input Impedance gt 10MQ Linearity 0 01 of full scale 0 60 C Resolution 0 1 C Absolute Accuracy 0 5 degrees C 25 C 0 9 degrees C 0 60 C Isolation Channel to Channel 300 V peak to peak Channel to Bus 1780 Vac Q 47 63 Hz for 1 minute or 2500 for 1 minute 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 487 I O Modules Specifications Update Time All Channels 2 wire 640 ms 4 wire 3 wire 1 2s Fault Detection
53. 8 W per point 644 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications DDO88500 Output Point Operating Curve LE 075 3 0 625 z o 0 5 lod 2 n 2 o N 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C NOTE Each group 0 60 Per module 6 A 0 60 C Inductance Internal diode protected no limit on inductance Output Response OFF ON ON OFF 1 0 ms resistive Switching Frequency 50 Hz maximum Output Protection internal Group varistor and individual point over current sense Isolation Field to Bus 2500 Vac for 1 minute Group to Group 1200 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection Over current see note below Bus Current Required 6 points ON 375 mA 12 points ON 650 mA Power Dissipation 1 0 W 0 77 W x number of points ON External Power None Fusing Internal 4 A Part 4 043511382 or equivalent See below for the location of the fuses External Not required for this module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 645 I O Modules Note Each output point is protected by an over current sense circuit When an over current condition is detected the point is turned OFF its LED fault indicator is turned ON and the appropriate bit is set in the module fault register Th
54. Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point fused groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Operating Voltages rms Working 20 253 Vac Absolute Maximum 300 Vac for 10 sec 400 Vac for 1 cycle Frequency 47 63 Hz On State Drop Point 1 5 Vac Minimum Load Current rms 10 mA resistive Maximum Load Current rms Each Point 1 A continuous 20 253 Vac rms Each Group 4A max Per module 16 A continuous See derating chart 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 613 I O Modules Specifications The following figure shows the DAO85300 derating chart 17 16 15 sas N NO POINT a w EXCEEDS 0 5A lt 13 N 12 ion A N e o Ems E a 5 N 5 6 lt z 5 NO POINT z 4 aw EXCEEDS 1 0A o Bis 2 1 0 N 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C Off State Leakage Point max 2 0 mA 230 Vac 1 1 mA 115 Vac 0 4 mA 48 Vac 0 2 mA 24 Vac Surge Current Maximum rms One Cycle 15 A per point Two Cycles 12 A per point Three Cycles 8 A per point Applied DV DT 400 V us Response OFF ON 0 50 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 50 of one line cycle max Output Protection RC snubber protection internal Isolation rms Group to Grou
55. iau ai 414 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 18 1 18 2 18 3 18 4 18 5 Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules 415 14001133000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module 417 14001033000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output 423 Quantum Simulator Modules 429 Ata Glance s suoi eue RR DAS UR SERE elg d 429 140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module 430 140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module 432 Quantum Battery Module 437 Glance M EC T TT PM 437 Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module 438 140XCP90000 Quantum Battery 439 Quantum I O 445 Ata Glance C map upi iL ic Zeche UE Hubs 445 Overview of I O 447 Overview of I O Modules 447 Quantum I O Modules 448 VO Map Status Byte o Veda Die EE u eek 459 Analog Input Modules 461 Ata Glance zs oce e EUER RECEN a a UTR PADS 461 Analog Input Modules 462 140ACI03000 I O Analog In Module 479 140ACI
56. ocnRouvu 324 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 2 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 2 INPUT 1A INPUT 1A INPUT 1B INPUT B1 At 1 1 OUTPUT RESET 10 OUTPUT ae N C NIC ENABLE 1 ENABLE 1 K IO D N C 3 N C VT OUTPUT 1A OUTPUT 1B cera 2 LO FILTER SEL 1 VREF1 N C N C INPUT 2A INPUT 2A INPUT 2B INPUT 2B PRESET 2C PRESET 2C OUTPUT RESET 20 OUTPUT RESET 20 N C N C ENABLE 2 ENABLE 2 N C N C OUTPUT 2A OUTPUT 2B LO FILTER SEL 2 VREF2 OUTPUT SUPPLY RETURN l lii 24 Vdc e rN 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 325 Intelligent Special Purpose Note Notes on Wiring Diagram 2 N O Q Q N Differential pulse input Constant enable Zero pulse resets outputs 1A and 1B Count up Outputs a and B operate relays Counter 2 not used N C Not Connected 326 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 3 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 3 INPUT 1A INPUT 1 INPUT 1B INPUT 1B PRESET 1C PRESET 1C OUTPUT RESET 10 N C N C e ENABLE 1 ENABLE 1 N C N C OUTPUT 1A OUTPUT 1B 5 LOFILTERSEL 1 VRE
57. 3 5 10 5 dBm average power in 100 140 micron fiber cable Rise Fall Time 20 ns or better Silence OFF leakage 43 dBm Optical Receiver Specifications Receiver Sensitivity 30 dBm average power Dynamic Range 20 dB Detected Silence 36 dBm 252 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Specifications Miscellaneous Specifications Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum Processor Power Dissipation 4 W Bus Current Required 750 mA max External Power Not required for this module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 253 Modbus Plus NOM Front Panel Switch A three position slide switch is located on the front of the unit This switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 port The three options that are available as shown in the figure below include setting the slide switch in the top position ASCII middle position RTU or bottom position Valid mem comm port parameters r ASCII RTU mem Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters which are set and cannot be changed ASCII Comm Port Parameters Baud 2 400
58. I O Modules Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram for the 14005135300 Module A INPUT 4 4 3 INPUT 3 1 e ak INPUT 6 6 5 INPUT 5 56 KQ INPUT 8 INPUT 7 GROUP A SUPPLY 9 GROUP A COMMON 4 INPUT 10 12 GD INPUT 9 INPUT 12 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 15 INPUT 13 56 KQ D INPUT 16 17 INPUT 15 M GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON e INPUT 18 2 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 e3 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 25 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 INPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COMMON e INPUT 26 82 81 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 3 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 85 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 87 INPUT 31 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON Recommended resistor value for 24 Vdc 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 669 I O Modules 18 9 Discrete Input Output Modules Ata Glance Overview This section provides information on the Quantum discrete input output modules the 140DDM39000 and the 140DDM69000 What s in this This section contains the following topics ion Section Topic Page I O Configuration for Discrete Input Output Modules 671 140DAM59000 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 676 140DDM39000 I O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink DC Output 24 2x4 Source 682 Module 140DDM69000 I O 125 VDC Input High Power Output Module 688 670 840 USE 100 00 Se
59. N C OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 N C Note N C Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 647 I O Modules CAUTION Reverse Polarity Possibility This module is not protected against reverse polarity If you want to protect against polarity miswiring an external diode in series with each group supply line is recommended This diode must be able to support the group load current Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 648 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DRA84000 Quantum I O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module Overview Specifications The Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open module is used to switch a voltage source using 16 relays with normally open contacts The following table shows the specifications for the RELAY OUT module Specifications Number of Output Points 16 normally open LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word out Voltage Working 20 250 Vac 5 30 Vde 30 150 Vdc reduced load current Maximum Load Current Each Point 2 A max at 250 Vac or 30 Vdc 9 60 C ambient resistive load 1 A Tungsten lamp load 1 A a power factor of 0 4 1 8 hp 125 250 Vac Each Point 30 150 Vdc 300 mA resistive load 100 mA L R 10 msec Minimum Load Current 50 mA Note Minimum load current if
60. o INPUTS 8 5 INPUT 5 e INPUT 8 2 7 o N C GROUP INPUT 10 12 11 INPUT 9 poem INPUT 12 13 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 INPUT 13 15 FIELD DEVICE INPUT 16 17 INPUT 15 ROUP B COMMON INPUT 18 2 1 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 23 INPUT 19 INPUT 24 7 INPUT 23 N C GROUP C COMMON INPUT 26 82 81 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 83 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 85 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 87 INPUT 31 N C GROUP D COMMON Note N C Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 567 I O Modules 14000135310 Quantum I O DC Input 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input Module Overview sink output devices The 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with Specifications module The following table shows the specifications for the DDI35310 24 VDC IN SOURCE Specifications Number of Input Points 32 input points in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Voltage ON Voltage 15 30 Vdc reference from group supply OFF Voltage 0 5 Vdc reference group supply ON Current 2 mA min 14 mA max OFF Current 0 5 mA max Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 Vdc 1 0 ms 50 decaying pulse Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1 ms max ON OFF 1
61. 14000135300 Quantum I O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module Overview The DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 24 Vdc inputs and is for use with Source output devices Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI35300 24 VDC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Currents ON voltage 15 30 OFF voltage 3 5 ON current 2 0 mA min OFF current 0 5 mA max Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 Vdc 1 3 ms 56 Vdc decaying pulse Response OFF ON 1 ms max ON OFF 1 ms max Internal Resistance 2 5k Input Protection Resistor limited Isolation Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 330 mA Power Dissipation 1 7 W 0 36 W x the number of points on External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion 566 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI35300 wiring diagram INPUT 2 L INPUT 1 Joje ee 0
62. 8 amp amp 0 001090 9 9 CO C9 amp G6 8 8 5 855 G5 GS OC C3 C OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 GROUP B SUPPLY OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 GROUP B COMMON Note Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 643 I O Modules 140DDO88500 Quantum I O DC Output 24 125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module Overview Specifications The DC Output 24 125 Vdc 2x6 Source module switches 24 125 VDC powered loads and is for use with sink devices The following table shows the specifications for the 00088500 24 125 VDC OUT module Specifications Number of Output Points 12 in two 6 point groups LEDs Active F Red An over current condition on any point has been detected 1 12 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 12 Red The indicated output point has an over current condition Required Addressing 1 word in 1 word out Voltages Working 19 2 to 156 2 Vdc including ripple ON State Voltage Drop 0 75 Vdc Q 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 75 A lt 40 C see the operating curve below Each Group 3A 0 60 C Per Module 6A 0 60 C Surge Current Maximum 4A 1 ms pulse no more than 6 per minute OFF State Leakage 0 5 mA 150 Vdc Maximum Tungsten 130 46 W per point 115 Vdc 41 W per point 24 Vdc
63. 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Overview 2 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modicon TSX Quantum Automation System Overview 1 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides an overview of the Quantum TSX Automation System which includes Quantum software support What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page Modicon TSX Quantum Automation Series Overview Quantum Power Supplies Quantum CPU Modules Quantum I O Modules 0 0 A Quantum Communication Interface Modules Quantum Intelligent Special Purpose I O Modules 11 Quantum Simulator Modules XSM 12 Quantum Battery Backplanes and CableFast Cabling 13 Quantum Programming Packages 14 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 3 Quantum Overview Modicon TSX Quantum Automation Series Overview Overview Quantum System Block Diagram The Quantum system is a special purpose computing system with digital processing capabilities Quantum is designed for real time control in industrial and manufacturing applications in a modular expandable architecture employing the following modules Power Supply CPU Network Interface Intelligent Special Purpose Simulator XSM Battery Backplanes CableFast Cabling The following figure is a block diagram of a typical Quantum system Local I O Drop m Ethernet TCP IP P S CPU
64. Note If 0 an address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address 122 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Ports Pinout Connections All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that supports Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 RX TX 3 TX DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR 6 DSR RTS 7 RTS CTS 8 8 CTS 9 NC IBM XT Quantum 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male SHIELD 1 9 1 SHIELD TX 2 2 RX RX 3 3 TX RTS 4 4 DTR cis 5 _ 5 GRND DSR 6 6 DSR GRND 7 7 RTS NC 8 L 8 CTS DTR 20 9 NC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 123 CPU Modules Modbus Ports The following figure shows the Modbus port connections for nine pin portable Pinout co
65. Output 3 Fault Output 4 Fault Modsoft Module Push Enter to display and select the timeout state for the module Timeout state Zoom Selections is assumed when the system control of the module is stopped Outputs Hold Last Value User Defined User Defined Timeout State Point 1 4 0000 Default Output State 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 673 I O Modules 16 Point Input 8 Point Output Modules Map Register Assignments Map Register Inputs Map Status Byte Inputs Module Zoom Selections Inputs Map Assignment Outputs Map Status Byte Outputs The following information pertains to the 140DAM59000 AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 and the 140DDM39000 DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 modules e 140DAM59000 AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 e 140DDM3900 DC Input 24 Vdc 2X8 DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 The modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register and as one 4x register The following figure shows the 3x input register 1 213 14 5 1 6 7 8 9 110 11 12 13 14 15 16 There is no input I O map status byte associated with these modules Push Enter to display and select the input type This selection appears if the module is I O mapped to a 3x register and one 4
66. Output Specifications Loop Voltage 7 30 up to 60 Vdc with an external resistor Loop Resistance 30Vdc Rmn 0 02A 7Vde Rmax 002A No Ryn is required for loop voltage less than 30 Vdc Internal Voltage Drop 7 Vdc min 30 Vdc max 20 mA Resolution bits 12 Accuracy Error 25 C 0 20 of full scale Linearity Monotonic 1 LSB Accuracy Error 0 60 C Typical 0 004 C of full scale Maximum 0 007 of full scale Isolation Channel to Channel 500 Vac 750 Vdc for 1 minute Channel to Bus 500 Vac 750 Vdc for 1 minute Output Channel to Input 500 Vac 750 Vdc for 1 minute Channel Update Time 15 ms for 2 channels Settling Time 900 us to 0 196 of final value Fault Detection Open circuit indicator light and status byte External Power Supply See loop voltage above 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 525 I O Modules Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Common Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the voltmeter monitor for the analog input output module Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Range 1 5 V Loop current must be active Scaling lout mA x 0 250 Vour volts Output Impedance 3000 typical Maximum Wire Length 1 meter The following table shows the common specifications fo
67. Register 1 Channel 1 data 0 4 095 10 V 5 V 0 5 V 10V Register 2 Channel 2 data 0 4 095 10 V 5 V 0 5 V 10V Register 3 Channel data 0 4 095 10 V 5 V 0 5 V 10 V Register 4 Channel 4 data 0 4 095 10 V 5 0 5 V 10V There is no I O map status byte associated with this module Push lt Enter gt to display and select the timeout states for each channel Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped The following figure shows the Channel X timeout state options Disabled Channel X Timeout State Last Value per channel User Defined Channel X User Defined Timeout Value 0 DEC Note Selecting Disabled for any channel causes all others to default to that state Output will be what is connected to the module master override terminals either common or an external voltage Output LEDs 1 4 will go out when Disabled is selected and the module goes to the inactive state 504 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140ACO02000 Quantum I O Analog Current Out Module Overview 20 mA loops The Analog Output 4 Channel Current module controls and monitors current in 4 Specifications The following table shows the module specifications Specifications Number of Cha
68. VD 4 Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU40000 Qty 10 Wickman 3701400041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 j e 4e VD 15 VD _ A W N 16 VD lt gt VA eGND VB VB e GND VC e GND VD Eos e GND 780 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 2 The GND ground terminal points are not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 781 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CFG01600 wiring for the 140DA084210 and for Grouped AC 140DAO84220 output modules grouped AC output mode Field Side Output Mode F1 4A Module Output 1 1 VA gt d VA 3 3 f va ta tan va vB 6 ve 7 ve 8 yp F9 4A Module Output 9 F10 4A Module Output 10 12 2 4 vc 1313 5 vDo 144 vo i515 VD e 8 vDo Module Group A VA VA e GND Common Module Group A VB VB e GND Hot Module Group C VC VC e GND Common Module Group C VD yD e GND Hot V g adnouo
69. 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 6 1 5 V only 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 5 1 5 V only 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 4 1 5 V only 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 3 1 5 V only 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 2 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 1 1 Note Count stops at 4095 ee 5 V only Loads 5 V only Note The undervoltage for this module is 0 5 0 7 V 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 463 I O Modules CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure When configured for voltage measurement no jumper installed between INPUT and SENSE terminals if a broken field wire occurs readings will be non zero and not predictable Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Map Status The most significant bit in the I O map status byte is used for the 140ACI03000 Input Byte module The following figure shows the MSB register MSB 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 Broken wire under voltage on or input channels Module Zoom There no Module Zoom selections required for this module Selectio
70. 750 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Specifications All CableFast systems are designed to the following specifications Specifications Power Ratings 150 Vac Vdc 0 5 A per point 150 Vac Vdc 2 0 A per point Requires the 140CFG01600 Terminal Block and the 140XTS012XX Cable Dielectric Withstanding Voltage 1060 Vac and 1500 Vdc Creepage and Clearance per IEC 1131 UL 508 CSA 22 2 142 1987 Terminal Block Wire Sizes per Terminal One wire 12 AWG 2 5 mm2 Two wires 16 AWG 1 0 mm2 and above See below for the maximum number of wires allowed per terminal Note It is recommended that no more than two wires be used at one time Wire Size Number of Wires 24 22 18 16 14 12 N G Terminal Screw Size M3 Screwdriver Head Size 0 13 3 3 mm flat head min Terminal Screw Type Captive Terminal Screw Finish Tin plate 197 min Terminal Screw Tightening 7 2 Ib in 0 8 Nm Torque System Flammability Rating 94 V 2 Temperature Operating 0 60 C 32 140 F Storage 40 65 C 40 149 F Humidity 0 95 RH noncondensing Altitude 6 666 ft 2000 m full operation Shock 15 g peak 11 ms half sine wave Vibration 10 57 Hz 0 075 mm displacement 57 150 Hz 1 g total 10 sweeps Mounting Configuration DIN rai
71. BIN BCD Last Value User Defined User Defined Timeout State Points 1 12 000000000000 Note To clear a fault the point must be commanded OFF in user logic 588 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 16 Point Output Modules Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Module Zoom Selections The 16 point output modules are as follows 140DAO84000 AC Output 24 230 Vac 16x1 140DAO84010 AC Output 24 115 Vac 16x1 140DAO84210 AC Output 100 230 Vac 4x4 140DAO84220 AC Output 48 Vac 4x4 140DDO84300 DC Output 10 60 VDC 2x8 Source 140DRA84000 Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open The output modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous discrete output 0x references or as one output 4x register in the following formats The following figures show the formats for the output modules For the 140DAO84000 140DAO84010 140DAO84210 140DAO84220 140DDO84300 and the 140DRA84000 modules 1 2 3 4 15 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 The I O map status byte is used by the 140DAO84210 and 140DAO84220 output modules The following figure shows I O map status bytes use 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Group D fault Group A fault Group C fault Group B fault There is no I O map status byte associated with the
72. DSR RTS 7 RTS CTS dj B CTS NC g 9 NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 155 CPU Modules 140CPU43412A CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the specifications LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU43412A Controller Module This module is functionally identical to the non A version however the following should be considered e If you using the module in a Hot Standby topology then you must use either two non A models or two A models e The A version requires a new flash executive The A version and non A flash executives are not interchangeable e Schneider Automation software Concept ProWORX and Modsoft supports the A version Any existing or new 140CPU43412 program configuration will load into a 140CPU43412A without any modifications CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components N Model Number CPUS Module Description LED i Color Code Removable door Customer Identification Label Part 043513804 Fold label and place it inside
73. DTR GRND DSR RTS CTS The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 247 Modbus Plus NOMs 248 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module 1 2 140NOM25200 Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module Overview The following information pertains to the Modbus Plus on Fiber module 140NOM25200 The Modbus Plus on Fiber module provides connectivity to Modbus Plus nodes by fiber cable There are many benefits that result from the use of fiber optics Some of these benefits include e Longer distances between nodes up to 3 km thereby increasing the total length of the network e Fiber optic medium is not susceptible to the effects of electromagnetic interference RF interference and lightning e Intrinsically safe links that are required in many hazardous industrial environments e Total electrical isolation between terminal points on the link Related For more detailed information on fiber optic network repeaters see the Fiber Documentation Repeater User Guide part number GM FIBR OPT 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 249 Modbus Plus NOM Modbus Plus on The following figure shows the parts of the Modb
74. GROUP D HOT 4o 55 N C 616 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules CAUTION Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common single phase AC power source Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output then an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent must be wired in parallel with the switch Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 617 I O Modules 140DDO15310 I O DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink Module Overview The DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink module switches 5 Vdc loads and is for use with source devices and is compatible with LS S TTL and CMOS logic Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 5 V TTL OUT module Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active F 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Output Ratings ON Level 0 2 Vdc max 75 mA sinking OFF Level Vout Us 1 25 V Q 1 mA source Vour 3 2 V min 1 mA Us 4 5 V Internal Pullup Resistor 440 Q Maximum Load Current Each Point 75 mA sinking Each G
75. GROUP E COMMON INPUT 12 INPUT 11 GROUP F SUPPLY GROUP F COMMON N C N C INPUT 14 INPUT 13 GROUP G SUPPLY GROUP G COMMON INPUT 16 INPUT 15 GROUP H SUPPLY GROUP H COMMON N C 9 amp G GO G9 9 9 amp amp amp amp amp amp S GG GS 9 O9 C 9 O N C Note N C Not Connected 580 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 14000185300 Quantum I O DC Input 10 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module Overview The DC Input 10 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink module accepts 10 60 Vdc inputs and is for use with source output devices ON OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected Different reference voltages may be used for different groups Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 10 60 VDC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 Words In Group Supply Tolerance ON State OFF State 12 Vdc 596 9 12 0 1 8 IEC 57 Class 2 24 15 20 11 24 0 5 IEC 65A Type 2 48 Vdc 15 20 34 48 0 10 IEC 65A Type 1 60 15 20 45 60 0 12 5 IEC 57 Class1 ON OFF state ranges are specified at nominal reference voltages Absolut
76. Input Power Interruption 1 2 cycle full load and minimum rated line voltage frequency No less than 1 second between interruptions Fusing external 2 0 A slo blo recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current Stand alone configuration 11 A 60 C Summable configuration Two 140CPS11420 20 A 60 C Total load capacity Summable configuration One 140CPS11420 and one 140CPS11410 16A 60 C Total load capacity Minimum Current None required Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506326 Internal Power Dissipation Less than 12 W at full load Operating Mode Standalone Summable 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies LED Indicator The following figure shows the CPS11420 LED indicator and Description Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS11420 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus Wiring Diagram The following figures shows the CPS11420 Power loss alarm Install jumper for 115 VAC operation only ACL ACN _ 0000000 eoo Note A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac 6A 30 Vdc 5A is available on termina
77. LED Indicators The condition of the NOL module is indicated by the status off on or blinking of Descriptions the LED indicators The following figure shows the LED indicators and Status Ready MSG In MSG Out Wink Srvc Active The following table shows the LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Function Active Bus communication is present Ready Module has passed internal diagnostics and is configured MSG In Flashes every 10 ms when an update message for a bound network variable is received by the NOL module from the LonWorks network MSG Out Flashes every 10 ms when an update message for a bound network variable is transmitted by the NOL module to the LonWorks network Wink Flashes briefly when the NOL module receives a wink message from the LonWorks network Also used to display internal error codes defined in the Wink LED Error Codes table Srvc Indicates status of LonWorks network service 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 209 Quantum Field Bus Modules The following table shows the LED Indicator Status LED Indicator Status LED Color Condition of NOL Module Error Condition Powered Up Powered Up Normal Not Configured Configured Operation Not Programmed Not Configured Programmed Programmed Active Green Off Off On off Ready Green Blink On On Off MSG In Green Off Off
78. MSB Second Word Register 3 Output 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Point 33 MSB Third Word Register 4 Output 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Point 49 MSB Fourth Word Register 5 Output 65 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Point 65 MSB Fifth Word Register 6 Output 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 Point 81 MSB Sixth Word Map Status The I O map status byte is used by the module as follows Byte 8 7 16 15 4 3 2 1 Output 1 to 16 Fault Output 17 to 32 Fault Output 33 to 48 Fault L Output 49 to 64 Fault Output 65 to 80 Fault L Output 80 to 96 Fault 592 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Module Zoom Selections Push lt Enter gt to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped The following figure shows the output type and timeout state Output Type BIN BCD Timeout State Last Value User Defined User Defined Timeout State Points 1 16 User Defined Timeout State Points 17 32 User Defined Timeout State Point
79. O Loop Voltage 6 30 Vdc maximum Internal Voltage Drop 6 Vdc min 30 Vdc max 25 mA Accuracy Error 25 C 0 2 of full scale Linearity 12 uA 4 20 mA 0 4 095 counts 4 pA 0 25 mA 0 25 000 counts 4 pA 0 20 mA 0 20 000 counts 4 uA 4 20 mA 0 16 000 counts Accuracy Drift w Temperature Typical 0 004 of full scale C Maximum 0 007 of full scale C Isolation Channel to Channel Field to Bus none 1780 Vac for 1 minute Update Time 5 ms for all 8 channels Settling Time Full Scale Step Change 1 6 ms to 596 of the final value 3 2 ms to 0 1 of the final value Fault Detection Broken wire in 4 20 mA mode Bus Current Required 550 mA Power Dissipation 5 0 W External Power Supply See Loop Voltage above 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 509 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External None Voltmeter Monitor Scaling Vout Volts li ooP mA 0 10 Accuracy 25 0 2 of full scale Output Impedance 300 Q Maximum Cable Length 1 meter Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 6 or Concept 2 2 510 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The folllowing figure shows the 140ACO130 Wiring Diagram RETURN Field Device OUTPUT 1
80. Specifications Fusing Internal 8A fuse time lag for each group Part 042701994 or equivalent For location of fuses see Fuse Locations p 642 External Each group is protected with an 8 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions It is recommended that each point be fused with a 2 A fuse Little Fuse 312 002 or equivalent CAUTION Possible danger to equipment or personnel Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Fuse Locations The following figure shows fuse locations for the DDO84300 module Fuse Locations BI Points 9 16 642 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO84300 wiring diagram N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N G N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C OUTPUT 1 ae MMe OUTPUT 2 2A OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 3 AM V e GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 GROUP A COMMON
81. The following figure shows the DDM39000 wiring diagram N C OUTPUT 1 1 25 A N C OUTPUT 2 Ay OUTPUT 3 1 25 A N C OUTPUT 4 v OUTPUT GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT GROUP A COMMON N C OUTPUT 5 N C OUTPUT 6 N C OUTPUT 7 N C OUTPUT8 OUTPUT GROUP B SUPPLY INPUT 2 OUTPUT GROUP B COMMON INPUT 1 INPUT 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUT 5 INPUT 8 INPUT 7 N C INPUT GROUP A COMMON INPUT 1 e PUT 10 al INPUT 12 eo e e NPUT 14 a NPUT 1 e UT 16 N C INPUT 9 m 11 ee INPUT13 ee INPUTI5 ee INPUT GROUP B COMMON Note N C Not Connected 686 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions It is recommended that each point be fused with a 1 25 A fuse Part 043508930 Littlefuse 3121 25 1 25 A 250 V Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 0
82. mem Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed ASCII Communication Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Communication Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 172 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Device Address 1 247 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 173 CPU Modules
83. yo Node 7 OR 1 252 P S Q 0 a 252 Note If a passive optical star coupler is used e The number of repeaters and the length of each segment of fiber cable must be calculated separately and cannot exceed a maximum pulse width distortions of 200 ns between any nodes at the end of the branches e 100 140 mm fiber cable is recommended because of its higher available optical e The use of a maximum of four ports of the passive optical star coupler is recommended 264 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Self Healing Ring This configuration can be achieved by connecting the unused fiber optic ports of the Configuration first and last NOM25200 directly or through the fiber optic repeater if a mixed fiber optic twisted pairs network is used This type of connection has all the advantages of the previously described configurations along with built in redundancy A broken connection between any two Quantum modules in the ring will automatically reconfigure the network to the Bus Configuration and continue the communication Self Healing Ring Configuration Example Node 1 Node 2 P S 1 0 P S CPUNOM I O 1 0 Legend t MB Cab
84. 0 79 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 175 5 mm 6 91 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches OU gt z r x 718 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Note Before installing a Quantum backplane to a mounting bracket ensure that the mounting holes of the bracket and backplane are properly aligned 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 719 Hardware Installation 20 mm Mounting Bracket The following figure shows the 20 mm mounting bracket Diameter of the mounting holes 6 6 mm 0 26 inches A B G H z r Ac O Du 20 mm 0 79 inches 22 83 mm 0 90 inches 17 5 mm 0 69 inches 88 9 mm 3 50 inches 7 1 mm 0 28 inches 146 1 mm 5 75 inches 88 9 mm 3 50 inches 14 7 mm 0 58 inches 436 6 mm 17 19 inches 482 25 mm 18 99 inches 20 2 mm 0 79 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 175 5 mm 6 91 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 720 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Hardware Installation Space Requirements for the Quantum System Overview When mounting Quantum systems in a cabinet a 4 in 101 60 mm space should be maintained above and below the modules Side spacing should be 1 in 25 40 mm minimum Wiring ducts up to 2 in 50 80 mm square may be centered horizontally between backplanes Duct work or similar items mounted in this manner that extend further out than 2 in require a 4 in space i
85. 109 2 801 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram Source The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFJ00400 source grounding module Grounding Field Side Connections S VO 1 Monitor 1 e Field Sink 1 CO 1 Device Current Out 1 16A V 1 Sinking F1 V 1 Jumper 1 Source 1 1 Modicon 140 CFX 001 10 52 e Monitor 2 ii I Sink 2 44 1 16A V 2 e F2 V 2 o 2 Source 2 e Monitor 3 Field z 3 Device SIDES s 1 16A Jumper Current Out V 3 Modicon Sourcing e e 140 CFX 002 10 F3 Z Source 3 S vg cg4 Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU00600 Qty 10 ig Wickman 3700063041 V4 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 6 0 4 e GND e RET V 802 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000 see the wiring diagrams in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram p 507 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 803 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the140CFJ00400 instru
86. 11 42 inches 270 mm 10 63 inches 175 5 6 91 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 10 mm 0 39 inches 15 mm 0 59 inches 143 13 mm 5 64 inches 113 08 mm 4 45 inches zTo T m 00 WwW D gt 712 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Four Position The following figure shows the four position backplane Backplane G gt Figure IN ME NE O p e O e el Ground Screws Mounting Hole Diameter 8mm 0 31 inches O Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding Diameter 8 mm 0 31 inches Threaded mounting holes for A B c D E F G H half and full height modules Diameter 4mm 0 16 inches 290 mm 11 42 inches 270 mm 10 63 inches 175 5 mm 6 91 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 10 mm 0 39 inches 15 mm 0 59 inches 183 69 mm 7 23 inches 153 72 mm 6 05 inches 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 713 Hardware Installation Six Position The following figure shows the six position backplane Backplane a e gt Figure gt E Hy gt A e TIVIT B Y Y Y OA Ground Screws Mounting Hole Diameter 8mm 0 31 inches O Optional locations for Modb
87. 140ARI03010 140 103000 140AVIO3000 140AVO02000 140DAI34000 140DAI35300 140DAI44000 140DAI45300 140DAI54000 140DAI54300 140DAI55300 140DAI74000 140DAI75300 140DAM59000 140DAO84000 140DAO84010 140DAO84210 140DAO84220 140DAO85300 14000115310 2 lt a ay H Hl H 2 H H e 14000135300 14000135310 Y 14000136400 Y 14000167300 Y 14000184100 4 E 4 E E 4 E 4 E 4 E E 4 E 4 E 4 4 E 4 4 E 4 4 ata ali aja au H H H S a 2 aja a 2 S H HSH H H S SS a lt a lt S H S H 2 2 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 833 Agency Approvals Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 14000185300 V 140DDM39000 140DDM69000 V N V 14000015310 V V
88. 140XBP01000 10 2 2 Ibs 1 0 kg 4 5 lbs 2 04 kg 140XBP01600 16 3 5 lbs 1 58 kg 7 2 lbs 3 27 kg 710 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Two Position The following figure shows the two position backplane Backplane 4 Figure Mounting Hole gt mi Diameter 8mm 0 31 inches O Optional locations for Modbus Plus XN s communication cable grounding z Diameter 8 mm 0 31 inches K Threaded mounting holes for A half and full height modules Ce Diameter 4mm 0 16 inches e OOo OA Ground Screws 290 mm 11 42 inches Sleeee 270 mm 10 63 inches 175 5 mm 6 91 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 10 mm 0 39 inches 15 mm 0 59 inches 102 61 mm 4 04 inches 72 44 mm 2 85 inches OUD 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 711 Hardware Installation Three Position The following figure shows the three position backplane Backplane E e B Q Mounting Hole Figure gt Diameter 8mm 0 31 inches O Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding Diameter 8 mm 0 31 inches Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules Diameter 4mm 0 16 inches md Emir es d y Y Noo e Ground Screws 290 mm
89. 234 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Networking CAUTION Connection Compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC the RIO Head module must be connected using quad shielded cable see the Remote I O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide 890USE10100 V2 0 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage LED Indicators The following figure shows the LED indicators for the Drop module and Description Ready Com Act Fault Error A Error B The following table shows the RIO Drop module LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed power up diagnostics Com Act Green The module is communicating on the RIO network Fault Red Unable to communicate with one or more I O modules Error A Red Communication error on Channel A Error B Red Communication error on Channel B dual cable only 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 235 Networking LED Error Codes Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Drop module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Drop module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each all codes are in hex LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Description of Error 3 6701H asic test fa
90. 3 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 LINE 5 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 LINE OUTPUT 4 ve OO OUTPUT 5 LINE OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 LINE OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 LINE T OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 LINE OUTPUT 8 N C N C OUTPUT 9 LINE OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 10 LINE OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 LINE 6 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 LINE OUTPUT 12 i OUTPUT 13 LINE D 5 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 LINE 6 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 LINE 69 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 LINE 65 OUTPUT 16 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 601 I O Modules Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected CAUTION Connectivity Compatibility Each output point must be fused with an external fuse The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse Part 043502405 or any other fuse with an IT rating of less than 87 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 602 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DAO84210 Quantum I O AC Output 100 230 Vac 4x4 Module Overview The AC Output 100 230 Vac 4x4 module switches 100 230 Vac powered loads Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 100 280 VAC OUT module Specifications Number of Output Points 16 in four 4 point groups LEDs Active F 1 16 Green Indicates point status 1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 Red Indicated group has a blown fuse or no field power Required Addressing 1 word ou
91. 5 8 W max External Power Supply See Loop Voltage in this table Fusing Internal None WARNING Possible injury to personnel or equipment Before removing the connector ensure that it is safe to have field wiring in an open circuit condition Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage The following table shows the voltmeter monitor specifications Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Range 1 5 V Main current loop must be active Scaling Vout Volts mA x 0 25 Output Impedance 3000 Typical Wire Length 1 m 506 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules ACO02000 The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140ACO02000 module Wiring Diagram I SOURCE 1 MONITOR 1 co I SOURCE 1 N C N C I SOURCE 1 i I SOURCE 2 I SOURCE 2 N C N C I SOURCE 2 I SINK 1 FIELD DEVICE MONITOR 2 CURRENT SINKING G3 NS FIELD N C DEVICE CURRENT N C SOURCING I SOURCE 3 MONITOR 3 I SOURCE 3 N C N C I SOURCE 3 I SOURCE 4 I SOURCE 4 N C N C I SOURCE 4 LooP SUPPLY 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 507 I O Modules Note 1 Unused chann
92. Current IN Instrument Powered 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 791 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 For the required jumper options for the 140 103000 and the 140AVIO3000 see the wiring diagrams in 140AC103000 I O Analog In Module 479 and 140AVI03000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module p 495 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 792 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling 140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The block is used for analog inputs This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interfaces for both field and loop power configurations See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks Application The following are the application notes for the 140CFI00800 module Notes 1 Configuration Eight analog inputs with a common loop supply Each point is allocated four terminals 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides eight connection point sets for the 140 103000 and 140AVI03000 analog input modules Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFI00800 module 4 4 S4 V3 3 3 3 V2 2 2 52 1 1 1 St V 8 8 8 S8 V7 7 7 S7 V6c6 6 S6 V5 5 5 55 ur
93. DAO84000 description 594 specifications 594 wiring diagram 596 DAO84010 description 598 specifications 598 wiring diagram 601 606 DAO84210 description 603 specifications 603 DAO84220 description 608 fuse locations 610 specifications 608 wiring diagram 611 DAO85300 description 613 fuse locations 615 specifications 613 wiring diagram 616 DD035301 fuse locations 628 DD036400 recommended cables 639 DDI15310 description 563 logic states 564 specifications 563 wiring diagram 565 DDI35300 description 566 specifications 566 wiring diagram 567 DDI35310 description 568 specifications 568 wiring diagram 569 DDI36400 color codes for input groups 572 compatible connection sub bases 573 description 570 front view illustration 571 LEDs 572 recommended cables 572 specifications 570 DDI67300 description 574 minimum version levels 575 specifications 574 wiring diagram 577 00184100 description 578 specifications 578 wiring diagram 580 00185300 description 581 specifications 581 wiring diagram 583 DDM39000 common specifications 683 description 682 fuse locations 685 input specifications 682 output specifications 683 topology 682 wiring diagram 686 DDM69000 common specifications 690 description 688 I O map register outputs 672 I O map status byte outputs 673 input specifications 688 module zoom selecti
94. Input 1A and or Input 2A are not connected Differential input encoders use both plus and minus inputs INPUT B Direction level for non quadrature devices or Phase B for quadrature mode Direction inputs for non quadrature input devices are Count Up High Voltage Level Count Down Low Voltage Level For single ended Input devices only Input 1B and or Input 2B are used Input 1B and 2B are not connected Differential input encoders use both plus and minus inputs PRESET C Presets count register s Low level causes preset For single ended Preset inputs only Preset 1C and or Preset 2B are used Preset 1C and 2C are not connected Differential input encoders use both plus and minus inputs OUTPUT RESET 0 Low level resets Outputs 1A 1B 2A and 2B to OFF if latched For single ended Reset inputs only Reset 10 and or Reset 20 are used Reset 10 and 20 are not connected Differential input encoders use both plus and minus inputs ENABLE Low level enables counting For single ended Enable inputs only Enable 1 and or Enable 2 are used Enable 1 and 2 are not connected Differential input encoders use both plus and minus inputs VREF Field input device power source connection Also connect any unused inputs to the group VREF terminal or the one in use 30 Vdc max Group A Terminal 17 Group B Terminal 37 Group A and
95. L Load Inductance Henry 2 Load Current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance Maximum 50 uf Tungsten Load Maximum 12 W 24 Vdc Output Protection internal Transient voltage suppression 36 V Bus Current Required 330 mA max Power Dissipation 2 0 W 0 4 V x Total Load Current External Power 19 2 30 Fusing Internal 5 0 A fuse per group Part 043502405 For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations p 633 External Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions It is recommended that each point be protected with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Part 57 0078 000 CAUTION damage Possible danger to equipment or personnel Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment 632 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the DDO35310 module 140 DDO 353 10 Fuse Locations Points Y e 25 32 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 633 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following shows the DDO35310 wiring diag
96. Modbus Plus NOMs Front Panel Two three position slide switches are located on the front of the unit The switch on Switches the left is not used The three position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 port provided with the Modbus Plus option module Three options are available as shown in the following illustration ASCII Switch not I RTU used mem Note The NOM hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the NOM Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is conected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port The following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed ASCII Comm Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary Switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Comm Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary Switch setting 840 USE 100 00 September 20
97. Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding 5 Vdc 14000115310 14000015310 DEF 9 12 Vdc ABD CEF 24 Vdc 140DDI35300 14000135310 14000 39000 14000035300 14000035310 14005135300 140HLI34000 ABE CDF 10 60 14000184100 14000185300 14000084300 140DVO85300 ABF CDE 125 Vdc 14000167300 140DDM69000 140DDO88500 ACD BEF 24 Vac 140DAI34000 140DAI35300 ACE BDF 48 Vac 1400 144000 1400 145300 14004084220 BDE 115 Vac 140DAI54000 140DAI54300 140DAI53300 140DAM59000 140DAO84010 ADE BCF 230 Vac 140DAI74000 140DAO84000 140DAO84210 140DRA84000 ADF BCE 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 455 I O Modules Primary Module and Terminal Strip Keying Module Class Module Part Number Module Terminal Strip Coding Coding Relay 140DRC83000 AEF BCD Analog I O 140ACIO3000 BCD AEF 140AVIO3000 140ACO02000 BCE ADF 140AVO02000 BCF ADE TC RTD 140ARI03010 BDE ACF 140ATI03000 Analog In Out 140AMM09000 BDF ACE Intelligent Special 140EHC10500 BEF ACD Purpose 140EHC20200 Unassigned CDE ABF Unassigned CDF ABE Unassigned CEF ABD Unassigned DEF ABC To implement t
98. N 140NOE25100 140NOE31100 N N N N V N 140NOE35100 V 140NOE51100 N N N N N N 140NOE55100 V V 140NOE77100 V N V 140NOE77110 N N N N V N NOMs The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the NOMs of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140NOM21 100 N N N N N N 140NOM21200 140 25200 Hot Standby The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Hot Standby of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140CHS11000 N N N N N N 830 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Agency Approvals Counters ASCII Interface The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Counters of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Goaled UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140EHC10500 Y Y 140 20200 Y Y Y The following table provides the agency approvals conformal coating ava
99. Note Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means no change 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 311 Intelligent Special Purpose If configured for Rate Sample Mode the following figures which show the 4X through 4X 2 counters are displayed Configured for Rate Sample Mode 4X 16 15 14 1311211110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Preset Counter 1 1 Enable Counter 1 1 Disable Counter 1 1 Preset Counter 2 1 Enable Counter 2 1 Disable Counter 2 Load Values Command Bit 4X 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Ea IRE Rate Sample Timer Value Counter 1 milliseconds max 3FFF hex 4X 2 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Rate Sample Timer Value Counter 2 milliseconds max 3FFF hex no change Note Zero set into any 4X register or any 4X register pair for 32 bit values means 312 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Command 1 and Command 2 Response Formats Command 3 READ INPUT COUNTER Output Register Format 4X z 03XX hex The following figures show the 3X through 3X 5 response formats 3x 16 18
100. OFF ON ON OFF Non default Filter 1 5 ms Internal Resistance Input 24 KQ nominal 688 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Output Specifications The following table shows the output specifications for the DDM69000 module Output Specifications Voltage Output Operating max 19 2 156 2 Vdc including ripple ON State Drop Point 0 75 Vdc 4 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 4 A continuous Per Module 16 A continuous see the derating curve below Off State Leakage Point 1 2 mA 150 Vdc Output Response OFF ON ON OFF 0 2 ms max resistive load output The following figure shows the DDM69000 Derating Curve 5 16A 5 gt g gt 8 e 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature Surge Current Maximum Each Point 30 A 500 ms duration Load Inductance Maximum Output For switching intervals gt 15 secondsper ANSI IEEE C37 90 1978 1989 L lt 12 For repetitive switching amus PF where L Load Inductance Henry 2 Load Current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance Maximum 0 1 uf 150 0 6 uf 24 Vdc 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 689 Modules Common Specifications The following table shows the common specifications for the DDM69000 module Common Specifications
101. OUTPUT 6 LINE OUTPUT 7 LINE OUTPUT 8 LINE N C OUTPUT 9 LINE OUTPUT 10 LINE OUTPUT 11 LINE OUTPUT 12 LINE N C OUTPUT 13 LINE OUTPUT 14 LINE OUTPUT 15 LINE OUTPUT 16 LINE N C OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 N C OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 amp O9 9 9 CO C Ce G 9j q yoQ o N C OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 N C OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 596 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected CAUTION Agency Compliance 1 Voltages up to 133V may be different phases on adjacent output points 2 Voltages over 133V of different phases must have an output point separation between them For example Output 1 and 2 Phase A Skip Output 3 Output 4 Phase B Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION Connectivity Compatibility Each output point must be fused with an external fuse The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse Part 043502405 or any other fuse with an I2T rating of less than 87 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment dama
102. P F1 08 e Og 99 910 9414 912 913 914 915 916 Module Output 7 o g e je je e je Aaa n ni oj Q AY oj nm 9174 918 194 9204 921 22 22 Fuse Part Numbers 923 Modicon 140CFU08000 924 Qty 10 Wickman 3700800041 925 926 927 928 929 930 931 Module 932 Group A Group A Power Common VA e vB Group B Power Group A ved evel Supply e VC Group C Power e VDH VD Group D Power eje O Co N j N 2 dnoub bX 4 o a dnouo NI Note The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX001 10 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 763 CableFast Cabling 140CFC03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The C block provides connections for 32 group fused input or output points The block may be used for 1 or 2 wire inputs or outputs and features a fuse per group four groups total Users select input or output mode via four switches located on the module The default is input mode See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks Terminal Block The following figure
103. module This module requires ten contiguous 16 bit words eight for input data one for channel status and one for internal temperature of the module The data words formats are as follows Word 1 Channel 1 data Word 2 Channel 2 data Word 3 Channel 3 data Word 4 Channel 4 data Word 5 Channel 5 data Word 6 Channel 6 data Word 7 Channel 7 data Word 8 Channel 8 data 470 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Map Status Byte The following shows the word 9 register Word 9 Input status word 1 Channel 8 out of range __ 12 Channel 7 out of range 12 Channel 6 out of range __ 1 Channel 5 out of range 12 Channel 4 out of range __ 1 2 Channel out of range __ 1 2 Channel 2 out of range 1 Channel 1 out of range 1 213 4 5 6 78 9 110 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning channel 8 1 Range warning on channel 7 1 Range warning on channel 6 1 Range warning channel 5 1 Range warning channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value as shown in the following table An out of range bit i
104. 108 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm state trn asc 623 bad comm state trn rtu 624 bad comm state rcv rtu 625 bad comm state rcv asc 626 bad modbus state tmrO evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 109 CPU Modules Front Panel Two three position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU The left Switches switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the mid
105. 140A1133000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module Overview The Quantum 1404A1133000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module will interface with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software configurable on a module basis with either RTD Resistance or thermocouple millivolt inputs When it is configured as an RTD Resistance Input module it supports 1000 2000 5000 and 10000 platinum American or European and nickel sensors The module also allows any mix and match of sensor type or resistance inputs that can be configured by the software When it is configured as a Thermocouple Millivolt Input module it accepts B J K R S and T type thermocouples The module also allows any mix and match of thermocouple or millivolt inputs that can be configured by the software RTD Resistance Specifications for the Quantum140A1133000 module configured as an Intrinsically Module Safe RTD Resistance input module are as follows Specifications RTD Resistance Module Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active Green F Red 1 8 Red Inicated channel is out of range includes broken wire and short circuit conditions RTD Types Configurable Platinum American and European 200 C to 4850 C PT100 PT200 PT500 PT1000 Nickel N100 N200 N500 N1000 60 C to 180 G Measurement Current PT100 PT200 N100 N200 2 5 mA PT500 PT1000 N500 N1000 0 5 mA
106. 140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module 233 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 227 Networking 140CRP93X00 Remote I O RIO Head Single and Dual Channel Module Overview The Remote I O Head Single and Dual Channel modules are installed in the same backplane as the system controlling CPU modules The RIO head is used to transfer qata bi directionally between the CPU and RIO drop modules installed in separate backplanes A coaxial cable network is used to interconnect the RIO head module and one or more RIO drop modules RIO Head Module The following figure shows the Remote I O RIO module s parts The specific module illustrated is the 140CRP93200 Label Customer Identification Label 107 1 Number Fold label place it inside HORE Module Description Part 043504680 LED Area Color Code Removable Door Part 043513804 f EE E RIO Coax Connector ES E ty lt 228 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Networking Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I O Head Single and Dual Channel modules Specifications Drop Type Quantum 200 Series 500 Series 800 Series or S
107. 627 DDO35310 631 DDO36400 636 DDO84300 641 00088500 644 01133000 417 01033000 423 DRA84000 649 DRC83000 652 05135300 667 DVO85300 661 10500 299 20200 334 EIA92100 200 5106210 347 HLI34000 353 NOA6XXXO 202 NOE2X100 272 NOE3X100 277 NOE771xx 283 NOL911XO0 209 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index NOM21X00 240 NOM25200 252 XCP90000 440 XSM01000 434 standalone power supplies models 739 summable power supplies description 740 system configurations local RIO and DIO 18 system space requirements dimensions 721 illustration 722 locations 721 minimum spacing 721 system specifications AC DC power supplies 44 agency approvals 47 description 43 electrical 44 I O modules between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc 44 I O modules greater than 48 Vac or Vdc 45 I O modules less than 24 Vac or Vdc 44 mechanical 43 operating conditions 45 storage conditions 46 T Telefast Input See DDI36400 Telefast Output See DDO36400 terminal strip module keying description 453 illustration 454 primary keying 453 secondary keying 453 V version levels DDM69000 691 W wiring diagram ACI03000 481 ACI04000 485 ACOO02000 507 ACO13000 511 AII33000 395 AII33010 405 AMMO09000 527 ARI03010 489 ATIO3000 493 AVI03000 498 AVOO2000 516 CFA04000 759 CFB03200 762 CFC03200 766 CFD03200 774 CFG01600 778 780 782 783 CFHO00800 787 CF100800 794 CFJ004
108. 697 empty module 698 empty module with door cover 699 field wiring terminal strip 700 I O conversion connector 704 IP 20 compliant field wiring terminal strips 701 Modbus Plus ruggedized tap 703 Modbus Plus tap 702 remote I O BNC connector 705 remote I O splitter 705 remote I O tap 704 RG 11 remote I O F connector 705 RG 6 remote I O F connector 705 terminal strip jumper kit 699 MMS interface network modules 10 Modbus and Modbus Plus communications features 37 Modbus communications description 37 Modbus connector 25 pin 365 9 pin 365 Modbus connector pinouts 25 point connections 176 nine pin connections 176 MODBUS I O Scanner functionality 286 Modbus Plus communications description 38 Modbus Plus network option modules See NOM21 X00 Modbus Plus on Fiber See NOM25200 module mounting procedure description 723 I O terminal strip mounting procedure 726 illustration 724 installing jumper clips 725 removing Quantum module door 727 mounting brackets 125 mm 718 20 mm 720 description 717 part numbers 717 MSB10100 See MSX10100 MSC10100 See MSX10100 MSX motion modules See MSX10100 MSX10100 analog input electrical specifications 361 analog input operational specifications 359 analog output electrical specifications 361 analog output operational specifications 359 application program operational specifications 358 communications operational specifications 358 compatibili
109. 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules FTP and HTTP The following information describes services provided by the FTP and HTTP Server servers FTP Server The NOE771xx s File Transfer Protocol FTP Server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address Any FTP client can log on to the module if the client uses the correct user name and password The FTP Server provides the following services e Update the NOE s firmware by downloading a new Exec e Provides error log visibility by uploading error log files e Upload download BOOTP Server and SNMP configuration files The default user name is USER and the default password is USERUSER Both the user name and password are case sensitive Refer to the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for instructions about how to change the password and how to add or delete user names to the FTP Server There should be only one FTP client per module HTTP Server The NOE771xx s HyperText Transport Protocol HTTP Server is available as soon as the module receives an IP address It can be used with version 4 0 or greater of either the Internet Explorer or Netscape browser The NOE771xx s HyperText Transport Protocol HTTP Server allows you to view the following information e Module s Ethernet statistics e Controller and I O information e BOOTP DHCP FDR Faulty Device Replacement Server information e Global Data Publish Subscribe The HTTP Server s
110. An Ethernet module may be inserted into an existing Quantum system and connected to existing Ethernet networks via fiber optic or twisted pair cabling Quantum SY MAX Ethernet modules are Quantum CPU network option modules that can be placed in a Quantum backplane to connect Quantum controllers to SY MAX devices and applications 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 9 Quantum Overview MMS Ethernet Modules NOE InterBus Interface Module NOA LonWorks Modules NOL Profibus Interface Module CRP AS i Interface Quantum MMS Ethernet modules are Quantum CPU network option modules that can be placed in a Quantum backplane to connect Quantum controllers to MMS devices and applications The Quantum InterBus is the interface module to the InterBus bus The InterBus bus is a fieldbus network designed for I O blocks and intelligent devices used in manufacturing It offers a master slave topology that permits deterministic I O servicing over it s 18 km twisted pair network Quantum NOL modules provide connectivity between a Quantum controller and a LonWorks network based on Echelon s LonWorks technology The NOL module is offered in three models for different transceiver types and supports three twisted pair media types with different network topologies or data transfer speeds Quantum Profibus module is the interface module to Profibus DP networks The interface modules use Type A shielded twisted pair to joi
111. DTR 4 4 DTR RTS 4 4 DTR GRND 5 t 5 GRND CTS 5 7 5 GRND DSR 6 6 DSR DSR 6 6 DSR RTS 7 7 RTS GRND 7 r7 RTS CTS 8 8 CTS 8 L8 CTS 9 NC DTR 20 9 NC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 165 CPU Modules Modbus Ports The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for portable laptop Pinout computers Connections for Portable IBM AT Quantum Computers 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 TX 3 DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR DSR RIS 7 RTS CTS RB CTS NC g The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 166 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules 140CPU53414 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU53414 Controller module CPU 4M 1xModbus Plus Max IEC Program 2 5 M CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components Model Number SEEN Module Description LED Area I TX Color Code Removable door Customer Identification Label Part 043513804 Fold label and place it inside door Part 31000226 E
112. E Front View i 8 508mm Side View The following figure shows the 9 pin RJ45 connector schematic Connectors Pinouts pe 9 pin D shell 1 1 DCD TID 3 M 2 RXD RXD 4 48 3 TXD DSR 2 4 DTR GND 5 5 GDN 6 DRS CTS 7 7 RTS RTS 6 hi 8 CTS 9 RI Chassis 8 48 9 Case of the Ground Connector 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 257 Modbus Plus NOM RJ45 Cable This following figure shows the RJ45 connector Modicon Part 110XCA2820X Types cable The table provides part numbers and cable lengths ry ri ae Connector Connector Modicon Part 110 XCA 282 0X Cable Part Numbers Cable Lengths 110XCA28201 3 ft 0 91 m 110XCA28202 10 ft 3 m 110XCA28203 20 ft 6 m 258 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Fiber Optic Cable NOM25200 module is connected in the Quantum system by a fiber optic cable Connections see the following figure The cable has two strands Each module transmits a signal in one direction For this reason each strand must be connected to the transmit port on one module and the receive port on the other One strand of the fiber optic cable is labelled every 10 inches with the manufacturer s name and the cable specifications This is the only way to distinguish the two strands Module Module B A m
113. Error A 158 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules The following table shows the LED error codes for the 140CPU43412A module Indication when On The CPU has passed power up diagnostics The CPU has been started and is solving logic The battery needs replacing or is not present Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2 Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port LEDS Color Ready Green Run Green Bat Low Red Modbus Green Modbus Green Error A Red Mem Prt Amber Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412A LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82bE MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 159 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnost
114. Example 2 Count Down 1 Pe pi JU Lu uL LLL ILL InputCounter 10 9 7 15 l4 3 2 1 Output Output B TENE m NEM Count is from 10 Maximum Count gt 0 Output A turns on at Setpoint 5 Output B turns on after Input Count 0 Note Outputs are not latched 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 341 Intelligent Special Purpose Counter Rollover Examples for Quadrature Input Example 1 Count Up Counter 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 9 10 0 1 2 Output A __ Output B JJ Count is from 0 gt 10 Maximum Count Output A turns on at Setpoint 5 Output B turns on after Input Count Maximum Terminal Count 10 Example 2 Count Down Input A _ LLT LT TL _ Input B L iu d LP EE LEE LAL Ee Leer er LEE Counter 10 9 8 T 5 4 3 i 1 oO 10 B Output A OE os Output B Count is from 10 Maximum Count gt 0 Output A turns on at Setpoint 5 Output B turns on after Input Count 0 Note Outputs are not latched 342 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram The following table shows the wiring diagram for signal descriptions Signal Parameter Description Usage Descriptions INPUT A Single ended or differential count input or Phase A for quadrature mode Single ended active low only uses Input 1A and or Input 2A
115. F 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 32 point I O modules LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 14282 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140AMM09000 bi directional and Descriptions module for Bi Directional Modules Active F 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140AMM09000 bi directional module LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present E Red No power applied to the output group s or input out of range 450 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 1 and 2 left column Green Indicates output is active 1 and 2 middle Red Indicates output status broken wire or bad field supply column 1 4 right column Red Indicates input status under over range The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140DAM59000 and 140DDM39000 bi directional modules Active F 1 1 9 2 2 10 3 3 11 4 4 12 5 5 13 6 6 14 7 7 15 8 8 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140DAM59000 and 140DDM39000 bi directional modules LEDs Color Indicat
116. GROUP C COMMON N C 69 G3 9 INPUT 26 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 INPUT 31 GROUP D COMMON Note N Not Connected CAUTION Voltage Compatibility All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 562 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 14000115310 Quantum I O DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source Module Overview The DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source module accepts 5 Vdc inputs and is for use with sink output devices and is compatible with LS S TTL and CMOS logic Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DDI15310 5 V TTL IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Input Ratings ON Level 0 8 Vdc maximum 4 0 mA at Us 5 5 and Uy 0 OFF Level 4 Vdc min Ug 2 5 5 V 8 Vdc min Us 4 5 V OFF Leakage 200 uA Us 5 5 V and Uy 4 Internal Pullup Resistor 7 5k Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 5 5 Vdc 1 3 ms 15 Vdc decaying pulse Response OFF ON 250 us max ON OFF 500 us max Input Protection Resistor limited Isolation Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute
117. Green left column Indicates output status Required Addressing 1 word in 0 5 words out The following table shows the Input specifications Input Specifications Operating Voltages and Input Wetting Currents 50 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 85 132 Vac 11 1 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 14 4 capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 79 132 Vac 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 12 capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 2 1 mA an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Absolute Maximum Input Voltages Continuous 132 Vac 10s 156 Vac 1 cycle 200 Vac Response Inputs OFF ON Min 4 9 ms max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms max 12 3 ms 676 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Output Specifications Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency The following table shows the Output specifications Output Specifications Absolute Maximum Output Voltages Continuous 85 132 Vac 10 seconds 156 Vac 1 cycle 200 Vac On State Drop Point 1 5 Vac Minimum Load Current rms 5 Maximum Load Current rms Each Point 4 A continuous Each Group 4 A continuous Per Module 8 A continuous see the derating chart b
118. LED Area Customer Identification Removable Door Label lt q pf Battery 1 Battery Slot 1 with battery installed Battery Access Tape EM for removal replacement Changed Battery Slot 2 with battery installed Battery2 Battery Access Tape for removal replacement NS Changed ur 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 439 Battery Module Battery Backup Specifications The 140XCP90000 provides RAM backup power for expert modules One non rechargeable 3 6 V lithium battery is provided and is accessible from the front of the module in Battery Slot 1 the upper slot for easy removal when it is necessary to change it Note Extended backup protection is provided when a second battery is installed in Battery Slot 2 the lower slot The following table shows the specifications for the battery module Specifications Battery Type C 3 V lithium Maximum Load Current 100 mA Service Life 8000 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 596 loss of capacity per year Battery Part Number 990XCP99000 Note The formula to calculate the life cycle of one battery in the battery module is Life cycle 1 4 x I days where in Amps is the total battery current load of all modules in the backplane 440 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Battery Module LED Indicators and Descriptions Battery Installation and Replacement Considerations
119. Master Red Processor fault Fault on the InterBus processor or the communications processor has failed 202 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Descriptions LEDs Color Function RBUS Red Remote bus fault The remote bus has been diagnosed as defective LBUS Red Peripheral bus fault The peripheral bus has been diagnosed as defective Slave Red An InterBus node has reported a module fault DEA202 Red Initialization fault with the DEA 202 Memory Red Memory fault Start Up Red The InterBus master is not operational LED Indicators The following figure shows the NOA62200 LED indicators and Descriptions for NOA62200 140 NOA 622 00 INTERBUS Master R Active F IBS RUN Slave The following table shows the NOA62200 LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Status Meaning R Green On Ready The switch on routine was completed successfully The firmware is running correctly and the module is ready for operations RAM and checksum are ok Flashing No firmware or firmware is being loaded Off Module error Active Green On The communication with the TSX Quantum CPU is active 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 203 Quantum Field Bus Modules Seven Segment Display LED Descriptions LEDs Color Status Meaning F Red On Fault An err
120. Module Protection Input Protection Resistor limited Output Protection Transient voltage suppression internal Isolation Input and Output Input Group to Output Output to Output 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Input None Output Over current each point Bus Current Required Module 350 mA Power Dissipation 0 4 W x 1 0 x number of input points ON 0 75 x total module output current External Power Module Not required for this module Fusing Input Internal None External User discretion Output Each output is protected by an electronic shutdown For current output surges between 4 A and 30 A the outpoint point will shutdown after 0 5 s For current surges greater than 30 A the output will shutdown immediately 690 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Version Levels The following table shows the required version levels Modules marked with SV PV RL rather than V0X X0 exceed the minimum version levels in this table Products Minimum Version Level see User Action Required lable illustration CPUs and NOMs lt V02 20 Executive upgrade to gt V02 10 gt V02 20 None RIOs lt V02 00 Module upgrade gt V02 00 and lt V02 20 Executive upgrade to gt V01 10 gt V02 20 None DIOs lt V0
121. Network Configurations Communications and Networking The following table shows the Quantum communications and networking modules Model Number Description Module Loadable Backplane Support Bus Power mA Interface Required Local RIO DIO Technique 140CRP81100 Profibus Direct CPU N Y N N 1200 Driver 140CRP93100 Remote I O Direct CPU N Y N N 780 Head Interface Driver single cable 140CRP93200 Remote I O Direct CPU N Y N N 780 Head Interface Driver dual cable 140CHS21000 Hot Standby Direct CPU Y Y N N 700 Processor Kit Driver 140NOA61110 Interbus Master Direct CPU Y Y N N 700 Driver 140NOM21100 Modbus Plus Option N Y N N 780 Options single Module cable 140NOM21200 Modbus Plus Option N Y N N 780 Option dual Module cable 140NOM25200 Modbus Plus Option N Y N N 900 Option single Module channel fiber 140NOE21100 Ethernet TCP IP Option N Y N N 1000 Twisted Pair Module 140NOE25100 Ethernet TCP IP Option N Y N N 1000 Fiber Optic Module 140NOE31100 Ethernet SY Option N Y N N 1000 MAX Twisted Module Pair 140NOE35100 Ethernet SY Option N Y N N 1000 MAX Fiber Optic Module 1 Ethernet MMS Option N Y N N 1000 Twisted Module 1 Ethernet MMS Option N Y N N 1000 ITONOESS100 Fiber Optic Module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 35 Network Configurations Model
122. Ohms 140AVI03000 0 20 mA 8 1 280 Mixed inputs 20 mA current or 10 Vdc voltage 5 140 103000 8 1 280 S T 58 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Specifications Modules Analog Out Intrinsic Safe Analog Modules Intrinsic Safe Discrete Modules The following table shows specifications for the Analog Out modules Type Part Number Function Points Points Bus Special Channels per Current Features group Required 140ACO02000 4 20mA 4 N A 480 mA Channels isolated 140ACO13000 0 25 mA 8 8 550 High density 0 20 mA 4 20mA 140AVO02000 0 10 Vdc 4 N A 700 mA Mixed outputs 1 10 0 5 5 Vde The following table shows specifications for the Intrinsic Safe analog modules Type Part Number Function Points Points Bus Special Features Channels per Current Group Required 140 1133000 8 1 400 CJC INT EXT K R S T IEC American RTD Pt Ni Ohms 140 1133010 0 25 8 8 1 5 A Mixed inputs 0 20 mA current Internal 4 20 mA power supply 140A1033000 0 25 8 8 2 5 Internal power 0 20 mA supply 4 20 mA The following table shows the specifications for the Intrinsic Safe discrete modules Type Part Function Points Points Bus Special Number Ch
123. Overview The 140EIA92100 field bus communications module provides communications interface to AS i networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems Related For more detailed information see Modicon Quantum AS i Master Module manual Documentation part number 840USE1 1700 or start the newmod hlp from your Concept CD To locate it go to the root of your Concept Installation directory Example of path Drive_X Concept hlp Note The newmod help system on your Concept CD contains a hyperlink labeled Back to Main Content This link will not return you to Concept 2 5 Help 196 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules Communications following diagram provides a view of the 140EIA92100 communications Module module 1 LED Display 2 AS i Red ON shows the module is not powered Flashing shows automatic addressing enabled SLV BUS Green ON when LEDs 0 31 are in bus display mode I O Status Green ON when LEDs 0 31 are in slave display mode Mode Push Button Press and hold this button to change from slave mode to bus mode o0 A Q Address Push Button Press this button to scroll through the 32 slaves Hold to reverse direction of the scroll 7 AS iChannel Cable Connector Connects module to AS i cable and AS i power supply 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 197 Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Display and Diagram of the LED display Descriptions B
124. Power Dissipation 5 W External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion 484 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram Wiring diagram for the 140ACI04000 module Differential Input INPUT S ey nen TER s INPUT 2 INPUT 40 g 7 INPUT 4 Ended ii NC N C INPUT 5 INPUT 5 ce A OE INPUT 6 s J e e s A INPUT 8 eeu N C N C INPUT 9 INPUT 9 INPUT 10 e INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 e INPUT 12 eo 60 N C N C INPUT13 DA INPUT 13 INPUT 14 AA INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 N C N C INPUT 16 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 485 I O Modules Note 1 The current sources are supplied by the user fusing is at the discretion of the user 2 Either shielded or unshielded cables may be used In noisy environments twisted shielded cable is recommended Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end 3 Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED To avoid this occurrence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 25 mA range The maximum channel to channel working voltage cannot exceed 30 Vdc N C Not connected cR
125. Rear Panel Two rotary switches refer to the illustration and table below are located on the rear Switches panel of the CPU They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 The following figure shows SW1 and SW2 SW1 A SW2 BOTTOM The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings Node Address swi SW2 1 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 or address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address 174 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Key Switch The key switch is used to protect memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation The following figure shows the key switch Sto P M Stop em Mem Prt Prt Start O Start Note The key switch positions shown next to the switch above are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right Key Switch The following
126. Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 40 72 Vdc Input Current 1 3 A 48 Vdc Inrush Current 25 A 48 Vdc Input Power Interruption 13 ms 48 Vdc Fusing external 2 0 A medium time lag recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Current 8 A see operating curve Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip Part 043503328 Internal Power Dissipation 172W 8A Operating Mode Standalone Redundant LED Indicator and Description Pwr ok The following figure shows the CPS42400 LED indicator The following table shows the CPS42400 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 93 Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS42400 wiring diagram Power Loss Alarm 4 8 60 Vdc Common 48 60 Vdc rs Capacitor 1 Optional peeoeeo 95 Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information Note A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac 6 30 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power te
127. Specifications Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Range 0 250 1 250 V Scaling Vout Volts mA x 0 0625 Output Impedance 62 5 W Typical Wire Length 1 m maximum Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 610r higher Field wiring to the module should consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge should be AWG 30 to AWG 18 Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area The Quantum140A1033000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module The module s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Coding CEF Terminal Strip Coding ABD Module Part Number 140A1033000 Module Class Intrinsically Safe 410 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency Approved Wiring Diagrams Notes related to CSA cer
128. The following figure shows the LED indicators Active Bat1 Low Bat2 Low The following table shows the LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present Bati Low Red Battery 1 voltage is low Bat2 Low Red Battery 2 voltage is low Note The Bat1 Low and Bat2 Low LEDs turn ON when a battery is not installed installed backwards or in need of replacement The following procedure describes the installation of a battery Step Action 1 Remove the insulating strip from the plus pole of the battery before inserting it into the module This strip is used to insulate the battery when on the shelf Note The battery installed in the module when shipped has the insulating strip in place Remove this strip and re install the battery before operation When single battery backup is required install the battery in Battery Slot 1 The circuitry is designed so Battery 1 supplies the current until it is used up Battery 2 when installed then assumes the load requirement without interruption Battery status is indicated via LEDs and Modsoft status bytes When the controller is in operation the batteries can be replaced at any time Note When the controller is powered OFF battery replacement can be done without RAM loss only when a second functioning battery is installed 840 USE 10
129. V 14000035300 V V 14000035301 Y 14000035310 V V 14000036400 V 14000084300 Y Y 14000088500 V V V 140DRA84000 N Y Y 140DRC83000 V 14005135300 Y 140DVO85300 V Backplanes The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the I O of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140XBP00200 V V V 140XBP00300 V 140XBP00400 V V 140XBP00600 V V 140XBP01000 V V V 140XBP01600 N V V 834 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Agency Approvals Backplane The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability Expander for the backplane expander of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Goated UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory CE Version 142 Mutual Class Availabilty Div 2 140XBE10000 Y Y V V 835 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Agency Approvals 836 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index A ACI03000 configuration 463 description 479 I O map status byte 464 register assignment 463 specifications 4
130. connected to chasis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 A dropping resistor 100 Ohms is across the signal and V pins of each channel V is internally connected to 1 5 ground Note 3 Three wire transmitters should be provided power only from the module An external power supply should not be used Note 4 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 5 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module 140A1I33010 Wiring Diagram 406 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 SEE NOTE 1 SEE NOTE 1 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 6 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 5 appropriate for connection with IS Analog Current HAZARDOUS LOCATION IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below The entity parameters are per Channel class I Div Group Voc 23 8 VDC Class II Div Group E F G Isc 112 mA Ch Class III Div Ca 123 nf Ch La 2 9 mH Ch m e e e s m Po 622 mW Ch NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end soles Signal 2 Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connect
131. e Run The switch should be in this position except when initiating a full program update or taking the module off line The slide switch is used to designate the controller as A or B The slide switch on one Hot Standby module in every pair must be set to A the switch on the other must be set to B The controller designated A will begin as the primary controller as long as it reaches the ready state before or at the same time as controller B If the switches are set to the same position the system will refuse to recognize the second controller at startup The following figure shows the A B designation slide switch r A 374 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog Digital Input Output 1 5 Modules At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Output and Digital Input Output Modules What s in this This chapter contains the following sections 2 Chapter Section Topic Page 15 1 Intrinsically Safe Modules General Information 376 15 2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules 380 15 3 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules 414 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 375 Intrinsically Safe Modules 15 1 Intrinsically Safe Modules General Information Intrinsically Safe Modules General Description Introduction Intrinsic Safety Module Location Intrinsically Saf
132. lot us g Tei 5 ACL 6 ACN o N 7 F 216 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 DIO Specifications The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21110 and CRA21210 AC powered single and dual channel DIO modules Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 85 276 Vac Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 10 of the fundamental rms value Input Current 0 4 A 115 Vac 0 2 A 230 Vac Inrush Current 10 A 115 Vac 20 A 230 Vac VA Rating 50 VA Input Power Interruption 1 2 cycle at full load and minimum rated line voltage frequency No less than 1 second between interruptions Fusing external 1 5 A Part 4043502515 or equivalent Operating Mode Standalone or not powered see Power and Grounding Guidelines p 729 Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Current 3A Minimum Load 0A Protection Over Current Over Voltage Communication Modbus Plus 1 port single cable 2 ports dual cable General Specifications Type Quantum Modules Drop Depends on bus current loading and word count Words 30 In 32 Out Two additional input words are reserved for drop status Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM Data Address Executive Checksum Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip Part 043506326
133. or as many as 14 along with a CPU and power supply in a single 16 slot backplane If required for the application system interface modules are also included in the Local I O backplane These modules could consist of one RIO processor or network option modules The following figure is an example of a typical local I O configuration PS CPU I O VO lO VO VO VO VO VO VO O VO VO VO e e e e e e e e 2 Slot 3 Slot 5 4 Slot 6 Slot vs w p 10 Slot tE 16 Slot gt Note A maximum of 448 digital I O points 14 4x8 digital I O modules or a maximum of 48 analog input channels six 8 channel analog in modules and 32 analog output channels eight 4 channel analog out modules may be serviced in a single local I O rack 20 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Configurations Quantum Remote I O RIO Overview Related Documentation Single Cable RIO Configuration Quantum RIO can be set up in single or dual cable configurations refer to the following two figures and is contained in one rack at each RIO drop When RIO is used the Quantu
134. p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 70 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies 140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115 230 Vac 11 A Overview The following provides information on the AC power supply 115 230 Vac 11 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module and its components Module LED Area e Model Number 0 E SPS Customer Identification Label Module Description Fold Color Code Removable m f Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover abel and place it inside door Door ECE fits vac its vac ACL Iv No o 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 71 Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11420 115 230 VAC power supply module Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 93 138 Vac 170 264 Vac Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 10 of the fundamental rms value Input Current 1 2A 115 Vac 0 7 A 230 Vac Inrush Current 25 C first power up lt 20 A 115 Vac lt 25 A 230 Vac VA Rating 160 VA 11A
135. terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 813 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 chassis grounding module Chassis Grounding Field Side Connections Jumper 140 ACO 02000 140 AVO 020 00 See jumper information below Signals Signals Monitor 1 Output 1 Field Device k Sink 140 ACO 020 00 Current Out Sinking Jumper Source 1 Common 1 Monitor 2 Output 2 ee evice I Sink 2 140 AVO 020 00 Voltage Out Source 2 Common 2 Monitor 3 Output 3 Field Device k pines 140 ACO 020 00 Current Out Sourcing Source 3 Common 3 Shield Jumper Part Number d 140CFX00110 V 4 9 Jumper Connections 1 to S2 to S3 to S4 GND V1 to 1 e CO3 to V3 For 140 ACO 020 00 T operation only 814 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When used with the 140AVO02000 analog voltage out module the master override connections and range select must be made on the Quantum I O connector 2 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 3 For wiring the 140ACO02000 and the 140AVO02000 see the wiring diagrams
136. 000 496 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Data Format Input Range Under Normal Over Warning Warning 12 bit Format 10 V 0 0 4 095 4 095 5 20 mA 0 0 4 095 4 095 0 10 V 0 4 095 4 095 0 5 V 0 20 mA 0 4 095 4 095 1 5V 4 20mA 0 0 4 095 4 095 The Voltmeter ranges are listed in signed integer format 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 497 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the AVI03000 wiring diagram INPUT 1 Jumper ISENSE 1 A Current INPUT 2 4 G GJS O N C INPUT 2 N C N C INPUT 3 N C INPUT 4 7 N C INPUT 5 N C INPUT 6 INPUT 8 amp GG 6 ISENSE 2 INPUT 3 SENSE 3 INPUT 4 4 1 SENSE 4 N C INPUT 5 1 SENSE 5 INPUT 6 1 SENSE 6 N C INPUT 7 4 I SENSE 7 INPUT 8 4 SENSE 8 N C Source Voltage Source Note 1 The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user fusing is at the discretion of the user 2 Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used Shielded types should have a shield tied
137. 1 L 1 Preset Counter 1 L 1 Enable Counter 1 L 1 Disable Counter 1 LLL 1 Preset Counter 2 1 Enable Counter 2 1 Disable Counter 2 Read Rate Last Count Command Bit 314 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Command 4 Response Format Map Status Byte Using I O Mapped Registers to Operate the High Speed Counter The following figures show the counters for 3X through 3X 5 for command 4 3X 16 15 14 i3 i2 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Read Rate Sample Last Count Command Byte 3X 1 and 3 2 Counter 1 s 32 bit Rate Sample Last Count Before Preset 3X 3 and 3X 4 Counter 2 s 32 bit Rate Sample Last Count Before Preset 3X45 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Field Power Lost The most significant bit in the I O Map status byte is used for the 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module The following figure shows the map status byte register 8 7 65 514 3 2 1 1 Internal Fuse Blown External Output Supply Lost COUNT UP Example Field connections for this example are illustrated in the EHC202 wiring diagrams 1 4 in this section The maximum allowable V
138. 100 B gain 100 Note A gain of 25 produces readings with 100mV A gain of 100 produces readings with 25mV Pt100 200 to 850 Pt200 200 to 850 Pt500 200 to 850 Pt1000 200 to 850 Ni 100 60 to 180 Ni 200 60 to 180 Ni 500 60 to 180 Ni1000 60 to 180 R 0 to 766 66 OHM R 0 to 4000 OHM APt100 100 to 450 APt200 100 to 450 APt500 100 to 450 APt1000 100 t0 450 This channel installed Yes No 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 385 Intrinsically Safe Modules 140AII33010 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140A1133010 intrinsic safe analog input module Map Register The 140 1133010 module requires nine contiguous input registers assigned as Assignments follows Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 hannel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Channel 5 data Register 6 Channel 6 data Register 7 Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data Register 9 Input Status Word 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of range on Channel 8 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of range on Channel 7 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of range on Channel 6 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of
139. 111 7 Not Used 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 307 Intelligent Special Purpose CAUTION Module disable possibility The Output ON time specified in the Command 2 registers may be used by only one of the four outputs When more than one output is set to mode 5 or 6 the module firmware will operate the first one encountered and disable the other outputs set to modes 5 or 6 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 308 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Command 2 LOAD VALUES Output Register Format 4X z 02XX hex The LOAD VALUES 4X register format depends on the Counter Rate Sample mode selected in Command 1 Register 4X 1 bits 11 and 12 If configured for two 16 bit Counters Output Assert ON the following figures which shows counters for registers 4X through 4X 5 are displayed Configured for two 16 Bit Counters Output Assert ON 4X 16 15 14 13 12 11 109 8 7165 4131211 1 Preset Counter 1 L 1 Enable Counter 1 L _1 Disable Counter 1 LLL 1 Preset Counter 2 1 Enable Counter 2 1 Disable Counter 2 Load Values Command Bit 4X 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Maximum Count for Counter 1 max FFFF hex 4X 2 16
140. 140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module 190 140EIA92100 Quantum AS i Master Module 196 140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules 201 140NOL91 1X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules 208 Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Distributed I O DIO for the Quantum Modules 215 Ata Glance ee Cea 215 140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I O DIO Modules 216 140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I O DIO Modules 221 Quantum Remote I O Communication Modules 227 Ata Glance moss set 227 140CRP93X00 Remote I O RIO Head Single and Dual Channel Module 228 140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module 233 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules 239 140NOM21X00 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules 239 Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module 249 140NOM25200 Quantum Networking Modbus Plus on Fiber Module 249 Quantum Ethernet Modules 271 Ata GlanCe a ya PE 271 140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Module 272 140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY MAX Modules 276 140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules 279 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules 282 Inte
141. 2 Connections Typical 2 wire 14 configuration Typical 1 configuration Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU40000 Qty 10 Wickman 3701400041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 Note 1 The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 2 The GND ground terminal points are not connected 782 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CFG01600 wiring for the 14000084300 for Grouped DC grouped DC output mode module Output Mode Field Side Connections F1 4A Module E Output 1 Module Group A e Common 6 VB Group A 7 VB Return 8 vB F9 4A Module Output 9 9 e 1010 11 12 2 Module Group B e 1 gl SF VD Fuse Part Numbers 1424 9 3 14 VD Modicon 140CFU40000 Group B Qty 10 15 9 VD Return Wickman 3701400041 e 164 1 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 16 2 VD Module Group VAI MATT e GND Supply GroupA VB VB e GND T Supply VC VC e GND Module ponis e lb Group B VD4 VD eGND T Supply 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 783 CableFast Cabling Note 1 The terminal block com
142. 25 degrees 0 15 of full scale Accuracy Drift w Temperature Unipolar Ranges 0 003 of full scale C typical 0 005 of full scale C max Bipolar Ranges 0 004 of full scale C typical 0 007 of full scale C max Linearity 1 LSB 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 513 I O Modules Specifications Isolation Channel to Channel 500 Vac 47 63 Hz for 1 minute Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz for 1 minute Maximum Settling Time 700 us to 0 196 of the final value Update Time 3 ms for all channels Fault Detection None Wire Length 400 m max Bus Current Required 700 mA Power Dissipation 4 5 W max External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External An external fuse is required on the master override signal when it is connected to an external source The required fuse is 1 16 A or 0 063 A fuse Fuse Type 3AG Fast Acting 1 16 A 250 V Fuse Holder 3AG Fuse Type The external fuse is not required if master override is connected to common WARNING Possible injury to personnel or equipment Before removing the connector ensure that it is safe to have field wiring in an open circuit condition Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage WARNING module Malfunction of equipment Mast
143. 276 mA ch SEE NOTE 1 TE Po 1 07 W ch Co 0 508 microf ch Lo 466 microH ch 4 Wire RTD Resistor Connection Chassis Ground 12 G I Source 3 V Sense 3 re SEENOTE 1 2 Wire RTD Resistor Connection N C Source 6 Chassis Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Ground cables should be used for connec tions Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground Screws on the backplane V Sense 6 4 Source 7 V Sense 7 N C P 5 1 ETSI AS MERI I S 2 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 3 Wire RTD Resistor Connection Note 2 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to Chassis the module Ground 31001362 Rev 00 140 1133000 RTD Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 395 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a Thermocouple connection CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Parameters per Channel Vo 15 5 Vdc lo 276 mA ch Po 1 07 W ch Co 0 508 microf ch Lo 466 microH ch 31001362 Rev 00 NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION I Source 8 V V Sense 8 1 5 Module All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip Ground HAZARDOUS LO
144. 29 30 31 32 MSB Second Word 656 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modules Map Status The eight bits in the I O map status byte are used as follows Byte 8 17 61514 3 2 1 Eon A Voltage Fault Group B Voltage Fault Group C Voltage fault Group D Voltage Fault Group A Miscompare Group B Miscompare Group C Miscompare Group D Miscompare The voltage fault bit is set when the field supply is not present or the group fuse is blown The miscompare bit is set when any point within the group does not match its commanded state Modsoft Zoom The module zoom screen selections are shown below Screens Selections Head slot X Drop X Slot X Fail States Output Shutdown State Group Number Fail States User Defined Status Input Values Verified Health Outputs OFF Last Value 00000000 Verified Fault Group X User Defined Input Only Actual NO ALLOW AUTOMATIC RESTART OF FAULTED POINTS YES 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 657 I O Modules Zoom Screen Output Shutdown State Determines the module output states if backplane Selection communication is lost i e no Active LED on module Descriptions Fail States Output Shutdown State Fail States Group outputs are per the selection made in the Fail States column Disabled Forces all outputs to be in the OFF state Fail States Module outp
145. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 MSB First Word Register 2 Input 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Point 17 MSB Second Word Register 3 Input 34 35 36 37 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 Point 33 MSB Third Word Register 4 Input 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 Point 49 MSB Fourth Word Register 5 Input 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 Point 65 MSB Fifth Word Register 6 put 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 oint 81 MSB Sixth Word Map Status There is no I O map status byte associated with this module Byte Modsoft Module Push lt Enter gt to display and select the input type This selection appears if the Zoom Selections module is I O mapped to a register The following figure shows the input type Input Type BIN BCD 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 533 I O Modules 140DA134000 Quantum I O 24 VAC IN Module Overview The AC Input 24 Vac 16x1 module accepts 24 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI34000 24 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 16 Indiv
146. 32 INPUT 31 8 GROUP D COMMON N C Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 539 l O Modules 140DA144000 Quantum I O 48 VAC IN Module Overview The AC Input 48 Vac 16x1 module accepts 48 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAl44000 48 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 16 individually isolated LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50 Hz Typical Input impedance ON 34 56 Vac 9 8 mA max OFF 0 10 Vac 6 8 capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input impedance ON 29 56 Vac 11 7 mA max OFF 0 10 Vac 5 6 capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 1 7 mA an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 56 Vac 10s 63 Vac 1 cycle 100 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Input to Input 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 180 mA Power Dissipation 5 5 W max External Power Not required for this module 540 8
147. 6 Kb 20 000 registers sec Programming Yes Yes Read Write data Yes Yes Global data No Yes Peer Cop No Yes Modbus a master slave protocol is a de facto industry standard with support from over 500 industrial suppliers On line programming or data acquisition applications are easily supported directly from the serial port of any computer Modbus can be used in either a simple point to point manner with a pair of devices or in a network architecture with up to 247 slave devices 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 37 Network Configurations Modbus Plus Modbus Plus combines high speed peer to peer communication and easy installation to simplify applications and reduce installation costs It allows host computers controllers and other data sources to communicate as peers throughout the network via low cost twisted pair cable or optional fiber optic cable As a deterministic token passing network Modbus Plus communicates at one megabaud for fast access to process data It s strength is its ability to control real time control devices like I O and drives without degraded performance due to loading or traffic Bridging between Modbus and Modbus Plus is done automatically on CPUs and Modbus Plus network modules The bridge mode redirects Modbus messages onto the Modbus Plus network for easy connectivity between Modbus and Modbus Plus devices A summary of the available services on Quantu
148. 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to I S terminals must satisfy the following conditions Voc lt Vmax lg lt Imax Ca gt Gi La gt Li Leable Note 8 This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu Outpu 31001365 Rev 00 Output NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION 1 5 Module DII 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D E E Pp I See Note 1 I S Field Device Chassis Ground Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backpalne Note 2 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 Only Quantum 140 XBP oX oo backplanes should be used for mounting this module 14001133000 Wiring Diagram 420 840 USE 100 00
149. 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 237 Networking 238 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules 1 1 140NOM21X00 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules Overview The following information describes the single and dual channel twisted pair cable NOM21X00 modules which provide interface to Modbus Plus networks Modbus Plus The following figure shows the components of the Modbus Plus 140NOM21X00 Module modules Model Number 140 T Module Description X 00 l LED Area samana Color Code Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door Removable door Part 043504417 _ Comm Parameter Slide Switch o Modbus Connector E Modbus Plus s O Connector 25 B Chan A 2 0 Plus 52 Connector 89 B Chan B 220 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 239 Modbus Plus NOMs Specifications The Modbus Plus Head Single and Dual Channel modules provide extended communication capabilities for the Quantum system within a Modbus Plus configuration The following table shows the specifications show the Modbus Plus single and dual channel modules Specifications Communication Ports NOM21100 1 Modbus Plus network RS 485 port 9 pin connector NOM21200 2 Modbus
150. 990NAA26320 Modbus Programming Cable RS 232 12 ft 2 7 m 990NAA26350 Modbus Programming Cable RS 232 50 ft 15 5 m 990NAD21110 Modbus Plus Drop Cable 8 ft 2 4 m 990NAD21130 Modbus Plus Drop Cable 20 ft 6 m 990NAD21810 Modbus Plus Drop Cable left side drop 8 ft 2 4 m 990NAD21830 990NAD21910 Modbus Plus Drop Cable left side drop 20 ft 6 m Modbus Plus Drop Cable right side drop 8 ft 2 4 m 990NAD21930 Modbus Plus Drop Cable right side drop 20 ft 6 m AS MBII 003 Prefabricated S908 RIO drop cable RG 6 cable 50 ft 14 m AS MBII 004 Prefabricated S908 RIO drop cable RG 6 cable 140 ft 43 m 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 697 Misc Components Modbus Plus The following figure shows the connector orientation for the 990NAD21XXO Cable Connector 990NAD218 219X0 Connector Orientation Orientation iu 990NAD218X0 990NAD219X0 Coding Kit The following figure shows the coding kit a typical 1 set of 18 Plastic Keys 6 white 140XCP20000 sets 12 yellow sets part number 140XCP20000 Empty Module The following figure shows an empty module without a terminal strip part number 140XCP50000 140XCP50000 698 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Misc Components Empty Module The following figure shows an empty module without the terminal strip and wi
151. Active F 0 8 16 24 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 3 11 19 27 4 12 20 28 5 13 21 29 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 3 The following table provides LED descriptions LED Descriptions LED Color Description Active Green Bus communication is present F Red Fault on the AS i bus Steady module fault Flashing bad bus configuration or slave address B Green Communication exists between master and slaves 0 31 Green Slave indicators LED Bus Mode Each indicator lamp 1 31 corresponds to a slave address on the bus e On Slave is present e Flashing Slave is mapped but not detected or detected but not mapped It may also be projected and detected but not activated bad profile or I O code e Off Slave is neither mapped nor detected Example 16 2h 17 25 18 26 19 2 12 20 28 13 21 29 22 30 M 6 14 gt x 15 23 31 NZ SLV BUS Select with mode pushbutton di STATUS 198 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Slave I O Slave mode SLV figure Mode Display of the address of the selected slave Display of the state of the I O bits of the W On number of the selected slave selected slave A short press on the address button will change the selected Wi 0 3 displays the state of the input bits slave 4 7 displays the state of the output bits On bit 1 Off bit 0 or not significant 8 7 lt p 9 0 Long press on the 10 18
152. Features Required 140MSB10100 Motion Controller 1 750 mA Dual Encoder Single Axis Bi Feedback directional ASCII Interface 140MSC10100 Motion Controller 1 1000 mA Dual Encoder Single Axis Feedback and Resolver Feedback Modules The following table shows specifications for the Discrete In modules Miserere In Type Part Function Points Points per Bus Special Number Channels Group Current Features Required 1400 134000 24 16 180 Isolated 140DA135300 24 Vac 32 8 250 mA Grouped 1400 144000 48 16 180 Isolated 140DA145300 48 Vac 32 8 250 mA Grouped 140DAI54000 115 Vac 16 N A 180 mA Isolated 140DAI54300 115 Vac 16 8 180 mA Grouped 140DAI55300 115 Vac 32 8 250 mA Grouped 1400 174000 230 16 N A 180 mA Islolated 140DAI75300 230 Vac 32 8 250 mA Grouped 14000115310 5 Vdc 32 8 170 mA Grouped 14000135300 24 Vdc 32 8 330 mA Grouped 14005135300 24 Vdc 32 8 250 mA Supervised inputs grouped 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 55 Hardware Specifications Modules Discrete Out Type Part Function Points Points Bus Special Number Channels Group Current Features Required 140DDI35310 24 Vdc 32 8 330 mA Grouped 14000136400 24 96 16 270 Grouped 14000167300 125 24 8 200 Grouped 14000184100 10 60 16 2 200 Grouped 14000185300 10 60 32 8 300 Grouped 1400513530
153. Green Flashing Indicates fault Refer to LED fault codes in manual 840USE46800 PROFIBUS Green Flashing Erroneous configuration data or PROFIBUS fault DP S R Green Fast flashing frequency Sending receiving DP bus data Medium flashing frequency Slaves are configuring Slow flashing frequency Waiting for configuration data Flashing with fault code Erroneous configuration data Load Yellow Flashing Configuration data load operation active Flashing with fault code Load operation fault 192 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules CAUTION Possible hardware damage To reset the fault LED the CRP811 must be power cycled or hot swapped Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage PROFIBUS Below are the pinouts for the PROFIBUS RS 485 port RS 485 Port d Sub pinouts pr C9 O4 O7 C2 Legend pinouts for the RS 485 port Pin Signal Function 1 Shield Shield Protective Ground 3 RxD TxD P Receive Transmit Data P 5 DGND 5 V common 6 VP 5 V 8 RxD TxD N Receive transmit data N 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 193 Quantum Field Bus Modules RS 232C Port Below are pinouts for the RS 232C port 10 60 20 79 3 80 40 90 pe Legend to pinouts for the RS 232C port Pin Signal Function 2 RXD Received Data 3 TXD Trans
154. N 20 132 vms x 170 253 vms TOTAL MODULE CURRENT A ANO O A 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C The specifications stated are pending UL CSA approval This module was originally approved at 2 A each point and 12 A 0 50 C 115 Vac and 0 50 230 Vac per module Surge Current Maximum vms Per Point One Cycle 30A Two Cycles 20A Three Cycles 10A Applied DV DT 400 V us Response OFF ON 0 50 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 50 of one line cycle max Output Protection RC snubber suppression internal Isolation rms Output to Output 1500 Vac for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 for 1 minute Bus Current Required 350 mA Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 x Total Module Load Current External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External Each output point must be fused with an external fuse The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse Part 043502405 or equivalent or any other fuse with an I T rating of less than 87 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 595 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO84000 wiring diagram 5 A see Connectivity Compatibility CAUTION on following page L OUTPUT 1 LINE OUTPUT 2 LINE OUTPUT 3 LINE OUTPUT 4 LINE N C OUTPUT 5 LINE
155. OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 N C N C N C N C GROUP C HOT amp GG GG 9 amp C6 60 O O99 OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 N C N C N C N C GROUP D HOT OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 amp amp G6 GROUP B COMMON GROUP C COMMON GROUP D COMMON Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected 606 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules CAUTION Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common single phase AC power source Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output then an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent must be wired in parallel with the switch Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 607 I O Modules 140DAO84220 Quantum I O AC Output 24 48 Vac 4x4 Module Overview The AC Output 24 48 Vac 4x4 module switches 24 48 Vac powered loads Specifications module The following table shows the specifications for the DAO84220 24 48 VA
156. P S CPUNOM P S CPUNOM 1 0 P S CPUNOM 1 0 N N N N te LO ite N N N N l Node 4 Node 5 Node 8 Node 9 P S CPUNOM I O P S CPUNOM P S CPUINOM I O P SICPUNOM e e e e ite ite ite N N N N L 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 263 Modbus Plus NOM Star Coupler Commercially available passive optical star coupler devices can also be introduced Configuration to the optical link to provide added flexibility to the NOM25200 network A typical four port star coupler could be used as follows on a NOM25200 optic link Node 1 s Passive Optical Star Coupler PC with SA85 Card Star Coupler Configuration Example Legend MB Cable Fiber Optic Cable MB Tap with p Terminator 490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeaters Node 2 P S CPUNOM 1 0 yo Node 4 Node 3 P S CPU yo 1 0 P S CP VO 252 o Node 5 252 GR 252 z P S CP M 1 0 252 Node 6 P S CPUNOM 1 0
157. Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following RTU comm parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Comm Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 254 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Mem Comm Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 255 Modbus Plus NOM Rear Panel Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules They are used Switches together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 Rotary SW1 top switch sets the upper digit tens and rotary
158. Plus network RS 485 ports 9 pin connectors for dual connectivity on a single Modbus Plus network These ports handle identical versions of all inbound and outbound transactions and keep track of the data paths used for these transactions Both Modules 1 Modbus RS 232 serial port 9 pin connector A bridge mode capability in the module permits a panel device connected to this port to access nodes on the Modbus Plus network or to access the local PLC directly without having to go out onto the network Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum Processor Power Dissipation 4W Typical Bus Current Required NOM21100 780 mA 21200 780 240 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOMs LED Indicators The following figure shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED indicators and Descriptions Ready Run Modbus Modbus Error A Error B The following table shows the Modbus Plus NOM LED Descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed power up diagnostics Run Green Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode should always be OFF during normal operations Modbus Green Indicates communication is active on the single RS 232 serial port Modbus Green Indicates communication is active on the Modbus Plus port Error A
159. Powered The following figure shows the AC powered systems for CE compliance Systems for CE Compliance REDUNDANT SUMMABLE POWER SUPPLY BACKPLANE See detailed AC Powered System Figure SHIELDED CABLE SHIELDED AN FERRITE BEAD CABLE LINE LOAD AC POWERg AC N I LINE SOURCE FILTER CASE GND GROUND SCREWS PANEL GROUND SHIELDED CABLE LINE LOAD EARTH BROW LINE GROUND FILTER CASE GND CAUTION European Compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC the 140CPS11100 140CPS11400 140CPS11410 and 140CPS12400 power supplies must be installed in accordance with these instructions Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION Requirements Compliance For installations that must meet Closed System requirements as defined in EN 61131 2 without relying upon an external enclosure connector models 140 XTS 00100 and 140 XTS 00500 are required Also if an external Line Filter is used it must be protected by a separate enclosure which meets the finger safe requirements of IEC 529 Class IP20 See Closed System Installation p 747 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 732 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Detailed AC The following figure shows the details for the AC powered
160. Red There is an error condition on Cable A of a dual cable Modbus Plus network 140NOM21200 only Error B Red There is an error condition on Cable B of a dual cable Modbus Plus network 140NOM21200 only 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 241 Modbus Plus NOMs LED Error Codes blinking Run LED error codes for the NOM module shows the number of times the Run LED on the NOM module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each all codes are in hex LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Steady 014H normal power down event 2 815 ram sequence error 3 49H illegal data command received by bypass code 4BH diagnostics test pattern invalid in the icb block 4CH diagnostics test pattern invalid in the page 0 4DH icb address not the same as found in hcb 4EH bad code selected for mstrout sel proc 52H config table exec id is different than the sys table exec id 53H got a pupinit hook for neither S985 nor S975 addr 56H did not get bus ack form 984 interface within 400 ms 59H unexpected modbus port state in send command to 680 proc 5AH system table missing 5BH bad DPM critical byte write 4 616h bad or unexpected interrupt 617h loopback error on modbus port 1 618h parity error 619h set port greater than 21 61AH controller ram size is less than 8k 621H modbus cmd buffer overflow 622H modbus cmd length is zero 623H
161. Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Channel 5 data Register 6 Channel 6 data Register 7 Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data Register 9 Input Status Word 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 8 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 7 1 2 TED Wire or out of range on channel 6 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 5 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 4 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 3 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 2 T E 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 1 1 2 3 6 7 8 9110 11 3114115116 1 Range warning on Channel 8 1 Range warning on Channel D 1 Range warning on Channel 1 1 Range warning on Channel 5 1 Range warning on Channel 4 1 Range warning on Channel 3 1 Range warning on Channel 2 1 Range warning on Channel 1 Register 10 Remote Junction Temperature 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 383 Intrinsically Safe Modules Map Status The I O map status byte is used by the 140AII33000 module as follows Byte MSB LSB 81716 51413 2 1 8 L Channel 1 out of range or short circuit Channel 2 out of range or short circuit Channel 3 out of range or short circuit Channel 4 out
162. September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Closed System Installation Overview For installations that must meet Closed System requirements as defined in EN 61131 2 without relying upon an external enclosure in which an external Line Filter is used it must be protected by a separate enclosure which meets the finger safe requirements of IEC 529 Class IP20 AC DC The following figure shows the detailed installation for the AC and DC powered Installation systems for CE closed system compliance AC amp DC Powered Systems for CE Closed System Compliance Detailed Installation Illustration QUANTUM BACKPLANE 140XBPXXX00 BACKPLANE GND SCREWS AC LINE BROWN STRAIN RELIEF BUSHING WIRING DETAILS FOR LINE FILTER SHOWN ON NEXT PAGE SHIELD GND LEAD GREEN YELLOW GROUND PROTECTIVE COVER TO GROUND SCREW ON FOR LINE FILTER QUANTUM BACKPLANE CONNECTOR REQUIRED GROUND Quantum Power Supply Wire to the power supply as follows Note Only one ground wire per backplane is required In redundant and summable systems this lead is not Line Brown wire connected for the additional line filter power supply Neutral Blue wire GND Green Yellow wire Note Connectors 140 XTS 005 00 for all power supplies and 140 XTS 001 00 for all I O modules must be ordered separately 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 747 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Protective Cover
163. September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION I S Module DII 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 31001365 Rev 00 14001133000 Wiring Diagram HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS I DIV I GROUP A B C D CLASS II DIV GROUP E F G CLASS III DIV I Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 1 5 Field appropriate for connection with IS RTD TC IN Device Module with Concept Parameters Listed below The entity parameters are Voc 9 6 VDC Ch Isc 80 mA Module Ca 450 nf Ch La 0 694 uH Ch Po 192 mW Module Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electonically connected to the Module Note 3 Only 140 XBP 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are
164. Specifications Number of Connected 2 Backplanes Maximum Distance 3 meters Backplane Requirements Size All backplane sizes 3 4 6 10 and 16 slot Slots used 1 Number of Backplane Expander modules allowed 1 per backplane LEDs None Required Addressing The Backplane Expander will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC map Power Requirements Power Consumption 2 5 watts Bus Current Required 500 mA Connector 37 pin D type Compatibility Primary Backplane No restrictions Secondary Backplane All types of Quantum I O modules can be used in the secondary backplane unless otherwise noted in the I O documentation Programming Software Modsoft V 2 6 or Concept V 2 2 at a minimum Executive Firmware 140CPUX130X Version 2 2 140CPUX341X Version 1 03 140CPUx341xA Any version 140CPU42402 Version 2 15 140CRA93XO0X Version 1 2 The following tables shows Words per drop Maximum words per drop Local I O 64 in 64 out Remote I O 64 in 64 out 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 369 Intelligent Special Purpose Cable Specifications Basic Configuration Specifications for the the three possible Expander Cables are below Part Number Length 140 XCA 71703 1 meter 140 XCA 71706 2 meters 140 XCA 71709 3 meters The backplane containing the the CPU o
165. TERM NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION per Channel ZONE 1 Vo 9 6 Vdc GROUP IIA IIB IIC lo 80 mA ch ee SEE NOTE 1 Po 192 mW ch Co 450 nf ch Lo 694 microH ch Output 1 es 1 I S Field Device Output 2 19 2 Chassis N C N C _ Ground Output 3 Output 3 N C E NG N C Output 4 4 Output 4 Note 1 Only shielded cables N C N G should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the N C N C field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on NIC N C the backplane N E N is G i Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 All INPUT S are Ne ee NG connected together internally Output 3 N C Output 4 GO Gy 8 1 5 Module DII 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 31001365 Rev 00 14001133000 Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 419 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to CSA certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per module Voc 9 5 V lg 80 mA Ca 450 nf La 694 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 for installation in Canada Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA
166. The protective cover must completely enclose the line filter Approximate dimensions for the cover are 12 5 cm by 7 5 cm Wire entry exit shall be through strain relief bushings Line Filter The following figure shows the wiring connections to the enclosed line filter Connections I Brown Brown 4 Case tab Ground wire for metal box Not Protective Cover Green Yellow required for plastic box To ground screw on Quantum backplane 748 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling At a Glance Introduction The following information pertains to the CableFast cabling system What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Pads Features of the CableFast Cabling System 750 140CFA04000 CableFast Cabling Block 757 140CFB03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 760 140CFC03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 764 140CFD03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 773 140CFE03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 775 140CFG01600 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 777 140CFH00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 785 140CFI00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 793 140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 800 140CFK00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block 808 CableFast Cables 816 CableFast Accessories 821 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 749 CableFast Cabling Features of the CableFast Cabling System Overview The CableFast w
167. Transmit Transmit 1 Fiber Fiber Port2 Port2 To Next From Previous NOM Receive NOM Receive 3 Receive Receive i m qum From Previous TONO Transmit NOM Transmit x Receive Receive a Fiber Fiber Tij Port1 Port1 Transmit 5 i 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 259 Modbus Plus NOM Connecting the The following steps show how to connect the fiber optic cable Fiber Optic Cable Step Action 1 Remove the protective plastic coverings from the cable ports and the tips of the cable Snap one of the fiber cable clasps shipped with the module over the cable so that the wider end of the tool is closest to the cable end Protective Coverings Cable Fiber Cable Clasp Turn the connection ring so that one of the arrows on the side of the ring lines up with the ridge inside Cable Connection Ring Cable Tip Ridge Arrow lt a Slide the tool up to the connection ring b Gripping the cable with the plastic cable clasp slide the cable end onto the lower cable port The arrow and the ridge on the connection ring should lineup with the slot on the left of the cable port c Use the clasp to push the cable over the tab on top of the port d Turn the cable to the right so that the tab locks securely e Remove the clasp f Repeat this process with the remaining st
168. USE 100 00 September 2002 495 I O Modules Specifications Common Mode Rejection gt 80 dB 60Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3dB cutoff 847Hz 20 Isolation Channel to Bus 750 Vdc 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Channel to Channel 200 Vdc 135 Vac rms max Update Time 10 ms for all channels Fault Detection Broken wire in 4 20 mA mode out of range in 1 5 V mode Bus Current Required 280 mA Power Dissipation 2 2 W External Power Not required for this module Note Calibration is not required for this module Linear The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AVI03000 Analog Measuring Input Module Ranges Data Format Input Range Under Normal Over Warning Warning 16 bit Format 10 V lt 768 768 64 768 64 768 5 V 20mA lt 16 768 16 768 48 768 gt 48 768 0 10V 0 64 000 64 000 0 5V 0 20mA 0 32 000 32 000 1 5V 4 20mA 6 400 6 400 32 000 gt 32 000 Voltmeter 10 V lt 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 Format 5 V 20 mA lt 5 000 5 000 5 000 gt 5 000 0 10V 0 10 000 10 000 0 5V 0 20mA 0 5 000 5 000 0 20 000 1 5V 4 20mA 1 000 1 000 5 000 5 000 4 000 20 000 20 mA 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 0 20 mA 0 20 000 20 000 4 20 mA 4 000 4 000 20 000 20
169. Vdc Times ms u gee x 40 47 millifarads e 69 Capacitor 30 Saal O 693 Note 1 A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac 6A 30 Vac 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF The relay will de energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc 2 Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a gt 50 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip Refer to the hold up capacitor timing chart for capacitor values Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 85 Power Supplies 140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply 24 Vdc 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC Redundant Power Supply 24 Vdc 8 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module may Model Number cedar Module Description Customer Identification Label Color Code Fold label and place it inside door LED Area Removable Door lt Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover
170. Wire AWG for AWG for Color Pin Standard High Pin Standard High Power Power Power Power Cable Cable Cable Cable 11 26 20 Gray 31 26 20 White Black Blue 12 26 20 White 32 26 20 White Black Violet 13 26 20 White 33 26 20 White Black Black Gray 14 26 20 White 34 26 20 White Brown Brown Red 15 26 20 White 35 26 20 White Red Brown Orange 16 26 20 White 36 26 20 White Orange Brown Yellow 17 26 20 White 37 26 20 White Yellow Brown Green 18 26 20 White 38 26 20 White Green Brown Blue 19 20 18 Red 39 20 18 Blue 20 20 18 Orange 40 20 18 Violet The following table shows the 140XTSOxx terminated cables Part Number Cable Type Cable Description Standard High Power Power 140XTS00203 X CableFast system cable with Quantum 140XTS01203 X connector 3 ft 0 9 m and D sub connector 818 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Part Number Cable Type Cable Description Standard High Power Power 140XTS00206 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I O 140XTS01206 X connector 6 ft 1 8 m and D sub connector 140XTS00209 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I O 140XTS01209 X connector 9 ft 2 7 m and D sub connector 140XTS00212 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I O 140XTS01212 X connector 12 ft 3 7 m and D sub connector Connector for following figure shows the I O Co
171. address push button 11 19 12 20 13 21 14 22 15 23 8 16 24 9 17 25 10 18 26 11 19 27 12 20 28 13 21 29 14 22 30 15 23 3l SLV BUS Input bits Output bits ON 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SLV BUS amp ay VO STATUS l O STATUS pos LED Diagnostics State of Indicator Lamps B Active F Meaning Corrective Action Module switched off Switch the device on O O Operating in Protected O O Mode normal Displaying Outputs Operating in Protected Mode normal Displaying Inputs Fault on AS i bus self Replace the faulty slave with a O o e programming possible new identical slave Fault on AS i bus self Connect the terminal O o 8 programming not possible AS i power supply fault 1 Check AS i power supply e O no slave on the AS i bus 2 Check the continuity of the AS i bus cable Module self tests in Q progress 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 199 Quantum Field Bus Modules Indicator Indicator Indicator lamp Indicator lamp is in lamp is O lamp is off is flashing X indeterminate state 1 Faulty slave ID is flashing 2 No slave ID numbers are flashing AS i Cable The following figure shows the AS i cable connection Connection op f T Brown wire Em ASi Blue Brown Specifications The following table provides specifications for the 140EIA92100
172. after zero count has been reached The example configures the module to decrement the input count from the maximum value turn on an output at a setpoint value of 50 and turn on a second output after the input counter had reached zero and rolled over to the maximum count the operation is then repeated The initial loading of the maximum count will not cause its associated output to turn on Field connections for this example are illustrated in Wiring Diagrams1 4 The connections on terminals 15 and 16 are optional depending on the use requirements of the outputs Terminals 39 and 40 always require the 24 Vdc supply connections The maximum allowable Vref value is 30 Vdc Input pulse on off threshold levels for the 5 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification table The minimum differential input is 1 8 V As with count examples tables are set up and transferred to the module using block moves The User Logic for Rate Sample is the same as that used for Pulse Input Count Up Down The following table shows the module configurations 400101 0140 CONFIGURE command Disable Counter 2 400102 1000 Pulse input Rate Sample ON disable outputs at bus communication loss Note Bits 11 and 12 were not required 400103 0000 400104 0000 Not used by this command 400105 0000 400106 0000 320 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Load Values Read Rat
173. applied to the output point The status byte voltage fault bits work in this mode Actual Module output state 1 ON Allow Automatic Restart of Faulted Points NO ALLOW AUTOMATIC RESTART OF FAULTED YES NO Module outputs that fault during the on state are latched off until the user clears the point bit to the OFF 0 state and then sets it back to the ON 1 state 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 659 I O Modules State of output point Status bits LEDs and Fault Bit for the three operating states are as follows Mode Fault Occurs Point commanded ON Off command sent On command sent After fault is Group fault flag 1 Group fault flag 1 shuts OFF removed Verified health Output point OFF Output point OFF Output point ON Status bit 0 Status bit 0 Status bit 1 Output LED OFF Output LED OFF Output LED ON Fault LED ON Fault LED ON Fault LED OFF Group fault flag 0 Verified fault Output point OFF Status bit 1 Output LED OFF Fault LED ON Group fault flag 1 Output point OFF Status bit 1 Output LED OFF Fault LED ON Group fault flag 1 Output point ON Status bit 0 Output LED ON Fault LED OFF Group fault flag 0 Actual Output point OFF Status bit 0 Output LED OFF Fault LED ON Group fault flag 1 Output point OFF Status bit 0 Output LED OFF Fault LED ON Group fault flag 1 Output point ON Status bit 1 Output LED ON Fault LED OFF Group fault f
174. block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word of Register I O must be subtracted from the total available Reguires the use of the 140NOM21x00 Option Processor The following figure shows the CPU11303 LED indicators Ready Run Modbus Modbus Mem Prt Bat Low Error A The following table shows the CPU11303 LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic see the following table for Run LED error codes Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 117 CPU Modules Indication when On Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on The battery needs replacing LED Descriptions LEDs Color Modbus Green Mem Prt Amber Bat Low Red Error A Red Indicates a communications error on the Modbus Plus network LED Error Codes The LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group all codes are in hex The following table shows the blinking run LED error codes LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel
175. cabling blocks Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFK00400 terminal block CableFast 140 CFK 004 00 UL FILE E123528 Application The following are the application notes for the 140CFK00400 module Notes 1 Configuration Four analog outputs with a common loop supply Each point is allocated four terminals 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides four individually unfused connection point sets for the 140ACO02000 and 140AVO02000 analog output modules 808 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFK00400 module 2 V2 V2 02 V02 52 1 V1 V1 01 VOT 51 V RET GND 4 V4 V4 C04 V04 S4 3 V3 V3 C03 V03 S3 4 3 in 3 0 in oh 109 2 mm 76 2 mm 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 809 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following shows the wiring for the 140CFK00400 source grounding module Source
176. diagram CSA TC 398 wiring diagram FM RTD 399 wiring diagram FM TC 400 wiring diagram UL RTD 401 wiring diagram UL TC 402 AII33010 configuration 386 description 403 field wiring 404 fixed wiring 404 map status byte inputs 386 module zoom selections 387 register assignment 386 specifications 403 terminal strip color and keying assignment 404 wiring diagram Cenelec 405 wiring diagram CSA 406 wiring diagram FM 407 wiring diagram UL 408 AIO33000 configuration 388 description 409 I O map status byte 388 module zoom selections 389 register assignments 388 specifications 409 wiring diagram FM 427 9000 3x registers 518 4x registers 520 common specifications 526 configuration 518 description 523 I O map status byte 521 input specifications 524 linear measuring ranges 520 module zoom selections 521 output specifications 525 register assignments 518 status warning 519 topology specifications 523 wiring diagram 527 analog input modules configuration 462 analog input output module See AMM09000 analog output modules configuration 500 analog simulator module See 5 01000 ARI03010 configuration 466 description 487 map status byte 468 module zoom selections 468 register assignment 467 specifications 487 wiring diagram 489 ASCII interface module See ESI06210 AS i master module See EAI92100 ATI03000 configuration 470 des
177. discretion Required Addressing 12 Words In 12 Words Out Compatibility Programming Software Modsoft V2 4 or Concept 2 0 at a minimum Data Formats Supported Text Decimal Fixed Point Nested Write Message Set Register Pointer Print Time Date Repeat Space Newline Control Code Flush Buffer Quantum Controllers All Executive V2 0 at a minimum Battery Backup Module 140XCP90000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 347 Intelligent Special Purpose LED Indicators The following figure shows the ESI06210 LED indicators and Descriptions R Active F Rx1 Error 1 Tx1 Rx2 Error 2 Tx2 Status The following table shows the 5106210 LED descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On R Green The module has passed powerup diagnostics Active Green Bus communication is present F Red The module has detected a fault Rx1 Green Received data on RS 232C Port 1 Tx1 Green Transmitted data on RS 232C Port 1 Rx2 Green Received data on RS 232C Port 2 Tx2 Green Transmitted data on RS 232C Port 2 Status Yellow Status Error 1 Red There is an error condition on Port 1 Error 2 Red There is an error condition on Port 2 348 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose LED Blinking The following table shows the blinking seque
178. e24 24 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 25 25 21 26 26 Module e 971 Group A He amp 9 es Common z 29 29 B 30 30 5 Module WV o e 9324 4 Group A VAH Ez iE Group B Power Group C Power e 2 VD Group D Power e vb DC Input Module Power AC Input Module Note The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 766 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CFC03200 wiring for the 14000115310 input for DDI15310 module Input Module Field Side Connections 9 24 9 34 9 44 9 54 6 e Module Input 7 84 Module Input 1 V dflOHO 11611199 gt Module Input 9 o 10 11 Open 2 Collector el3 134 e14 14 5 15 16 16 un N e e jo e je 17 17 18 18 19 194 20 21 9224 23 0 8 A Fuse Part Numbers 244 Modicon 140CFU08000 Qty 10 25 Wickman 3700800041 26 s6 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 9 9 9 v dNOY 9 A oO o 9o s N NX 07 28 929 44 9304 314 324 Module Q o Group A Com
179. ee IN4 IN3 24 Vdc IN6 z IN5 86 24 Vc IN8 IN7 Input Signals 7 IN1 IN8 Common Common OUT2 30 29 OUT1 e YYY 2 65 ip OUT4 OUT3 3 OUT6 OUT5 e 24 Vdc 86 e Output Signals outs OU OUT1 OUT8 8 External Power Supply Return T x ME 24 Vdc 302 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Note 1 N C Not Connected 2 Terminals 29 and 30 are common and are jumpered together 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 303 Intelligent Special Purpose Configuration for 140EHC20200 Overview Map Register This section describes configuration of the 140EHC20200 high speed counter module which operates in pulse or quadrature mode and accepts single ended or differentiated inputs The 140EHC20200 high speed counter requires six contiguous output 4X and six Assignment contiguous input 3X registers in the I O map The 4X registers perform the same configuration tasks as the Modzoom screen assigned parameters Also the preset and the enable inputs connected to the field wiring terminal block perform the same functions as those software command control bits When both methods are used to e Preset a counter the last preset executed has precedence e Enable disable a counter it will only be enabled when both the hardware enable input and software enable control bit are in the enable state For simple applications the zoom screens rather t
180. field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end Thermocouple tips may be grounded if required Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to the Module Note 3 Only 140 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically Source 1 V Sense 1 Thermocouple Type J K E T R S B N C Source 2 Source 2 Source 3 Source 3 V Sense 3 N C me Source 4 safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Vcc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically safe apparatus plus all cable parameters Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Leable Voc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax N C Source 4 Source 5 N C Source 6 Chassis Ground Note 5 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs etc Source 7 Note 6 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 Wiring P
181. for the 140Ax103000 input modules 140Ax002000 output modules and the 140AMM09000 input output module Wiring Example 115 240 Vac Analog Simulator Analog Output 140XSM01000 Red n Black Monitor Typical v White 9 249 0 5 Blue oad for 10 Medis pisani uU eee Analog Input Yellow 1 Input X AE Bu c Typical ow Violet 8 Input Y 6 Typica e Lato IN 2 oq Gb Black 24 Vdc N White Green Yellow 140XSM01000 Generic Wiring Diagram for the 140Ax103000 Input Modules 140AxO02000 Output Modules and the 140AMM09000 Input Output Module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 435 Simulator Modules Note The preceding diagram shows a typical connection between the simulator a 140AC103000 input module and a 140ACO02000 output module The simulator provides a variable 4 20 mA input to the analog in module The input can then be read by a Quantum CPU and if required outputted through an analog out module For the output module to operate properly the main current loop must be active and as shown above 24 Vdc is supplied between terminals 9 and 10 with a 249 Ohms voltage drop resistor For a more detailed description of these modules refer to Quantum I O Modules p 445 436 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Batte
182. from catastrophic failure Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 630 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DDO35310 I O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module Overview The 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Sink module switches 24 Vdc and is capable of driving displays logic and other loads up to 500 mA sinking in the ON state Specifications module The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35310 24 VDC OUT SINK Specifications Number of Output Points 32 output points in four 8 point groups LEDs Active F 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Voltage Operating max 19 2 30 1 0 ms 50 Vdc decaying pulse ON State Drop Point 0 4 Vdc 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 4A Per Module 16A OFF State Leakage Point 0 4 mA 30 Vdc Surge Current Maximum Each Point 5 A 1 ms duration no more than 6 per minute Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1 ms max ON OFF 1 ms max Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Isolation Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 631 I O Modules Specifications Load Inductance Maximum 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or L 0 5 PF where
183. full functionality including Quantum DIO support Watchdog Timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 09 ms k to 0 45 ms k Battery 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 5 loss of capacity per year 168 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions Specifications Battery Load Current Power off Typical 14 uA Maximum 420 uA Communication Modbus RS 232 2 serial port 9 pin D shell Modbus Plus RS 485 1 network port 9 pin D shell General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1 8A Power dissipation 9 TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 C Operating Temperature 0 45 C This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I Os For each word of Register I O configured word of I O words must be subtracted from the total available The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word of Register I O must be subtracted from the total available Requires the use of two 140NOM21x00 Option Modules The following figure shows the LED indicators Ready Run Bat1 Low Modbus Modbus Error A Mem Pr
184. greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus all cable parameters Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Lcable Voc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax Note 5 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW For examples Switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs Etc Note 6 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP12 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part I Intrinsic Safety Note 7 Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250Vrms Note 8 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA S82 01 Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 421 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to UL certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Vsoc 9 5 V Isc 80 mA C 450 nf La 0 175 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capactance 60 Pf ft Inductance 0 20 uH ft Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installati
185. inches 290 mm 11 42 inches 270 mm 10 63 inches 175 5 mm 6 91 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 10 mm 0 39 inches 15 mm 0 59 inches 670 74 mm 26 41 inches 641 4 mm 25 25 inches 427 6 mm 16 83 inches 213 8 mm 8 42 inches 716 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Hardware Installation Mounting Brackets Overview Backplane Mounting Brackets Brackets are required when mounting backplanes in 19 inch NEMA cabinets These brackets support the 2 through 10 position backplanes The bracket mounts to rails using standard NEMA hardware Mounting brackets are offered in two sizes 20 mm for back rail mounting and 125 mm for front rail mounting refer to the following illustrations The following table shows the mounting brackets Part Number Description 140XCP40100 125 mm Bracket 140XCP40200 20 mm Bracket 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 717 Hardware Installation 125 mm The following figure shows the 125 mm mounting bracket Mounting Bracket Doc a oO og G gs a Diameter of the mounting holes 6 6 mm 0 26 inches 125 mm 4 92 inches 22 83 mm 0 90 inches 17 5 mm 0 69 inches 88 9 mm 3 50 inches 7 1 mm 0 28 inches 146 1 mm 5 75 inches 88 9 mm 3 50 inches 14 7 mm 0 58 inches 436 6 mm 17 19 inches 482 25 mm 18 99 inches 20 2 mm
186. includes the following e Aninternal 24 Vdc power supply e AO 5 meter e Two 10 turn potentiometers 432 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Simulator Modules Analog The following figure shows the XSM01000 Analog Simulator module Simulator Module a Be Removable Door Voltmeter i Analog out Potentiometers Analog in1 Analog in2 lt lt Color Coded Leads Note The 140XSM01000 can be placed in any slot in the Quantum Note The 140XSM01000 is not a functional module and should be used only for testing simulating and calibrating current input Quantum modules 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 433 Simulator Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the XSM 010 00 analog simulator module Specifications Voltage Operating Voltage 100 240 Vac 50 60 Hz Output Continuous 24 400 mA max Operating Current 300 mA 120 Vac Voltmeter Range 0 5 Vdc 10 Turn Potentiometer Output Variable 4 20 mA Current Voltage 1 5 Internal Fusing None Bus Current Required None 434 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Simulator Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140XSM01000 generic wiring diagram
187. installation in the United States 2 Wire RTD Resistor Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Ground cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Vcc lt Vmax sc lt max Ca gt Gi Ccable La gt Li Lcable SEE NOTE 1 Source 8 fe en Ge Source 8 V Senso s oloke 1 5 Module All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 3 Wire RTD Resistor Connection N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 Only Quantum Chassis 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should Ground be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xxx xx 31001362 Rev 00 140 1133000 RTD Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 401 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION UL certification CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 for this
188. key switch Stop Stop Mem Prt Prt Start O Start Note The key switch positions shown next to the switch above are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right The following table shows the key switch information Key Switch Description Key switch Controller Status Memory Will Accept Key switch Position Protected Programmer Transition From Stop or Start Programmer Changes Stop Controller is stopped Y N From Start or and disables Memory Programmer Protect Stops changes controller if running and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be Y N From Stop or either stopped or Start Prevents running and Programmer Programmer changes changes are controller run disabled User status is not cannot write to changed unlocated variables 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 153 CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Port Modem Support Key Switch Description Key switch Controller Status Memory Will Accept Key switch Position Protected Programmer Transition From Stop or Start Programmer Changes Start Controller may be N Y From Stop either stopped or Enables running Programmer Programmer may changes starts make changes and controller start stop the controller From Memory Protect Enables programmer changes starts controller if stopped All Quantum CPUS are equ
189. maintain intrin sic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possi ble Note 6 intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to I S termi nals must satisfy the fol lowing conditions Voc lt V Isc lt Imax Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Leable max Note 8 This module is cer tified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suit ability of the final combina tion is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module HAZARDOUS LOCATION ZONE 1 GROUP IIA IIB IIC I S 14 5 Vdc LE 3 wire See Note 2 V2 6 NC V2 N C e NG Signa N C G CR N G a O Ore as transmita N C Signal 4 transmitter N C V5 6 V5 N C HE Signa V6 18 N C Signal N C ele NIC V7 2167 V7 N C 62163 Signal N C ee Signa N C N C I S Module AII 330 10 Blue Terminal Strip 31001363 Rev 00 N O a D N Chassis Ground See Note 1 Chassis Ground See Note 1 s UV N C Signal 1 Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and
190. most significant bit in the I O map status byte is used for the 140AVI03000 Input Byte module The following figure shows the input register 1 2 3 415 6 7 8 1 Out of range or broken field wire on one or more channels 4 20 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 477 I O Modules Module Zoom Push lt Enter gt to display and select data format for the module and the ranges for Selections the individual input channels The following figures show the module data format and Channel X range per channel options Data Formats per module Channel X Range per channel 16 bit Format Voltmeter 12 bit Format 10V to 10V OV to 10V 5V to 45V OV to 5V 1V to 5V 20mA to 20mA to 20 4mA to 20 478 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AC103000 I O Analog In Module Overview Specifications The Analog Input 8 Channel Unipolar module accepts mixed current and voltage inputs Required jumpers between the input and sense terminals for current input measuring are included with the module The following table shows the specifications for the ACI03000 analog input module Specifications Number of Channels 8 Differential LEDs Active Indicates bus communication present F Indicates channel fault NOTE This module produces a fault sig
191. ms max Fault Detection None Isolation Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Internal Resistance 2 4k Input Protection Resistor limited Bus Current Required 330 mA max Power Dissipation 1 5 W 0 26 W x the number of points ON External Power 19 2 30 Vdc Fusing Internal None External User discretion 568 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI35310 wiring diagram INPUT 2 2 INPUT1 INPUT 4 8 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUTS INPUT 8 7 INPUT7 e GROUP A SUPPLY 9 N C INPUT 10 B GD INPUT 9 INPUT 12 O INPUT 11 INPUT 14 5 INPUT 13 INPUT 16 17 INPUT 15 e GROUP B SUPPLY N C INPUT 18 62 E INPUT 17 INPUT 20 G3 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 5 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 27 INPUT 23 e GROUP SUPPLY N C INPUT 26 82 81 _INPUT 25 INPUT 28 63 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 65 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 DD INPUT 31 GROUP D SUPPLY N C e I e o e ee ls mis Saa E J M23 Elie Note N C Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 569 I O Modules 140DD136400 I O DC Input 24 VDC 6x 16 Telefast Input Module Overview The Telefast input module ports each accepts 24 Vdc inputs and has 6 groups with 16 sink Specifications T
192. of the address The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 Led 0 15 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address Key Switch The following figure shows the key switch Stop Mem Stop Mem Prt Prt Start O Start Note The key switch positions shown next to the switch above are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 185 CPU Modules Key Switch The following table provides a description of the key switch information Description Key Switch Description Key Switch Controller Status Memory Will Accept Key Switch Position Protected Programmer Transition From Stop or Start Programmer Changes Stop Controller is stopped Y N From Start or and disables Memory Programmer Protect Stops changes controller if running and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be Y N From Stop or either stopped or Start Prevents running and Programmer Programmer changes changes are controller run disabled The user status is not cannot write to changed unlocated variables Start Co
193. of the fuses see Fuse Locations p 679 External User discretion Note Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to the fuses 678 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAM59000 module 140 DAM Fuse Locations H Points 5 8 fy Note If the 140DAM59000 module is used in a RIO drop the 140CRA93X00 RIO Drop must be Version 1 04 at a minimum Check the version label see below on the top front of the 140CRA93X00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level Revision Numbr The following figure shows the revision number location Location for RIO RIO DROP S908 01 04 Drop Note Since this original note revision marking format has changed Any RIO drop module with PV RL SV formatted labeling is acceptable 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 679 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAM590wiring diagram N C N C OUTPUT 1 Optional N L OUTPUT 2 Fuse VM N C OUTPUT 3 N C OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT GROUP A COMMON N C OUTPUT 5 N C OUTPUT 6 N C OUTPUT 7 N C OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT GR
194. outputs Discrete Outputs Number 3 Update Time 10 ms max Isolation 500 V to system bus Reset State 0 V nominal On State 24 V nominal Output Type Totem pole sink source Protection Short circuit overvoltage Fault Overcurrent detected The following table shows the operational specifications for analog input Analog Input Number 1 Scan Time 15 ms Data User configurable Range 10 V Accuracy 100 mV plus offset The following table shows the operational specifications for analog output Analog Output Number 1 Scan Time 20 ms Data User configurable Range 10 V Accuracy 50 mV plus offset 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 359 Intelligent Special Purpose The following table shows the operational specifications for the resolver feedback fully configured version Resolver Feedback Fully Configured Version Conversion Method Tracking Resolver Style Transmit Excitation Frequency 5 kHz Excitation Amplitude Automatically adjusted Excitation Current 120 mA Loss of Feedback Detected within 40 ms The following table shows the operational specifications for the incremental encoder feedback Incremental Encoder Feedback Resolution 4 times line count Signals A B Mark Signal Frequency 200 kHz up to 500 kHz with reduced noise immunity Encode
195. point to point connection Note This terminal block can be used with all Quantum I O modules with the exception of the 140ATIO3000 Thermocouple Module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 757 CableFast Cabling Dimensions of the Terminal Block The following figures show the dimensions of the 140CFA04000 terminal block 4 5 in 114 3 mm 758 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Figure The following figure shows the wiring for the CFA04000 module Lo 4 s l De A0 0 12 40 14 O 17 The wiring of the 140CFA04000 block is identical to m 18 wiring the 140XTS00200 Quantum I O connector 20 Q 5i Refer to the module wiring 22 diagrams for module wiring 23 02 24 26 4 30 M 32 0 34 3 38 40 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 759 CableFast Cabling 140CFB03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The B block is used for individually fused 2 wire digital inputs This terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs It is not recommended for sourced 1 wire inputs powered from the field See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast c
196. range on Channel 5 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of range on Channel 4 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of range on Channel 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of range on Channel 2 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or out of range on Channel 1 Map Status The most significant bit in the I O map status byte is used for this module Byte Inputs MSB 1 2 3 4 5 6 1718 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on one or more input channels 386 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Modsoft Module Use Modsoft s Module Zoom feature to display and select the input range Zoom Selections 4 to 20mA 0 16 000 4to20mA 0 4095 Channel x Range Selection 0 to 20mA 0 20 000 to 25mA 0 25 000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 387 Intrinsically Safe Modules 140A1033000 Register Assignments Map Status Byte The following information pertains to configuration of the 140 1033000 intrinsic safe analog output module The 140A1O33000 module requires eight contiguous output 4x registers assigned as follows Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Channel 5 data Register 6
197. requires a paper clip or similar tool to activate There are three connectors located on the front of the NOL module These are the RS 232 configuration port the primary LonWorks communication port and the auxiliary LonWorks configuration port This 9 pin D shell female RS 232 compatible serial port s attributes are Configured at a fixed rate of 9600 baud 8 data bits 1 stop bit and no parity Used to download configuration and new firmware to the module Supports XMODEM protocol with an ASCII terminal based command processor Can be directly connected to a PC serial communications port The following figure shows the 9 pin configuration port RS 232 C The following table shows the key to the RS 232C port Pin Signal Function 2 RXD Received Data 3 TXD Transmitted Data 5 GND Signal Ground Black circle Pin occupied White circle N C Modbus cables 990NAA26320 and 990NAA26350 are suitable for connection between the PC serial port and NOL module RS 232 port 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 211 Quantum Field Bus Modules Primary LonWorks Communication Port Auxiliary LonWorks Communication Port This is the primary interface for wiring into a LonWorks network The connector is a two position 5 08 mm screw terminal This is the auxiliary interface for wiring into a LonWorks network The connector is an eight position RJ 45 phone jack socket The figure bel
198. safety shield for each cable I Source 5 must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals V Sense 5 kI VSenseb j SEE NOTE 1 as possible IL N C Note 6 Intrinsically Safe I S I Source 6 4 4 mV Source cables of one module must be 1 routed separately from I S V Sense 6 cables of another module I Source 7 Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions V Sense 7 Voc lt V max N C Isc lt max Source 8 Source 8 Note 3 Pins marked N C Not Ca gt Gi m 20 S r Connected not electronically La gt Li Lcable V Sense 8 V Sense 8 connected to the module Note 4 Only Quantum Note 8 This module is certified 1 5 Module 330 00 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should as a component for mounting in Blue Terminal Strip be used for mounting this module a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an exon authority having the 31001362 Rev 00 140 1133000 TC Wiring Diagram jurisdiction 398 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured as a RTD resistor connection NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Source 1 RTD Resistor Connection Chassis Ground RTD Resistor Connection Chassis Ground I S
199. should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 I S Field Device appropriate for connection with IS RTD TC IN Module with Concept Parameters Listed below The entity parameters are per Channel Voc 27 9 VDG Isc 121 mA Ch Ca 84 nf Ch La 2 2 mH Ch Po 840 mW Ch Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to the Module Note 3 Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus all cable parameters Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Lcable Voc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax Note 5 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs Etc Note 6 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article
200. should write a configuration offline and transfer it to the CPU prior to attempting to login to the CPU If this error appears while seeking to coomunicate to a previously running CPU this would suggest a corrupted state memory in the CPU The usr should clear memory and attempt to reload the user logic program Bad modbus port intervention This error will most likely appear in conjunction with another error The CPU would in all likelihood be stopped when this error occurs This error may also appear upon the user s attempt to clear the system stop state The user should try to clear user logic and reload Bad segment scheduler This error indicates improper programming of the segment scheduler Start of network SON did not start a segment This error is most often caused by improper programming It can also be caused by a corrupted program and can be detected by issuing a start command to the CPU Bad power down checksum This error indicates that continuous run time ram diagnostic has failed Reload the user logic program If this error persists replace the CPU No end of logic detected This error is usually caused by an incomplete or unsuccessful load of the program Try another reload Watchdog timer has expired This error indicates that the CPU has taken too much time to complete its current scan This error will sometimes occur with ambitious DX programming techniques The user may want to increase the Watchdog Timer value This erro
201. shows specifications for DIO Networking modules Part Numbers DIO Source Voltage Communication Bus Current Channel s Provided 140CRA21110 115 Vac 1 3A 140CRA21210 115 Vac 2 3A 140CRA21120 24 Vdc 1 3A 140CRA21220 24 Vdc 2 3A The following table shows specifications for ethernet modules Part Numbers Communication Channels Bus Current Required 140NOE21100 1 10BASE T Ethernet network RJ 45 port 1A 140NOE25100 1 10BASE FL Ethernet network ST style 1A port 140NOE31100 1 10BASE T Ethernet network RJ 45 port 1 140NOE35100 2 10BASE FL Ethernet network ST style 1A ports 140NOE51100 1 10BASE T Ethernet network RJ 45 port 1 140NOE55100 2 10BASE FL Ethernet network ST style 1A ports 140NOE771xx 1 10 100 BASE TX Ethernet network RJ 750 mA 45 port 1 100 BASE FX MT RJ connector fiber optic port 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 53 Hardware Specifications Networking Modules NOM Intelligent Special Purpose Hot Standby Module Counter Modules ASCII Interface Module The following table shows specifications for Modbus Plus NOM Networking modules Part Numbers NOM Communication Channels Bus Current Required 140NOM21100 1 twisted pair 1 Modbus 9 pin D Sub 780 mA 140NOM21200 2 twisted pair 1 Modbus 9 pin D Sub 780 mA 140NOM25200 2 fiber optic ST style 1 Modbus RJ 780 mA 45
202. shows the terminal block for the 140CFC03200 module CableFast 140 CFC 032 00 UL FILE E123528 0001020099 Fr 000000199 764 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Application The following are the application notes for the 140CFC03200 module Notes 1 Configuration Arranged in four groups of eight I O points two terminals per point This block may be used for one and two wire inputs or outputs The input and output mode is selected via four switches located on the block 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides 0 8 A group fusing for the following discrete modules The following table shows the modules provided with 0 8 A group fusing Module Mode Switch Setting Fuse Rating 140 DAI 353 00 Input 0 8 A 140 DAI 453 00 Input 0 8A 140 DAI 553 00 Input 0 8 A 140 DDI 153 10 Input 0 8A 140 DDI 353 00 Input 0 8 A 140 DDI 853 00 Input 0 8 A 140 DDO 153 10 Output 4A 140 DDO 353 00 Output 4A Note Select input or output mode with the four switches located on the terminal Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFC03200 terminal block block All four switches must be set to the same position
203. suppression internal Isolation rms Group to Group 1000 Vac for 1 minute Galvanically Isolated Input to Bus 1780 for 1 minute Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Bus Current Required 350 mA Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 V x Total Module Load Current External Power Supply rms 20 56 Vac Fusing Internal 5 A fuse for each group Part 043502405 or equivalent For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations p 610 External User discretion 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 609 I O Modules CAUTION Possible injury to personnel or equipment First turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Fuse Locations The following figure shows the DAO84220 fuse locations 140 DAO 842 20 10 80 vdc out Fuse Locations Points 1 4 Points 9 12 Points u SS 13 16 610 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO84220 wiring diagram N G N G N G N G GROUP A HOT OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT2 N C N C N C N C GROUP B HOT N C N C N C N C GROUP C HOT sa i ease ee GR
204. table provides descriptions of the key switch information Deseription Key Swich Description Key switch Controller Status Memory Will Accept Key switch Position Protected From Programmer Transition Programmer Stop or Start Changes Stop Controller is stopped Y N From Start or and disables Memory Protect Programmer Stops controller if changes running and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be Y N From Stop or Start either stopped or Prevents running and Programmer Programmer changes controller changes are run status is not disabled The user changed cannot write to unlocated variables 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 175 CPU Modules Modbus Port Modem Support Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Ports Pinout Connections Key Swich Description Start Controller may be N Y From Stop Enables either stopped or Programmer running changes starts Programmer may controller make changes and start stop the controller From Memory Protect Enables programmer changes starts controller if stopped Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability Modbus Port 2 RTS CTS connections function properly for normal non modem communications but do not support modems All Quantum CPUS are equipped with a 9 pin RS 232C connector that supports Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections
205. the DAO84010 derating chart s NI 20 132 V rms 17 16 15 14 13 12 E 11 ui 10 9 3 8 ul 7 6 Q 5 d 4 amp Rx M 30 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C Surge Current Maximum rms Per Point One Cycle 30A Two Cycles 20A Three Cycles 10A Applied DV DT 400 V us Response OFF ON 0 50 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 50 of one line cycle max Output Protection RC snubber suppression internal Isolation rms Output to Output 1500 Vac for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 for 1 minute Bus Current Required 350 mA Power Dissipation 1 85 W 1 1 x Total Module Load Current External Power Not required for this module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 599 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External Each output point must be fused with an external fuse The recommended fuse is a 5 A fuse Part 043502405 or equivalent or any other fuse with an rating of less than 87 600 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO84010 wiring diagram 5 A see the CAUTION L N C2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 1 LINE OO N A OUTPUT 2 LINE
206. the Quantum supported networks Supported Networks Service Modbus Modbus Remote Ethernet Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Profibus Description Plus y o TCP SY MMS IP MAX Native to Y Y N N N N N N N N Quantum CPU Availableona Y Y Y Y Y 5 Y Y Y Y Network Module CPU 1 Y N Y N N N N N N Programming CPU 1 Executive Firmware Loading Support Module Y Y Y Y Y Y 6 N Y Y Firmware Loaded From CPU Report B 2 Y N N N N p y Y Exception Communica tions Multi node N 1 N N N N N N N N Broadcast Communica tions Synchronized N N Y N N N N N Y Y Scanning Non N 1 N N N N Y Y N N Synchro nized I O Scanning Quantum I O N 1 Y N N N N N N N Drops 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 31 Network Configurations Service Modbus Modbus Remote Ethernet Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Profibus Description Plus TCP SY MMS IP MAX Hot Standby N N Y N N N N N N N Quantum I O Drop Support Hot Standby Y Y N Y N N N N N N Data Communica tions Support Optional Dual N 1 Y N N N N N N N Y Cabling Optional 3 1 Y Y Y 5 3 4 4 N Fiber Optics P M Y Momentum N y N N N N Y N N Y Drops Variabl N N N N N Y ariable f y3 y y3 v Speed Drives Moti N N N N N Y Y Servo Motion y y3 y Control HMI Displ Y Y N N N N N isplays y
207. the illustration and table that follow are located on the Switches rear panel of the CPU They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 SW1 Top SW2 Bottom The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches SW1 and SW2 Switches Node Address SW1 SW2 1 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 an address greater than 32 is selected the RIO module displays a flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition Only addresses 1 32 are valid 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 225 DIO 226 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Remote I O Communication Modules 1 0 At a Glance Introduction Quantum networking modules provide open standards based networking and fieldbus connectivity using Modbus Modbus Plus Ethernet InterBus SY MAX and LonWorks networks Specifications for these modules are included below What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page 140CRP93X00 Remote I O RIO Head Single and Dual Channel Module 228
208. the system POK is generated as shown in this section For the special case of a single summable supply used as a standalone the system POK generation reverts to the standalone case as shown previously in this section Redundant Five redundant power supply models are offered Power Supplies 40cpsi2400 115 230 Vac input 8 A output 140CPS12420 115 230 Vac input 10 A output 140CPS22400 24 Vdc input 8 A output 140CPS42400 48 Vdc input 8 A output 140CPS52400 125 Vdc input 8 A output Similar to the summable supplies the Quantum redundant power supplies also contain circuitry which forces the installed power supplies to share output current almost equally An important difference between the summable and the redundant supply lies in the system POK generation circuitry 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 741 Pwr amp Grnding Guide The Quantum system POK signal in systems powered by redundant power supplies is true power is OK if either or both internal POK is true The following figure shows the internal Quantum redundant supply POKs are ORed to create the Quantum System POK Redundant CPS Internal POK J Quantum OR System POK ae Redundant CPS Internal POK Note Redundant power supply module health may be monitored in an I O module health status word Refer to the STAT Block description in Modicon Ladder Logic Block Library User Guide 840USE10100 Another imp
209. this configuration disables the rest of the network It is suggested that the Self Healing Ring configuration be used to avoid this problem Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 261 Modbus Plus NOM The following figure shows the mixed fiber optic copper network Bus Configuration Example 1 Mixed Fiber Optic Copper Network Node 1 Node 2 P S CPU NOM I O I O P S CPUNOM o 1 0 Legend 8 amp MB Cable Fiber Optic Cable MB Tap with L Terminator Tap Terminator not ulla y required 490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater To Node n Node 3 Node 4 Node 5 P S CPU NOM 1 0 CPUINOM 1 0 1 0 P S CPUINOM 1 0 1 0 N N N ite ite N N al The following figure shows the pure fiber optic network Bus Configuration Example 2 Pure Fiber Optic Network Fiber Optic Cable To Node n Node 1 Node 2 Node 3 P S CPUNOM I O P S CPU NOM I O 1 0 P S CP B VO VO N ite N To Node n 252 252
210. to earth ground near the signal source end 3 To prevent improper fault indications unused inputs should have the plus and minus inputs tied together and be configured for a bipolar input range 4 N C Not Connected 498 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 18 3 Analog Output Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum analog output modules What s in this This section contains the following topics ion Section Topic Page I O Configuration for Analog Output Modules 500 140ACO02000 Quantum I O Analog Current Out Module 505 140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I O Module 509 140AVO02000 Quantum I O Analog Voltage Out Module 513 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 499 I O Modules I O Configuration for Analog Output Modules Overview This section provides information on the configuration of analog output modules These modules are 140ACO02000 140ACO13000 140A1033000 140AVO02000 500 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140ACO02000 Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Modsoft Module Zoom Selections The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ACO02000 Analog Output module This module requires four contiguous output 4x registers which are assigned as follows The following figure shows the register assignments Regist
211. w Offset 1 5 Vdc 4 20 mA Voltage Input Linear Measuring Range 2 496 over and under range Absolute Maximum Input 50 Input Impedance In Range gt 10 MQ Input Impedance Over Range 0 5 MO Current Input Linear Measuring Range 2 4 over range and 9 6 under range Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA Input Impedance 2502 Resolution 16 Bit 10 Vde 0 10 15 Bit 5 0 5 20 0 20 mA 14 Bit 1 5 4 20 mA Absolute Accuracy Error Typical 0 0396 25 C Voltage Mode Maximum 0 05 of full scale Linearity Monotonic 1 LSB Offset 0 60 C 0 0014 C of full scale max Gain Shift 0 60 0 002 C of full scale max Common Mode Rejection Better than 80 dB 9 50 or 60 Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3dB 9 21 Hz 20 Operating Voltage Channel to Channel 40 Vdc max Isolation Channel to Bus 500 Vac 750 for 1 minute Input Channel to Output Channel 500 Vac 750 for 1 minute Update Time 320 ms for 4 channels Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA range or over range or under range in bipolar modes only 524 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Output Specifications module The following table shows the output specifications for the analog input output
212. works with servo motors that use Cyberline drives and other types of DC and brushless drives from other manufacturers For detailed information on the use of MSX motion modules refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140MSX10100 Single Axis Motion Module Reference Guide part number 840USE10500 The following figure shows the components of the MSX motion modules Model Number Customer Identification Label MSB 107 00 Module Description Fold label and place it inside door LED Area Color Code Removable Door lt lt Modbus 5 Connector Servo Port Connector lt j 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 357 Intelligent Special Purpose Operational Specifications The following table shows the operational specifications for the servo Servo Commutation Update Rate 0 25 ms Velocity Loop Update Rate 0 5 ms Velocity Loop Bandwidth gt 100 Hz Velocity Range 0 6000 rpm Position Loop Update rate 1 ms Position Accuracy Resolver 10 arc minutes typical 15 arc minutes max Position Repeatability Resolver 5 arc minutes max Position Accuracy Encoder Encoder dependent 0 5 arc minutes max The following table shows the operations specifications for communication Communication Protocol Modbus Address set by software 1 default Required Addressing 6 Wo
213. y y4 amp Panels HMI Work Y N Y Y N N N y 5 y stations 1 Refer to the Modbus Plus portion of the Quantum Specifier s guide section for details of available services on 140NOM2XXX00 Modbus Plus Network modules 2 Service is only available on the native controller Modbus port when the XMIT loadable is used 3 Available from third parties 4 The SERCOS network standard is fiber optics 5 The software for this module is a modConnect product 6 Module firmware loaded through serial port on module 32 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Network Configurations Quantum Network Interface Techniques Overview Direct CPU Driver Option Module Interface CPU Interface Support Quantum communication and networking modules use a variety of different techniques to interface to the Quantum controller over the local backplane This technique allows the CPU to control high speed data transfers to and from the communication and networking modules maximizing throughput and performance This technique is used extensively by the Remote I O network and Hot Standby system to ensure highly deterministic synchronization of the CPU and I O scans Note Only one Remote I O Head Interface is supported for each Quantum CPU This technique allows the communication and networking modules to control data transfers to and from the CPU maximizing the flexibility of the communications interface This tech
214. 0 0 degrees C 2 Terminals labeled shield are not connected internally Shields should be grounded at the field device end 3 When using 2 wire configurations the temperature equivalent of twice the lead resistance of one leg must be subtracted from the temperature reading 490 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140ATI03000 I O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module Overview The Thermocouple Input 8 Channel is an eight channel thermocouple input module Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the TC IN module Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active F 1 8 Red Indicated channel is out of range or Broken wire condition is detected Required Addressing 10 Words In TC Types and Ranges Range degrees C J 210 760 K 270 1370 E 270 1000 T 270 400 S 50 1665 R 50 1665 B 130 1820 Millivolt Ranges 100 mV 100 mV 25 mV 25 mV Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges TC Resistance Max Source Resistance 2000 max for rated accuracy Input Impedance gt 1 MQ Input Filter Single low pass nominal 20 Hz plus notch filter at 50 60 Hz Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min 9 50 or 60 Hz Cold Junction Compensation CJC Internal CJC operates 0 60 C errors are included in the accuracy specification The c
215. 0 00 September 2002 441 Battery Module Installing The following procedure describes how to install or remove a battery Removing a Ste Action Battery p 1 Remove the insulating strip from the new battery 2 If necessary remove the old battery Detach it from its housing on the front of the module by pulling the battery access strip see below until the battery pops out Insulating Strip IPull on this tape to Battery 2 Access Strip 3 Replace it with the new battery using the reverse of the procedure in step 2 WARNING May cause personal injury or damage to equipment Do not use any metallic tools i e pliers screwdriver etc when removing or replacing a battery in this module Using tools during removal and replacement may cause personal injury and or damage to the battery and this module Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage WARNING May cause personal injury of damage to equipment Ensure that proper polarity is maintained when connecting and inserting new batteries into the XCP90000 Inserting the battery improperly may cause personal injury and or damage to this module Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 442 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Battery Module CAUTION Hazardous waste Used batteries nazardous waste mu
216. 0 00 September 2002 475 I O Modules The following figure shows Register 9 Register 9 Input status word 1 Channel 8 out of range __ 1 Channel 7 out of range 1 Channel 6 out of range __ 1 Channel 5 out of range 1 Channel 4 out of range __ 1 Channel out of range 1 Channel 2 out of range 1 Channel 1 out of range 1 21314 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 18 14 15 16 1 Range warning on channel 8 1 Range warning on channel 7 1 Range warning on channel 6 1 Range warning on channel 5 1 Range warning on channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 A range warning is issued when a channel input is outside the rated input value as shown in the following table Warning bits stay on after out of range bits are set An out of range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2 496 Out of range bits are also set if inputs drop below 0 5 V 1 5 V mode or 2 08 mA 4 20 mA mode When configured for current inputs jumper installed between INPUT and ISENSE terminals a broken field wire results in a zero current reading If 4 20 mA is selected fault LEDs and warning out of range and I O Map Status Byte bits are displayed CAUTION Possible Equipment F
217. 0 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Device Address 1 247 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 111 CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the CPU They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom Switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 SW 1 TOP SW 2 BOTTOM The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address 112 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Ports Pinout Connections All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that supports Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The followi
218. 0 24 Vdc 32 8 250 mA Supervised Inputs Grouped The following table shows specifications for the Discrete Out modules Type Part Number Function Points Points Bus Special Channels per Current Features Group Required 140DAO84000 24 230 Vac 16 N A 350 mA 4 A per point isolated 140DAO84010 24 115 Vac 16 N A 350 mA 4 A per point isolated 140DAO84210 115 230 Vac 16 4 350 mA 4 A per point group fused 140DAO84220 24 48 Vac 16 4 350 mA 4 A per point group fused 140DAO85300 230 Vac 32 8 1A 1 A per point group fused 140DDO15310 5 Vdc 32 8 350 mA 0 5 A per point group fused 140DDO35300 24 Vdc 32 8 330 mA 0 5 A per point group fused 140DDO35301 24 Vdc 32 8 250 mA 0 5 A per point 56 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Specifications Type Part Number Function Points Points Bus Special Channels per Current Features Group Required 140DDO35310 24 Vdc 32 8 330 mA 0 5 A per point group fused 140DDO36400 24 Vdc 96 16 250 mA 0 5 A per point group fused 140DDO84300 10 60 Vdc 16 8 160 mA 2 A per point group fused 140DDO88500 24 125 Vdc 12 6 6 points 0 5 A per 375 mA point with 12 points short circuit 650 mA protection Group fused 140DRA84000 N O Relay 16 1 1 100 mA 2 A per point 140DRC83000 N O N C Relay 8 1 560 mA 5 A per point 140DVO85300 10 30 Vdc 32 8 500 mA 0 5 A per point verified output group fused
219. 0 Quantum I O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed Module Overview The Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed module is used to switch voltage sources using eight relays with normally open and normally closed contacts Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DRC83000 RELAY OUT module Specifications Number of Output Points 8 normally open normally closed pairs LEDs Active 1 8 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 0 5 word out Voltage Working 20 250 Vac 5 30 30 150 Vdc reduced load current Maximum Load Current Each Point 5 A max at 250 Vac 30 Vdc 60 C ambient resistive load 2 A Tungsten lamp load 3 A power factor 0 4 1 4 hp 125 250 Vac Each Point 30 150 Vdc 300 mA resistive 100 mA L R 10 msec Maximum Module Current 40 A see the derating curve below The following figure shows the relay derating curve Relay Derating Curve 40 30 TOTAL MODULE CURRENT A N 40 50 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE Degrees C Minimum Load Current 50 mA Note Minimum load current if the contact is used at rated loads of 5 150 Vdc or 20 250 Vac 652 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Maximum Frequency F 30 Hz resistive loads or 0 5 PL where L Load Indu
220. 0 September 2002 125 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU21304 controller module Specifications User Logic Reference Capacity Extended Register 984 Ladder Logic Discrete Register 32 k words 64k 57k 80k 48 k words 64k 28k Ok 57 766 4XX registers max Only if OXXX 16 and 1XXX 16 and 3XXX 16 Discrete 64 k any mix Local I O Main Backplane Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Requires expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out per System Maximum Number of Remote 31 Drops Distributed I O Maximum Number of Networks 3 Maximum Words per Network For every DIO drop there is a minimum of words input of overhead 500 In and 500 Out Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out Watchdog Timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 3 ms kto 1 4 ms k Battery 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 5 loss of capacity per year Battery Load Current Power off Typical 5 uA Maximum 110 pA 126 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Specifications Communication Modbus RS 232 1 serial port 9 pin D shell Modbus Plus RS 485 1 network port 9 pin D shell General
221. 0 September 2002 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPU53414A Controller module Specifications User Logic Reference Capacity 984 Ladder Discrete Register Extended IEC Logic Register Application Memory 64k words 64k 57k 96k 2 5M 57 766 4XX registers max Only if OXXX 16 and 1XXX 16 and 16 Reference Capacity Discrete 64 k any mix Local I O Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Requires Expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out System Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31 Distributed I O Maximum Number of Networks per 9 Maximum Words per Network for every DIO drop there is a minimum of words input of overhead 500 In and 500 Out Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out This information can be a mix if Discrete or Register I O For each word of register I O configured one word of I O words must be subtracted from the total available The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word Register I O must be subtracted from the total available Requires the use of two 140NOM21 X00 Option Modules Maximun Number of Network Option Module Interfaces Supports up to six network modules i e Modbus Plus Ehternet and Multi Axis Motion option modules using the op
222. 0 September 2002 687 I O Modules 140DDM69000 I O 125 VDC Input High Power Output Module Overview The 125 VDC Input High Power Output module provides four isolated outputs and four grouped inputs The outputs switch 24 to 125 Vdc powered loads and are for use with sink and source devices The outputs also have short circuit sense indication and shutdown circuitry The inputs accept 125 Vdc inputs and are for use with source output devices The inputs have software selectable response times to provide additional input filtering Topology The following table shows the topology for the DDM69000 module Topology Number of Input Points 4in 1 group Number of Output Points 4 isolated LEDs Active F red Over current condition on any point 1 4 Green left column Indicated output point is turned ON 1 4 Red middle column Indicated output point has an over current condition 1 4 Green right column Indicated input point is turned ON Required Addressing 1 word in 1 word out Input The following table shows the input specifications for the DDM69000 module Specifications Input Specifications Operating Voltages and Currents Input ON voltage 88 4156 2 Vdc including ripple OFF voltage 0 36 Vdc ON current 2 0 mA min OFF current 1 2 mA max Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 156 2 Vdc including ripple Input Response Default Filter 0 5 ms
223. 0 USE 100 00 September 2002 101 Power Supplies 102 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the specifications LED indicators and description and error codes for the Quantum CPU modules The following table shows an overview of the Quantum CPU modules CPU SRAM Ladder Registers Extended 984 Ladder Max IEC bytes Performance Program 140CPU11302 256 k 8k 10k none 0 3 1 4 ms k 109 k 140CPU11303 512k 16k 10k none 0 3 1 4 ms k 368 k 140CPU21304 768k 32kor 57kor 80 0 3 1 4 ms k 606 k 48k 28k k 140CPU42402 2M 64 k 57k 96 k 0 1 0 5 ms k 570 k 140CPU43412 2M 64K 57 K 96 k 0 1 0 5 ms k 896 k 140CPU43412A 2M 64K 57 K 96 k 0 1 0 5 ms k 896 k 140CPU53414 4M 64K 57K 96k 0 9 0 45 ms k 2 5M 140CPU53414A 4M 64K 57K 96K 0 1 0 5 ms k 2 5M Refer to the individual specification pages for detailed information 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 103 CPU Modules What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page 140CPU11302 CPU Module 105 140CPU11303 CPU Module 115 140CPU21304 CPU Module 125 140CPU42402 CPU Module 135 140CPU43412 CPU Module 145 140CPU43412A CPU Module 156 140CPU53414 CPU Module 167 140CPU53414A CPU Module 178 104 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules 140CPU11302
224. 00 802 CFK00400 810 812 814 CPS11100 64 CPS11400 67 CPS11410 70 CPS11420 73 CPS12400 76 CPS12420 79 CPS21100 82 CPS21400 85 CPS22400 88 CPS41400 91 CPS42400 94 CPS51100 98 CPS52400 101 CRA21X10 218 223 DAI34000 536 DAI35300 539 DAI44000 542 DAI45300 545 DAI54000 548 DAI54300 551 DAI55300 555 DAI74000 559 DAI75300 562 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xxxi Index X DAM59000 680 DAO84000 596 DAO84010 601 606 DAO84220 611 DAO85300 616 DDI15310 565 DDI35300 567 DDI35310 569 DDI67300 577 DDI84110 580 DDI85300 583 DDM39000 686 DDM69000 692 DDO15310 621 DDO35300 625 DDO35301 629 DDO35310 634 DDO84300 643 DDO88500 647 DII33000 419 01033000 425 DRA84000 651 DRC83000 654 05135300 669 DVO85300 664 EHC10500 302 EHC20200 323 344 HLI34000 355 intrinsically safe modules 379 XSM01000 435 XBE10000 configuration illustration 370 description 368 expander cables 370 guidelines 371 illustration 368 specifications 369 XCP90000 battery backup 440 configuration 438 description 439 illustration 439 installing and removing a battery 441 LED descriptions 441 LED indicators 441 specifications 440 XSM00200 description 430 illustration 431 XSM01000 description 432 illustration 433 specifications 434 wiring diagram 435 xxxii 840 USE 100 00 September 2002
225. 00 September 2002 269 Modbus Plus NOM Calculating Calculate the number of NOM25200 modules in a fiber network using the following Number of table Modules in a Fiber Network Step Action 1 The total allowable pulse width distortions and jitter are limited to 20 of the bit period and is 200 nsec for the full fiber optic network The jitter contributed by the NOM252 is 5 nsec max Jitter contributed by fiber optic repeaters if used is 40 nsec 4 The formula to determine the number N of chained repeaters is 200nsec X L nsec 40nsec P we 5nsec 1 where L is the total cable length km and X is the jitter added by the fiber optic cable in nsec km X 8 ns km for 50 125 um 5 ns km for 62 5 125 um 7 5 ns km for 100 140 um 270 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Ethernet Modules 13 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the NOE2X1 TCP IP NOE3X1 SY MAX NOE5X100 MMS and NOE771xx Ethernet modules What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page 140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Module 272 140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY MAX Modules 276 140NOE5X100 Quantum Ethernet MMS Modules 279 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules 282 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 271 Ethernet Modules 140NOE2X100 Quantum Ethernet TCP IP Module Overview The Quantum NOE2X1TCP IP is des
226. 01366 Rev 00 140DIO33000 Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 425 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to CSA certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voc 27 9 V ls 119 mA Ca 84 nf La 1 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 for installation in Canada Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Voc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Leable Note 8 This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D 1 5 24 NO LOAD See Notes 1 amp 2 Output 1 N C Output 2
227. 02 245 Modbus Plus NOMs Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Modbus Connector The NOM modules are equipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that supports Pinouts Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin left and 25 pin right connections IBM AT Quantum IBM XT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male 1 1 SHIELD SHIELD 1 6o SHIELD RX 2 2 RX TX 2 2 RX TX 3 3 TX RX 3 TX DTR 4 4 DTR RTS 4 4 DTR GROUND 5 5 GROUND CTS 5 5 GROUND DSR 6 6 DSR DSR 6 6 _ DSR RTS T 7 RTS GROUND 7 7 RIS CTS 8 L 8 CIS NC 8 Ls CTS 9 NC DTR 20 9 NC 246 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOMs Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin portable laptop computers IBM AT 9 Pin Female CD 1 RX 2 TX 3 DTR 4 GRND 5 DSR RTS 7 CTS NC g Quantum 9 Pin Male SHIELD
228. 04000 High Density Analog in Module 483 140ARI03010 I O RTD Input 8 Channel Module 487 140ATI03000 I O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module 491 140AVIO03000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module 495 Analog Output Modules 499 At aiGlance us r rud dg vl P ey ura pera red 499 Configuration for Analog Output Modules 500 140ACO02000 Quantum I O Analog Current Out Module 505 140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I O Module 509 140AVO02000 Quantum I O Analog Voltage Out Module 513 Analog Input Output Modules 517 Ata Gl tnce iod ll usu Chu pasos e tiled a ebbe dob e SIS RENS 517 Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input Output Module 518 140AMMO09000 Analog Input Output Module 523 Discrete Input Modules 529 Ata Glance iae seta ect exe qur e ecol Fare ue DRE ace 529 Configuration for Discrete Input Modules 530 140DAI34000 Quantum I O 24 VAC IN Module 534 140DAI35300 Quantum I O AC Input 24 Vac Module 537 140DAI44000 Quantum I O 48 VAC IN Module 540 140DAI45300 Quantum I O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module 543 140D
229. 043505765 78 Modicon Quantum Automation Series Hardware Reference Guide 840 USE 100 00 Version 10 0 Schneider d Electric Table of Contents Part Chapter 1 Part Il Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Safety Information ix About the xi Quantum Automation System Overview 1 Ata Glance lud eR uya d d HR RA V Re 1 Modicon TSX Quantum Automation System Overview 3 ALaGlarce s zr ERE LACUS nop es a un et Rus 3 Modicon TSX Quantum Automation Series Overview 4 Quantum Power 5 Quantum CPU Modules 6 Quantum I O Modules 7 Quantum Communication Interface Modules 8 Quantum Intelligent Special Purpose I O Modules 11 Quantum Simulator Modules 5 12 Quantum Battery Backplanes and CableFast Cabling 13 Quantum Programming Packages 14 Quantum System Configurations 15 ocne ircu cirai rl doin ee eee Y Reg e ERE EAE TA 15 Quantum Configurations 17 Ata IN n ADI 17 Quantum Local I O Remote I O an
230. 07 108 157 158 109 I59 160 I12 161 162 113 4 163 164 5 H6 NC COM NC NC COM INC COM E B 165 166 117 H8 167 168 119 I20 169 I70 121 122 171 172 123 124 173 174 125 126 175 176 127 128 177 178 129 130 179 180 DI 132 NC COM NC COM F C IST T 182 B3 D4 183 184 D5 136 T85 T86 137 138 IS7 I88 B9 140 T89 190 141 142 191 192 143 04 193 194 045 146 195 196 17 048 NC COM INC NC COM INC COM Pushbutton The front view of the DDI36400 input module including terminal assignment 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 571 I O Modules Selecting Point Status Indicator LEDs Recommended Cables Color Codes for Input groups Use the pushbutton to select input points displayed LED 32 64 Inputs 1 to 32 OFF OFF Inputs 33 to 64 ON OFF Inputs 65 to 96 OFF ON The following table shows recommended cables description and their length in meters Cable Part Number Description Length M TSXCDP301 1 HE 10 flying leads 3 TSXCDP501 1 HE 10 flying leads 5 TSXCDP102 2 HE 10 ribbon cable 1 TSXCDP202 2 HE 10 ribbon cable 2 TSXCDP302 2 HE 10 ribbon cable 3 TSXCDP053 2 HE 10 round cable 0 5 TSXCDP103 2 HE 10 round cable 1 TSXCDP203 2 HE 10 round cable 2 TSXCDP303 2 HE 10 round cable 3 TSXCDP503 2 HE 10 round cable 5
231. 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 120 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Device Address 1 247 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 121 CPU Modules Rear Panel Two rotary switches refer to the illustration and table that follow are located on the Switches rear panel of the CPU They are used for setting the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 SW1 SW2 The following table shows the SW1 SW2 address settings SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 9 0 Toad 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 60 64 6 0 4
232. 101 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xvii Index CPU description 6 hardware specifications 52 part numbers 52 CPU11302 ASCII communication port parameters 110 description 115 front panel switches 110 illustration 105 LED descriptions 107 LED error codes 108 LED indicators 107 Modbus connector pinouts 113 Modbus ports pinout connections 113 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers 114 rear panel rotary switches 112 RTU communication port parameters 110 specifications 106 SW1 and SW2 address settings 112 SW1 and SW2 switches 112 valid communication port parameters 111 CPU11303 ASCII communication port parameters 120 illustration 115 LED descriptions 117 LED error codes 118 LED indicators 117 Modbus connector pinouts 123 Modbus ports pinout connections 123 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers 124 rear panel switches 122 RTU communication port parameters 120 specifications 116 SW1 and SW2 address settings 122 SW1 and SW2 switches 122 valid communication port parameters 121 CPU21304 ASCII communication port parameters 130 description 125 front panel switches 130 illustration 125 LED descriptions 128 LED error codes 128 LED indicators 127 Modbus connector pinouts 133 Modbus ports pinout connections 133 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers 134 rear panel switches 132 RTU comm
233. 114 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules 140CPU11303 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU11303 Controller module CPU 512 k 1xModbus Plus Max IEC Program 368 K requires IEC Exec CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components LED Area 140 CPU 113 03 CONTROLLER Battery Memory Protect and Comm parameter Slide Switches Modbus Modbus Connector Modbus Plus IModbusy Plus Connector Chan A eR Chan A E Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door lt Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door ate mem rASCII off LRTU Lmem not used Modbus Modbus Plus Network ode 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 115 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU11303 CONTROLLER module Specifications 984 Ladder Logic 16 k words max Reference Capacity Discrete 8192 In and 8192 Out max Register 9999 max Local I O Main Backplane Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Require
234. 11410 description 68 illustration 68 LED description 70 LED indicator 70 specifications 69 wiring diagram 70 CPS11420 description 71 illustration 71 LED description 73 LED indicator 73 specifications 72 wiring diagram 73 CPS12400 description 74 illustration 74 LED description 76 LED indicator 76 specifications 75 wiring diagram 76 CPS12420 description 77 illustration 77 LED description 79 LED indicator 79 specifications 78 wiring diagram 79 CPS21100 description 80 illustration 80 LED description 81 LED indicator 81 specifications 81 wiring diagram 82 CPS21400 description 83 illustration 83 LED description 84 LED indicator 84 specifications 84 wiring diagram 85 CPS22400 description 86 illustration 86 LED description 87 LED indicator 87 specifications 87 wiring diagram 88 CPS41400 description 89 illustration 89 LED description 90 LED indicator 90 operating curve and timing chart 91 specifications 90 wiring diagram 91 CPS42400 illustration 92 LED description 93 LED indicator 93 operating curve and timing chart 95 specifications 93 wiring diagram 94 CPS51100 description 96 illustration 96 LED description 97 LED indicator 97 specifications 97 wiring diagram 98 CPS52400 description 99 illustration 99 LED description 100 LED indicators 100 specifications 100 wiring diagram
235. 135300 and 14000185300 Field Side Connections F1 08A L Nx Module 92 Input 1 Module 93 94 95 96 eye 9 8 5 59 9595 9 19 Mo 10 e N Oo 104 911 912 13 913 SUN A 914 e a 915 16 16 e zi 17 918 919 920 921 922 9253 924 925 926 927 928 929 9304 Lee 9324 Group A Common Module Group Supply VB vc 9 vD V dNOY9 Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU08000 Qty 10 Wickman 3700800041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 9 dnOu S q dnou5 Group A Power s l Group B Group C Group D DC Input Module Power N VA VB VB L VC VC VD VD AC Input Module Power Note The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX001 10 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 762 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring for the The following figure shows the 140CFB03200 wiring for the 140DDO15310 output Output Module module Field Side Connections TTL Inverter Module Output 1 eo GROUP A 1 e Module e 93 TTL Nand Gate Output 4 4 5 6 7 8 Module Output 5 e
236. 140CFH00800 source grounding Current IN Loop Power Required 4 20mA Source Current IN Instrument Powered Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU00600 Qty 10 Wickman 370063041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 787 CableFast Cabling Note 1 Whenusing a single power supply there willbe no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 For the required jumper options for the 140 103000 and the 140AV103000 see the wiring diagrams in 140AC103000 I O Analog In Module p 479 and 140AVI03000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module p 495 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 788 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram Instrument Grounding Jumper Field Side Connections See jumper information below Module Input 1 Module Input 1 TT 146A S2 Module Input 2 9 Module Input 2 2 F2 1 16A Module Input 3 Module Input 3 e T3 1 16A 9s e 4 94 Fuse Part Numbers est Modicon 140CFU00600 95 Qty 10 es Wickman 3700063041 9vs UL VDE SEMK IEC 9 55 127 3 ec Jumper Part Number 140CFX00110 Sues 95 Jumper Connections S1 to 1 e S2 to 2 S3 to 3 x ss 95 es Ove GND RET V
237. 140DAO84000 140DAO84010 140DDO84300 or 140DRA84000 module Push Enter to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped The following figures show the output type and timeout state Output Type BIN BCD Last Value User Defined Timeout State User Defined Timeout State Points 1 16 0000000000000000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 589 I O Modules 32 Point Output Modules Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte The following list shows the 32 point output modules 140DAO85300 AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 Sink 140DDO15310 DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source 140DDO35310 DC Output 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Sink 140DDO35300 140DDO35301 The output modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous 0x references or as two 4x registers in the following format The following figures show the formats for the output modules Output Point 1 Output Point 17 Register 1 1 213 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MSB First Word Register 2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MSB Second Word The I O map status byte is used by the modules as f
238. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Setpoint for Counter 1 max FFFF hex 4X 3 16 15 14 1311211110 9 8 7 6 5 4 383 2 1 Maximum Count for Counter 2 max FFFF hex 4X 4 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Setpoint for Counter 2 max FFFF hex 4X 5 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Output Assert ON Time milliseconds max SFFF hex 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 309 Intelligent Special Purpose Note Zero set into any 4X register means no change If configured for one 32 bit Counter Output Assert ON the following figures which show the counters for registers 4X through 4X 5 with low and high word are displayed Configured for One 32 Bit Counter Output Assert ON 4X 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 7 6 2 1 L 1 Preset Counter 1 L 1 Enable Counter 1 LLL 1 Disable Counter 1 1 Preset Counter 2 1 Enable Counter 2 1 Disable Counter 2 Load Values C
239. 2 Intelligent Special Purpose User Logic The User Logic illustrated accomplishes the module s configuration and then causes the input counter to be displayed after the first three successive scans by the PLC when it is in RUN mode The following figure shows the module s configuration in RUN mode Load Configuration 400101 D Load Configuration Done 000010 000010 400001 BLKM 00006 000010 Load Values P 400201 000011 400001 BLKM 00006 Read Counter PL 400301 000012 400001 BLKM 00006 Check Configuration Echo 300001 00256 a Configuration Done TEST 000011 00001 Check Load Values Echo 300001 00512 gt Load Values Done TEST 000012 00001 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 319 Intelligent Special Purpose COUNT DOWN Example RATE SAMPLE Example for Either Pulse or Quadrature Input Module Configuration The COUNT DOWN example uses the same wiring as in the count up example except the Input 1B level is changed to common connected to Vref for Pulse Inputs illustrated in Wiring Diagrams 1 and 2 For Quadrature Inputs no wiring change is required as the count direction is decoded internally by sensing the phase shift change between inputs A and B The User Logic is the same as for the count example The actual operation of the module is different in that the output associated with maximum count turns on
240. 2 10 Module upgrade gt V02 10 None Modsoft V02 40 Upgrade to V02 40 2 V02 40 None ProWORX NxT 2 V02 00 Concept gt V02 00 None Note See Version Label p 691 This figure is found on the top front of the module Version Label The following figure shows the version number location CPU 2M 2XMB 02 20 CPU 424 02 Controller 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 691 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDM69000 wiring diagram OUTPUT 1 O OUTPUT 1 HIE OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 1 Output Sourcing nic 6 G NIC NIC Ne N C 9 N C OUTPUT 2 4 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 2 4 i3 OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 4 OUTPUT 3 li OUTPUTS 7 OUTPUT 3 Output Sinking NIC NIC Nic 2 NIC N C Nc OUTPUT 4 5 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 4 NC N C 6 D 125 VDC INPUT 1 s 128 voe veu e 4 65 N C N C D N C N C INPUT Note 2 N C Not Connected 1 Each output has two terminals for multiple wire connections 692 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules CAUTION Polarity awareness The output points are not protected against reverse polarity Reverse polarity will turn an output point ON Failure to follow this prec
241. 300 AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 140DAI75300 AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 14000115310 DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source 14000135300 DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink 14000135310 DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Source 14000185300 DC Input 10 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink The input modules listed above can be configured as either 32 contiguous discrete input 1x references or as two contiguous input 3x registers in the following format The following figure shows the input points for Register 1 and Register 2 Register 1 Input Point 1 1 213 14 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 MSB First Word Register 2 Input 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Point 17 MSB Second Word There is no I O map status byte associated with these modules Push Enter to display and select the input type This selection appears if the module is I O mapped to a register The following figure shows the input type Input Type BIN BCD 532 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 96 Point Input The following is the only 96 point input module modules e 14000136400 DC input 6 x 16 sink 14000136400 The following information pertains to the 14000136400 Input module The following Register figures show the output points for register 1 through 6 Assignment Register 1 Input Pointi 2
242. 4 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input Module 568 14000136400 I O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module 570 140DDI67300 Quantum I O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module 574 14000184100 Quantum I O DC Input 10 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module 578 140DDI85300 Quantum I O DC Input 10 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 581 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 529 I O Modules Configuration for Discrete Input Modules Overview 16 Point Input Modules Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Modsoft Module Zoom Selections This section provides information on configuration of 16 24 32 and 96 point input modules The 16 point input modules are 140DAI34000 AC Input 24 Vac 16x1 140DAI44000 AC Input 48 Vac 16x1 140DAI54000 AC Input 115 Vac 16x1 140DAI54300 AC Input 115 Vac 8x2 140DAI74000 AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 14000184100 DC Input 10 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink The input modules listed above can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register The following figure shows the 16 point register There is no I O map status byte associated with these modules Push Enter to display and select the input type This selection appears if the module is mapped to a 3x register The following figure shows the input type display Input Type BIN BCD 530 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modu
243. 40 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 541 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI44000 wiring diagram RETURN 1 RETURN 2 RETURN 3 RETURN 4 N C RETURN 5 RETURN 6 RETURN 7 RETURN 8 N C RETURN 9 RETURN 10 RETURN 11 RETURN 12 N C RETURN 13 RETURN 14 RETURN 15 RETURN 16 N C INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 N C INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected 542 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DA145300 Quantum I O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 module accepts 48 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI45300 AC input 48 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50Hz Typical Input impedance ON 34 56 Vac 9 8 mA max OFF 0 10 Vac 6 8 kO capa
244. 40 USE 100 00 September 2002 331 Intelligent Special Purpose Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 1x32 Output Assert Mode Counter 2 Maximum Count ODEC Counter 2 Setpoint alarm ODEC Time Output On 0 DEC milliseconds 16383 maximum Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module The following figure shows the number of counters in output assertion Number of counters output assertion 2x16 Assert Outp 2x32 Assert Outp 2x32 No Assert Rate Sample Mode The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x32 No Output Assert Mode Words 2 3 Counter 1 Maximum Count 0 DEC Words 4 5 Counter 2 Maximum Count 0 DEC Refer to Load Values Command section for the maximum values that may be used by the module The next line applies ONLY IF the counter is in Rate Sample Mode Rate Sample Timer X 0 DEC milliseconds 65535 maximum Note Any Number of counters output assertion selection pop up menu can be used as they reflect each other 332 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module Overview The EHC20200 offers the following features e Two counters that operate in pulse or quadrature mode and accept single ended or differen
245. 50 1665 50 1665 130 1820 Millivolt Ranges 100 mV 100 mV 25 mV 25 mV Open circuit detect can be disabled on these ranges TC Circuit Resistance Max Source Resistance 2000 max for rated accuracy Input Impedance gt 1MQ Input Filter Single low pass nominal 20 Hz Plus notch filter at 50 60 Hz Normal Noise Rejection 120 dB min 50 or 60 Hz Cold Junction Compensation CJC Internal CJC operates 0 60 C errors are included in the accuracy specification The connector door must be closed Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting the TC which monitors the external junction block temperature to channel 1 Types J K and T are recommended for best accuracy Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 610r higher Resolution TC Ranges Choice of 1 C Default 0 1 C 1 F 0 1 F Millivolt Ranges 100 mV range 3 05 uV 16 bits 25 mV range 0 76 uV 16 bits TC Absolute Accuracy see Note 1 Types J K E T see Note 2 2 C 0 196 of reading Types S R B see Note 3 4 C 0 1 of reading 392 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Thermocouple Millivolt Module Specifications Millivolt Absolute Accuracy 25 20 uV 0 1 of reading Accuracy Drift w Temperature 0 15 n V C 0 001
246. 504 and ANSI ISA RP1 2 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part I Intrinsic Safety Note 7 Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250Vrms Note 8 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA S82 01 Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval 140DIO33000 Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 427 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION UL certification CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 for this module Group A B C D Note 1 Entity parameters per 1 5 24 Vdc NO LOAD Z l See Notes 1 amp 2 channel Voc 27 9 V lc 119 mA 1 5 Field Ca 84 nf Output 1 o 9 9 m 1 La 1 0 mH T Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Chassis Ground Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground Screws on the backplane Note 3 If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60 Pf ft Note 2 All i Inductance 0 20 uH ft ote negative output terminals Output 1 thru Output 8 are internally
247. 570k 2M 64k 64k 1 8 A 140CPU43412 896 k 2M 64k 57k 1 8 A 140CPU43412A 896 k 2M 64k 57k 1 25 140CPU53414 25M 4M 64k 57k 1 8A 140CPU53414A 2 5M 4M 64 k 57k 1 25A Networking The following table shows specifications for RIO Networking modules Modules RIO Part Numbers RIO Drop Location Communication Bus Current Channel s Provided 140CRA93100 Remote Drop 1 600 mA 140CRA93200 Remote Drop 2 750 mA 140CRP93100 Local Head 1 600 mA 140CRP93200 Local Head 2 750 mA Field Bus The following table shows specifications for field bus modules modules Part Number Communication Channel s Bus Current Required 140CRP81100 1 Profibus port 1 RS 232 port 1 2A db 9 pin 140EIA92100 1 AS i 250mA 140NOA61 100 1InterBus LED display gen 3 700 mA 140NOA61110 1 InterBus 7 segment display 700 mA gen 3 52 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Specifications Networking Modules DIO Modbus Plus Networking Modules Ethernet Part Number Communication Channel s Bus Current Required 140NOA62200 1 InterBus LED gen 4 800 mA 140NOL91100 2 free topology twisted pair 400 mA 78 000 BPS LonWorks 140NOL91110 2 linear topology twisted pair 400 mA transformer isolated 78 000 BPS LonWorks 140NOL91 120 2 linear topology twisted pair 400 mA transformer isolated 1 25 BBPS LonWorks The following table
248. 596 of reading C max Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min Update Time 1 sec all channels Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire Bus Current Required 400 mA Power Dissipation 2W External Power Not required for this module Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 6 or higher or Concept Ver 2 2 or higher Notes 1 Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC TC curvature offset plus gain for module temperature of 0 60 C User supplied TC errors not included 2 For type J and K add 1 5 C inaccuracy for temperatures below 100 C 3 Type B cannot be used below 130 C 4 All TC ranges have an open TC detect and upscale output This results in a reading 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected Field Wiring Field wiring to the module shall consist of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge shall be AWG 20 to AWG 12 In a 2 wire field configuration the maximum field wire length is a function of the required accuracy Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area RTD Resistance When the Universal Input module is configured as a RTD Resistance Input module Input Wiring th
249. 6 N G N C N G INPUT 18 INPUT 20 INPUT 22 INPUT 24 N C INPUT 1 o INPUT 3 INPUT 5 INPUT 7 ee GROUP A COMMON The following figure shows the DDI67300 wiring diagram e e e e o 99 N C N C INPUTS INPUT 11 GROUP B COMMON INPUT13 INPUT15 N C N C N C INPUT 17 INPUT 19 INPUT 21 INPUT 23 amp amp 8 amp 9 9 C 9 amp amp amp OC amp 6 9 C 9 O GROUP C COMMON FIELD DEVICE Note N C Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 577 I O Modules 14000184100 Quantum I O DC Input 10 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module Overview The DC Input 10 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink module accepts 10 60 Vdc inputs and is for use with source output devices ON OFF levels are dependent on the reference voltage selected Different reference voltages may be used for different groups Specifications module The following table shows the specifications for the DDI84110 10 60 VDC IN Specifications Number of Input Points 16 in eight 2 point groups 24 15 20 48 Vdc 15 20 60 15 20 LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 Word in Group Supply Tolerance ON St
250. 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Device Address 1 247 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 151 CPU Modules Rear Panel Switches Two rotary switches see the following illustration and table are located on the rear panel of the CPU They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 The following figure shows SW1 and SW2 A SW1 TOP XO SW BOTTOM Note If 0 or an address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 Tu 9 0 UT 10 19 1 20 29 30 39 40 49 50 59 o OG NO S o o oo o CO CO 60 64 152 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Key Switch The key switch is used to protect memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation The following figure shows the
251. 613 14000015310 I O DC Output 5 V TTL 4x8 Sink Module 618 14000035300 Quantum I O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Module 622 14000035301 I O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module 627 14000035310 I O DC Output 24 4x8 Sink Module 631 14000036400 I O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module 636 14000084300 Quantum I O DC Output 10 60 Vdc 2x8 Source Module 641 14000088500 Quantum I O DC Output 24 125 Vdc 2x6 Source Module 644 140DRA84000 Quantum I O Relay Output 16x1 Normally Open Module 649 140DRC83000 Quantum I O Relay Output 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed Module aya Ob ale eee ie 652 Discrete Verified Output Module 655 Ata Glance det ot hubs dde naa 655 Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module 140DVO85300 656 140DVO85300 I O Verified 10 30 VDC Out 661 Discrete Supervised Input Module 665 Ata GlanGe cnet Fiat tite a u Ae 665 Configuration for the Discrete Supervised Input Module 140DSI35300 666 14005135300 I O DC 24V Supervised Input Module 667 Discrete Input Output Modules 670 Ata Glarces se G ce etse aasma dd RAN SOURCE ON ae a ae ea 670 I O Configuration for Discrete Input Output Modules
252. 6900 error in additional transfer calculation 2 6801 ICB frame pattern error 6802 head control block error 6803 bad diagnostic request 6804 greater than 128 MSL user loadables 4 6604 powerdown interrupt error 6605 UART initialization error 6503 RAM address test error 6402 RAM data test error 6301 PROM checksum error 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 373 Intelligent Special Purpose Front Panel Controls Keyswitch and Program Update Button A B Designation Slide Switch Number of Blinks Code Error 8 C101 no hook timeout C102 read state RAM timeout C103 write state RAM timeout C200 powerup error The Hot Standby module has three controls on the front panel a function keyswitch a designation slide switch and an update button The following figure shows the keyswitch and program update button Off line Xfer Run The keyswitch has three positions off line xfer and run e Off line Putting the key in this position takes the controller out of service e Xfer When the key on the standby unit is in this position the standby is prepared to receive a full program update from the primary controller The update is initiated by pressing the program update button which is located on the front panel between the function keyswitch and the cable connectors If you turn the key on the primary unit to xfer the system will ignore your action
253. 7 RTS CTS 8 8 CTS NC 8 L8 CTS 9 NC DTR 120 9 NC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 187 CPU Modules Modbus Ports The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin portable Pinout computers Connections for Portable IBM AT Quantum Computers 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 TX 3 DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR DSR RIS 7 RTS CTS CTS NC g The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 188 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules At a Glance Field Bus Modules What s in this Chapter This chapter contains information on various Quantum Field Bus Modules This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page 140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module 190 140EIA92100 Quantum AS i Master Module 196 140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules 201 140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules 208 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 189 Quantum Field Bus Modules 140CRP81100 Profibus DP Master Communications Module Overview The following information describes the 140CRP81100 Field Bus Communication Module which provides interface to Profibus DP networks for the Quant
254. 785 wiring diagram chassis grounding 791 wiring diagram instrument grounding 789 wiring diagram source grounding 787 CFI00800 application notes 793 description 793 dimensions 793 wiring diagram chassis grounding 798 wiring diagram instrument grounding 796 wiring diagram source grounding 794 CFJ00400 application notes 800 description 800 dimensions 801 terminal block illustration 800 wiring diagram chassis grounding 806 wiring diagram instrument grounding 804 wiring diagram source grounding 802 CFK00400 application notes 808 description 808 dimensions 809 terminal block illustration 808 wiring diagram chassis grounding 814 wiring diagram instrument grounding 812 wiring diagram source grounding 810 CHS11000 A B designation slide switch 374 blinking Com Act LED error codes 373 description 372 illustration 372 keyswitch and update button 374 LED descriptions 373 LED indicators 373 specifications 372 communication interface modules Ethernet TCP IP module 9 InterBus interface modules 10 LonWorks modules 10 Modbus Plus on Fiber 9 SY MAX Ethernet 9 twisted pair wiring 9 types 8 CPS11100 description 62 illustration 62 LED description 64 LED indicator 64 wiring diagram 64 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index CPS11400 description 65 illustration 65 LED description 67 LED indicators 67 specifications 66 wiring diagram 67 CPS
255. 79 wiring diagram 481 AC104000 description 483 I O map status byte 466 module zoom selections 466 register assignment 465 specifications 483 wiring diagram 485 ACOO02000 configuration 501 description 505 I O map status byte 501 module zoom selections 501 register assignments 501 specifications 505 voltmeter monitor specifications 506 wiring diagram 507 ACO13000 configuration 502 description 509 I O map status byte 502 module zoom selections 503 register assignments 502 specifications 509 wiring diagram 511 Agency approvals ASCII interface 831 backplane expander 835 backplanes 834 battery module 832 counters 831 CPUs 828 DIO drops 828 field bus modules 829 high speed interrupts 831 Hot Standby 830 1 0 833 intrinsically safe modules 832 NOEs 830 NOMs 830 power supplies 827 RIO heads and drops 829 simulators 832 single axis motion 831 AII33000 configuration 381 description 390 field wiring 393 I O map register assignment 381 I O map status byte 384 module zoom selections 384 register assignment 382 RTD resistance module specifications 390 terminal color and keying assignment 394 thermocouple millivolt map register 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xiii Index assignment 383 Thermocouple Millivolt module specification 392 wiring diagram Cenelec RTD 395 wiring diagram Cenelec TC 396 wiring diagram CSA RTD 397 wiring
256. 799 27 027 27 e28 e28 28 e29 029 179 30 30 631 31 e32 932 32 Group A Group A Power k e GND Module Group A PISA rl VB e GND Group B Power e e GND Supply VO C e Group C Power Vo C e GND L See Note 2 VD Wb Group D Power Vor lS ND DC Input Module AC Input Module Power Note 1 The GND ground terminal points are not connected 2 The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX001 10 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 774 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling 140CFE03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview Terminal Block Application Notes Dimensions The E block provides connections for 32 individually fused 24 Vdc outputs 1 and 2 wire interfacing may be selected Field power must be supplied to the four groups See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks The following figure shows the 140CFE03200 terminal block GROUP D GROUP C GROUP B GROUP A Q Q Q Q e90090900900000060006 0000000000000000 CableFast 140 CFD 032 00 UL FILE E123528
257. A 68 140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115 230 Vac 11 A 71 140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A Module 74 140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply 115 230 Vac 11 A Module 77 140CPS21100 DC Power Supply 24 Vdc AModule 80 140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply 24 Vdc 8 A Module 83 140CPS22400 DC Redundant Power Supply 24 Vdc 8 A Module 86 140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply 48 Vdc 8 A Module 89 140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply 48 Vdc 8 A Module 92 140CPS51100 DC Power Supply 125 Vdc A Module 96 140CPS52400 DC Standalone Redundant Power Supply 125 Vdc 8A 99 CPU 103 AtaGlanee RE RARI RT VER A IG V ed 103 140CPU11302 CPU Module 105 140CPU11303 CPU Module 115 140CPU21304 CPU Module 125 140CPU42402 CPU Module 135 140CPU43412 CPU Module 145 140CPU43412A CPU Module 156 140CPU53414 CPU Module 167 140CPU53414A CPU Module 178 Quantum Field Bus Modules 189 Overview ucl y RETE RR IE Ded d epis 189
258. A e If two 140CPS12420 are installed with one 140CPS22400 or one 140CPS42400 in the backplane the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 16 A Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage If these constraints are observed then in a system of two or three redundant supplies one supply it doesn t matter which one is hot swappable This is possible because there is excess capacity in the N 1 remaining supplies to source the backplane current while the Nth supply is being swapped An obvious extension to this argument is that a single redundant power supply may be used as a standalone supply but the lowest cost solution will be achieved by using a summable or standalone supply for this application 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 743 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Compatibility Power supplies Issues e With the exception of standalone models power supplies with the same model number are always compatible when installed in the same backplane e Do not mix different models of power supplies on the same backplane except in the following combinations e One 140CPS11420 and one 140CPS11410 power supply may be installed for configurations consuming more than the rated current of one supply In this case the total load capacity is 16 A 60 C e One 140CPS12420 and one 140CPS22400 power supply may be used for configurations requiring power for uninterrupted system o
259. AI54000 Quantum I O 115 VAC In Module 546 vi 140DAI54300 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module 549 140DAI55300 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module 553 140DAI74000 Quantum I O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module 557 140DAI75300 Quantum I O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module 560 14000115310 Quantum I O DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source Module 563 14000135300 Quantum I O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 566 14000135310 Quantum I O DC Input 24 Vdc True Low 4x8 Input Module 568 14000136400 I O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module 570 14000167300 Quantum I O DC Input 125 Vdc 3x8 Sink Module 574 14000184100 Quantum I O DC Input 10 60 Vdc 8x2 Sink Module 578 14000185300 Quantum I O DC Input 10 60 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 581 Discrete Output Modules 584 Ata Glance e sacs eoe RU CUR e Pes 584 Configuration for Discrete Output Modules 585 140DAO84000 I O AC Output 24 230 Vac 16x1 Module 594 140DAO84010 I O AC Output 24 115 Vac 16x1 Module 598 140DAO84210 Quantum I O AC Output 100 230 Vac 4x4 Module 603 140DAO84220 Quantum I O AC Output 24 48 Vac 4x4 Module 608 140DAO85300 Quantum I O AC Output 24 230 Vac 4x8 Module
260. AS i module Specifications Master profile Bus length slaves time Transmission Polarity reversal M2 100m max no repeaters 124IN 124OUT 31 max 30Vdc 120mA max 156 msec x n 2 if n lt 31 156 msec x n 1 if n 31 167 kbits sec Non destructive Bus current required 250mA max Power dissipation 2 5W max Installation Local RIO DIO Programming software Concept v2 5 ProWORX Nxt v2 1 Modsoft v2 61 200 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules 140NOA6XXXX Quantum InterBus Communications Modules Overview Related Documentation InterBus Communications Module This section includes information for the NOA6XXXX InterBus communications modules which provide interface to InterBus networks for the Quantum Automation Series systems For more detailed information on the installation and use of Quantum InterBus modules see the Modicon TSX Quantum 140NOA61110 User Manual part number 840USE41900 the Modicon TSX Quantum 140NOA61100 User Manual part number 840USE41800 and the TSX Quantum 140NOA62200 User Manual part number 840USE49700 The following figure shows the NOA6XXXX InterBus Communications module Model Number k Module Description n DIE Color Code LED Display Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door
261. Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module Overview The Analog In 8 Channel Bipolar module accepts a mix of current and voltage inputs Jumpers are required between the input and sense terminals for current inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AVIO3000 ANALOG IN module Specifications Number of Channels 8 Differential LEDs Active F 1 8 Red Indicated channel is out of range or broken wire condition is detected 4 20 mA Required Addressing 9 Words In Input Ranges Selectable on a per channel basis Bipolar 10 5 Vdc 20 mA Unipolar 0 10Vdc 0 5 0 20 mA Unipolar w Offset 1 5 Vdc 4 20 mA Voltage Input Linear Measuring Range Input range x 1 024 Absolute Maximum Input 50 Vdc Input Impedance gt 20 MQ Current Input Linear Measuring Range Input range x 1 024 Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA Input Impedance 2500 0 03 Resolution 16 Bit 10 Vdc 0 10 Vdc 15 Bit 5 0 5 Vdc 20 mA 0 20 mA 14 Bit 1 5Vdc 4 20 mA Absolute Accuracy Error 25 C Voltage Mode Add 0 03 in Current Mode Typical 0 0396 Maximum 0 05 of full scale Linearity 0 008 Accuracy Drift w Temperature Typical 0 0015 of full scale C Maximum 0 004 of full scale C 840
262. B Communication Tap Grounding This appendix provides information on grounding issues for the chassis power supply Modbus Plus and other equipment and system requirements A chassis ground wire is required for each backplane The wire is connected between one of four ground screws located on the backplane and the main ground point of the power system This wire should be green or green with a yellow stripe and the AWG rating must be at a minimum sized to meet the fuse rating of the supply circuit On each power supply connector there is a ground connection This connection must be made for safety reasons The preferred connection is between the power supply connector ground terminal and one of the backplane ground screws This wire should be green or green with a yellow stripe and at a minimum the same AWG rating as the power connections to the supply In backplanes with multiple power supplies each supply should have a ground connection between its input connector and the backplane ground screws Note It is recommended that the power supplying the I O modules be grounded at the main ground point Modbus Plus network drop cables require a ground connection to the backplane The connection is made by means of a metal loop clamp that grounds the cable shield to the ground point The maximum allowable distance from the ground point to the drop cable s connector is 30 cm 11 8 in 840 USE 100 00 Se
263. Blink N A MSG Out Green Off Off Blink N A Wink Green Off Off Blink on Blink command Srvc Yellow Off Blink Off N A Wink LED Error Codes e If not lit either the LON module requires configuration and mapping or is not communicating with the CPU by way of the DX Loadable e If a LON module is inserted into the backplane and the Ready LED does not illuminate the Wink LED should be observed for an error code e See the following Wink LED error codes The Wink LED is used to display error conditions The following table shows the number of times the LED blinks for each type of error LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Error Condition 1 Module is in the bootloader Error in writing to flash memory Error in initializing the Lon Works network 2 3 4 Error in the module configuration 210 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules Front Panel Push Buttons Front Panel Connectors RS 232 Configuration Port Two push buttons are located on the front ofthe NOL module The service pin push button initiates the LonWorks network installation When depressed it causes the Service LED to illuminate and forces the Neuron Chip in the module to output its unique 48 bit ID and Program ID The reset push button performs a hardware reset of the module and must be done each time new firmware has been downloaded Note The Reset push button is recessed and
264. C OUT Specifications Number of Output Points 16 in four 4 point groups LEDs Active F 1 16 Green Indicates point status 1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 Red Indicates group has a blown fuse or no field power Required Addressing 1 word out Voltage rms Working 20 56 Vac Absolute Maximum 63 Vac for 10 s 100 Vac for 1 cycle 111 Vac peak for 1 3 ms Frequency 47 63 Hz ON State Drop Point 1 5 Vac Minimum Load Current rms 5 mA Maximum Load Current rms Each Point 4 A continuous 20 56 Vac rms Each Group 4 A continuous Per Module 16 A continuous See the derating chart Off State Leakage Point 1 mA max The specifications stated are pending UL CSA approval This module was originally approved at 2 A each point 12 A 0 50 C per group 608 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications 17 The following figure shows the DAO84220 derating chart 16 15 14 gt 13 12 11 N 10 K N 20 56 V rms TOTAL MODULE CURRENT A m Q O O 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C Surge Current Maximum rms Per Point Per Group One Cycle 30A 45A Two Cycles 20A 30A Three Cycles 10A 25A Applied DV DT 400 V us Output Protection RC snubber
265. CATION ZONE 1 GROUP IIA IIB IIC See Note 1 Thermocouple Type J K E T R S B See Note 2 See Note 1 mV Source Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connec tions Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 Thermocouple tip may be grounded if required Note 3 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module 140A1I33000 TC Wiring Diagram 396 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD resistor connection Notes related to CSA certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Vec 15 5 V 123 mA Ca 0 47 uf La 1 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION I Source 1 Source 1 N C Source 2 N C Source 2 oo Note 3 Install in accordance V Sense 2 with Canadian Electrical Code Part for installation in Canada Source 3 Note 4 Install in accordance v Sensas with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for N installation in the United States I Source 4 Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be ground
266. CIO30 module INPUT 1 N C INPUT 2 N C N C INPUT 3 N C INPUT 4 N C N C INPUT 5 N C INPUT 6 N C N C INPUT 7 N C INPUT 8 N C N C amp O 9 9 9 amp amp amp amp amp 9 9 9 C 9 9 O INPUT 1 4 Jumper SENSE 1 INPUT 2 4 I SENSE2 N C INPUT 3 4 1 SENSE 3 INPUT 4 4 1 SENSE 4 N C INPUT 5 4 1 SENSE 5 INPUT 6 4 1 SENSE 6 N C INPUT 7 4 1 SENSE 7 INPUT 8 4 SENSE 8 N C Current Source Voltage i d Source 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 481 I O Modules Note 1 The current and voltage sources are supplied by the user fusing is at the discretion of the user 2 Either a shielded or unshielded signal cable may be used Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end 3 Unused inputs may cause the activation of the F LED To avoid this occurrence wire unused channels in voltage mode to a channel that is in use 4 N C Not connected 482 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AC104000 High Density Analog in I O Module Overview The 140 104000 is a 16 channel analog input module which accepts mixed current inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ACIO4000 a
267. CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU11302 Controller module CPU 256 K 1xModbus Plus Max IEC Program 109 K requires IEC only Exec CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components Model Number ENSE Module Description LED Area Color Code Removable door Customer Identification Label Part 043513804 Fold label and place it inside door Part 043502480 CN Battery ar Memory Protect and pem ASCII Comm parameter of Slide Switches mem not used Modbus Modbus S Modbus Connector 0 Modbus Plus woa Q Connector li RA Chan A ttes D Network ode 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 105 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU11302 CONTROLLER module Specifications 984 Ladder Logic 8 k words max Reference Capacity Discrete 8192 In and 8192 Out max Register 9999 max Local I O Main Backplane Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Requires expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In 64 Out Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31 Distributed I O Maximum Num
268. Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60 Pf ft Inductance 0 20 uH ft Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe I S cables of one module must be routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Voc Vmax Isc lt Imax Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Leable 31001364 Rev 00 NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION O Monit I S Module AIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D mmm m um SEE NOTE 1 I S Field Device R 500 OHMS Max SEE NOTE 2 or 1 pu Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end Chassis Ground can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms Note 3 The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter Note 2 More than one device See Note 3 Note 4 Unused channels will show open loop unless out
269. Channel 6 data Register 7 Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data The I O map status byte for this module is as follows 81716 51413 1 2 i Channel 1 loop broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 2 loop broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 3 loop broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 4 loop broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 5 loop broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 6 loop broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 7 loop broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 8 loop broken wire 4 20 mA 388 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Modsoft Module Use Modsoft s Module Zoom feature to display and select the module channel Zoom Selections ranges and time out state Time out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped The following figure shows the time out state for the Modsoft module zoom feature Channel X Range Selection Channel X Time out State 41020 0 16 000 410 20 0 Oto 20 0 20 000 25 0 25 000 4 095 Disabled Last Value User Defined User Defined Time Out Value is in Percentage 50 00 should be entered as 5000 Channel X User Defined Time Out Value 0 DEC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 389 Intrinsically Safe Modules
270. Connectors AS W955 xxx MSx Computer _ Signal Pin Pin Signal Function 1 No Connection 1 Shield TXD 2 2 RXD Serial data RXD 3 3 TXD Serial data GND 4 7 GND Ground DTR 5 6 DSR Control line DSR 6 20 DTR Control line RTS 4 RTS Control line CTS 8 KS 45 CTS Control line 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 365 Intelligent Special Purpose The MSX is also equipped with a 50 pin servo connector for communication with feedback devices Servo Connector Note The tables below show the 50 pin servo connector signals Pin numbers correspond to both the MSB and MSC modules When the signals differ from each other they are shown separated by a slash i e Pin Number 34 MSB MSC The following figure shows the server connector signals from left to right 50 34 Server Connector Signals eseug g O N 35 34 9 eseud O N 36 eseug LDJA 37 jne4 eAuq 38 ON 1961002 39 ON peuo ejqeu3 e ug 40 UOWWOD ejqeu3 eAug 41 uBiH duieueAQ 42 M07 43 euisoo O N 44 M07 1ndu O N 1ndu euiS O N 46 45 1ndu euiS O N 47 YBIH 1ndino eouei8jeu O N 48 M03 1ndino eoue18jeu O N 49 50 The following figure shows the serv
271. D GREEN YELLOW GREEN a BLUE YELLOW SHIELD EARTH GROUND GND LEAD Quantum Power Suppl Wire to the power supply as follows 125 Vdc Brown wire 125 Vdc COM Blue wire GND 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 737 Pwr amp Grnding Guide The following table provides a list of parts for the 125 Vdc Powered Installation Figure Callout Vendor or Part Number Description Instruction equivalent 1 Offlex Series 35005 Line Cord Terminate the shield at the 100cy power supply ground terminal 2 Steward 28 BO686 200 Ferrite Bead Install next to the filter and Fair Rite 2643665702 secure with tie wraps at Both ends of the ferrite bead CAUTION damage European compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC the 140CPS51100 and the 140CPS52400 must be installed in accordance with these instructions Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment 738 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies Overview There exist some important design differences between various models of Quantum power supplies that require careful consideration by the system designer in order to achieve maximum system performance The principal difference lies in the generation within the power s
272. Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 900 mA Power Dissipation 4 5 W TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 C Maximum Number of NOM 2 NOE and MMS modules any combination This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I Os For each word of Register I O configured one word of I O words must be subtracted from the total available The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word of Register I O must be subtracted from the total available Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Processor LED Indicators The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators and Descriptions Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus Error A Mem Prt 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 127 CPU Modules The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions Indication when On The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics The CPU has been started and is solving logic see the following table for Run LED error codes Communications are active on the Modbus port Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on The battery needs replacing LED Descriptions LEDs Color Ready Green Run Green Modbus Green Modbus Green Mem Prt Amber Bat L
273. E 100 00 September 2002 81 Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CPS21100 wiring diagram Not used Not used 24 Vdc Common 24 Vdc Not used Not used ODDO PERSE Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 82 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies 140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply 24 Vdc 8 A Module The following provides information on the DC summable power supply 24 Vdc 8 A Overview module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module N N Model Number ERU Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door am Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 83 Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS21400 PS 24 Vdc power supply module Specifications Input Requirements I
274. F1 N C N C INPUT 2A INPUT 2A INPUT2B INPUT 2B PRESET 2C PRESET 2 DUTPUT RESET 20 OUTPUT RESET 2 N C N C ENABLE 2 ENABLE 2 N C N C OUTPUT 2A OUTPUT 2B LO FILTER SEL 2 VREF2 OUTPUT SUPPLY RETURN Ji 1111 24 Vdc Y o 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 327 Intelligent Special Purpose Note Notes on Wiring Diagram 3 Quadrature input Constant enable Counter 2 not used N C Not Connected Q O N Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays 328 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 4 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 4 OUTPUT RESET 10 N C ENABLE 1 N G OUTPUT 1A LO FILTER SEL 1 N C INPUT 2A INPUT 2B PRESET 2C OUTPUT RESET 20 N C ENABLE 2 N C OUTPUT 2A LO FILTER SEL 2 OUTPUT SUPPLY INPUT 1A INPUT 1B PRESET 1C INPUT 1 INPUT 1B PRESET 1C OUTPUT RESET 104 2 N C ENABLE 1 N N C OUTPUT 1B i VREF1 Wapu OOOOH SGS OO N C INPUT 2A INPUT 2B PRESET 2C OUTPUT RESET 20 N C ENABLE 2 N C OUTPUT 2B GGG OOAD OAOA RETURN 840 USE 100 00 Sept
275. Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 Word In Operating Voltages and Currents ON voltage 15 30 OFF voltage 3 5 ON current 2 0 8 0 mA OFF current 0 0 5 mA Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 Response OFF ON 30 us max ON OFF 130 us max Input Protection 30 reverse polarity Isolation Point to Point 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Point to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 400 mA Power Dissipation 2 0 W 0 30 W x the number of points on External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 353 Intelligent Special Purpose LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module ACTIVE 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the HLI34000 high speed interrupt module LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned on Note Due to the speed of the module LED indications do not represent the state of the input signal when the input signal is a short duration pulse 354 840 USE 100 00 September 2002
276. Group B VREF supplies can be different voltage levels LO FILTER SEL Enables the internal 200 Hz filter when connected to Return Terminal 39 OUTPUT Internal FET switches connect the output supply wired to Terminal 40 to the Output 1A 1B 2A 2B terminals at output assert times POWER SUPPLY External 24 Vdc power supply connection Required for the module interface and for Outputs 1A 1B 2A and 2B RETURN External 24 Vdc power supply connection Required for the module interface and for Outputs 1A 1B 2A and 2B 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 343 Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram INPUT 1A INPUT 1B PRESET 1C OUTPUT RESET 10 N C ENABLE 1 N C OUTPUT 1A LO FILTER SEL 1 N C INPUT 2A INPUT 2B PRESET 2C OUTPUT RESET 20 N C ENABLE 2 N C OUTPUT 2A LO FILTER SEL 2 POWER SUPPLY The following figure shows the 140EHC20200 wiring diagram VREF INPUT 1A 0V INPUT 1B PRESET 1C OUTPUT RESET 10 N C ENABLE 1 OUTPUT 1B AMN VREF1 N C INPUT 2A INPUT 2B PRESET 2C OUTPUT RESET 20 N C ENABLE 2 N C OUTPUT 2B VREF2 WV RETURN ER ll 24 Vdc 344 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose The preceding wiring diagram shows single ended connections for T
277. Group to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 170 mA Power Dissipation 5W External Power Us 4 5 5 5 Vdc Module Supply 150 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 563 I O Modules Logic States Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion The following table shows the logic states for the DDI15310 module Input Voltage Input State LED 0 8 Vdc ON ON gt 4 0 Vdc 5 5 Ug gt OFF OFF 3 0 Vdc 4 5 Us No Connection OFF OFF 564 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI15310 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 4 INPUT 6 INPUT 8 GROUP A POWER GROUP B POWER GROUP C POWER GROUP D POWER INPUT 1 Ge INPUT 3 INPUT 5 INPUT 7 ll INPUT 10 INPUT 12 INPUT 14 INPUT 16 N C INPUT 9 INPUT 11 INPUT 13 INPUT 15 Open Collector INPUT 18 INPUT 20 INPUT 22 INPUT 24 INPUT 26 INPUT 28 INPUT 30 INPUT 32 amp amp amp 9 N C INPUT 17 INPUT 19 INPUT 21 INPUT 23 N C INPUT 25 INPUT 27 INPUT 29 INPUT 31 N C 5 Vdc 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 565 I O Modules
278. HTML pages allow you to configure the module s BOOTP DHCP FDR Server and SNMP Agent The HTTP Server is protected with a default name and password The default name and password are both USER and both are case sensitive They can both be changed via the Configuration page on the NOE 771 0x s Web Embedded Pages see the nstalling the Module chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide For the NOE7711x modules they can be changed via the FactoryCast Configurator The NOE771xx supports a maximum of 32 HTTP simultaneous connections 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 289 Ethernet Modules Note Browsers may open multiple connections so 32 HTTP connections does not indicate 32 simultaneous users Note The NOE7710x module does not support user downloaded Web pages You will need to purchase the 140NOE7711x module to support that requirement 290 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules Address Servers The following information describes the services provided by the Address Servers e BOOTP Server e DHCP Server BOOTP Server Note The BOOTP Server is available on the 140NOE771 00 and 10 models The BOOTsirap Protocol BOOTP software compliant with RFC 951 is used to assign IP addresses to nodes on an Ethernet network Devices hosts on the network issue BOOTP requests during their initialization sequence and a BOOTP Server that receives the request will e
279. I O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module Overview The AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 module accepts 230 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 16 individually isolated LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50Hz Input Impedance ON 175 264 Vac 9 7 mA max OFF 0 40 Vac 31 8 KQ capacitive 60 Hz Input Impedance ON 165 264 Vac 11 5 mA max OFF 0 40 Vac 26 5 kO capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 2 6 mA an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 264 Vac 10s 300 Vac 1 cycle 400 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Input to Input 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 180 mA Power Dissipation 5 5 W max External Power Not required for this module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 557 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency
280. Input Impedance gt 10 MQ Linearity 0 003 of full scale 0 60 C Resolution 12 bits plus sign 0 1 C Absolute Accuracy 0 5 C 25 C 0 9 0 60 C Accuracy Error 25 C Typical 0 05 of full scale Maximum 0 1 of full scale 390 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules RTD Resistance Module Specifications Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus gt 100 dB 50 60 Hz Input Filter 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min Update Time All Channels 3 wire 1 35 sec 2 or 4 wire 750 m sec Bus Current Required 400 mA Power Dissipation 2W External Power Not required for this module Fault Detection Out of range or broken wire conditions Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 61 or higher 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 391 Intrinsically Safe Modules Thermocouple Millivolt Module Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Thermocouple Millivolt module Thermocouple Millivolt Module Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active Green F Red 1 8 Red Indicated channel is out of range Broken wire condition is detected TC Types and Ranges TypesUKETSRB Ranges 210 760 270 1370 270 1000 270 400
281. Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt module 24 Vdc 288 24 INPUT 1 4 INPUT 2 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 I _ e e Il Sourcing Field Device N C INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 4 INPUT 8 N C INPUT 9 INPUT 10 4 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 4 N C INPUT 13 4 INPUT 14 4 INPUT 15 4 INPUT 16 N C Sinking Field Device G C9 9 CO 9 amp Q O 9 COO INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 amp amp amp amp GG 6 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 355 Intelligent Special Purpose Note 1 Either shielded or unshielded signal cables may be used the user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end 2 N C Not Connected 356 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose 140MSB MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules Overview Related Documentation MSX Motion Modules The Quantum single axis motion MSX modules are incremental encoder 140MSB10100 or resolver and encoder 140MSB MSC10100 feedback only modules contained in a single width housing It
282. Intrinsically Safe modules provide intrinsically safe power to field devices located in hazardous areas No external field power is required where these modules are installed Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules are designed to fit into a standard Quantum 140XBPOXX00 Quantum backplane The modules can be installed in any slot Intrinsically Safe position in the backplane The first slot is normally reserved for the power supply Modules module 376 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Hot Swapping Safe Area Wiring Practices Identification and Labeling Wiring Type and Grounding Hot swapping Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is not allowed per intrinsic safety standards WARNING Hot Swap Do not attempt to hot swap a Quantum Intrinsically Safe module Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage Intrinsically safe wiring between Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules and the field devices located in the hazardous area must be separated from all other wiring This can be accomplished by the following methods e Separate blue wire ducts raceways or conduits e Grounded metal or insulated partitions between the intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe wiring e aseparation of two inches 50 mm of air space between the intrinsically safe and non intrinsically safe wiring With this method the intrinsically safe and non intr
283. Load Values The following table shows the load values 400201 0243 LOAD VALUES command disable Counter 2 preset and enable Counter 1 400202 0064 Counter 1 maximum count count after which Output 1B turns on 400203 0032 Counter 1 setpoint count when Output 1A turns on 400204 0000 Counter 2 maximum count not used in this example 400205 0000 Counter 2 setpoint not used in this example 400206 0000 Output Assert Time Not used in this example one output only if used Zeros in the 4X registers also mean no change Setpoint maximum count and assert time can only be set to zero using the Modzoom screens When the registers in this example are echoed zeros will appear but the actual content in the module will be unchanged from previous values In this example Counter 2 is disabled and its outputs and timed assert have not been selected Registers 400204 6 have no meaning 316 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose After the module executes the Configure and Load Value s commands they are echoed in the I O mapped registers except for the command register s low 8 bits Command execution time by the module is 1 ms Actual time between the 4X register block move and the echo response display in the 3X registers is dependent on User Logic and hardware configuration An echo of the Configuration command registers would appear as follows Response for The following table
284. N 6 RETURN 7 RETURN 8 N C RETURN 9 RETURN 10 RETURN 11 RETURN 12 N C RETURN 13 RETURN 14 RETURN 15 RETURN 16 N C amp amp amp GG 9 9 CO 9 OJOJOO GG G Qe INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 N C INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 N C INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 N C INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 N C L Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected 536 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DA135300 Quantum I O AC Input 24 Vac Module Overview The AC Input 24 Vac 4x8 module accepts 24 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI35300 AC input 24 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 14 30 Vac 11 1 mA max OFF 0 5 Vac 3 1 capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 12 30 Vac 13 2 mA max OFF 0 5 Vac 2 6 kO capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 1 9 mA an Externa
285. N A N A Ground Braid N A Flat braid 0 5 in 134 mm with a maximum length of 4 100 mm 5 Offlex Series 35005 Line Cord Third lead green yellow is 100cy The maximum length is 8 5 215 mm not used terminate the shield at the power supply ground terminal 24 Vdc Powered The following figure shows the 3 A 24 Vdc powered systems for CE compliance Systems for CE Compliance See System for CE Compliance Figure Shielded Cable and Ferrite Bead 24 Vdc Common 24 Vdc EARTH GROUND l i BACKPLANE CAUTION European compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC the 140CPS21100 the 140CRA21120 and the 140CRA21220 must be installed in accordance with these instructions Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 734 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Detailed System for CE Compliance The following figure shows the detailed installation for the CE compliance system and the parts list callouts QUANTUM BACKPLANE BACKPLAN 140 XBP XXX 00 GND SCREWS BROWN 24 VDC SI COM GREEN YELLOW Quantum Power Supply BLUE Wire to the power supply EARTH as follows GROUND 24 COM Blue wire 24 Vdc Brown wire GND T
286. Note 4 Install in accordance connected to 1 5 ground with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 3 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 4 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx Note 6 Intrinsically Safe I S 140 CPS xxx xx cables of one module must be routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 7 I S devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Veo lt Vmax 1 5 Module Isc lt Imax DIO 330 00 Ca gt Ci Blue Terminal Strip La gt Li Leable 31001366 Rev 00 14001033000 Wiring Diagram 428 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Simulator Modules 16 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on discrete and analog simulator modules What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page 140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module 430 140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module 432 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 429 Simulator Modules 140XSM00200 Quantum Point Discrete Simulator Module Overview The 140XSM00200 mo
287. Number Description Module Loadable Backplane Support Bus Power mA Interface Required Local RIO DIO Technique 140NOE77100 1 Ethernet TCP IP N N Y N N 750 10 100 TX FX 140NOE77110 1 Ethernet TCP IP N N Y N N 750 10 100 TX FX Factory Cast 140MMS42500 Multi Axis Motion Option N Y N N 2500 Controller w Module SERCOS 140NOL91 100 LonWorks Map 16 Y Y Y N 950 Interface twisted 16 pair FTT10 140NOL91110 LonWorks I O Map 16 Y Y Y N 950 Interface twisted 16 pair TPT XF 78 140NOL91120 LonWorks Map 16 Y Y Y N 950 Interface twisted 16 pair TPT XF 1250 1 The software for this module is a ModConnect product 36 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Network Configurations Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications Overview Modbus and Modbus Plus Features Modbus Each Quantum CPU includes both a Modbus and Modbus Plus communications port The features offered by both these communication protocols are listed in the following table The following table shows the Modbus and Modbus Plus features Features Modbus Modbus Plus Technique Slaves polled by a master Peer to peer token rotation Speed 19 2K typical 1M Electrical RS 232 various others RS 485 Distance without repeater RS 232 50 ft 15 m 1 500 ft 457 m Media Various Twisted pair Fiber optics Max nodes per network 247 64 Max network traffic 300 registers sec 9
288. O Remote I O and Distributed I O Configurations Overview Local RIO and DIO Configuration The following information contains a description of the Local I O Remote I O and Distributed I O and their configurations These configurations see the configuration table below for valid Quantum configurations can be equipped with a combination of Quantum CPUs Power supplies I O interfaces Expert modules modules Note Refer to System Specifications for the Quantum Module p 43 for a complete list of part numbers for all Quantum modules The following table provides valid Quantum configurations including backplanes and modules If Configuration Backplane Required Optional Modules Not Type Is Types Typical Modules Are Modules Are Permitted Are Are Local 6 10 16 slots Power Supply RIO Head I O RIO Drop DIO CPU NOx Drop RIO 6 10 16 slots Power Supply I O CPU RIO Head RIO Drop DIO Drop NOx DIO 2 3 4 6 slots DIO Drop Power Supply CPU RIO Head y o RIO Drop NOx NOM NOA and NOE Remote I O is typically used for large number of modules drops 6 10 or 16 slot backplanes Distributed I O is typically used for small drops using 2 3 4 or 6 slot backplanes Note Every Quantum module requires power from the backplane except power supply and DIO modules For a valid configuration add up the required backplane current in mA for every m
289. O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 module accepts 115 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAIB4300 AC input 115 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 16 in two 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 85 132 Vac 11 1 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 14 4 capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 79 132 Vac 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 12 kQ capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 2 1 mA an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 132 Vac 10s 156 Vac 1 cycle 200 Vac 1 3 ms 276 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Input to Input Allinputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage Group to Group 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 549 I O Modules Specifications Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 180 mA Power Dissipation 5 5 W max External Power Not r
290. O Link To Other RIO Drops I P S CPU I O VO VO 490NR95400 Fiber Optic Repeaters for RIO Remote I O Drop Typical Hot Standby System with Remote I O 266 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Network Status Recommended Materials for Fiber Optic Links Connectors Termination Kits The information about the condition of the network is presented in the form of Network Status This information indicates the loss of connection the first break in the self healing ring and is similar to the way existing 140NOM21200 reports the loss of redundant cable The break of the fiber cable will be detected by the module not receiving the signal from the side where the cable is broken and will be reported as a Cable B Framing error by MBPSTAT This condition will also activate the FRNGoff LED on the front of the module Modicon does not manufacture fiber optic products such as cables connectors or special tools However we have experience with third party suppliers of materials and can give some guidelines on what will work with our products The following table shows the connector types Connector Type Part Number Operating Temperature ST Bayonet Epoxy 3M 6105 40 80 C ST Bayonet Hot Melt 3M 6100 40 60 C ST Bayonet Epoxy AMP 501380 5 Series 30 70 C ST Bayo
291. OUP A COMMON OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 OUTPUT 8 GROUP B COMMON N C N C N C N C GROUP D HOT OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 12 GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 16 amp amp amp amp amp amp amp 5 amp 9 O CO 9 86 6 O 9 GG CO O GROUP D COMMON Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 611 I O Modules CAUTION Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common single phase AC power source Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output then an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent must be wired in parallel with the switch Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 612 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DAO85300 Quantum I O AC Output 24 230 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Output 230 Vac 4x8 module switches 24 230 Vac powered loads Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 230 VAC OUT module Specifications
292. OUP B SUPPLY INPUT 2 OUTPUT GROUP B COMMON INPUT 1 INPUT 4 INPUT 3 INPUT 6 INPUT 5 INPUT 8 INPUT 7 N C INPUT GROUP A COMMON INPUT 10 INPUT 9 INPUT 12 INPUT 11 EI L INPUT 14 e 6 INPUT 138 INPUT 16 INPUT 15 N C 8 amp amp amp 6 D 99 9 CO 9 amp GG GC 9 6 O G OO 9 9 O INPUTGROUP B COMMON N Core 680 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected CAUTION AC Power Compatibility The AC power energizing each group must be from a common single phase AC power source Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output then an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent must be wired in parallel with the switch Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 681 I O Modules 140DDM39000 I O DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source Module Overview Th
293. Out of range or 8 red LEDs to indicate broken wire conditions Bus Current Required 200 mA Power Dissipation 1W External Power Not required for this module 488 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the ARI03010 wiring diagram SHIELD 4 4 WIRE RTD I SOURCE 1 I SOURCE 1 V SENSE 1 V SENSE x I SOURCE 2 SOURCE 2 V SENSE V SENSE 2 SHIELD 2 SHIELD 1 TOTUM I SOURCE 3 GD 2 WIRE RTD V SENSE 3 V SENSE 3 I SOURCE 4 SOURCE 4 69 09 E 9 9 SOURCE 5 V SENSE 5 SOURCE 6 ES V SENSE 6 SHIELD 6 SOURCE 7 V SENSE 7 SOURCE 8 4 SOURCE 5 V SENSE 5 I SOURCE 6 V SENSE 6 SHIELD 5 3 WIRE RTD ISOURCE7 A V SENSE 7 I SOURCE 8 V SENSE 8 V SENSE 8 SHIELD 8 amp amp SHIELD 7 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 489 I O Modules Note 1 The module is calibrated per IEC Publication 751 for platinum RTDs 1002 9 0 degrees C TCR a 0 003850 Q degrees C DIN 43760 for nickel RTDs American Platinum RTDs 1000 0 degrees C TCR a 0 00392
294. PUT 7 GROUP A COMMON INPUT 9 INPUT 11 INPUT 13 INPUT 15 amp amp GG 9 CO CO OJOJOO GROUP B COMMON INPUT 17 INPUT 19 INPUT 21 INPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON INPUT 25 INPUT 27 INPUT 29 INPUT 31 Q9 GROUP D COMMON Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 545 l O Modules 140DA154000 Quantum I O 115 VAC In Module Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 16x1 module accepts 115 Vac inputs Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAI54000 115 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 16 individually isolated LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50 Hz Typical Input impedance ON 85 132 Vac 11 1 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 14 4 KQ capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input impedance ON 79 132 Vac 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 12 capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 2 1 mA an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 132 Vac 10s 156 Vac 1 cycle 200 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 l
295. Rear Panel Two rotary switches refer to the following illustration and table are located on the Switches rear panel of the CPU They are used for setting Modbus Plus node addresses for the unit SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 SW1 Top SW Bottom The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW switches SW1 and SW2 Switches Node SW1 SW2 Address 1 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 an address greater than 32 is selected the RIO module displays a flashing Error A and Error B LED to indicate an error condition Only addresses 1 32 are valid 220 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 DIO 140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I O DIO Modules Overview This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus Distributed I O DC powered single CRA21120 and dual 21220 channel modules DIO Module The following figure shows the parts of the Distributed I O DIO module qe Customer Identification Label mw Model Number Fold label and place it inside door Gir Module Description Part 043504640 LED Area Color Cod
296. Reg 300001 300002 Number of Outputs 32 Ref Output Ref Description If you choose to display or develop a program using these values the table module relationship is given in the following example 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 459 I O Modules Table Module The following figure shows the table module configuration Configuration Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 yo yo B C Slot 2 L Slot 1 300001 Slot 4 Slot 3 VOA 300002 Slot 6 Slot 5 VOC 300003 Given the above sample configuration if you select 300001 as the starting address of the status table and there are no I O modules in the first two locations the first I O module status is found in the least significant byte of the second word i e position 3 The table fills until the last I O mapped module is found Note The bit pattern reported in each status error byte is dependent on the module type 460 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 18 2 Analog Input Modules Ata Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum Analog Input Modules What s in this This section contains the following topics ion Section Topic Page Analog Input Modules 462 140AC103000 I O Analog In Module 479 140AC104000 High Density Analog in I O Module 483 140ARI03010 I O RTD Input 8 Channel Module 487 140ATI03000 I O Thermocouple Input 8 Channel Module 491 140AVI03000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipola
297. Removable Door Part 043513804 S O RIO Coax Connector E e lt 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 233 Networking Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Remote I O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules Specifications I O Type Quantum Words Drop 64 In 64 Out Coax Termination Internal 75 Q Coax Shield Capacitor to ground Data Transfer Rate 1 544 mb Dynamic Range 35 dB Isolation 500 Vdc coaxial cable center conductor to ground External Connections One Channel CRA93100 One F type female connector with a right angle adapter Two Channels CRA93200 Two F type female connectors with a right angle adapter General Holdup Time Software configurable Note In the event of a communication loss with the remote processor this is the time that output modules will retain their last operating state Input module data will be held in the system controlling CPU After this time output modules will assume their predefined time out states and inputs will be zeroed by the CPU Diagnostics Power Up Power Up and Runtime Dual Port Memory Check Executive Checksum LAN Controller Check RAM Address Data Bus Current Required Typical Single Channel 600 mA Dual Channel 750 mA Power Dissipation Typical Single Channel 3 W Dual Channel 3 8 W
298. S22400 DC Redundant Power Supply 24 Vdc 8 A Module 86 140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply 48 Vdc 8 A Module 89 140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply 48 Vdc 8 A Module 92 140CPS51100 DC Power Supply 125 Vdc 3 A Module 96 140CPS52400 DC Standalone Redundant Power Supply 125 Vdc 8 A 99 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 61 Power Supplies 140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac 3 A Module Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac 3 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module Model Number ar Sea Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Cover l 1 9 2 9 3 lt 4 5 ACL Y 6 ACN X lt EH Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 62 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Specifications supply module The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11100 115 230 VAC power Specifications Input Require
299. SINK MONITOR 1 Field Device RETURN OUTPUT 2 SINK Field Device N C RETURN OUTPUT 3 SINK Field Device RETURN OUTPUT 4 SINK Field Device N C RETURN OUTPUT 5 SINK Field Device RETURN OUTPUT 6 SINK Field Device N C RETURN OUTPUT 7 SINK RETURN Field Device E OUTPUT 8 SINK N C MONITOR 2 N C N C MONITOR 3 N C MONITOR 4 N C N C MONITOR 5 N C MONITOR 6 N C N C MONITOR 7 N C MONITOR 8 24 Vdc loop N C S9 G GO S 5 5 G amp 5 OO 9 Co G G O N C v supply LE 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 511 I O Modules Notes on Wiring Diagram At power up channel outputs are all at zero current 0 mA VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum Either shielded or unshielded cables may be used In noisy environments twisted shielded cable is recommended Shielded cable should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end Unused outputs may cause the activation of the F fault LED To avoid this
300. SUPPLY OUTPUT 26 OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY n N SIF 3 4 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 7 GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON amp 8 amp amp 9G OOOO amp amp amp 5 5 amp G2 6 OO 9 Co 9 9 OUTPUT 25 A ANV gt OUTPUT 27 FIELD OUTPUT 29 DEVICE OUTPUT 31 GROUP D COMMON 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 625 I O Modules CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions It is recommended that each point be protected with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Part 57 0078 000 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 626 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DDO35301 I O DC Output 24 VDC 4x8 Discrete Source Module Overview The 140DDO35301 source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads and is short circuit and overload resistant Specifications module The following table shows the specifications for the DDO35301 24 VDC OUT Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 p
301. SW2 bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the Modbus Plus node address The following illustration shows the setting for an example address of 11 SW1 T I SW2 Bottom The following figure shows the node address settings for the SW1 and SW2 switches SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 1 4 Note If 0 address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address 256 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Modbus The NOM25200 module is equipped with an RS 232 port see below located on the Connector front of the module This port uses an eight position RJ45 phone jack type connector The following figure shows the NOM25200 Pin 1 connector ADIMI pini Note A D shell adapter is available from Modicon for NOM25200 to computer connections a 110XCA20300 9 pin adapter for PC AT type computers see the illustration pinout table below The following figures show the 9 pin adapter front view left and side view right OB Pin 1 99 110 20300 eO Pin 9
302. September 2002 Quantum Configurations Dual Cable RIO The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum RIO configuration Configuration o PS CPU eag I O ER Local I O Drop o o Lo Up to 31 Drops RIO RIO Tap k 17 RIO Tap and 52 0422 000 RIO RIO RIO Tap and 9 Tap Terminator RIO RIO PSprop YO VO VQ 1 PS ro VO VO VO RESTER RR 2 PE LI I RURUN LI I RURUN u i RIO RIO Drop n B800 Series An RIO tap MA 0185 100 is required for every RIO drop in the system Note The dual cable option is provided for systems that require added protection against cable breaks or damaged connectors With two cables connected between the host and each node no single cable break will disrupt communications Hot Standby The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I O networks A System Quantum Hot Standby system may be set up using single or dual cable configurations refer to the following two figures 22 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Configurations Single Cable Hot The following figure is an exam
303. Signal 2 N C o N C ic SEE NOTE 1 a N C f Signal 4 TRANSMITTER NIC HE N C Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connec tions Shields should be left open at N C elt 5 Signal 5 the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground V6 C C Ge 25 V6 screws on the backplane Signal 6 NS 5 lE 3 Note 2 A dropping resistor 100 Ohms is across the signal and V N C gE N C pins of each channel V is 5 OG V7 internally connected to 1 5 ground Ja N C mA Signal 7 Note 3 Three wire transmitters should be provided power only v8 HE V8 from the module An external power supply should not be used ve e ep gt Note 4 Pins marked Not N C N C Connected are not electronically LS Module All 330 10 connected to the module Blue Terminal Strip 31001363 Rev 00 140 1133010 Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 405 Intrinsically Safe Modules Notes related to CSA certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voc 23 8 V lg 112 mA 127nf La 1 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part for installation in Canada Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To
304. TD Resistance input module it requires Register nine contiguous input 3x registers assigned as follows Assignments Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Channel 5 data Register 6 Channel 6 data Register 7 Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data Register 9 Input Status Word 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 8 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 7 1 pioen Wire or out of range on channel 6 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 5 1 gs Wire or out of range on channel 4 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 3 We Broken Wire or out of range on channel 2 1 Broken Wire or out of range on channel 1 1 2 3 EL 3 14 15 16 1 Range warning on Channel 8 STI 1 Range warning on Channel 7 1 Range warning on Channel 6 1 Range warning on Channel 5 1 Range warning on Channel 4 1 Range warning on Channel 3 1 Range warning on Channel 2 1 Range warning on Channel 1 382 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Thermocouple When the 140A1133000 is configured as a Thermocouple Millivolt input module it Millivolt Map requires ten contiguous input 3x registers assigned as follows Register Register 1 Channel 1 data Assignments
305. TE 1 516 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 18 4 Analog Input Output Modules Ata Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum Analog input output modules What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Configuration of the 140 9000 Analog Input Output Module 518 140 9000 Analog Input Output Module 523 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 517 l O Modules Configuration of the 140AMM09000 Analog Input Output Module Overview This section provides information on configuration of the analog input output module 140AMMO09000 Note Modsoft V2 2 or above is required to set up your Quantum I O configuration I O Map Register This module requires five contiguous input registers and two output 4x Assignment registers 3X Registers The following figure shows the 3x registers 3x Registers Register 1 Channel 1 input data Register 2 Channel 2 input data Register 3 Channel 3 input data Register 4 Channel 4 input data Note The input data format and resolution are selected in Zoom screen Voltmeter mode is recommended for bipolar ranges with signed decimal numbers 518 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modules Status Warning The following figure shows the status warnings f
306. The NOE31100 is equipped with one RJ 45 connector instead of the fiber optic connectors as shown above on the NOE35100 276 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the SY MAX Ethernet modules NOE31100 and 35100 Specifications Communication Ports NOE31100 1 10BASE T Ethernet network RJ 45 port NOE35100 2 10BASE FL Ethernet network ST style ports Cable Type 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet 2 3 4 or 6 twisted pairs with a solid copper core 10Base T twisted pair RG58a u or RG58C U coaxial Belden 9907 82907 or equivalent Wire Size 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet 20 AWG 10Base T twisted pair 22 24 26 AWG Topology 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet Bus 10Base T twisted pair Star Connector 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet BNC UG 274 10Base T twisted pair Modular RJ 45 4 pins of 8 are used by 10Base T Backplane Compatibility Requires Quantum CPU 3 4 6 10 and 16 position backplanes Compatible SY MAX 802 3 Devices Model 450 and Software Model 650 SFI160 SFW390 VAX Streamline Version 1 3 Bus Current Required 1A 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 277 Ethernet Modules LED Indicators The following figure shows the NOE3X100 LED indicators and Descriptions Active Ready Fault Run Collision Link Kernel Appl
307. The following figure shows the remote I O network F connector part number 490RIO00211 This is the F connector for the quad shield RG 11 cable 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 705 Misc Components 706 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Spare Parts Spare Parts Overview This section provides information on miscellaneous spare parts and fuses Miscellaneous The following table shows the miscellaneous spare parts for the Quantum modules Spare Parts Spare Part Number Description 043502480 X13 CPU Door Label 043502952 Universal Module Door smoked obsolete 043503019 1X4 AC Power Supply Door Label 043503328 24 Vdc 7 Position includes safety cover Field Wiring Terminal Block 043503381 Module Ground Clip 043504417 NOM Door Label 043505673 AC DIO Door Label 043504639 2X4 DC Power Supply Door Label 043504640 DC DIO Door Label 043504680 RIO Door Label 043504708 111 AC Power Supply Door Label 043504710 211 DC Power Supply Door Label 043506326 115 230 Vac 7 Position includes safety cover Field Wiring Terminal Block 043506673 424 CPU Door Label 043513804 Universal Module Door clear 043509695 200 Series I O Conversion Connector Label 043503242 Yellow Safety Keys 6 043503243 White Safety Keys 6 043503020 Backplane Connector Dust Cover 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 707 Spare Parts
308. UTION Hardware Restrictions The cable for an Ethernet module must be routed through an Ethernet hub for the network to function properly Do not connect the module directly to another device Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 275 Ethernet Modules 140NOE3X100 Quantum Ethernet SY MAX Modules Overview Related Documentation Ethernet SY MAX Module This section includes information for the NOE31100 and 35100 SY MAX Ethernet modules The Quantum SY MAX Ethernet modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface for the Quantum Automation Series system to SY MAX devices via Ethernet For more detailed information see Quantum S Y MAX Ethernet Module User Guide 840USE11100 Version 1 0 The following figure shows the NOE3X100 SY MAX Ethernet modules Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Global Address Label Transmit Cable Connector Receive Cable Connector N 140 NOE 311 00 CONTROLLER Global Address Fiber Opti 10 base idu Rx v L lt Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door lt Note
309. W 0 4 V x Total Module Load Current External Power 19 2 30 Vdc Fusing Internal 5A fuse for each group Modicon Part 043502405 For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations p 624 External Each group is protected with a 5A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions It is recommended that each point be protected with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Part 4 57 0078 000 CAUTION damage Possible danger to equipment or personnel Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 623 I O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO35300 module Fuse Locations Points 9 16 Points 17 24 Points Y er 25 32 624 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO35300 wiring diagram GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 4 3 4 A OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 16 GROUP B SUPPLY OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 24 GROUP C
310. X X 14000135310 x 14000136400 Not compatible with CableFast See 74000136400 I O DC Input 24 VDC 6x16 Telefast Input Module p 570 for re commended cables 14000167300 x 14000184100 x 14000185300 x x x x 140DDM39000 x 140DDM69000 X See Note 1 140DDO15310 x 140DDO35300 x x x 140DDO35301 x x x 140DDO35310 x 140DDO36400 Not compaitble with CableFast See 140DDO36400 I O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module p 636 for recommended cables 140DDO84300 X See Note 2 140DDO88500 X See Note 1 140DRA84000 X See Note 1 140DRC83000 X See Note 1 14005135300 x 140DVO85300 x X Valid Selections 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 753 CableFast Cabling Note These are the maximum load current capacities of the 140CFA04000 and CFG01600 terminal blocks 1 When using the 140CFA04000 terminal block the indicated module outputs are limited to 0 5 A per point 150 Vac maximum and 0 5 A per point 150 Vdc maximum When using the 140CFG01600 terminal block and either the 140XTS012xx or 140XTS102XX high power cables the indicated module output ratings are 2 A per point 150 Vac maximum and 2 A per point 150 Vdc maximum The 140CFA04000 block does not incorporate an isometric barrier and is not recommended for use with the 140ATIO3000 TC module Without such a barrier temperature readi
311. Y MAX any mix Drops 31 max Words Drop 64 In 64 Out ASCII 2 ports drop 32 ports 16 drops max Requires the use of AS P892 000 AS J892 101 102 or AS J290 0X0 at the RIO drops Coax Termination Internal 75Q Coax Shield Tied to chassis ground Data Transfer Rate 1 544 mb Dynamic Range 35 dB Isolation 500 Vdc coaxial cable center conductor to ground External Connections One Channel One F type female connector with a right angle adapter CRP93100 Two Channels Two F type female connectors with a right angle adapter CRP93200 General Diagnostics Power Up Power Up and Runtime Dual Port Memory Check Executive Checksum LAN Controller Check RAM Address Data Maximum Number of CRPs Supported by the Controller ore Bus Current Required Typical Single Channel 600 mA Dual Channel 750 mA Power Dissipation Single Channel 3 W Typical Dual Channel 3 8 W 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 229 Networking CAUTION Connectivity Compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC the RIO head module must be connected using quad shielded cable see the Remote I O Cable System Planning and Installation Guide 890USE10000 V2 0 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage LED Indicators The following figure shows the LED indi
312. a word is always 7FFFH if it is under range the channel s output data word is always 8001H These are the possible highest and lowest values Measurement This table shows thermocouple ranges Tables Thermocouple Ranges Data Input Minimum Normal Over Range Out of Format Reading Warning Range Set Modsoft J Type TC 228 5 210 to 760 760 1 to 778 6 2778 7 Signed KTypeTC 3029 270 to 1370 1370 110 1405 0 gt 1405 1 somat E Type TC 293 8 270 to 1000 1000 1 to 1023 9 gt 1024 0 T Type TC 279 5 270 to 400 400 1 to 409 6 gt 409 7 S Type TC 89 9 50 to 1665 1665 1 to 1705 0 gt 1705 1 R Type TC 89 6 50 to 1665 1665 1 to 1704 7 gt 1704 8 B Type TC 86 4 130 to 1820 1820 1 to 1863 7 gt 1863 8 See Note 3 This table shows millivolt ranges Millivolt Ranges Offset 100 mV 0 Binary 0 0 8000h None See Note 2 100 mV FFFFh Gain 25 25 mV 0 0 0 8000h None See Note 2 25 mV FFFFh Gain 100 472 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Note 1 Open Circuit Detect is always enabled for all TC types and may be disabled for linear ranges 2 On millivolt ranges if Open Circuit Detect is enabled this bit is set on Open Circuit Detect or input FFFFh 3 Data format changes to unsigned if the output is requested in units of 0 1 F to accommodate readings above 3276 8 F
313. abling blocks Terminal Block The following figure shows the terminal block for the 140CFB03200 module GROUPA Q Q OOO OOO CableFast 140 CFB 032 00 ULFILE E123528 rr Q amp J sHiELD J en E37 ET 0202010200199 59 Application The following are the application notes for the 140CFB03200 terminal block Notes 1 Configuration Arranged in four groups of eight I O points Two terminals per point prevent disruption of service due to a single point failure 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides individual 32 point 0 8 A fusing for the following input modules 140DAI35300 140DAI45300 140DAI55300 140DDO15310 140DD135300 and 14000185300 760 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Dimensions The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFB03200 terminal block ni i s i 83 8 mm 111 8 mm Y 9 3 in 236 2 mm lt 44 in 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 761 CableFast Cabling Wiring for the Imput Modules The following figure shows the 140CFB03200 wiring for the ollowing input modules 140DAI35300 140DA145300 140DAI55300 14000
314. ad port number in chkmst hdw proc 6Alh unknown controller type in reset busy flag 6A2h unknown function code in generate_poll_cmd proc 6A3h unknown function code in generate_logout_msg proc 6A4h slave link timeout on port other than port 9 6A5h illegal bypass command received by bypass code 513h ram address test error 412h ram data test error 311h prom checksum error 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 243 Modbus Plus NOMs Rear Panel Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the modules They are used Switches together to set the Modbus Plus node and Modbus port address for the unit Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 Rotary SW1 top switch sets the upper digit tens and rotary SW2 bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the Modbus Plus node address The illustration below shows the setting for an example address of 11 SW1 Top T SW2 Bottom Note If 0 or an address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address The following table shows the address settings for the SW1 and SW2 switches SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 O09 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 1 4 244 840 USE 100 00 September 2002
315. ad power down checksum 0100 No end of logic detected 0080 Watchdog timer has expired 0040 Real time clock has failed 0020 Bad coil used table 0010 RIO option has failed 0008 Illegal node type found 0004 User logic checksum error 0002 Discrete disable table error 0001 Bad configuration 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 823 Error Stpd Codes Definitions for Error Stopped Codes The following are definitions for Error Stopped Codes PLC unhealthy This condition indicates that the CPU has failed one or more of its health diagnostics In all probability the CPU will have to be replaced PLC stopped By itself an 8000 hex is not an error but a CPU state If for example a user issues a CPU stop command the status register would indicate 8000 hex An error condition exists when 8000 is anded with one or more of the previously defined errors bits 0 14 An example would be an error code of 8100 this suggests a PLC stopped with No End of Logic Node detected Bad I O map This error will occur if the user declares more than one I O drop in his configuration but does not have an RIO Head installed This error may also occur if a drop has been configured in such a way so as to exceed the maximum number of inputs outputs allowable per drop PLC unconfigured The user should expect this condition if he is trying to log into the CPU for the first time This error indicates that the CPU has not been configured The user
316. agram UL 428 direct CPU driver network interface techniques 33 discrete I O true high illustration 457 discrete I O true low illustration 458 discrete input 16 point modules description 530 module zoom selections 530 register assignments 530 discrete input 24 point modules description 531 map register assignment 531 module zoom selections 531 discrete input 32 point modules description 532 I O map register assignment 532 module zoom selections 532 discrete input 8 point module module zoom selections 415 register assignments 415 discrete input 96 point modules description 533 module zoom selections 533 register assignments 533 discrete input modules description 530 discrete input output 16 8 point modules I O map assignments outputs 674 module zoom selections inputs 674 module zoom selections outputs 675 register assignments 674 discrete input output modules configuration 671 discrete output 12 point module description 587 register assignments 587 xxii 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index discrete output 16 point modules description 589 module zoom selections 589 register assignments 589 discrete output 32 point modules description 590 module zoom selections 591 register assignments 590 discrete output 8 point modules description 416 585 map register assignment 416 585 module zoom selections 416 585 module zoom selections outputs 586 d
317. agraph the rate sample would be equal to 240 Encoder type selection is set using Command 1 CONFIGURE 01XX 4X 1 register bits 9 or 10 see the description of Command 1 in this section If the Encoder Type select bits are set to 0 either type of encoder will produce the Rate Sample as did versions of the module that were lower than V02 00 322 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram 1 The following figure shows the EHC20200 wiring diagram 1 VREF INPUT 1A INPUT 1A EOM INPUT 1B 5 S INPUT 1B PRESET 1C PRESET 1C OUTPUT RESET 10 OUTPUT RESET 10 nm 5 we NIC VREF ENABLE 1 D A ENABLE 1 5 b N C OR we OUTPUT 1A S OUTPUT 1B rra n LO FILTER SEL 1 D VREF1 4 N C N C INPUT 2A A 6 INPUT 2 e INPUT 2B 3 INPUT 2B b PRESET 2C 65 2 b OUTPUT RESET 20 OUTPUT RESET 20 5 N C N C ENABLE 2 ENABLE 24 G2 60 N C 83 N C OUTPUT 2A 69 OUTPUT 2B LO FILTER SEL 2 VREF2 OUTPUT SUPPLY RETURN EE iii Er 24 Vdc amp YN 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 323 Intelligent Special Purpose Note Notes on Wiring Diagram 1 Single ended pulse input Constant enable Count up Outputs 1A and 1B operate relays Counter 2 not used N C Not Connected
318. ailure When configured for voltage inputs no jumper installed between INPUT and ISENSE terminals if a broken field wire occurs readings will be non zero and not predictable Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 476 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Linear The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AVI03000 Analog Measuring Input module Ranges Data Format Input Under Normal Over Warning Warning 16 bitFormat 10 V 768 768 64 768 64 768 5 V 20 mA lt 16 768 16 768 48 768 gt 48 768 0 10 0 64 000 gt 64 000 0 5 V 0 20 0 32 000 gt 32 000 1 5 4 20 lt 6 400 6 400 32 000 gt 32 000 Voltmeter 10V 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 Format 4 5V 5 000 5 000 5 000 5 000 0 10V 0 10 000 gt 10 000 0 5V 0 5 000 5 000 1 5V 1 000 1 000 5 000 5 000 20 mA 20 000 20 000 20 000 20 000 0 20 mA 0 20 000 20 000 4 20 mA 4 000 4 000 20 000 20 000 12 bit Format 10 V 0 0 4 095 4 095 5 V 20 mA 0 0 4 095 4 095 0 10 V 0 4 095 4 095 0 5 V 0 20 mA 0 4 095 4 095 1 5 V 4 20 0 0 4 095 4 095 The Voltmeter ranges listed Modsoft signed format Map Status The
319. al in Modsoft 520 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Map Status Byte Module Zoom Selections Module Zoom Selections Inputs The I O map status byte is used for the 140AMM09000 Combination module as follows 6 7 8 Not used Not used Channel 1 input out of range or broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 2 input out of range or broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 3 input out of range or broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 4 input out of range or broken wire 4 20 mA Channel 1 output broken wire Channel 2 output broken wire Module Zoom selection screens for selecting input ranges and output timeout states are as follows Push Enter to display and select the data format for the module and the ranges for the individual input channels Data Formats per node Inputs Channel X Range per channel Inputs 16 bit Format Voltmeter 12 bit Format Not installed 10V to 10V OV to 10V 5V to 5V OV to 45V 1V to 45V 20mA to 20mA OmA to 20 4mA to 20mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 521 I O Modules Module Zoom Push lt Enter gt to display and select the mode for the outputs after a communication s Selections timeout This mode is selected for each channel The following figure shows t
320. altitude exceeds this reduce the 60 C maximum operating temperature by 6 C per 1000 meters of additional elevation Vibration 10 57 Hz at 0 075 mm d a 57 150 Hz at 1 g Shock 15 g peak 11 ms half sine wave 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 45 System Specifications Gas Resistance in Conformally Coated Modules The following table shows gas resistance data for conformally coated Quantum modules Mixed Flowing Gas Test 22 days exposure Standard Gas Test Requirment Actual Exposure EIA364 65 Level Ill CL Chlorine 20 PPB 5 PPB 20 PPB NO Nirtic Oxide 200 PPB 50 PPB 1250 PPB H2S Hydrogen Sulfide 100 PPB 20 PPB 100 PPB SO Sulfur Oxide N A 300 PPB ISA S71 04 GX CL Chlorine 10 PPB 20 PPB Severe NO Nitric Oxide 1250 PPB 1250 PPB H2S Hydrogen Sulfide 50 PPB 100 PPB O Sulfur Oxide 300 PPB 300 PPB Storage The following table shows the Quantum storage conditions Conditions Temperature 40 85 C 40 185 F Humidity 0 95 percent RH non condensing at 60 C Free Fall 3 ft 1 m 46 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 System Specifications Agency The following table shows the agency approvals Approvals UL 508 CSA 22 2 142 Factory Mutual Class 1 Div 2 European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC CE Note All Quantum system modules co
321. alves LEDs etc that are located in a hazardous area This module is for use with sink devices only Specifications Specifications for the DIO33000 module are as follows Specifications Number of Output Points 8 LEDs Active 1 Green 1 8 Green Indicates point status Output Voltage 24 V open Maximum Load Current Each Point 45 mA Per Module 360 mA Off State Leakage Point 0 4 mA Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1ms ON OFF 1ms Output Protection Internal Transient voltage suppression Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 2 2 Amp full load Power Dissipation 5 W full load External Power Not required Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety requirements Fusing Internal not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 61 or higher Fixed Wiring System plugged into the module The DIO33000 module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 423 Intrinsically Safe Modules Field Wiring Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12 Wiring
322. ame Description 1 DCD Carrier Detect 2 RXD Receive Data 3 TXD Transmit Data 4 N A Not Connected 5 GND Signal Ground 6 N A Not Connected 7 RTS Request to Send 8 N A Not Connected 9 N A Not Connected Shield N A Chassis Ground The serial port interface allows the user to configure the module and to program the ASCII messages into the module This is only activated when the module enters into its programming mode via the front panel push button Note The serial port is capable of communicating with either a dumb terminal or a PC using terminal emulation software i e PROCOMM 350 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Serial Port Setup When programming mode is entered one of the RS 232 serial ports is set to a standard terminal communication s configuration to communicate with the user on the programming terminal via a Modbus This communication configuration consists of the following Baud rate 9600 Data bits 8 Stop bits 1 Parity bit None disabled Keyboard Mode ON Character echo XON XOFF ON The serial port configuration has been set this way so that the configuration of the port is a known configuration and may or may not be the same configuration that is used when the module is running Front Panel A recessed push button on the front of the module is used to reset the module Reset Push RESET e Button
323. ample of a single cable Quantum DIO configuration PS IO O VO VO VO I O VO e e e e e e e Local I O Up to 31 drops 64 with repeater arte e Tap Tap DIO yo vo vo DIO yo yo vo Drop Drop o ro o role 6 1165 j O Quantum Drop m Quantum Drop n Drop Cable Drop Cable A MODBUS Plus tap is required for every participant on the network A drop cable is required for each drop from the MODBUS Plus tap Cables are not included with the modules and need to be ordered 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 25 Quantum Configurations Dual Cable DIO The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum DIO configuration Configuration PS CPUNOM I O I O I O 1 0 I O O VO e e 63 with
324. and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically Safe apparatus plus all cable parameters Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Lcable Voc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax Note 7 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs etc Note 8 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP12 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part I Intrinsic Safety Note 9 Control room equipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250Vrms Note 10 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA S82 01 Note 11 No revisions to this drawing without prior FMRC Approval 412 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to UL certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voc 29 5 V lg 93 mA Ca 68 nf La 2 0 mH Output 1 Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 If the electrical parameter of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for
325. annels per Current Features Common Required 14001133000 Discrete In 8 8 400 mA Internal power supply 140DIO33000 Discrete Out 8 8 2 2 Internal power supply 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 59 Hardware Specifications Miscellaneous Modules The following table shows specifications for miscellaneous modules Type Part Number Function Bus Current Required 140XBE10000 Backplane 500 mA expander 140XCP90000 Battery backup None 140XSM01000 Analog simulator None 60 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supply Modules At a Glance Overview What s in this Chapter The following chapter describes the Quantum power supplies including specifications LED indicators and descriptions and wiring diagrams Where applicable it includes operating curves and hold up capacitor timing charts This chapter contains the following topics Topic Page 140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac 3 A Module 62 140CPS11400 AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A Module 65 140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A 68 140CPS11420 AC Summable Power Supply 115 230 Vac 11 A 71 140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A Module 74 140CPS12420 AC Redundant Power Supply 115 230 Vac 11 A Module 77 140CPS21100 DC Power Supply 24 Vdc 3 A Module 80 140CPS21400 DC Summable Power Supply 24 Vdc 8 A Module 83 140CP
326. antum Fiber Optic Communication Ports 2 Transmit and Receive Compatibility Programming Software Modsoft V2 32 or Concept 2 0 at a minimum Quantum Controllers All V2 0 at a minimum Check the version label of the top front of the module for the proper revision level Bus Current Required Typical 700 mA 372 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose LED Indicators The following figure shows the LED indicators and Descriptions Ready Com Act Primary Com Err Standby The following table shows the LED descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green If steady Power is being supplied to the module and it has passed initial internal diagnostic tests If blinking Module is trying to recover from an interface error Com Act Green If steady CHS 110 modules are communicating If blinking An error has been detected Primary Green Module is supporting primary controller Com Err Red Module is retrying communications or communications failure has been detected Standby Amber If steady Module is supporting the standby controller which is ready to assume the primary role if needed If blinking Program update is in progress Error Codes The following table shows the number of times the Com Act LED blinks for each type of error and the codes possible for that group all codes are in hex Number of Blinks Code Error d
327. ate OFF State 12 5 9 12 IEC 57 Class2 0 11 24 0 1 65 2 34 48 0 101 65 1 45 60 0 91 57 Class1 ON OFF state ranges are specified at normal reference voltages Absolute Maximum Input 75 Vdc ON State Current mA 12 Vdc 5 10 mA 24 Vdc 6 30 mA 48 Vdc 2 15mA 60 Vdc 1 5 Response OFF ON 4ms ON OFF 4ms Switching Frequency lt 100 Hz Input Protection Resistor limited Isolation Group to Group 700 for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 Vdc for 1 minute Bus Current Required 200 mA Power Dissipation 1 W 0 25 W x the number of points on 578 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications External Power 10 60 Vdc group supply Fusing Internal None External User discretion 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 579 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI84100 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 1 T GROUP A SUPPLY GROUP A COMMON INPUT 4 INPUT 3 GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON N C N C FIELD DEVICE INPUT 6 INPUT 5 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COMMON INPUT 8 INPUT 7 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON N C N C INPUT 10 INPUT 9 GROUP E SUPPLY
328. ate trn asc 623 bad comm state trn rtu 624 bad comm state rcv rtu 625 bad comm state rcv asc 626 bad modbus state tmrO evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 129 CPU Modules Front Panel Two three position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU The left Switches switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions The three position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 ports The following figure shows the three options that are available not used Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicationunicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed ASCII Communic
329. ation Communication is done via single or dual coaxial cabling up to 15 000 feet away This configuration supports a mix of the following product lines e SY MAX e 200 Series e 500 Series e 800 Series e Quantum I O When Quantum RIO is required the Quantum controller may support up to 31 RIO drops In an RIO configuration an RIO head module is connected with coaxial cable to RIO drop modules at each remote drop Quantum DIO is implemented over a Modbus Plus network The CPU or NOMs module may be the network head via their Modbus Plus ports Quantum DIO Modbus Plus drop adaptors are specifically designed to link Quantum I O modules to the head via twisted pair shielded cable Modbus Plus The DIO drop modules also provide the I O with power maximum 3A from a 24 Vdc or a 115 230 Vac source Each DIO network supports up to 63 distributed drops using repeaters Quantum NOM modules provide extended communication capabilities for the Quantum system within a Modbus Plus configuration Quantum Modbus Plus on Fiber modules provides connectivity to Modbus Plus nodes by fiber cable without fiber optic repeaters and allows the creation of a pure fiber optic network or a mixed fiber optic twisted pair network with the use of a 490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater Quantum Ethernet TCP IP modules make it possible for a Quantum controller to communicate with devices on an Ethernet network using TCP IP the de facto standard protocol
330. ation Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Communication Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 130 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Data Bits 7 8 Stop Bits 1 2 Device Address 1 247 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 131 CPU Modules Rear Panel Two rotary switches refer to the illustration and table below are located on the rear Switches panel of the CPU They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration below shows the correct setting for an examp
331. atus Byte Outputs The 12 point output module is e 140DDO88500 The 140DDO88500 can be configured as either 16 contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register The following figure shows the inputs configuration 1 21314 5 6 7 8 911 11 12 Push lt Enter gt to display and select the input type This selection appears if the module is I O mapped to a 3x register The following figure shows the input type input Type BIN BCD Note Do not use the BCD selection as it will incorrectly display fault conditions 14000088500 can be configured as one output 4x register in the following format The following figure shows the register format for outputs The least significant bit in the output I O map status byte is used as follows The following figure shows the status byte output register 8 7 6 51 4 3 2 1 Module Fault any point fault turns on this bit 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 587 I O Modules Modsoft Module Zoom Selections Outputs Push lt Enter gt to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the module Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped The following figure shows the output type and timeout state Output Type Timeout State
332. aution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 693 I O Modules 694 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Appendices Ata Glance Overview These appendices provide information on miscellaneous components and spare parts hardware installation instructions power and grounding considerations the CableFast cabling system error stopped codes agency approvals of Quantum products and troubleshooting tools and resources What s in this The appendix contains the following chapters Appendix Chapter Chapter Name Page A Miscellaneous Components 697 B Spare Parts 707 C Hardware Installation 709 D Power and Grounding Guidelines 729 E CableFast Cabling 749 F Error Stopped Codes 823 G Agency Approvals 827 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 695 Appendices 696 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Miscellaneous Components A Miscellaneous Components Overview This appendix contains information on cabling and illustrations of miscellaneous components For more detailed information on Modbus Plus components see the Modbus Plus Network Planning and Installation Guide Part Number 890USE10000 For more detailed information on Remote I O components see the Remote I O Cable Planning and Installation Guide Part Number 890USE10100 Cables The following table shows the available cables Part Number Description
333. ax No of Output Words 500 HealthTimeout Value Global Setting 20 Msec to 2 Secs in 20 mSec increments Input TimeOutState Global Setting Zero or Hold IP Address Derived from MODBUS Address must be on NOE s Subnet Remote Register Reference Not configurable 400001 is used 286 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules Enhanced The following table lists the characteristics of the Enhanced based MODBUS I O Modbus I O Scanner which is available on the NOE77100 NOE77101 and NOE77111 scanner Parameter Value Max No of Devices 128 NOE77100 NOE77101 and NOE77111 Max No of Input Words 4000 Max No of Output Words 4000 HealthTimeout Value Individual Setting 1 Msec to 2 Secs in 1 mSec increments Input TimeOutState Individually Settable IP Address Individually Settable Remote Register Reference Configurable Min Update Rate Settable Refer to the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide 840USE11600 to learn how to configure the MODBUS I O Scanner 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 287 Ethernet Modules MODBUS TCP Server Introduction Client Introduction The following information describes the functionality of the MODBUS TCP Server All NOE771xx Quantum Ethernet TCP IP modules provide the user with the capability of transferring data to and from nodes on a TCP IP network through the use of a communication instruction A
334. be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 554 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 4 INPUT 6 INPUT 8 N C The following figure shows the DAI55300 wiring diagram INPUT 1 TI INPUT 3 S EX INPUT 5 25 L e INPUT 7 GROUP A COMMON INPUT 10 INPUT 12 INPUT 14 INPUT 16 N C amp amp 9 O CO CO INPUT 18 c G9 O9 INPUT 20 INPUT 22 INPUT 24 N C INPUT 26 INPUT 28 INPUT 30 INPUT 32 Q9 amp amp INPUT 9 INPUT 11 INPUT 13 INPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON INPUT 17 INPUT 19 INPUT 21 INPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON INPUT 25 INPUT 27 INPUT 29 INPUT 31 GROUP D COMMON 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 555 I O Modules Note 1 All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage 2 This module is not polarity sensitive 3 N C Not Connected CAUTION Voltage Compatibility All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 556 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DA174000 Quantum
335. ber of Networks per 3 System Maximum Words per Network For every 500 In and 500 Out DIO drop there is a minimum of two words input of overhead Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out Watchdog Timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 3 ms k to 1 4 ms k Battery 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 5 loss of capacity per year Battery Load Current Power off Typical 5 pA Maximum 110 uA Communication Modbus RS 232 1 serial port 9 pin D shelf Modbus Plus RS 485 1 network port 9 pin D shell 106 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions Specifications General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 780 mA Power Dissipation 3 9W TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 G Maximum Number of NOM NOE and 2 MMS modules any combination This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I O For each word of register I O configured one word of I O words must be subtracted from the total available The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word of Register I O must be subtracted from the total available Reguires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Proce
336. between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area The module s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify it as an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 14001033000 CDE ABF 424 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module Approved Wiring Diagrams Non Hazardous Location Hazardous Location Zone 1 Group IIA IIB IIC 1 5 24 Vdc NO LOAD CENELEC CERTIFICATION Entity Paramenters per Channel Vo 27 9 Vdc l 121 mA ch Po 840 mW ch Co 84 nf ch Lo 2 2 mH ch OUTPUT 2 CHASSIS OUTPUT 3 4 GROUND Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and con nected to the chassis ground at the module end Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electroni cally connected to the module OD NC OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 5 Note 3 All OUTPUT 1 s are connected together internally I S MODULE TERMINAL STRIP 310
337. ble provides a comparison of the NOA61 100 61110 and 62200 modules Characteristics NOA61100 NOA61110 NOA62200 Physical Addressing Y Y Y Logical Addressing N Y Y PCP Channel N Y Y Startup Check of Possible via user Y Y Configuration program triggering one of the active bits 10 15 Support of Remote Bus Y Y Y Branch Support for Hot Standby N N N Number of NOAs in 3 3 2 140CPU11303 Local Drop 6 140CPUX341XA Interbus Compatibility Generation 3 Generation 3 Generation 4 Maximum Slaves 512 512 251 Configuration Tool Phoenix Contact CMD Phoenix Contact Sycon V1 21 or V1 30 CMD V1 21 or TLX L FBC 10M V1 30 V2 725 Software Versions Modsoft Rev min 2 4 2 4 N A Concept Rev min 2 0 2 1 2 5 SR2 ProWORX min 2 0 2 0 N A 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 207 Quantum Field Bus Modules 140NOL911X0 Quantum LonWorks Network Option Modules Overview The NOL modules provide connectivity between a Modicon Quantum controller and a control network based on Echelon s LonWorks technology Once the NOL module has been installed in a Quantum backplane and configured it can be bound to an existing LonWorks network and installed as a standard node Note The NOL module requires a valid LonWorks configuration file XIF loaded into it to define the LonWorks network variables to which it will be bound Note Yo
338. block is used for analog outputs with individual fusing provided per channel This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interfaces for both field and loop power configurations See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFJ00400 terminal block ULFILE E123528 5 CableFast 140 CFJ 004 00 O00 sm tl Application The following are the application notes for the 140CFJ00400 module Notes 1 Configuration Four analog outputs with a common loop supply Each point is allocated six terminals 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides four individually 0 063 A fused connection point sets for the 140ACO02000 analog output module 800 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFJ00400 module Dimensions C01 V01 S1 C02 V02 S2 1 V1 V1 2 V2 V2 V3 RET GND V4 4 3 in p
339. cators The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC10500 high speed and Descriptions counter R Active F 1 C1 1 P 2 C2 2 3 C3 3 4 C4 4 5 C5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC10500 high speed counter LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present F Red Lights upon any defined hardware firmware and process error R Green Indicates firmware initialization is complete and the module is ready for service 1 8 left column Green Digital inputs IN1 IN8 C1 C5 Green Counter inputs xxC1 xxC5 xx 5 24 1 8 right column Green Digital outputs OUT1 OUT8 P Green 24 Vdc is present 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 301 Intelligent Special Purpose Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the EHC10500 wiring diagram N G 5 Vdc C1 2 5 Vdc Counter Input Signals N C 5 Vdc C2 C1 C5 N C 5 Vdc C3 _ 8 1 in N C 5 Vde C5 To M11 M11 12 GD TE VUE 24 Vdc Counter Input Signals M12 24 Vdc C2 C1 C5 03 L M13 24 C3 9 M14 24 Vdc C4 24 Vdc 7 To M11 M15 24 Vdc C5 IN2 IN1 m
340. cators for the RIO Head module and Descriptions Ready Com Act Error A Error B The following table shows the LED descriptions for the RIO Head module LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication When On Ready Green The module has passed powerup diagnostics Com Act Green The module is communicating on the RIO network Error A Red There is aloss of communication on Channel A with one or more of the drops Error B Red There is aloss of communication on Channel B with one or more of the drops dual cable only 230 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Networking LED Error Codes The Blinking Com Act LED error codes for the RIO Head module table show the number of times the Com Act LED on the RIO Head module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each all codes are in hex LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Slow steady 0000 Requested Kernel Mode 2 6820 hcb frame pattern error 6822 head cntrl blk diag error 6823 mod personality diag error 682A fatal start I O error 682B bad read I O pers request 682C bad execute diag request 6840 ASCII input xfer state 6841 ASCII output xfer state 6842 I O input comm state 6843 output comm state 6844 ASCII abort comm state 6845 ASCII pause comm state 6846 ASCII input comm state 6847 ASCII ou
341. citive 60 Hz Typical Input impedance ON 29 56 Vac 11 7 mA max OFF 0 10 Vac 5 6 kO capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 1 7 mA an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 56 Vac 10s 63 Vac 1 cycle 100 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Group to Group 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 250 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 543 I O Modules Specifications Power Dissipation 10 9 W max External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 544 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI45300 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 4 INPUT 6 INPUT 8 N G INPUT 10 INPUT 12 INPUT 14 INPUT 16 N G INPUT 18 INPUT 20 INPUT 22 INPUT 24 N G INPUT 26 INPUT 28 INPUT 30 INPUT 32 N G INPUT 1 L PRN N Ba INPUT 3 INPUT 5 et IN
342. clamping diode across the load 650 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DRA84000 wiring diagram RELAY 1 COMMON e OUTPUT 1 N O VOLTAGE SOURCE RELAY 2 COMMON OUTPUT2NO RELAY 3 COMMON OUTPUT 3 N O RELAY 4 COMMON OUTPUT 4 N O N C N C RELAY 5 COMMON OUTPUT 5 N O RELAY 6 COMMON OUTPUT 6 N O RELAY 7 COMMON OUTPUT 7 N O RELAY 8 COMMON LOUTPUT 8 N O N C RELAY 9 COMMON N C LOUTPUT 9 N O RELAY 10 COMMON LOUTPUT 10 N O RELAY 11 COMMON OUTPUT 11 N O RELAY 12 COMMON OUTPUT 12 N O N G N C RELAY 13 COMMON OUTPUT 13 N O RELAY 14 COMMON OUTPUT 14 N O RELAY 15 COMMON OUTPUT 15 N O RELAY 16 COMMON OUTPUT 16 N O N G amp GG 5 9 0 GS 9 C G C9 amp amp 9 9 O 9 C O0 G O N C V See Note 1 OUTPUT X nod P c NO N C O RELAY X COMMON One of 16 Typical Note 1 For 125 Vdc inductive loads external clamping is recommended to extend relay contact life 1N 4004 or equivalent 2 N C Not Connected N O Normally Open N C Normally Closed 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 651 I O Modules 140DRC8300
343. communication is present F Red An over current condition on any point has been detected 1 12 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 12 Red The indicated output point has an over current condition 452 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modules Field Wiring Terminal Strip Module Keying Assignments Field wiring terminal strips and module housings are slotted on the left and right sides of the PCB card slot to accept keying pins see I O Module figure The purpose of keying is to prevent plugging the terminal strip into the wrong module once wiring connections have been made Keying is implemented at the discretion of the user CAUTION Safety precaution For maximum safety and protection Modicon recommends that module key coding be part of the system installation procedure Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Primary keying is provided on the right side of the module marked A through F top and bottom positions are coded the same Primary keying provides module class coding Primary codes have been pre defined see the following chart Secondary keying is provided on the left side of the module marked 1 through 6 Secondary keying codes are user definable and may be used to identify module personality within module classes or other unique site requirements 453 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules The following figure sho
344. control bits to preset and enable disable counters of either channel Command 1 Command 1 uses three 4X registers and six 3X registers as shown in the following CONFIGURES figure the Module 4X 3X 4X 1 3X 1 4X 2 3X 2 3X 3 3X 4 3X 5 This command does the following e Sets up the module for pulse or quadrature input e Sets up the module for count or rate sample mode Counters cannot be separately configured e Defines counter register length 16 or 32 bit e Enables output assertion including module communication loss state Output assertion is available if configured for two 16 bit or one 32 bit counter No output assertion is available if two 32 bit counters are defined or in rate sample mode e Defines output assertion point Command 2 There are four formats for this command It uses up to six 4X registers and six 3X LOAD VALUES registers as shown in the following figure 4X 3x 4X 1 3X 1 4X 2 3X 2 4X 3 3X 3 4X 4 3X 4 4X 5 3X 5 Values loaded may be 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 305 Intelligent Special Purpose e Maximum count and setpoint i e output turn on times e Output assertion ON time duration one input only e Rate sample time interval Command 3 Command 3 uses one 4X register and six 3X reg
345. crete 16 Pointand Analog Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for 24 Point Input Modules The following table shows the LED indicators for discrete 16 point and analog I O modules Active F 1 9 1 9 2 10 2 10 3 1 3 1 4 12 4 12 5 13 5 13 6 14 6 14 ASS Fe 215 8 16 8 16 The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 16 point and analog I O modules LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 16 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 1 16 Red There is a fault on the indicated point or channel The following table shows the LED indicators for the 24 point input modules Active F 1 9 17 2 10 18 3 11 19 4 12 20 5 18 21 6 14 22 7 15 23 8 16 24 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 24 point input modules LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 24 Green The indicated point or channel is turned ON 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 449 I O Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for 32 Point I O Modules LED Indicators The following table shows the LED indicators for the 32 point I O modules Active 9 10 1 12 18 14 15 16 O Q N
346. cribed in this section This includes specifications for the NOE21100 and NOE25100 modules Ethernet TCP IP The following figure shows the Ethernet TCP IP NOE2X100 module Module Model Number Module Description NOE ZT OO Color Code LED Display Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door Global Address Label Goss Fiber Optic 0 base FL R Transmit Cable Connector e Receive Cable Q Connector NC Specifications The Ethernet TCP IP modules for twisted pair and fiber optic cabling provide an interface to Ethernet networks for the Quantum Automation Series system Specifications Communication Ports Ethernet ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP IP protocol NOE 211 00 1 10BASE T Ethernet network RJ 45 port NOE 251 00 1 10BASE FL Ethernet network ST style port Data Transfer Frequency 10 mb Power Dissipation 5W Bus Current Required 1A 272 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules Specifications Compatibility Programming Software Modsoft V2 32 or Concept 2 0 at a minimum Quantum Controllers All V2 0 at a minimum LED Indicators and D
347. cription 491 map status byte 471 measurement ranges 472 module zoom selections 474 register assignment 470 specifications 491 wiring diagram 493 xiv 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index AVI03000 configuration 475 description 495 I O map status byte 477 linear measuring ranges 477 496 module zoom selections 478 register assignment 475 specifications 495 wiring diagram 498 AVOO2000 configuration 504 description 513 module zoom selections 504 register assignments 504 specifications 513 wiring diagram 516 B backplane expander See XBE10000 backplanes four position 713 mounting hardware specifications 710 part numbers 710 selecting 710 six position 714 sixteen position 716 ten position 715 three position 712 two positions 711 battery module See XCP90000 C CableFast cable lengths 817 cable selections XTS 818 cable specifications 816 description 750 I O connector for Quantum 819 I O connector illustration 820 inner wire color codes 817 quantum modules and backplane illustration 750 specifications 751 terminal block descriptions 755 terminal block features 756 terminal block selection 752 terminal block stacking convention 756 XCA102xx pigtail 819 XTS102xx pigtail 820 CableFast accessories jumper fuse replacement 821 part numbers 821 terminal block common strip 821 cables part numbers 697 CE closed system installation AC amp DC powered sys
348. ct output points to be displayed as per the following table LED 32 64 Out 1 to 32 Off Off Out 33 to 64 On Off Out 65 to 96 Off On The following table shows recommended cables description and their length in meters Cable Part Number Description Length M TSXCDP301 1 HE 10 flying leads 3 TSXCDP501 1 HE 10 flying leads 5 TSXCDP053 2 HE 10 round cable 0 5 TSXCDP103 2 HE 10 round cable 1 TSXCDP203 2 HE 10 round cable 2 TSXCDP303 2 HE 10 round cable 3 TSXCDP503 2 HE 10 round cable 5 The following table shows the color codes for all groups 1 White 2 Brown 3 Green 4 Yellow 5 Gray 6 Pink 7 Blue 8 Red 9 Black 10 Purple 11 Gray pink 12 Red blue 13 White green 14 Brown green 15 White yellow 16 Yellow brown 17 White gray 18 Gray brown 19 White pink 20 Pink brown 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 639 I O Modules Compatible The following tables shows the compatible output adapter sub bases See Quantum Output Adapter Modicon Telemecanique Automation Platform Discrete I O Chapter Telefast 2 pre Sub Bases wired system connector cables FOR Quantum PLCs section for more detailed informaton Channels Type 8 ABE 7S08S2xx 8 ABE 7R08Sxxx 7P08T330 16 ABE 7R16Sxxx 16 ABE 7R16Txxx 7P16Txxx with the splitter sub bas
349. ctable Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 519 I O Modules Linear The following table shows the linear measuring ranges for the 140AMM09000 Measuring combination Analog module Ranges Data Format Input Under Normal Over Warning Warning 16 bit 10 V 768 768 64 768 64 768 Format 5 V 20 mA lt 16 768 16 768 48 768 gt 48 768 0 10 0 64 000 gt 64 000 0 5 0 20 0 32 000 gt 32 000 1 5 4 20 mA lt 6 400 6 400 32 000 32 000 Voltmeter 10 V 10 000 10 000 10 000 10 000 Format 5V lt 5 000 5 000 5 000 gt 5 000 0 10 0 10 000 gt 10 000 0 5V 0 5 000 5 000 1 5V 1 000 1 000 5 000 gt 5 000 20mA lt 20 000 20 000 20 000 gt 20 000 0 20mA 0 20 000 20 000 4 20mA 4 000 4000 20 000 20 000 12 bit 10 V 0 0 4 095 4 095 Format 5 20mA 0 0 4 095 4 095 0 10 0 4 095 4 095 0 5 0 20 mA 0 4 095 4 095 1 5 4 20 0 0 4 095 4 095 4x Registers The following figure shows the 4X registers 4x Registers Register 1 Channel 1 output data Register 2 Channel 2 output data Note The data format is always 0 4095 decim
350. ctance Henry Load Current A Surge Current Maximum Each Point 20 A capacitive load t 10 ms Switching Capability 1250 VA resistive load Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 10 ms max ON OFF 20 ms max Off State Leakage lt 100 HA Relay Contact Life Mechanical Operations 10 000 000 Electrical Operations 100 000 Resistive load max voltage and current Electrical Operations 100 000 300 mA resistive load 30 150 Vdc 50 000 500 mA resistive load see note 100 000 100 mA L R 10 msec 100 000 Interposing Relay Westinghouse Style 606B Westinghouse type SG Struthers Dunn 219 x 13 XP Relay Type Form C NO NC contacts Contact Protection Varistor 275 V internal Isolation Channel to Channel 1780 Vac rms for one minute Field to Bus 1780 Vac rms for one minute 2500 Vdc for one minute Bus Current Required 560 mA Power Dissipation 2 75 W 0 5 x N Watts where N is the number of points on External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external contact protection such as a clamping diode across the load 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 653 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DRC83000 wiring diagram
351. d Distributed I O Configurations 18 Quantum Local ies esse bp egre ee gee Pee 20 Quantum Remote I O RIO 21 Quantum Distributed I O DIO 25 Network lt 29 Ata Glance nice ioe ot bun eek oen sra oti Et meri te 29 Quantum Network Support 30 Quantum Network Interface Techniques 33 Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications 37 Part Ill Chapter 4 Part IV Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Quantum System Specifications 41 Glance ci P DUE RE E bs BTE CI 41 System Specifications for the Quantum Module 43 Quantum System Specifications 43 Quantum Module Specifications and Configuration 49 Ata Glance n ABE Sas Ee E PERSE EST S 49 Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules 51 Quantum Hardware Specifications 51 Power Supply Modules 61 AtaGlance ef ys de pee lm ERR DT SA w u SOY Y SUE 61 140CPS11100 AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac A Module 62 140CPS11400 AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A Module 65 140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8
352. d label and place it inside 223 Part 043506673 MX Battery F N Memory Protect and mem ASCII Comm parameter ot aay Slide Switches s Modbus E LL e Connector Modbus Plus TIS e Connector M Chan A D Modbus Plus Modo Connector Chan n Chan B 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 135 CPU Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPU42402 CONTROLLER module Specifications User Logic Reference Capacity 984 Ladder Logic Extended Register Discrete Register 64 k words 64k 57k 96k 57 766 4XX registers max Only if 0XXX 16 and 1XXX 16 and 3XXX 16 Reference Capacity Discrete 64 k any mix Local I O Main Backplane Maximum I O Words 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of I O Racks 2 Requires expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In and 64 Out Maximum Number of Remote 31 Drops Distributed I O Maximum Number of 9 Networks per System Maximum Words per Network For every DIO drop there is a minimum of words input of overhead 500 In and 500 Out Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out Watchdog Timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 1 ms kto 0 5 ms k Battery 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years wi
353. de Is Enabled Dual Mode Disabled 1 Output 1 is turned ON when Input 1 and Input 2 are ON and when both Fast Trip 1 Enabled Enable and Fast Trip 2 Enable are enabled or by directly turning ON the Output 1 bit 2 Output 2 is controlled by the Output 2 bit 3 Output 3 is turned On when Input 3 and Input 4 are ON and when both Fast Trip 3 Enable and Fast Trip 4 Enable are enabled or by directly turning ON the Output 1 bit 4 Output 4 is controlled by the Output 4 bit Filter Select 5 msec This entry selects which filter response time to use for the input circuits Filter Select 1 5 msec Map Register The following figure shows the 4x output register Outputs Fast Trip 4 Enable Fast Trip Enable Fast Trip 2 Enable Fast Trip 1 Enable Output 4 Output 3 Output 2 Output t 1 In Fast Trip Mode each output can be turned ON by the Command Bit e g Output 1 or by the corresponding Input Bit plus the Fast Trip Enable Bit e g last order Input 1 controls Output 1 directly 672 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Map Status The four least significant bits in the I O map status are used as follows Byte Outputs 81 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Output 1 Fault Output 2 Fault
354. defined as a device which will neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs etc Note 6 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part Intrinsic Safety Note 7 Control room eqipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms Note 8 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA SB2 01 Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval 31001362 Rev 00 140 1133000 RTD Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 399 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection Notes Related to FM Certification HAZARDOUS LOCATION Class 1 Div Group A B C D Class II Div Group E F G Class III Div 1 This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 appropriate for connection with IS RTD TCIN Module with Concept Parameters listed below The entity parameters are per Channel NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Vcc 15 5 VDC Isc 276 mA Ch Ca 500 nf Ch La 0 3 mH Ch Po 1070 mW Ch Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the
355. dle and bottom positions The three position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 ports The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU11302 Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed ASCII Communication Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following communication parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Communication Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 110 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign communication parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Communication Port Parameters Baud 19 20
356. ds input of overhead 500 In and 500 Out Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out Maximum Number of Option Module Interfaces Supports up to six network modules i e Modbus Plus Ethernet and Multi Axis Motion option modules using the option module interface technique see Quantum Network Interface Techniques p 33 Note Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality including Quantum DIO support Watchdog Timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 1 ms k to 0 5 ms k Battery 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 5 loss of capacity per year 146 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions Specifications Battery Load Current at Power off Typical 7 yA Maximum 210 uA Communication Modbus RS 232 2 serial port 9 pin D shell Modbus Plus RS 485 1 network port 9 pin D shell General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1 8 A Power Dissipation 9W TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 C Operating Temperature 0 60 C This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I Os For each word of register I O configured one word of I O words must be subtracted fr
357. dule Overview for use with sink devices The DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads and is Specifications module The following table shows the specifications for the 00035300 24 VDC OUT Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active F 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Voltage Operating max 19 2 30 Absolute max 56 Vdc for 1 3 ms decaying voltage pulse ON State Drop Point 0 4 Vdc 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 4A Per Module 16A Off State Leakage Point 0 4 mA 30 Vdc Surge Current Maximum Each Point 5 A 500 us duration no more than 6 per minute Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1 ms max ON OFF 1 ms max Output Protection internal Transient voltage suppression Load Inductance Maximum 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or 0 5 PF where L Load Inductance Henry Load Current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance Maximum 50 uf 622 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Isolation Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Bus Current Required 330 mA Power Dissipation 1 75
358. dule consists of 16 toggle switches which are used to generate up to 16 binary input signals to the 140DA154000 and the 140DA174000 AC input modules CAUTION Electrical Shock Hazard When using this simulator module with the 140DA174000 input module be careful not to come in contact with the supplied 220 VAC located at the bottom of the simulator module Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 430 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Simulator Modules Point Discrete The following figure shows the 140XSM00200 16 Point Discrete Simulator module Simulator Module Q9 m 2 8 86 4 amp lt 5 28 6 EX 7 S Switch Eg Position Function os 10 28 Right Momentary Signal zs Middle Off 5 Left Constant Signal EI RS 35 El prete NES v H L N Power Connector Label Power Connector Ly Note Voltage source range is 24 230 Vac 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 431 Simulator Modules 140XSM01000 Analog Simulator Module Overview The 140XSM010module is used for simulating 4 20 mA field current loops used with current input Quantum modules It provides two adjustable 4 20 mA analog signals and one fixed 24 Vdc output The simulator also measures and displays voltages from 0 5 Vdc The simulator module
359. e Removable Door Pu D Modbus EM ES Networl Plus O Field Wiring Node Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover Not used Not used Not used ACL ACN EEEEEEE 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 221 DIO Specifications The following specifications are for the Modbus Plus CRA21120 and CRA21220 DC powered single and dual channel DIO modules Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 20 30 Vdc Input Current 1 6A Inrush Current 30A Input Power Interruption 1 0 ms max Fusing external 2 5 A Part 043503948 or equivalent Operating Mode Standalone or not powered See Power and Grounding Guidelines p 729 Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Current 3A Minimum Load 0A Protection Over Current Over Voltage Communication Modbus Plus 1 port single cable 2 ports dual cable General Specifications I O Type Quantum Modules Drop Depends on bus current loading and word count Words 30 In 32 Out Two additional input words are reserved for drop status Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM Data Address Executive Checksum Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal str
360. e Barriers Intrinsically Safe Power Supply Installation of The following information is specifically concerned with the application of intrinsic safety with regards to the installation and field wiring of the Quantum Intrinsically Safe series of modules It provides a general description of intrinsic safety and how it is accomplished in Quantum modules how they should be installed precautions that should be observed and wiring and grounding practices that must be followed Intrinsic safety is a technique for ensuring that electrical energy supplied to circuits in a hazardous area is too low to ignite volatile gases either by spark or thermal means Intrinsically safe circuits use energy limiting devices known as intrinsically safe barriers to prevent excess electrical energy from being applied to electrical equipment located in the hazardous area The Quantum Intrinsically Safe family of modules are entity certified to be installed in safe areas to monitor control intrinsically safe apparatus located In hazardous areas All Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules use galvanic isolation to provide the intrinsically safe barrier between them and the field devices located in hazardous areas Opto isolators are located within the modules between the field side and the Quantum backplane bus circuitry The maximum agency specified intrinsically safe parameters are Voc 28 and lg lt 100mA DC DC converters in Quantum
361. e Sample Response to Read Rate Sample Command The following table shows the load values 400201 0243 LOAD VALUES command disable Counter 2 preset and enable Counter 1 400202 XXXX Counter 1 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds 400203 0000 Counter 2 Rate Sample Time in milliseconds Not used in this example 400204 0000 Not used by this command 400205 0000 400206 0000 Note Command echoes are the same as described in the Pulse Input Count Up Down examples The following table shows a read rate sample 40030 0400 READ INPUT COUNTER command 400302 0000 400303 0000 Not used by this command 400304 0000 400305 0000 400306 0000 When this command is issued the input pulse counter content is retrieved The 3X register content is the count over the time period selected in the Load Values registers 4X 1 and 4X 2 The 3X response to the Read Rate Sample command in register 40301 is as follows The following table shows the responses to the read rate sample command Register Value Description 300001 0400 Command echo 300002 XXXX Counter 1 Input rate low word 300003 XXXX Counter 1 Input rate high word this register is a multiplier As an example 30002 has a value of 324 and 30003 a value of 3 The total count is 65 536 x 3 324 196 932 300004 0000 Counter 2 is disabled 300005 0000 Counter 2 is disabled 300006 0X00 X is the
362. e location of the fuses see Fuse Locations p 685 External Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure The group fuse is not guaranteed to protect each output for all possible overload conditions It is recommended that each point be fused with a 1 25 A fuse Part 043508930 Littlefuse 3121 25 1 25 A 250 V CAUTION damage Possible injury to personnel or equipment Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment 684 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations of the DDM39000 module 140 DDM 390 00 1080 VDC OUT Fuse Locations Points 5 8 Note If the 140DDM39000 module is used in an RIO drop the 140CRA93X00 RIO Drop must be Version 1 04 at a minimum Check the version label see Version Label p 685 on the top front of the 140CRA93X00 module and ensure that it is at the proper revision level Any module marked PV RL SV is acceptable Version Label The following figure shows the location of the version label RIO DROP S908 01 04 CRA 932 00 RIO DROP 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 685 I O Modules Wiring Diagram
363. e ABE 7ACCO2 640 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 14000084300 Quantum I O DC Output 10 60 2x8 Source Module Overview The DC Output 10 60 Vdc 2x8 Source module switches 10 60 Vdc powered loads and is for use with sink devices External power supplies may be mixed between groups Specifications module The following table shows the specifications for the DDO84300 10 60 VDC OUT Specifications Number of Output Points 16 in two 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word out Voltage Operating 10 2 72 Vdc Absolute Maximum 72 Vdc continuous ON State Drop Point 1V max 022A Maximum Load Current Each Point 2A Each Group 6A Per Module 12A Off State Leakage Point 1 mA 60 Vdc max Surge Current Maximum Each Point 7 5 A 50 ms duration no more than 20 per minute Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1 ms ON OFF 1ms Output Protection internal Over voltage suppression diode Isolation Group to Group 700 Vdc for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 for 1 minute Bus Current Required 160 mA Power Dissipation 1 W 1 Vx Total Module Load Current External Power 10 60 Vdc module inrush at power up approximately 0 75A 1 msec 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 641 I O Modules
364. e DC Input 24 Vdc 2x8 Sink DC Output 24 Vdc 2x4 Source module accepts and switches 24 Vdc inputs outputs and is for use with sink input and source output devices Topology The following table shows the topology for the DDM39000 module Topology Number of Input Points 16 in two 8 point groups Number of Output Points 8 in two 4 point groups LEDs Active F red No power applied to the group s or blown fuse 1 16 Green right two columns Indicates input status 1 8 Green left column Indicates output status Required Addressing 1 Word In 0 5 Word Out Input The following table shows input specifications for the DDM39000 module s Specifications Input Specifications Operating Voltages and Currents Input ON voltage 15 30 OFF voltage 3 5 ON current 2 0 mA min OFF current 0 5 mA max Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 Vdc 1 3 ms 56 Vdc decaying pulse Internal Resistance Input 2 5 kQ 682 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Output Specifications Common Specifications The following table shows the output specifications for the DDM39000 module Output Specifications Voltage Output Operating max 19 2 30 Vdc Absolute max 56 Vdc for 1 3 ms decaying voltage pulse ON State Drop Point 0 4 Vdc Q 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 5A Each G
365. e Maximum Input 75 Vdc ON State Current mA 12 Vdc 5 10 mA 24 Vdc 6 30 mA 48 Vdc 2 15 60 Vdc 1 5 mA Response OFF ON 4 ms ON OFF 4ms Switching Frequency 100 Hz max Input Protection Resistor limited Isolation Group to Group 700 Vdc for 1 minute Group to Bus 2500 Vdc for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 300 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 581 I O Modules Specifications Power Dissipation 1 W 0 25 W x the number of points on External Power 10 60 Vdc group supply Fusing Internal None External User discretion 582 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDI85300 wiring diagram aXINPUT 2 INPUT 1 Ics e e we el ee a NPUT4 INPUT3 E ee _ T e ee e NPUT6 INPUTS e e INPUT 8 INPUT 7 e e GROUP A SUPPLY GROUP A COMMON e INPUT 10 INPUTS INPUT 12 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 INPUT 13 FIELD DEVICE INPUT 16 INPUT 15 GROUP B SUPPLY GROUP B COMMON INPUT 18 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 INPUT 23 GROUP C SUPPLY GROUP C COMMON INPUT 26 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 INPUT 27 INPUT 30 INPUT 29 INPUT 32 INPUT 31__ GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP D COMMON
366. e Note Moo EM CIO Signal 2 e N C 10 5 N C V3 V3 Oo Signal 3 v ES V4 SEE NOTE 1 I S 2 wire se IL TL transmit esee ss N C Signal 5 V6 2 JA ss 4 Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane Note 2 A dropping resistor of 100 Signal 6 NIC Ohms is across the Signal and V N C HE N C pins of each channel V is V7 V7 internally connected to 1 5 ground N C HE Signal 7 Note 3 Three Wire Transmitters V V should be provided power only 8C JE s from the module An external Signal 8 power supply should not be used N G e ej N C Se N C I S Module All 330 10 Blue Terminal Strip Note 4 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 5 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xxx xx 140 1133010 Wiring Diagram 408 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules 140A1033000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module Overview The Quantum 140A1033000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output module controls and monitors current loops in intrinsically safe applications The module provides 8 dual ended output c
367. e holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word must be subtracted from the total available Requires the use of two140NOM 21 X00 Option Modules Maximum Number of Network Module Interfaces 6 Watchdog Timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 1 ms kto 0 5 ms k Battery Type 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 5 loss of capacity per year 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 157 CPU Modules Specifications Battery Load Current at Power off Typical 7 uA Maximum 210 uA Communication Modbus RS 232 2 serial port 9 pin D shell Modbus Plus RS 485 1 network port 9 pin D shell Programming Software Capability Modsoft Version 2 6 minimum Concept version 2 1 with B2 1 patch Concept 2 2 with SR2 ProWORX Nxt version 2 0 minimum ProWORX Plus version 1 05 minimum ProWORX 32 version 1 0 minimum General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1 25A Power Dissipation 6 25 W TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 C Operating Temperature 0 60 C LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators Ready Run Modbus Modbus Mem Prt Bat low
368. e marked Primary always connects to the Backplane Expander module in the Primary Backplane The system can use any Quantum type power supply Each backplane can have a different type of power supply Loss of power in the secondary backplane will not shut down the entire drop Only modules located in the Secondary backplane will lose power Backplane expander modules can be located in any slot in the backplane and do not have to be placed in corresponding slots in the primary and secondary backplanes I O modules that have downloadable executive firmware such as the ESI module are allowed in the secondary backplane except when downloading their execs Executive firmware cannot be downloaded to modules in the secondary backplane It may be necessary to update the CPU or RIO drop executive firmware See firmware section of table above The Backplane Expander will not be recognized by the programming panel software It will look like an unfilled slot in the PLC I O map The Backplane Expander will allow configuration or I O mapping of additional modules in the local drop containing a CPU or RIO drop adapter up to the drop word limit or physical slot address limitation Option modules such as NOMs NOEs and CHSs must reside in the primary backplane Any Interrupt module can be located in the secondary backplane but the interrupt mode is not supported The Backplane Expander module can not be Hot Swapped into a powered backplane without firs
369. e maximum wire length distance to a sensor for a 3 or 4 wire configuration is 200 meters Thermocouple When the module is configured as a Thermocouple Millivolt Input module the sum Millivolt Input of thermocouple source or voltage source impedance and wire resistance should not Wiring exceed 200 ohms for rated accuracy 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 393 Intrinsically Safe Modules Fixed Wiring System Terminal Strip The Quantum140AII33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module The module s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify Colorand Keying it as an intrinsically safe connector Assignment The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 1133000 CDF ABE 394 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module configured with Approved Wiring RTD Resistance connection Diagrams CENELEC CERTIFICATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Entity Parameters NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION l ZONE 1 id per Channel Group IIA IIB IIC Vo 15 5 Vdc pe nl nn lo
370. e or out range on channel 5 1 Broken wire or out range on channel 4 1 Broken wire or out range on channel 3 1 Broken wire or out range on channel 2 1 Broken wire or out range on channel 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning on channel 8 1 Range warning on channel 7 1 Range warning on channel 6 1 Range warning on channel 5 1 Range warning on channel 4 1 Range warning on channel 3 1 Range warning on channel 2 1 Range warning on channel 1 This module requires nine contiguous 16 bit 3x registers eight for input data and one for input status The data registers formats are as follows 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 467 I O Modules Note The data format is 16 bit integer values in the positive range and an integer value with the MSB indicating a negative sign in the negative range A range warning is issued when a channel input exceeds the rated input value An out of range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2 34 or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel The warning bit is cleared when the out of range bit is set Map Status The I O map status byte is used by the 140ARI03010 Input module as follows Byte MSB LSB 8 7 16 15 4 3 2 1
371. e output point will be turned OFF after a short is detected A fault greater than 9 4 A will guarantee that the point will be turned OFF and will latch the output point in the OFF state To clear a fault the point must be commanded OFF in user logic CAUTION Possible danger to equipment or personnel Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO88500 module Fuse Locations Note At a minimum Modsoft V2 40 ProWORX Nxt V2 0 or Concept V2 0 is required to configure this module 646 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO885 wiring diagram N C N C N C N G GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 1 CS N C N C N C GROUPA N C GROUP B N C N C GROUP B SUPPLY N C N C N C N C N C W N C OUTPUT2 OUTPUT 3 GROUP A RETURN OUTPUT 4 N C OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 7 N C OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT 9 G G2 6 GS GO _GROUP B RETURN FIELD OUTPUT 10 DEVICE
372. ecifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 93 138 Vac 170 263 Vac Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 10 of the fundamental rms value Input Current 1 2 A 115 Vac 0 7 A 230 Vac Inrush Current lt 20A 115 Vac 25 C first power up lt 25 A 230 Vac VA Rating 160 VA 11A Input Power Interruption 1 2 cycle full load and minimum rated line voltage frequency No less than 1 second between interruptions Fusing external 2 0 A slo blo recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current Standalone configuration 11 A 60 Redundant configuration two 140CPS12420 10 A 60 C total load capacity Redundant configuration one 140CPS12420 and one 140CPS12400 8A 60 C total load capacity Redundant configuration one 140CPS12420 and one 140CPS22400 8 A 60 C total load capacity Redundant configuration one 140CPS12420 and one 140CPS42400 8 A 60 C total load capacity Minimum Current None required Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506326 Internal Power Dissipation Less than 12 W at full load Operating Mode Standalone Redundant 78 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies LED I
373. ed 250 mA max Power Dissipation 7 W all points on External Power 19 2 30 Vdc 19 2 A maximum depends on load Fusing External User discretion for field power 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 637 I O Modules Front view of The front view of the 140DDO36400 output module including terminal assignment 140DDO36400 numbers os 140 DDO 364 00 24 VDC OUT 6x16 Source 432 64 Act 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 3 11 19 27 4 12 20 28 5 13 21 29 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 e D A 049 O50 O01 O02 O51 052 O03 004 Pushbutton O53 O54 005 006 055 056 007 008 057 058 O09 010 059 060 O12 O61 062 OI3 014 O63 061 015 016 24 24V COM H24V 24V E 065 066 OI7 018 O67 068 019 020 069 070 O21 022 O71 072 O23 024 73 074 025 026 075 076 027 028 O77 078 O29 030 079 080 O31 032 H24V 24V H24V COM 24V COM F OST JO82 033 034 O83 084 O35 036 O85 086 O37 038 O87 088 O39 040 O89 O90 O4I 042 O91 O92 O43 O44 093 O94 O45 046 O95 096 O47 O48 H24V 724V COM H24V 724V COM 638 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Selecting Point Status Indicator LEDs Recommended Cables Color Codes for Input Groups Use the pushbutton to sele
374. ed and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Source 5 V Sense 5 N Note 6 Intrinsically Safe I S Source 6 cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module V Sense 6 Source 7 Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to I S terminals must satisfy the following conditions V Sense 7 OO Qo N lt Vmax I Source 8 lsc lt Imax gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Lcable Note 8 This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction 31001362 Rev 00 LS Ge All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip V Sense 2 JD n I Source 3 V Sense 3 HAZARDOUS LOCATION Class 1 Division 1 Group A B D SEE NOTE 1 goe CHASSIS GROUND CHASSIS GROUNDj 4 Wire RTD Resistor Connection Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground screws on the backplane SEE NOTE 1 2 Wire RTD Resistor Connection Note 2 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplane
375. ed by 10Base T Backplane Compatibility Requires 3 4 6 10 and 16 position backplanes Quantum CPU Data Transfer Frequency 10 mb Bus Current Required 1A LED Indicators The following table shows the NOE5X100 LED indicators and Descriptions Active Ready Fault Run Collision Link Kernel Appl 280 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules The following table describes the meaning of each NOE5X100 indicator LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Module is communicating with backplane Ready Green Module has passed internal diagnostic tests Run Green Flashes during normal operation Link Green Ethernet connection is made Kernel Amber On during download Fault Red An error condition has occurred Collision Red If steady an error condition exists If flashing packet collisions are occurring on the network during data transmission Appl Amber A fatal error has occurred 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 281 Ethernet Modules 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules Overview The following provides information on the Quantum ethernet modules 140NOE77100 140NOE77101 140NOE77110 and 140NOE77111 Related Documentation Refer to Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide 840USE11600 for more detailed information on the installation and use of Quantum ethernet modules Ethernet Module The fo
376. ed to the Module Note 3 Only 140 XBP 0xx 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module I S 2 wire transmitter Note 4 Three wire transmitters should be provided power only from the Module External Power Supply should not be used Chassis Ground Note 5 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Vcc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically safe apparatus plus all cable parameters V7 Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Lcable Voc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax N G Signal 7 HS Note 6 Simple Apparatus is defined as a device which will e SIS V8 neither generate nor store more than 1 2V 0 1A 20uJ or 25 mW Signal 8 For examples switches Thermocouples LEDs and RTDs etc Note 7 Wiring methods must be in accordance with National Electrical Code NFPA 70 Article 504 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 Wiring Practices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part I Intrinsic Safety I S Module AII 330 10 Blue Terminal Strip Note 8 Control room egipment connected to associated apparatus should not use or generate more tha
377. ed user logic checksum does not agree with the stored checksum It can be caused by an illegal change in memory The user should try to reload his user logic program If the error persists replace the CPU Discrete disable table error This error occurs when the user attempts to run the CPU in Optimize mode with disabled coils in user logic Bad configuration The most probable cause would be that the memory has been modified through the MODBUS MODBUS PLUS ports If this error occurs during a program download check configuration data for values greater than the CPU s specified addressable range This error can also appear if the CPU s memory is defective 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 825 Error Stpd Codes 826 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Agency Approvals G Agency Approvals Overview The following tables provide the agency approvals and also include the conformal coating availability of the indicated Quantum products Power Supplies The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the power supplies of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 22 2 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140CPS11100 V 140CPS11400 140CPS11410 140CPS11420 V 140CPS12400 N
378. ee Bandwidth Monitoring uses the same functions as used by SNMP The three service rates Global Data I O Scanner and Messaging are computed using the following formula Current load 100 Maximum Load Table of Maximum Load Rates Maximum load for NOE 771 x1 Diagnostic Service Workload Data Returned Global Data Number of published variables per second 800 I O Scanner Number of transactions per second 4200 Messaging Number of messages treated per second 410 The current load is computed dynamically 294 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules Note The loads are dependent on controller scan time Each application has an expected scan time Therefore when evaluating the loads you should ensure that the controller scan time is set to the expected scan time for the application being modelled Enhanced Web Diagnostics Note These services are available on the 140NOE771x1 modules The embedded Web server provides Web pages that you may use to diagnose Transparent Factory Real Time services Those diagnostic services are listed below 1 Global Data diagnostics e Status of all Global Data services e Status of all subscribed and published variables e Publication Subscription rate 2 Scanning diagnostics e Status of all Scanning services e Status of individual scanned devices e Actual I O scanning rate 3 Messaging diagnostics e Diagno
379. elow DAM59000 Operating Curve 85 132V rms S GO V n 45 50 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE C TOTAL MODULE LOAD CURRENT A 55 60 The specifications stated are pending UL CSA approval This module was originally approved at 2 A each point 7 A 0 50 C per group Off State Leakage Point max 2 mA 115 Vac Surge Current Maximum rms One Cycle Two Cycles Three Cycles Per Point Per Group 30A 45A 20A 30A 10A 25A Response OFF ON ON OFF 0 50 of one line cycle max Applied DV DT 400 V us Output Protection RC snubber suppression internal 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 677 I O Modules Common Specifications The following table shows the Common specifications Common Specifications Frequency 47 63 Hz Isolation Group to Group 1000 Vac for 1 minute Input or Output to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection Input None Output Blown fuse detect loss of field power Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation 5 5 W 1 1 V x Total module load current External Power 85 132 Vac required for output groups Fusing Input Internal None External User discretion Output Internal 5 A fuse for each group Part 043502405 or equivalent For the location
380. els will indicate broken wire status unless wired to the loop supply as shown on Channel 4 In this example loop supply must be 30 V or less 2 VM is an optional voltmeter that can be connected to read voltage that is proportional to the current Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter maximum 3 The wiring example shows Channel 1 acting as a current sink and Channel 2 acting as a current source for their respective field devices 4 N C Not Connected Note At power up the channel outputs are all disabled current 0 Configuring any channel as disabled will cause all channels to be disabled when a communication loss occurs 508 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140ACO13000 High Density Analog Out I O Module Overview The 140ACO13000 is an eight channel analog output module used to control and monitor current in 4 20 mA 0 20 mA and 0 25 mA loops Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the ACO13000 module Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active indicates bus communication present F indicates a fault on a channel 1 8 Green Module outputs active 1 8 Red Broken wire on indicated channels Required Addressing 8 Words Out Module Ranges and Resolution 0 25 mA 25 000 counts 20 mA 0 20 000 counts 20 mA 0 16 000 counts 20 mA 0 4 095 counts
381. em Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters ASCII Comm Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits d Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting The following table shows the RTU comm port parameters The comm parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Comm Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 183 CPU Modules The following table shows the valid comm port parameters Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Data Bits 718 Stop Bits 1 2 Device Address 1 247 184 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Rear Panel The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings Switches Oy SW1 TOP SW2 BOTTOM SW1 sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 sets the lower digit ones
382. ember 2002 329 Intelligent Special Purpose Note Notes on Diagram 4 Differential quadrature input Constant enable Output 1A and 1B operate relays Counter 2 not used N C Not Connected Zero pulse reset Output 1A and 1B 330 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Module Zoom Push lt Enter gt to display and select applicable parameters Selections The following figure shows the module zoom selections Counter X mode control Incremental Quadrature Number of counters output assertion 2x16 w Output 2x32 w Output 2x32 No Output Rate Sample Mode Note When OFF outputs are Comm lost output assert override Off disabled when communication with the bus is lost When ON On outputs continue to operate as configured Note Only one output Goumer care mode should be configured Output Coil X mode timed Setpoint Latched Setpoint as timed Setpoint or Terminal Terminal Count Latched Terminal Timed Setpoint Timed Terminal Number of counters output assertion 2x16 Assert Outp 2x32 Assert Outp 2x32 No Assert Rate Sample Mode The next lines apply ONLY IF the counter is in 2x16 Output Assert Mode Counter X Maximum Count ODEC Counter X Setpoint alarm 0DEC Time Output On 0 DEC milliseconds 16383 maximum 8
383. end of any configuration then a new node may be connected first by fiber cable and then hot swapped to the backplane to avoid errors to the existing network If a new mode is added to the middle of the network the fiber optic cables need to be disconnected from one side of the existing NOM252 module and connected to port 1 or 2 of a new node Additional fiber optic cable then needs to be connected to the second port of the new NOM252 and to the next NOM252 in the network the new NOM252 then has to be hot swapped to the backplane Because the NOM25200 will stop transmitting in the direction from which it is not receiving the signal the replacement of a broken fiber optic cable and the reconnection of it will not re establish communication over that segment The hot swap of only one NOM252 at the repaired connections is required to complete the connection Note The break of any fiber connectors or fiber optic cables is the equivalent to the break of the trunk cable in a Modbus Plus network on copper For the self healing ring configuration the repair of the first break in the fiber optic network has to be scheduled to the time when one of the units on either side of the repaired break can be hot swapped without creating the problem by disconnecting the node Note Self healing configurations are not considered redundant networks High System availability can be achieved with redundant networks 840 USE 100
384. ended inputs Registers Required 6 Words In 6 Words Out Data Formats 16 Bit Counter 65 535 Decimal 32 Bit Counter 2 147 483 647 Decimal Discrete Inputs Operation Modes Incremental Quadrature Max Continuous Input Voltage 30 Vdc Input Threshold Single Ended Mode VREF Supply On State Vdc Off State Vdc 5 Vdc 0 2 0 3 5 5 0 12 Vdc 0 5 0 7 0 12 0 24 Vdc 0 11 0 13 0 24 0 Differential Mode Minimum 1 8 Vdc Input Resistance 10k Discrete Outputs Output Levels 1A 1B 2A 2B FET Switch ON Supply 0 4 Vdc FET Switch OFF 0 Vdc ground reference Max Load Current each output 0 5A Output Off State Leakage 0 4 mA max 30 Vdc Output On State Voltage Drop 0 4 Vdc 0 5 A Output Protection 36 V transorb for transient voltage suppression 334 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Specifications Miscellaneous Isolation Channel to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of outputs 1A 1B 2A 2B field power Power Dissipation 4 0 W 0 4 x total module load current Bus Current Required 650 mA External 24 Vdc Power Supply 19 2 30 Vdc 24 Vdc nominal 50 mA required plus the load current for each output Fusing Internal 2 5 A fuse Part 043503948 or equivalent External User discretion C
385. equired for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 550 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C N C G G GOO GO OOO 9 9 9 O The following figure shows the DAI54300 wiring diagram INPUT 1 INPUT 2 NC INPUT 3 INPUT 4 N C INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 GROUP A COMMON INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 N C INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 GROUP B COMMON 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 551 I O Modules Note 1 All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage 2 This module is not polarity sensitive 3 N C Not Connected CAUTION Voltage Compatibility All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 552 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DAI55300 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module Overview The AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 module accepts 115 Vac inputs Specificati
386. er gt Hot Standby x X Xx X X X X x x In Version 2 0 In Version 2 0 Global Data Publish Subscribe x X Bandwidth Monitoring Faulty Device Replacement DHCP Server Enhanced Web Diagnostics Schneider Private MIB x X x gt FactoryCast Application User Programmable Web Pages x x X X x x 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 285 Ethernet Modules MODBUS I O The functionality of the NOE771xx module is further enhanced by the addition of a Scanner MODBUS I O Scanner that can be configured with either the Modsoft Concept or ProWorx programming panel This allows the user a means to transfer data between network nodes without using the MSTR instruction The NOE771 MODBUS I O Scanner can be configured by either of the following two methods e Peer Cop Available on NOE77100 only e Ethernet I O Scanner Note It is recommended that the enhanced MODBUS l O Scanner be used for all new installations Peer Cop functionality is provided only as an easy migration path for an existing installation The enhanced MODBUS I O Scanner provides greater functionality than the Peer Cop based I O scanner Peer Cop Based The following table lists the characteristics of the Peer Cop based MODBUS I O I O Scanner Scanner which is available only on the NOE77100 Parameter Value Max No of Devices 64 Max No of Input Words 500 M
387. er 1 Channel 1 data 0 4 095 2 4 20 mA Register 2 Channel 2 data 0 4 095 2 4 20 mA Register 3 Channel 3 data 0 4 095 2 4 20 mA Register 4 Channel 4 data 0 4 095 4 20 mA The four least significant bits in the I O map status byte are used for the 140ACO02000 Output module The following figure shows the status byte register 1 21314 5 6 78 L Channel 1 loop broken wire Channel 2 loop broken wire Channel 3 loop broken wire L Channel 4 loop broken wire Push Enter to display and select the timeout states for each channel Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped Disabled Channel X Timeout State Last Value per channel User Defined Channel X User Defined Timeout Value 0 DEC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 501 I O Modules 140ACO13000 Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ACO13000 analog current sink output module This module requires eight contiguous output 4x registers which are assigned as follows The following figure shows the map register assignment Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Chan
388. er connector signals from left to right 33 18 OPA vc 18 UOWWOD A pZ 19 1 1ndino Areiixny jndino exeug 20 z indino 21 g 1Indino 22 1 1ndul NO 23 z 1nduj Areyixny MOO 24 g 1nduj 25 v 1ndu g Aveyixny 27 9 Z 29 28 peeds 30 31 33 32 The following figure shows the server connector signals from left to right 17 1 V Jepoou3 V Jepoou3 9 eseug Jepoou3 g Jepoou3 e Jepoou3 Jepoou3 V Z Jepoou3 y Jepoou3 g z 1epoou3 g eseug Jepoou3 e W Z Jepoou3 ye 2 Jepoou3 12 13 14 15 16 p lo uuoO JON O N 17 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 366 Intelligent Special Purpose Rear Panel The MSX has an RS 232 serial port to connect the module to an IBM PC or Switches compatible running the Modicon Motion Development Software MMDS A two position Dip switch is located on the rear panel of the module see the followi
389. er of Input Points 24 in three 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 24 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Continuous Operating Voltages and Currents ON voltage 88 150 Vdc OFF voltage 0 36 Vdc ON current 2 0 mA min OFF current 0 5 mA max Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 156 25 including ripple Input Response OFF ON ON OFF Default Filter 0 7 ms Non default Filter 1 5 ms Internal Resistance OFF State 73 8 nominal ON State 31 6 nominal Input Protection Resistor limited Isolation Group to Bus 2500 Vac rms for 1 minute Group to Group 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 200 mA Power Dissipation 1 0 W 0 62 W x the number of points on External Power Not required for this module 574 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Operating Curve NXN 125 Vdc gt 140 Number of Points ON per Group 400 s 30 40 50 60 Ambient Temperature C The following figure shows the DDI67300 operating curve Operating Voltages this module Note The following information baselines mi
390. er override must be connected to an external source through 1 16 A in line fuse or strapped to common to avoid erroneous outputs in this Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 514 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Note The output levels of this module are either those generated within the module based on data inputs from the system or from the master override inputs on the field wiring terminal strip During normal operation the front panel Active and 1 4 green LEDs are ON If bus communication to the module stops for any reason the Active LED will go off and depending on panel software configuration e when LEDs 1 4 are ON the channel output levels will be as predetermined and held by the module e when LEDs 1 4 are OFF the master override levels are output on each channel If module power is lost or the module fails the master override levels will be output The master override inputs must be from an external supply with a source impedance of 2009 or tied to system common These inputs for channels that are in use should not be allowed to float and may be unique for each 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 515 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140AVO02000 module NOTE 1 Master override is an input COMMON 1 2 1 OUTPUT 1 IDE connected via an interna
391. erminal 1 Pulse encoder input sinking device Terminal 3 Input 1B count UP direction Terminal 5 Unused hardwire Preset tied high Terminal 7 Output Reset tied high not required outputs not used Terminal 11 Hardware enabled software enable also required using predefined Modzoom or 4X register Terminal 17 Required Vref connection Terminal 21 Terminal 23 Terminal 25 Terminal 27 Terminal 31 Terminal 37 Counter 2 not used These terminals must be connected VREF Terminal 39 Required Output Supply Return Terminal 40 Required Output Supply Note Refer to I O Configuration for 140EHC20200 p 304 for both differential pulse encoder input and single ended or differential quadrature encoder input wiring diagrams 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 345 Intelligent Special Purpose 140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module Overview Related Documentation ASCII Interface Module The ASCII Interface Two Channel module is a Quantum communications interface module used to e Input messages and or data from an ASCII device to the CPU e Output messages and or data from the CPU to an ASCII device e Bi directionally exchange messages and or data between an ASCII device and the CPU For more detailed information on use of the ASCII interface module refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module User Guide ide
392. ero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm state trn_asc 623 bad comm state trn_rtu 624 bad comm state rcv_rtu 625 bad comm state rcv_asc 626 bad modbus state tmr0_evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return Note Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility 182 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Front Panel The slide switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus Switch RS232 ports Three options are available 1 Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port 2 Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port 3 Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software The figure shows the three options that are available on the front panel slide switch ASCII r m
393. escriptions The following figure shows the NOE2X100 LED indicators Active Ready Fault Run Coll Link Kernel Appl The following table describes the meaning of each NOE2X100 LED indicator Indication when On Module is communicating with backplane Module has passed internal diagnostic tests Flashes during normal operation Ethernet link to hub is ok If steady module is operating in kernel mode If flashing module is waiting for download An error has been detected a download has failed or a reset is in process If steady cable is not connected If flashing Ethernet collisions are occurring LED Descriptions LEDs Color Active Green Ready Green Run Green Link Green Kernel Amber Fault Red Coll Red Appl Amber Entry exists in crash log 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 273 Ethernet Modules Installing the NOE Module Installation Example Discovering the Default IP Network Address Quantum Ethernet TCP IP modules come fully configured However before installing your module you should make sure the default configuration is appropriate for your network If the module will be communicating on an open network consult your network administrator to obtain a unique IP network address You must enter this address in the Modsoft Ethernet TCP IP configuration extension screen before installing the module If the module will be com
394. escriptions 224 LED indicators 224 rear panel switches 225 specifications 222 CRA93200 illustration 233 CRA93X00 address settings 237 description 233 error codes 236 LED descriptions 235 LED indicators 235 rear panel switches 237 specifications 234 SW1 and SW2 address settings 237 CRP81100 description 190 illustration 191 LED descriptions 192 LED status 192 RS 232C port 194 RS 485 port 193 specifications 195 CRP93X00 description 228 error codes 231 LED descriptions 230 LED indicators 230 specifications 229 DAI34000 description 534 specifications 534 wiring diagram 536 DAI35300 description 537 specifications 537 wiring diagram 539 DAI44000 description 540 specifications 540 wiring diagram 542 DAI45300 description 543 specifications 543 wiring diagram 545 DAI54000 description 546 specifications 546 wiring diagram 548 DAI54300 description 549 specifications 549 wiring diagram 551 DAI55300 description 553 specifications 553 wiring diagram 555 DAI74000 description 557 specifications 557 wiring diagram 559 DAI75300 description 560 specifications 560 wiring diagram 562 DAM59000 common specifications 678 description 676 fuse locations 679 input specifications 676 output specifications 677 topology specifications 676 wiring diagram 680 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index
395. ese points Install jumper for 115 VAC __ operation only Output to Bus CurrentT A 12 10 N o 40 45 50 55 60 Ambient Temperature C Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 67 Power Supplies 140CPS11410 AC Summable Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8A Overview The following provides information on the AC power supply 115 230 Vac 8 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module and its components Module Model Number Rb Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door 140 Removable Door lt t 1 Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover 68 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Specifications supply module The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11410 115 230 VAC power Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 93 138 Vac 170 276 Vac Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 10 of the fundamen
396. face 5 VCC NOA822 only F O Interface 6 DO Data Out 7 DI Data In 8 VCC NOA622 only Auxiliary Supply for F O Interface 9 RBST NOA622 only RBST Coupling Black circle Pin occupied White circle N C 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 205 Quantum Field Bus Modules RS 232C Port Use a Modbus data cable Part Number 990NAA26320 2 7 m or Part Number 990NAA26350 15 5 m The following figure shows the RS 232C port connection RS 232 C The following table shows the key to the RS 232C port Pin Signal Function 2 D2 RXD Received Data 3 D1 TXD Transmitted Data 5 E2 GND Signal Ground 7 S2 RTS Request to Send 8 M2 CTS Clear to Send Black circle Pin occupied White circle N C Reset Push The reset push button performs a hardware reset of the module which must be done Button each time new firmware has been downloaded This button allows you to reset the module without removing it from the backplane Required Loadables are accessible from Groupe Schneider s World Wide Web site at http Loadables www schneiderautomation com Click on the appropriate software under the Control Software section on the home page Note 140CPU11302 does not support the 140NOA61110 or the 140NOA62200 module 206 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules Comparison of NOA61100 61110 and 62200 Modules The following ta
397. fault indication 452 LED indicators for 16 point modules 449 LED indicators for 24 point input modules 449 LED indicators for 32 point I O modules 450 LED indicators for bi directional modules 450 LED indicators for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication 452 primary keys 454 secondary keying and backplane position codes 456 terminal strip key codes 454 terminal strip module keying 453 intelligent special purpose I O modules description 11 InterBus communication module See NOA6XXXX InterBus interface modules communication interface modules 10 intrinsically safe analog input module See AII33000 intrinsically safe analog output module See AIO33000 intrinsically safe current input module See AII33010 intrinsically safe discrete input module See DII33000 intrinsically safe discrete output module See 01033000 intrinsically safe modules description 376 identification and labeling 377 illustration 378 installation 376 intrinsic safety 376 safe barriers 376 safe wiring practices 377 wiring and grounding 377 wiring diagram 379 L local I O Quantum configurations 18 local I O configuration description 20 illustration 20 LonWorks modules communication interface modules 10 LonWorks See NOL911X0 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 XXV Index miscellaneous components battery 702 cable connector orientation 698 cables 697 coding kit 698 CPU battery 702 description
398. field power indicator 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 321 Intelligent Special Purpose Rate Sample Mode Caution If a version 02 00 or higher module replaces a module which has a version number less than 02 00 in a Rate Sample mode application extra software configuration may be required Rate Sample mode is set using Command 1 CONFIGURE 01XX 4X 1 register bit 13 1 see the description of Command 1 in this section Note To verify the version of the module reference the indicated label found on the top front of the module The following figure shows the module s label High Speed CTR 2CH 500KHz 02 00 Note Modules labeled with PV and SV designations are EHE 202 00 HI SPEED CTR newer than 02 00 marked models In modules prior to V02 00 when Rate Sample mode was selected input was always handled as if it were generated by a pulse encoder For example 60 count per revolution encoders either pulse or quadrature types would give a rate of 60 for a one second revolution when the interval was set for one second Users are cautioned that beginning with V2 00 modules if a quadrature type encoder is used to provide count input and Pulse Quadrature Input Counter 1 and 2 bits 9 or 10 are set to 1 the module will detect all edges The result is four times the rate sample value as would be accumulated with an equivalent pulse encoder input In the example in the above par
399. for 9 pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT Quantum IBM XT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD SHIELD 1 9 4 SHIELD RX 2 RX TX 2 2 RX TX 3 TX RX 3 3 TX DTR 4 DTR RTS 4 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND CTS 5 5 GRND DSR 6 DSR DSR 6 6 DSR RTS 7 7 RTS GRND 7 7 RTS CTS 8 L 8 CTS NC 8 L8 CTS 9 NC DTR 20 9 NC 176 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Ports The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin portable Pinout laptop computers Connections for Portable IBM AT Quantum Computers 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 TX 3 DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR DSR RTS 7 RTS CTS A CTS NC g The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 177 CPU Modules 140CPU53414A CPU Mod
400. for this module HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D SEE NOTE 1 Note 1 Only shielded cables I S Field Device R 500 OHMS Max SEE NOTE 2 should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the module end Note 2 More than one device can be connected as long as they have differential input and total input resistance is less than 500 ohms Note 3 The voltmeter is optional and reads voltage proportional to the current Length of wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 Meter Note 4 Unused channels will show open loop unless outputs are shorted as shown for channel 8 Note 5 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronical connected to the module Note 6 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module 140 1033000 Wiring Diagram ly 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 411 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a FM certified wiring diagram for this module NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION N C els Output 4 4 bie Output 4 N C N C N C Monitor 5 Output 5 Monitor 6 N C 9 C9 V Output 6 Output 6 4 Monitor 7 Output 7 1910 Output 8 Monitor 8 Output 8 1 5 Module Terminal I Strip 140 1033000 Wiring D
401. ft 1520 m Drop cables that can be used for these configurations include Part Number 990NAD21 110 8 ft 2 4 m Part Number 990NAD21130 20 ft 6 m 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 27 Quantum Configurations 28 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Network Configurations At a Glance Introduction The following chapter provides information on the Quantum network support network interface techniques and Modbus and Modbus Plus communications What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page Quantum Network Support 30 Quantum Network Interface Techniques 33 Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications 37 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 29 Network Configurations Quantum Network Support Overview Quantum systems provide multiple choices for open standards based networking and fieldbus connectivity requirements The Quantum supported networks include Modbus Modbus Plus Remote TCP IP Ethernet SY MAX Ethernet MMS Ethernet Interbus LonWorks SERCOS Combinations of these networks can be used to provide simple high performance communication architectures which meet the tightly integrated needs of computer and controller connectivity A summary of the services available on these networks is shown in the following table 30 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Network Configurations Quantum The following table shows
402. g text Network The following table shows the communication interface modules Interface Type Description Modules P RIO Single and dual channel Remote I O interface modules RIO heads and drops connected via a coaxial cable network DIO Single and dual channel Distributed I O interface modules connected via a twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network NOM Single and dual channel Network Option Modules NOM connected via a twisted pair Modbus Plus cable network Fiber Optic Modbus Plus on fiber module connected via a fiber optic Modbus Plus cable Modbus Plus network Ethernet TCP Single channel Ethernet TCP IP interface module connected via a twisted IP pair or fiber optic cable network InterBus InterBus Interface module connected via a twisted pair network SY MAX SY MAX Ethernet module connected via a twisted pair or fiber optic cable Ethernet network LonWorks LonWorks module connected via a twisted pair network MMS MMS Ethernet module connected via a fiber optic cable network Ethernet Profibus Profibus Master module connected via a Profibus RS 485 port AS i AS i module connected via a two wire AS i port 8 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Overview RIO Modules CRA CRP DIO Module CRA Network Option Module NOM Modbus Plus on Fiber Module NOM Ethernet TCP IP NOE Modules SY MAX Ethernet Modules NOE Quantum RIO head and drop modules use a S908 based networking I O configur
403. ge CAUTION Wiring Compatibility If an external switch is wired to control an inductive load in parallel with the module output then an external varistor Harris V390ZA05 or equivalent must be wired in parallel with the switch Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 597 I O Modules 140DA084010 I O AC Output 24 115 Vac 16x1 Module Overview The AC Output 24 115 Vac 16x1 module switches 24 115 Vac powered loads Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the DAO84010 AC Output 24 115 VAC OUT module Specifications Number of Output Points 16 isolated LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word out Voltage rms Working 20 132 Vac Absolute Maximum 156 Vac for 10 s 200 Vac for 1 cycle Frequency 47 63 Hz ON State Drop Point 1 5 Vac Minimum Load Current rms 5mA Maximum Load Current rms Each Point 4 A continuous 20 132 Vac rms Any Four Contiguous Points 4 A max continuous for the sum of the four points Per Module 16 A continuous See the derating chart Off State Leakage Point max 2 mA 115 Vac 1 mA 48 Vac 1 mA 24 Vac 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications The following figure shows
404. h a Quantum Module flexible removable door to allow for easier wiring and access to the terminal strip Door Follow the procedure below to remove the module door Open the module door Place your thumb near the middle of the door as illustrated With your thumb apply pressure until the door bends and the door hinge pins pop out of the retaining holes at the top and bottom of the terminal strip After wiring the module reinstall the door using the reverse of the above procedure 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 727 Hardware Installation 728 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power and Grounding Guidelines D At a Glance Introduction This section provides information of power and grounding considerations for AC and DC powered systems system design considerations for Quantum power supplies grounding and closed system installation What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems 730 System Design Considerations for Quantum Power Supplies 739 Grounding 745 Closed System Installation 747 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 729 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems Overview AC Powered Systems The required power and grounding configurations for AC powered and DC powered systems are shown in the following
405. h also has the added benefit of increasing total system MTBF and to distribute the thermal load across the backplane Summable supplies should be installed at opposite ends of in the Quantum backplane to maximize the system thermal performance The Quantum system POK signal in systems powered by two summable power supplies is only true power is OK when both internal POK signals in the 140CPSX14X0 are true Quantum summable power supplies are not hot swappable 740 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide The following figure shows that the internal summable supply Quantum POKs are ANDed to create the Quantum System POK Summable CPS Summable CPS Internal POK and Internal POK mp Quantum System The proper method for starting systems powered by summable power supplies is to insert both supplies in the backplane in an unpowered state and then apply power to each supply For 140CPS11410 140CPS21400 and 140CPS414 models there is no requirement to power each supply simultaneously For 140CPS11420 or wherever this module is operated with a 140CPS11410 the delay between the two powering times should not be greater than five seconds The system designer must realize that the operation of the summable supply described above is independent of total backplane load i e even if the total load on the backplane is less than 8 A if there are two summable supplies installed in the backplane
406. han the I O mapped registers can be used to configure the module Zoom screens are used only while the PLC is stopped The selected parameters take effect when the PLC is set to run For applications that require that module parameters be changed while the system is running user logic can modify the I O map assigned registers to override the previously selected zoom parameters When using either zoom screens or I O map registers the maximum values specified in the Load Values Command section are the largest values that can be used by the module The I O Mapped registers discussed in this section are 4x output registers that e Preset and enable disable input counters e Load setpoint and maximum values to define output turn on points e Set mode of operation count or rate sample e Enable output switches and configures their mode of operation 3X input registers that e Hold count or rate sample data e Display field power status e Echo 4X command data after the command is executed by the module 304 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose EHC20200 Four operations can be performed Operations e Command 1 CONFIGURES the Module e Command 2 LOADS VALUES e Command 3 READ INPUT COUNTER e Command 4 READS RATE SAMPLE or LAST INPUT COUNT BEFORE PRESET Each operation uses one or more of both types of registers assigned to the module In addition to the command definition byte the first 4X register for all commands contain
407. hannels that are referenced over sense resistors to a single Common The output ranges are 4 20 mA 0 20 mA and 0 25 mA This module detects broken wires on a per channel basis indicates their location on the front panel LEDs and transmits the status to the PLC Specifications module are as follows Specifications for the Quantum 140A1033000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active Green F Red 1 8 Green Module output switched ON 1 8 Red Broken wire on indicated Channel 4 20 mArange Loop Resistance 500 ohms maximum Ranges 4 20 mA 0 to 4095 4 20 mA 0 to 16000 0 20 mA 0 to 20000 0 25mA 0 to 25000 Resolution 15 bits within 4 20 mA Accuracy Drift w Typical 40 PPM C Temperature Maximum 70 PPM C Accuracy Error 25 0 2 of full scale Linearity 1 LSB Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 Vac RMS for 1 minute Update Time 4 ms for all channels Settling Time 1 ms to 0 196 of the final value Bus Current Required 2 5 Amp Power Dissipation 12 5W External Power Not required for this module Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA range 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 409 Intrinsically Safe Modules Field Wiring Fixed Wiring System Terminal Strip Color and Keying Assignment
408. hardware or software is sent to it The rate sample value is held and may be accessed during count operations The value read is from the last configured and completed rate sample interval 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 339 Intelligent Special Purpose QUADRATURE MODE Miscellaneous Information Operation Rate Sample Pulse Count Pulse Count and Turning Outputs On Off When the module is configured for quadrature mode operation the counter requires encoder pulses on inputs A and B In quadrature mode all input signal edges are counted A 60 count revolution encoder will produce a count of 240 for one shaft rotation Field wire to Counter 2 inputs and outputs when configured for one 32 bit counter with output assertion The unused Counter 1 must have its plus inputs connected to VREF Input counts and parameters are not maintained in the module at power down The rewrite of parameters at power up must be done with either user logic or Modzoom type preset panel selections The 200 Hz filter for each counter can be activated by strapping the Lo Filter Sel terminal to the Return terminal This function provides noise immunity for low frequency applications and can also be used for relay debounce The following information describes the operation of various module functions To rate sample the module must be Configured for pulse or quadrature mode Configured for Rate Sample mode Loaded w
409. has passed powerup diagnostics Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic see the following table for Run LED error codes Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Mem Prt Amber Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on Bat Low Red The battery needs replacing Error A Red Indicates a communications error on the redundant Modbus Plus port A 140CPU42402 only Error B Red Indicates a communications error on the redundant Modbus Plus port B 140CPU42402 only LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the CPU42402 LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82E MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA 138 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is zero 609 modbus abort command e
410. hat are available on the front panel slide switch Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network The following table shows the ASCII comm port parameters ASCII Comm Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting The following table shows the RTU comm port parameters The comm parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Comm Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 161 CPU Modules The following table shows the valid comm port parameters Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Data Bits 718 Stop Bits 1 2 Device Address 1 247 162 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Rear Panel The following figure shows the SW1 and SW2 settings Switches Oy SW1 TOP SW2 BOTTOM SW1 sets the upper d
411. he Outputs module zoom selections outputs Not Installed Not installed Disabled with output current equal to Channel X Output State 0for all conditions No error generated for this Last Value channel User Defined Channel X User Defined Output Value 0 DEC 522 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AMM09000 Analog Input Output Module Overview The Analog In Out 4 2 bi directional module combines four analog inputs which accept a mix of current and voltage with two isolated analog outputs that control and monitor current in 4 20 mA loops Topology The following table shows the topology specifications for the analog input output Specifications module Topology Specifications Number of Input 4 channels Channels Number of 2 isolated channels Output Channels LEDs Active F red No power applied to the output group s or channel fault 1 2 Green left column Indicates output is active 1 2 Red middle column Indicates output status broken wire 1 4 Red right column Indicates input status under over range broken wire 4 20 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 523 I O Modules Input Specifications The following table shows the input specifications for the analog input output module Input Specifications Operating Ranges Bipolar 10 5 Vdc 20 mA Unipolar 0 10 Vdc 0 5 0 20 mA Unipolar
412. he following table provides a list of parts for the CE Compliance Figure Callout Vendor or Part Number Description Instruction equivalent 1 Offlex Series 35005 Line Cord Terminate the shield at the 100cy power supply ground terminal 2 Steward 28 BO686 200 Ferrite Bead Install next to the filter and Fair Rite 2643665702 secure with tie wraps at Both ends of the ferrite bead 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 735 Pwr amp Grnding Guide 125 Powered The following figure shows the 125 Vdc powered system for CE compliance System i BACKPLANE i SHIELDED CABLE AND FERRITE BEAD i I 125 VDC 125 VDC COMMON SCREWS i a eo e EARTH GROUND SHIELDED CABLE AND FERRITE BEAD CAUTION European compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC the 140CPS51100 and the 140CPS52400 must be installed in accordance with these instructions Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 736 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide 125 Vdc Powered The following figure shows the detailed installation for the 125 Vdc powered system Installation for CE compliance with parts list callouts Quantum Backplane 140XBPXXX00 QUANTUM BACKPLANE GND SCREWS GND BROWN LEA
413. he following table provides detailed specifications for the DDI36400 input module Specifications Number of input points 96 in six 16 point groups LEDs ACT green 32 green Bus communication is present Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix 64 green Points 65 to96 displayed on LED matrix 1 32 green Indicates point status Required addressing 6 words in Operating voltages and currents ON voltage 15 VDC ON current 2 5 mA minimum OFF voltage 5 VDC OFF current 0 7 mA Absolute maximum input Continuous 30 VDC 1 0 ms 50 VDC Response resistive load OFF ON 2 0 ms maximum ON OFF 3 0 ms maximum Internal resistance 6 7 KQ Input protection Resistor limited Isolation Group to group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Bus current required 270 mA Power dissipation 1 35 W 0 13 W for each ON input External power 19 2 30 VDC Fusing User discretion for field power 570 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Front view of DDI36400 numbers Module 140 DDI 364 00 24 VDC IN 6x16 Sink 32 64 Act 1 9 17 25 2 10 18 26 3 11 19 27 4 12 20 28 5 13 21 29 6 14 22 30 7 15 23 31 8 16 24 32 e D A 149 150 101 102 151 152 103 104 153 154 105 106 I55 156 1
414. he selected configuration will verify that the output point is in the state commanded by the PLC The module is configured in four groups of eight source outputs Specifications Key specifications for the Quantum 140DVO85300 module are as follows Specifications Number of Output Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active Green Bus communication present 1 32 Green Indicates output point status F Red Indicates incorrect output state on a channel loss of field power or blown fuse Required addressing 2 words in 2 words out Voltage Operating 10 0 30 Vdc Absolute Maximum 50 Vdc for 1 0 ms decaying voltage pulse On state Drop Point 0 4 Vdc 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 4A Per Module 16A Off State Leakage Point 0 4 mA 30 Vdc Surge Current Maximum Each Point 2 5 A 1 ms duration no more than 6 per minute Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 1 ms typical 2 ms max ON OFF 1 ms typical 2 ms max Load Inductance Maximum 0 5 Henry 9 4 Hz switching frequency or 0 5 PF where L Load inductance Load current A F Switching frequency Hz 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 661 I O Modules Specifications Tungsten Load Maximum 2 5 W 10 Vdc 3 W 12 Vdc 6 W 24 Vdc Load Capacitance Maximum 75 uf Isolation Group
415. he specifications for the CPS12400 PS 115 230 VAC Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 93 138 Vac 170 276 Vac Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 10 of the fundamental rms value Input Current 1 1 A 115 Vac 0 6 A 230 Vac Inrush Current 38 A 115 Vac 19 A 230 Vac VA Rating 130 VA Input Power Interruption 1 2 cycle Q full load and minimum rated line voltage frequency No less than 1 second between interruptions Fusing external 2 0 A slo blo recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 8 A 60 C Minimum Current None required Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506326 Internal Power Dissipation 6 0 1 5 x lout Watts where lout is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone Redundant 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 75 Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS12400 LED indicator Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS12400 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus The following figure shows the 140CPS12400 wiring diagram
416. he user optional secondary keying code designed to prevent the mismatching of terminal strips to modules of identical type 17 slot positions have been provided in modules and terminal strips to support a variety of coding schemes In addition by using the secondary keying code the user may key the field wiring terminal to the position where the module is installed in a backplane using the white keys for each code To determine a unique module code and terminal strip code refer to the table below Secondary The following table shows the secondary keying and backplane positions Keying and Backplane Module Terminal Strip Backplane x N h Position Coding Coding Positions 1 123 456 2 124 356 3 125 346 4 126 345 5 134 256 6 135 246 7 136 245 456 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Backplane Module Terminal Strip Position Coding Coding 8 145 236 9 146 235 10 156 234 11 234 156 12 235 146 13 236 145 14 245 136 15 246 135 16 256 134 The user may also use personality keying to differentiate between like module types i e DAO84000 and DAO84210 both have the same primary keying pin combinations using the white keys for each code 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 457 I O Modules Discrete I O True High True Low Circuit Descriptions The following figures illustrate discrete I O module t
417. iagnostic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm state trn asc 623 bad comm state trn rtu 624 bad comm state rcv rtu 625 bad comm state rcv asc 626 bad modbus state tmrO evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 171 CPU Modules Front Panel Two three position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU The left Switches switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions The three position slide switch on the right is used to select the communication parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 ports The following figure shows the three options that are available forthe 140CPU53414 module mem ASCII pi L not used L
418. iagram 31001364 Rev 00 HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS DIV GROUP A B C D CLASS II DIV GROUP E E G CLASS III DIV I Notes Related to FM Certification This IS field device should meet Note 7 or should be FM approved with entity concept in Note 6 appropriate for connection with IS RTD TC IN Module with Concept Parameters Listed below The entity parameters are per Channel Voc 29 5 VDC Isc 94 mA Ch Ca 58 nf Ch La 4 2 uH Ch 520 mW Ch 1 5 Field Device lt R 500 OHMS Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electonically connected to the Module Note 3 Only 140XBPO0xx00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module Note 4 More than one device can be connected in series as long as they have differential input and total load resistance is less than 500 ohms Note 5 Voltmeter is an optional Voltmeter shown to read voltage proportional to the current Wiring to this terminal is limited to 1 meter Unused channels will show Open Loop unless shorted as Shown in Channel 8 Note 6 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Voc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax
419. ic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm state trn asc 623 bad comm state trn rtu 624 bad comm state rcv rtu 625 bad comm state rcv asc 626 bad modbus state tmrO evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return Note Information in the Code column is visible only with the Flash download utility 160 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Front Panel The slide switch is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus Switch RS232 ports Three options are available 1 Setting the switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port 2 Setting the switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port 3 Setting the switch to the bottom position lets you assign comm parameters to the port in software The figure shows the three options t
420. ickman 3701400041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 c U Group A Power Group B Group C Power Power Group D Power E 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 771 CableFast Cabling Note 1 The 140CFC03200 is shipped with Modicon 140CFU08000 0 8 A fuse installed Ensure that the Modicon 140CFU40000 4 A fuse is installed when the 140CFC03200 and the 14000035300 are wired together 2 The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX001 10 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 772 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling 140CFD03200 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The D block is used for sensors requiring either 2 or 3 wire electrical interfaces A fuse per group is supplied to accommodate the I O module 4 groups See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFD03200 terminal block CableFast 140 CFD 032 00 UL FILE E123528 20020199 2020 2020 Application The following are the application notes for the 140CFD03200 module Notes 1 Configuration Arranged in four groups
421. ided directly to the Quantum system POK Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 739 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Summable Power Supplies The following figure shows the single internal POK that relates directly to the Quantum system POK Standalone CPS Internal POK j gt QuantumSystem POK Four summable power supply models are offered 140CPS11410 115 230 Vac input 8 A output 140CPS11420 115 230 Vac input 11 A output 140CPS21400 24 Vdc input 8 A output 140CPS41400 48 Vdc input 8 A output A summable power supply may be used as a standalone power supply without reservation in any Quantum system For systems configured with a mix of CPS NOM expert and I O modules whose total current consumption from the backplane exceeds the current provided by one summable supply two summable supplies may be used in a single backplane In such a system the total current available on the backplane is the sum of the capability of both supplies e 16A for two 140CPS11410 16 A for two 140CPS21400 16 A for two 140CPS41400 20 A for two 140CPS11420 16 A for one 140CPS11410 and one 140CPS11420 Use only like summable power supplies same product reference except for 140CPS11410 and 140CPS11420 which can be summed The summable supplies are designed so that they split the current supplied to the load almost equally whic
422. idually Isolated LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 Word In Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 14 30 Vac 11 1 mA max OFF 0 5 Vac 3 1 kO capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input impedance ON 12 30 Vac 13 2 mA max OFF 0 5 Vac 2 6 kO capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an 1 9 mA External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 Vac 10s 32 Vac 1 cycle 50 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Input to Input 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 180 mA Power Dissipation 5 5 W max External Power Not required for this module 534 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD Total Harmonic Distortion and 63 Hz maximum frequency 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 535 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI34000 wiring diagram RETURN 1 RETURN 2 RETURN 3 RETURN 4 N C RETURN 5 RETUR
423. igit tens of the address SW2 sets the lower digit ones of the address The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address Key Switch The key switch protects memory from programming changes while the controller is in operation The following figure shows the key switch Stop Stop Mem Q Mem Prt Prt Start Start Note The key switch positions shown next to the switch above are for reference only and are marked on the module as indicated on the right 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 163 CPU Modules Key Switch The following table shows the key switch information Description Key Switch Description Key switch Controller Status Memory Will Accept Key switch Position Protected Programmer Transition From Stop or Start Programmer Changes Stop Controller is stopped Y N From Start or and disables Memory Protect Programmer Stops controller if changes running and disables Programmer changes Mem Prt Controller may be Y N From Stop or Start either stopped or Prevents running and Programmer Pr
424. ilability for the ASCII Interface of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated 1 508 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140ESI06210 Y Y High Speed The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability Interrupts for the High Speed Interrupt of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140HLI34000 Y Y Single Axis The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability Motion for the Single Axis Motion of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL 508 CSA 22 2 C UL Factory Mutual CE Version 142 Class I Div 2 Availabilty 140MSB10100 Y Y Y 140MSC10100 N N N N N N 831 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Agency Approvals Simulators Intrinsically Safe Modules Battery Module The following table provides the agency approvals and conformal coating availability for the Simulators of the indicated Quantum products Quantum Part Conformally Agency Approval Status Numbers Coated UL508 CSA222
425. illustrations Each backplane shown has its own ground connection that is a separate wire returning to the main grounding point rather than daisy chaining the grounds between power supplies or mounting plates The main grounding point is the local common connection of the panel ground equipment ground and earth grounding electrode Also shown are power and grounding configurations of AC and DC systems required for CE compliance The CE mark indicates compliance with the European Directive on Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC 89 336 EEC and the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC In order to maintain compliance the Quantum system must be installed per the installation instructions The following figure shows the AC powered systems FUSE ACL AC POWER SOURCE ACN FUSE AC POWER a E GROUND SOURCE AC N PANEL GROUND POINT EQUIPMENT CHASSIS GROUND EQUIPMENT CHASSIS ROUND FUSE GROUND SCREWS AC POWER SOURCE AC N AC N should be earth grounded If it is not earth grounded it must be fused refer to local codes 730 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide DC Powered The following figure shows the DC powered systems Systems FUSE 24 VDC EQUIPMENT CHASSIS GROUND EARTH GROUND GROUND SCREWS It is recommended that the 24 V power be earth grounded 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 731 Pwr amp Grnding Guide AC
426. ilure 4 6601H power down interrupt 6602H 82588 lan chip test error 6603H receive abort timeout 6604H transmission loop timeout 6605H transmission dma error 6606H cable a initialization error 6607H cable a dma xfer error 6608H cable b dma xfer error 6609H cable a dumped data error 660AH cable a DRQ line hung 660BH cable b DRQ line hung 660CH cable a or b DRQ hung 660DH power up lan controller error 6501H ram address test error 6401H ram data test error 6301H prom checksum error 236 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Networking Rear Panel Two rotary switches are located on the rear panel of the RIO Drop Modules and are Switches used for setting RIO drop addresses refer to the following illustration and table SW1 top switch sets the upper digit tens SW2 bottom switch sets the lower digit ones The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 SW1 Top SW2 Bottom The following table shows the node addresses of the SW1 and SW2 switches SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address SW1 sw2 169 0 12 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 address greater than 32 is selected the module displays flashing ERROR A and ERROR B LED indicating an error condition Only addresses 2 32 are valid
427. in 140ACO02000 Quantum I O Analog Current Out Module 505 and 140AVO02000 Quantum I O Analog Voltage Out Module p 513 4 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 815 CableFast Cabling CableFast Cables Overview This section provides CableFast cable specifications cable lengths inner wire color codes for standard and high power cables cable selections and accessories Cable The following table shows the CableFast cable specifications Specifications Cable Specifications Standard Power Cable Diameter 0 43 in nominal 10 9 mm Number of Conductors 8 420 AWG 0 8 mm 7 28 tinned annealed copper semi rigid PVC 32 26 AWG 0 4 mm 7 34 tinned annealed copper semi rigid PVC Bend Radius I D 0 75 in min 19 0 mm High Power Cable Diameter 0 55 in nominal 14 0 mm Number of Conductors 8 18 AWG 1 0 mm 16 30 tinned annealed copper semi rigid PVC 32 20 AWG 0 8 mm 10 30 tinned annealed copper semi rigid PVC Bend Radius I D 1 50 in min 38 1 mm Common Specifications Cable Jacket Jacket color black 0 040 in wall min flexible PVC Wire Strip Length 0 32 in 8 mm Wire Marking See the wire color coding table next page Wire Rating 300 V 105 C UL rated 2517 CSA Type AWM 1 2 FT1 Cable Rating 300 V 105 C rated Shielding Aluminum polyester tape aluminum side out attached at co
428. ine cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Input to Input 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 180 mA Power Dissipation 5 5 W max External Power Not required for this module 546 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 547 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140DA154000 wiring diagram RETURN 1 RETURN 2 RETURN 3 RETURN 4 N C RETURN 5 RETURN 6 RETURN 7 RETURN 8 N C RETURN 9 RETURN 10 RETURN 11 RETURN 12 N C RETURN 13 RETURN 14 RETURN 15 RETURN 16 N C amp amp GGG 9 GG 9 9 9C O _ E amp 9 C9 9 O INPUT 1 INPUT 2 INPUT 3 INPUT 4 N C INPUT 5 INPUT 6 INPUT 7 INPUT 8 N C INPUT 9 INPUT 10 INPUT 11 INPUT 12 N C INPUT 13 INPUT 14 INPUT 15 INPUT 16 N C Note 1 This module is not polarity sensitive 2 N C Not Connected 548 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DA154300 Quantum I
429. ing Chart The following figures show the 140CPS22400 wiring diagram left and the 140CPS22400 hold up capacitor timing chart right Capacitor Size millifarads C9 Power Loss 100 100 68 47 Al 90 f FE 3 Qc t de common 76 69 424 Vdc Times ms 60 o Capacitor Lan 50 58 Size 69 M 47 millifarads Capacitor 30 2 6 69 T Optional 26 0 10 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Input Voltage Note 1 A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac 6A 30 Vdc 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF or a power supply failure The relay will de energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc 2 Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a gt 50 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip Refer to the hold up capacitor timing chart above for capacitor values Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 88 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies 140CPS41400 DC Summable Power Supply 48 Vdc 8 A Module The following provides information on the DC summable power supply 48 Vdc 8 A Overview module P
430. insically safe wires must be tied down in separate bundles to maintain the required separation Intrinsically safe wiring must be properly identified and labeled Light blue color coding should be used for all intrinsically safe wiring The terminal strip wiring connector on all Quantum Intrinsically Safe modules is colored blue to distinguish it from all non intrinsically safe modules All wire ducts raceways cable trays and open wiring must be labeled Intrinsically Safe Wiring with a maximum spacing of 25 ft between labels Shielded twisted pair wires shall be used for each of the input or output pairs connected to the Quantum Intrinsically Safe module blue terminal strip The wire gauge size can be between AWG 20 and AWG 12 Each twisted pair wire shield must be connected to the ground screws on the backplane at the module end and left open at the field device connection end in the hazardous area The instruction sheet packaged with each Quantum Intrinsically Safe module contains a wiring diagram applicable to that type of module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 377 Intrinsically Safe Modules Module Figure The following diagram is a view of a typical input or output module Model Number Module Description y Color Code Customer Identification Label LED Area ee Field Wiring Fold label and place it inside the door Terminal Strip Part 140XTS33200 Removable Door 4
431. interface module 54 counter modules 54 CPU 52 DIO heads drops 53 Ethernet modules 53 high speed interrupt module 55 Hot Standby module 54 modules 55 NOM modules 54 power supplies 51 RIO heads drops 52 single axis motion modules 55 Peer Cop MODBUS I O Scanner characteristics 286 power and grounding considerations 125 Vdc powered systems 736 AC powered systems 730 AC powered systems for CE compliance 733 CE compliance installation instructions for AC systems 732 CE compliance installation instructions for Vdc systems 734 DC powered systems 731 description 730 power and grounding guidelines chassis grounding 745 Modbus Plus communication tap installation for CE compliance 745 other equipment grounding 746 power supply ground connection 745 systems with multiple power feeds 746 power supplies compatibility issues 744 description 5 739 modes 5 redundant 5 Profibus See CRP81100 Q Quantum Automation Series block diagram 4 capabilities 4 Quantum configurations description 18 distributed I O 18 local I O 18 remote I O 18 Quantum editors description 14 Quantum network support description 30 supported networks 31 Quantum simulator modules description 12 R redundant power supplies description 741 register assignment ACI03000 463 ACIO4000 465 AII33000 382 AII33010 386 ARI03010 467 ATIO3000 470 AVI03000 475 remote I O Quantum configurations 18 RIO configura
432. ion for the Discrete Verified Output Module 140DVO85300 656 140DVO85300 I O Verified 10 30 VDC Out Module 661 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 655 I O Modules Configuration for the Discrete Verified Output Module 140DVO85300 Overview Verified Output Module Map Register Assignment Outputs Map Register The following provides information on the 140DVO85300 DC verified output 10 30 Vdc 32 point module The following is the verified output module e 140DVO85300 DC Output 10 30 Vdc 4x8 Source The 140DVO85300 is configured as two output 4x registers The following diagram shows the register formats Output Point 1 Output Point 17 Register 1 1 213 1415 6 7 89 110 11 12 13 14 15 16 MSB First Word Register 2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 MSB Second Word The 140DVO85300 is configured using 32 contiguous 1x references or two 3x Assignment registers assigned as follows Inputs Register 1 InputSense 4 2 5 7 12 13 14 15 16 Point 1 MSB First Word Register 2 Input Sense Point 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28
433. ion shows the specifications for Quantum hardware modules including e Power Supplies e CPUs Networking Intelligent Special Purpose The following table shows the power supplies for local and RIO Drops Part Number Source Voltage Type Bus Current Provided 140CPS11100 115 230 Vac Standalone 3A 140CPS11400 115 230 Vac Standalone 8A 140CPS11410 115 230 Vac Standalone 8A Summable 140CPS11420 115 230 Vac Standalone 11A 16A 20A Summable 140CPS12400 115 230 Vac Standalone 3A Redundant 140CPS12420 115 230 Vac Standalone 8A 10A 11A Redundant 140CPS21100 24 Vdc Standalone 3A 140CPS21400 24 Vdc Standalone 8A Summable 140CPS22400 24 Vdc Standalone 8A Redundant 140CPS41400 48 Vdc Standalone 8A Redundant 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 51 Hardware Specifications CPU Specifications Part Number Source Voltage Type Bus Current Provided 140CPS42400 48 Vdc Standalone 8A Redundant 140CPS51100 100 150 Vdc Standalone 3A 140CPS52400 125 Vdc Standalone 8A Redundant The following table shows specifications for the CPUs Part Numbers SRAM Ladder Available Bus Current Program Size Logic Registers Required 140CPU11302 109 k 256 k 8k 10k 780 mA 140CPU11303 368 k 512k 16k 10k 790 mA 140CPU21304 606 k 768 k 32kor48k 64kor32k 900 mA 140CPU42402
434. ion when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red A fault external to the module has been detected 1 and 8 left columns Green The indicated output point and channel is turned ON 1 and 16 right two Green The indicated input point and channel is turned ON columns The following table shows the LED indicators for the 140DDM69000 bi directional module n Active 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 4 4 4 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 451 I O Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for Discrete 12 The following table shows the LED descriptions for the 140DDM69000 bi directional modules LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus communication is present F Red Over current condition on any point 1 and 4 left columns Green The indicated output point is turned ON 1 and 4 middle Red The indicated output point has an over current condition columns 1 and 4 right Green The indicated input point is turned ON columns The following table shows the LED indicators for the discrete 12 point 140DDO88500 module with fault indication Point Modules j with Fault AOINE eT Indication 1 9 1 9 2 10 2 10 3 1 3 11 4 12 4 12 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 The following table shows the LED descriptions for discrete 12 point modules with fault indication LEDs Color Indication when ON Active Green Bus
435. ip Part 4043503328 Internal Power Dissipation 2 0 V 3 0 V x Igys Watts where Ipus is in Amperes 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 DIO Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140CRA21110 and 21210 wiring diagram gt E 1 _ m X ki Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 223 DIO LED Indicators The following figure shows the LED panel and Descriptions Ready Fault Pwr ok Error A Modbus Error B The following table shows the DIO LED indicators and descriptions LED Descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed power up diagnostics Fault Red A communications error exists between the DIO module and one or more I O modules or an output module is not being written to over the Modbus Plus network Pwr ok Green Bus power is present Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Error A Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel A dual cable only Error B Red Communication error on the Modbus Plus Channel B dual cable only 224 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 DIO Rear Panel Two rotary switches refer to
436. ipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that support Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability Modbus Port 2 RTS CTS connections function properly for normal non modem communications but do not support modems 154 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Ports Pinout Connections Modbus Ports Pinout Connections for Portable Computers The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT Quantum IBM XT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD SHIELD 1 9 1 sHiELD RX 2 RX TX 2 2 RX TX 3 TX RX 3 TX DTR 4 DTR RTS 4 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND CTS 5 5 GRND DSR 6 DSR DSR 6 6 DSR RTS T RTS GRND 7 7 RTS CTS 8 CTS NC 8 L8 CTS 9 NC DTR 20 9 NC The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin portable computers IBM AT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 1 SHIELD RX 2 2 RX TX 3 TX DTR 4 4 DTR GRND 5 amp GRND DSR
437. iption 708 H hardware specifications ASCII interface module 54 counter modules 54 CPU 52 description 51 DIO heads drops 53 Ethernet modules 53 field bus modules 52 high speed interrupt module 55 Hot Standby module 54 I O modules analog out 59 I O modules discrete in 55 I O modules discrete in out 57 I O modules discrete out 56 intrinsic safe analog modules 59 intrinsic safe discrete modules 59 miscellaneous modules 60 NOM modules 54 power supplies for local and RIO drops 51 RIO heads drops 52 single axis motion modules 55 high speed counter 5 channel See EHC10500 high speed counter module 2 channel See EHC20200 high speed interrupt modules See HLI34000 xxiv 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index HLI34000 description 352 illustration 352 LED descriptions 354 specifications 353 wiring diagram 355 Hot Standby configuration description 22 Hot Standby module See CHS11000 I O map interface network interface techniques 34 I O map status byte description 459 illustration 459 table module configuration 460 modules description 7 448 discrete I O true high true low circuit 457 illustration 448 LED descriptions 448 LED descriptions for 16 point modules 449 LED descriptions for 24 point input modules 449 LED descriptions for 32 point I O modules 450 LED descriptions for bi directional modules 450 LED descriptions for discrete 12 point modules with
438. iring system consists of pre wired Quantum field wiring terminal strips available in various cable lengths that are terminated with D type connectors The D connectors plug into DIN rail mounted terminal blocks offered in straight through or special application versions Cables and terminal blocks are ordered separately and all terminal blocks may be used with any cable length Pigtail cable versions are also available Quantum The following figure shows the Quantum modules and backplane components Modules and Wiring Backplane Panduit o o l 97 D 05 O e AEG AEG AEG AEG AEG AEG lo MODICON eFast Cables MODICON MODICON MODICON MoDICON Wiring Panduit MODICON Cab lo CableFast 140CFA00400 UL FILE 123528 b 79 CableFast 140CFA00400 UL FILE 123528 CableFast Terminal Blocks on DIN Rails TA80 Note Ensure that the wiring panduits are large enough to support 12 ft cables
439. is precaution can result in injury or equipment 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 619 I O Modules Fuse Locations The following figure shows the locations of the fuses for the DDO15310 module Fuse Locations Points 1 8 Points 9 16 Points 17 24 Points Ny oy 25 32 620 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO15310 wiring diagram OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 4 GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 16 GROUP B SUPPLY OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 24 GROUP C SUPPLY OUTPUT 26 OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 5 TTL Nand Gate OUTPUT 7 GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON 8 amp OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 25 OUTPUT 27 OUTPUT 29 OUTPUT 31 GROUP D COMMON e amp amp amp G9 eee E 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 621 I O Modules 140DDO35300 Quantum I O DC Output 24 Vdc 4x8 Source Mo
440. iscrete output 96 point module 592 module zoom selections 593 register assingment 592 discrete simulator module See XSM00200 discrete verified output module See DVO85300 distributed I O Quantum configuations 18 DRA84000 description 649 specifications 649 wiring diagram 651 DRC83000 description 652 specifications 652 wiring diagram 654 05135300 description 667 specifications 667 wiring diagram 669 dual cable configuration RIO configuration 22 RIO in a Hot Standby configuration 24 DVO85300 configuration 656 description 661 Modsoft zoom screen selections 657 register assignments 656 specifications 661 wiring diagram 664 E EHC10500 description 298 illustration 298 LED descriptions 301 LED indicators 301 specifications 299 wiring diagram 302 EHC20200 3x register content 318 Command 1 305 Command 1 and Command 2 response formats 313 Command 2 305 Command 3 306 Command 3 read input counter 313 Command 3 response format 314 Command 4 306 Command 4 output register format 314 Command 4 response format 315 command words 307 configuration 304 COUNT DOWN example 320 counting pulses 340 description 333 fuse location 335 I O map register assignment 304 I O map status byte 315 illustration 333 LED descriptions 336 load values 316 321 module configuration 316 320 module functions 339 module zoom selections 331 one 32 bit counter 310 operations 305 RATE SAMPLE examp
441. issipation 2W External Power Not required Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 61 or higher 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 417 Intrinsically Safe Modules Fixed Wiring System Field Wiring Terminal Strip The DII33000module is designed with a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded twisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12 Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area The module s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify ColorandKeying _ it as an intrinsically safe connector Assignment The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 DII 330 00 CDE ABF 418 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module Approved Wiring Diagrams Ei Paride
442. isted pair wiring 9 NOM 21 X00 ASCII comm port parameters 245 description 239 front panel switches 245 LED descriptions 241 LED error codes 242 portable computers 247 rear panel switches 244 RTU comm port parameters 245 specifications 240 SW1 and SW2 address settings 244 valid comm port parameters 246 NOM25200 adding nodes 269 address settings 256 ASCII comm port parameters 254 bus configuration 261 cables 268 calculating modules in a fiber network 270 comm port parameters 255 connecting 260 269 description 249 fiber optic cable ports 259 fiber optic configurations 261 front panel switches 254 hot standby systems example 266 illustration 250 LED descriptions 251 LED topology and descriptions 251 materials for fiber optic links 267 mixed fiber optic copper network 261 Modbus connector pinouts 257 network status 267 optical star passive couplers 268 point to point configuration 261 rear panel switches 256 repairing cable breaks 269 RJ45 cable parts 258 RJ45 connector 258 RTU comm port parameters 254 self healing ring configuration 265 specifications 252 star topology 264 termination kits 267 tree and star configurations 263 LED indicators 241 O Modbus connector pinouts 246 option module interface Modbus ports pinout connections for network interface techniques 33 xxviii 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index P part numbers ASCII
443. isters as shown in the following READ INPUT figure COUNTER 4X 3X 3X 1 3X 2 3X 3 3X 4 3X 5 Command 4 Command 4 uses one 4X register and six 3X registers as shown in the following READS RATE figure SAMPLE or LAST INPUT COUNT 4X 3X BEFORE 3X 1 PRESET nae 3X 3 3X 4 3X 5 Note 4X register formats for the commands are described first The 3X register contents after issuing Command 1 or 2 are listed after the 4X register description for Command 2 since the responses are the same for both The 3X responses for Commands 3 and 4 immediately follow those commands Note When Command 0 4X 00XX or any other undefined commands are asserted in the 4X register the 3X registers will contain the count inputs if in count mode same as Command 3 and the rate sample values when in rate sample mode same as Command 4 306 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Command The following describes the command words and responses Words Described Command 1 The following figure shows the 4x output register for command 1 CONFIGURE 4X Output Register 16 15 14 13 12 8 100 9 16 5 2 1 Format 4 1 Preset Counter 1 01XX hex L 1 Enable Counter 1 1 Disable Counter 1 1 Preset Counter 2 1 Enable Counter 2 1 Disable Counter 2 Configure Command Bit The following figure shows the 4x 1
444. ith the Rate Sample time value Enabled to count using hardwired input and software control bits To count pulses the module must be Configured for pulse or quadrature mode e Configured for counter display two 16 bit one 32 bit or two 32 bit counters e Loaded with the maximum count e Enabled to count using hardwired input and software control bits To count pulses and turn outputs on and off the module must be e Configured for pulse or quadrature mode e Configured for two 16 bit or one 32 bit counter e Configured to assert or not assert outputs at the programmed count values when the module loses communication with the bus fault condition e Configured to specify if outputs turn on at a setpoint or maximum count turn on atthose points for a specific amount of time or remain latched If latched outputs can only be reset by a hard wired input e Loaded with setpoint values maximum count values and output assert time e Enabled to count using hardwired input and software control bits 340 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Counter Rollover Examples for Pulse Input Example 1 Count Up wa SLL UU LT ET UT LET UU ET UE 1 2 15 le 7 n 35 lo l4 2 Input Counter 1 Output A Output B ___ Count is from 0 gt 10 Maximum Count Output A turns on at Setpoint 5 Output B turns on after Input Count Maximum Terminal Count 10
445. k Common Strip Jumper Fuse Replacement The following information pertains to the CableFast accessories The following table shows the part numbers and descriptions for CableFast Accessories Part Number Description Quantity 140CFU40000 Fuse Kit Wickmann 4 A 10 140CFU08000 Fuse Kit Wickmann 0 8 A 10 140CFU00600 Fuse Kit Wickmann 0 063 A 10 140CFX00110 Terminal Block Common Strip 10 Position 10 see below The following figure shows the terminal block common strip Fuse replacement information is given in the following table Part Number Description Quantity 140 CFX 002 10 Jumper Fuse Replacement see below 10 The following figure shows a jumper Note The jumper is used instead of fuses as a disconnect device 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 821 CableFast Cabling 822 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Error Stopped Codes Error Stopped Codes Overview Error Stopped Codes The following is a list of error stopped codes and their definitions The following is a list of error stopped codes for the Quantum system Stop Bit Code hex Description 7FFF PLC unhealthy 8000 PLC stopped 4000 Bad I O map 2000 PLC unconfigured 1000 Bad Modbus port intervention 0800 Bad segment scheduler 0400 Start of network SON did not start a segment 0200 B
446. l Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 30 Vac 10s 32 Vac 1 cycle 50 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Group to Group 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 250 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 537 I O Modules Specifications Power Dissipation 10 9 W max External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 538 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI35300 wiring diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 1 L ar N OD INPUT 4 INPUT 3 OO INPUT 6 INPUT 5 eds OG INPUT 8 INPUT 7 Mn 8 GROUP A COMMON JOO INPUT 10 3 INPUT 9 INPUT 12 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 INPUT 13 INPUT 16 7 INPUTS GROUP B COMMON INPUT 18 INPUT 17 a 65 INPUT 20 INPUT 19 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 G INPUT 23 T GROUP C COMMON INPUT 26 INPUT 25 INPUT 28 a INPUT 27 69 69 INPUT 30 INPUT 29 INPUT
447. l mount NS35 7 5 and NS32 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 751 CableFast Cabling Terminal Block Use this table to select valid combinations of Quantum I O modules and CableFast Selection Guide terminal blocks 88 8 8 8 S o o 5 S o S S lt m o ul o z L LL u u L L u EDS S eng e ge kS XH E ME MA a mr 140ACIO3000 X X X 140ACO02000 X X X 140 104000 X 140ACO13000 X 140ARI03010 X 140ATI03000 X See Note 3 140AMMO09000 X 140 103000 X X X 140AVO02000 X X 140DAI34000 X X 140DAI35300 X X X X 140DAI44000 X X 1400 145300 X X X X 140DAI54000 X X 140DAI54300 X 140DAI55300 X X X X 140DAI74000 CableFast Not Allowed 140DAI75300 CableFast Not Allowed 140DAM59000 X See Note 1 140DAO84000 X See Note 2 140DAO84010 X See Note 2 140DAO84210 X See Note 2 140DAO84220 X See Note 2 752 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling e e e S 9 a 8 9 8 lt e T o e e o e e o lt m o u 2 5 x L LL L u Lu u u L o o o o o o o o e e e e e e t t t t r y E T T r w 140DAO85300 X See Note 1 140DDI15310 X X 14000135300 x
448. l relay contact to the output when the module is not active If COMMON 1 R1 connected to an external source the master 4 3 override input must be fused by a 1 16 A fuse If the master override is not connected to an NS 6 5 CONTROL CHANNEL 1 external source then it must be connected to Jumper JUMPERED common of that channel The master override MASTER OVERRIDE e FOR POY relay transition time is typically 2 ms sd REFERENCE 1 NOTE 1 COMMON 1 NOTE 2 N C Not Connected 10 9 NC COMMON 2 OUTPUT 2 12 11 Jumper CHANNEL 2 COMMON 2 0 14 013 Re JUMPERED FOR 0 TO 5 V Jumper 16 15 CONTROL 2 Normally Open when I Typical one MASTER OVERRIDE S REFERENCE 2 CH X green LED is ON of four See o Normally gt NOTE 1 MMON 2 COMMON 2 OM eo 18 NC Open Channel COMMON 3 OUTPUT 3 f Output X j Jumper normaly I M COMMON 3 ose Master 24 23 Override X R3 CHANNEL 3 VE JUMPERED NC 56 CONTROL 3 FOR 4 5 V MASTER OVERRIDE Jumper Master Override Relay Circuit Internal See 28 427 REFERENCE 3 NOTE 1 COMMON 3 30 29 N C COMMON 4 gq OUTPUT 4 L CHANNEL 4 COMMON 4 Jumper JUMPERED 34 33 FOR0TO10V R4 See NC 36 1351 CONTROL 4 NOTE 1 FELD MASTER OVERRIDE 38 37 REFERENCE 4 DEVICE COMMON 4 amp 40 39 N C 1 16 EXTERNAL The external voltage source VOLTAGE SOURCE is not required for standard operation see NO
449. lag 0 YES Module outputs that fault during the ON state are controlled by a thermal protection mechanism At shutdown the appropriate fault status indications will be present After shutdown the output device will cool and try to turn itself back on If the fault has been removed the output will function normally and fault status indications will be removed If the fault is still present the point will again shut down and repeat the cycle until the fault is removed or the point is commanded off When a faulted point is commanded off all fault indications will no longer be present because the miscompare will no longer exist WARNING Possible Safety Hazard When choosing YES the use of thermally protected output devices with the 140DVO85300 module can produce safety concerns In the event of an enabled output sensing an overcurrent condition the output will disable until the overcurrent condition is removed The output will then re enable itself if still set ON in the logic program Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 660 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140DVO85300 I O Verified 10 30 VDC Out Module Overview The Quantum Verified Output module is a 10 30 Vdc 32 point output module with diagnostic capability The module will detect and report the output state sensed at the field connector and depending on t
450. le s amp Fiber Optic Cable i MB Tap with L Terminator MB Tap 490NRP254 Fiber Optic Repeater Node 3 i Node 4 il Node 5 P S CPUNOM I O I O P S CPUNOM I O I O P S CPUNOM 1 0 e ite N 252 N ite N 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 265 Modbus Plus NOM Hot Standby The following figure shows the self healing ring configuration for Hot Standby Systems Systems example Self Healing Ring Configuration for Hot Standby Systems Example PC with SA85 Card Legend S MB Cable Fiber Optic Cable RIO Cable MB Tap with L Terminator 490NR25400 Fiber Optic Repeater MB Tap for Modbus Plus Oooo Remote I O ph Node 1 Primary System Standby Rees Node 2 P S CPU CRP NOMCHS P S P S CPU CRPINOMCHS P S P S CPUNOM I O O el ite ite N N N I Coaxial RI
451. le 320 rate sample mode 312 rate sample mode caution 322 rate sampling 340 read input counter command 317 read rate sample 321 reset latched outputs 318 response for configuration command 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xxiii Index 317 response to read rate sample command 321 signal descriptions 343 specifications 334 timing diagrams 338 timing parameters 338 two 16 bit counters 309 two 32 bit counters 311 user logic 319 using I O mapped registers 315 wiring diagram 344 wiring diagram 1 323 wiring diagram 2 325 wiring diagram 3 327 wiring diagram 4 329 EIA92100 AS i cable connection illustration 200 description 196 illustration 197 LED bus mode 198 LED descriptions 198 LED diagnostics 199 LED display 198 LED slave I O mode 199 specifications 200 error stopped codes definitions 824 list 823 5106210 description 346 front panel connectors and switches 350 front panel push button 351 illustration 346 LED blinking sequence 349 LED descriptions 348 LED indicators 348 RS 232 serial port setup 351 RS 232C serial port 350 specifications 347 Status LED crash codes 349 Ethernet MMS modules See NOE5X100 Ethernet SY MAX modules See NOE3X100 Ethernet TCP IP module See NOE2X100 F fiber optic cable bus configuration 261 connecting 260 point to point configuration 261 ports 259 fiber optic network adding nodes 269 calculating number of modules 270 fuses descr
452. le address of 11 The following figure shows SW1 and SW2 n SW1 TOP 07 SW2 following table shows SW1 SW2 address settings SW1 and SW2 Adress Settings Node Address SW1 SW2 1 9 0 15 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address 132 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Ports Pinout Connections All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that supports Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it isrecommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT 9 Pin Female CD 1 RX TX DTR GRND DSR RTS co O Q A CQ N CTS Quantum 9 Pin Male SHIELD RX TX DTR GRND DSR RTS CTS NC
453. le shows individual Quantum module mechanical specifications Specifications Weight 2 Ibs 1 kg max Dimensions H x D x W 9 84 in x 4 09 in x 1 59 in 250 mm x 103 85 mm x 40 34 mm Wire Size 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG max 20 AWG min Material Enclosures and Polycarbonates Bezels Space Requirements 1 backplane slot 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 43 System Specifications Electrical Specifications AC DC Power The following table shows the Quantum electrical specifications RFI Immunity IEC 1000 4 3 80 1000 MHz 10 V m Ground Continuity IEC 1000 4 5 2 kV shield to ground Electrostatic Discharge IEC 1000 4 2 8 kV air 4 kV contact Flammability Wiring Connector 94V 0 Module Enclosure 94V 1 The following table shows the Quantum AC DC power supplies Supplies Fast Transients IEC 1000 4 4 2 kV common mode Damped Ocillatory Transients 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Surge Withstand Capability 2 kV common mode Transients IEC 1000 4 5 1 kV differential mode Non Periodic Peak Input Voltage 2 3 times nominal for 1 3 ms Nominal DC average or AC peak Modules The following table shows the Quantum function I O modules with operating Table 1 voltages less than 24 Vac or Vdc Fast Transients IEC 1000 4 4 0 5 kV common mode Damped Oscillatory Transients 1 kV com
454. le shows the LED error codes for the 140CPU53414A module Indication when On The CPU has passed power up diagnostics The CPU has been started and is solving logic The battery needs replacing or is not present Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2 Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port LED Descriptions LEDS Color Ready Green Run Green Bat Low Red Modbus Green Modbus Green Error A Red Mem Prt Amber Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414A LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82E MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 181 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is z
455. lefast Output Source module switches 24 Vdc powered loads Outputs are Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the 140DDO36400 output module Specifications Number of Output Points 96 in six 16 point groups LEDs ACT Green Bus communications are present F Red Group power missing or point faulted 32 Green Points 33 to 64 displayed on LED matrix 64 Green Points 65 to 96 displayed on LED matrix 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 6 words out Voltage Operating 19 2 30 Vdc ON State Drop Point 0 5 Vdc 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 3 2A Per Module 19 2A Off State Leakage Point 1 mA 24 Vdc Surge Current Maximum Each Point 2 A Internally limited Response Resistive Loads OFF ON lt 1 ms ON OFF lt 1 ms Output Protection internal Thermal overload and short circuit Load Inductance Maximum 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or 0 5 led where L Load inductance Henry 2 Load current A F Switching frequency Hz Load Capacitance Maximum 50 uf 636 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Isolation Output to Bus 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Group indication loss of field power faulted point short circuit or overload Bus Current Requir
456. les 24 Point Input Module Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Modsoft Module Zoom Selections There is only one 24 point input module 140 DDI 673 00 DC Input 125 VDC 3x8 Sink The input module listed above can be configured as either 24 contiguous discrete input 1x reference or as two contiguous input 3x registers in the following format The following figures show the input point for Register 1 and Register 2 Register 1 Input Poiti 1 2 3 4 5 MSB First Word Register 2 Input Point 17 MSB Second Word There is no input I O map status byte associated with this module Push Enter to display and select the Input Type and the Filter Select options The following figures show the input type and the filter select option The input Type selection only appears if the module is mapped to a register Input Type BIN BCD Group X 7 msec Filter Select on The Filter Select option is made on a 1 5 msec group by group basis and defaults to the 7 msec filter 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 531 I O Modules 32 Point Input Modules Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Modsoft Module Zoom Selections The 32 point input modules are as follows 140DAI35300 AC Input 24 Vac 4x8 140DAI45300 AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 140DAI55
457. les Module Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display Global Address Label Transmit Cable Connector Receive Cable Connector N 140 IOE 511 00 CONTROLLER Global Address Fiber Optic Rx d Removable Door Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door Note The NOE51100 is equipped with one RJ45 connector instead of the fiber optic connectors as shown above on the NOE55100 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 279 Ethernet Modules Specifications The following table shows the MMS Ethernet specifications Specifications Communication Ports NOE51100 1 10BASE T Ethernet network RJ 45 port NOE55100 2 10BASE FL Ethernet network ST style ports Cable Type 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet 2 3 4 or 6 twisted pairs with a solid copper core 10Base T twisted pair RG58a u or RG58C U coaxial Belden 9907 82907 or equivalent Wire Size 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet 20 AWG 10Base T twisted pair 22 24 26 AWG Topology 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet Bus 10Base T twisted pair Star Connector 10Base 2 or ThinWire Ethernet BNC UG 274 10Base T twisted pair Modular RJ 45 4 pins of 8 are us
458. ling The following figures show the dimensions for the 140CFH00800 module Dimensions V4 4 4 S4 3 3 53 V2 2 2 52 1 T 1 51 RET GND V8 8 8 58 V7 7 7 S7V6 6 6 S6 V5 5 5 55 a Hate Ha Gesn cease 2 8 in z 58 4 mm Co JL 3 0 in 5 0 in r4 127 0 9 76 2 mm 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 786 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram Source Grounding module Module Input 1 Module Input 1 Module Input 2 Module Input 2 Module Input 3 Module Input 3 Field Side Connections 5 Ou 4 94 955 es e 5 9v5 956 9c e Ove 95 5 5 956 95 9 s Ove GND RET V The following figure shows the wiring for the
459. ll PLCs that support networking communication capabilities over Ethernet can use the MSTR Ladder Logic instruction to read or write controller information or can also use IEC communication blocks All NOE771xx Quantum Ethernet TCP IP modules provide the user with the ability Server to access data from the controller using the standard MODBUS TCP protocol Any device PC HMI package another PLC or any MODBUS TCP compliant device can access data from the PLC The MODBUS TCP Server also allows programming panels to log into the controller over Ethernet Limitations The NOE771xx supports up to 64 simultaneous MODBUS TCP Server connections The NOE771xx allows only one Programming Panel to be logged in at a time to guarantee consistency of changes to the controller configuration The following MODBUS TCP commands are supported by the NOE e Read Data e Write Data e Read Write Data e Get Remote Statistics e Clear Remote Statistics e MODBUS 125 Commands used by programming panels to download a new Exec to the NOE Performance The following table shows the performance characteristics of the NOE771xx s MODBUS TCP Server Parameter Value Typical Response Time ms 0 6 Number of MODBUS connections Client and Server 64 01 11 16 Client 00 32 Server 10 Number of simultaneous login channels 1 Note NOE771xx MODBUS TCP performance measurements are made with Quantum 140CPU53414 PLC 288
460. ll on this tape to remove battery Do not use metallic tool Batt install date The following figure shows the battery for the Battery Module part number 990XCP90000 The following figure shows the CPU battery part number 990XCP98000 Modbus Plus Tap The following figure shows the Modbus Plus Network tap part number 990NAD23000 I1 LA Y 702 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Misc Components Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Terminator Modbus Plus Ruggedized Tap Programming Cable The following figure shows the Modbus Plus Network ruggedized tap part number 990NAD23010 This tap is mounted on the ruggedized Modbus Plus tap din rail mounting bracket part number 990NAD23012 The following figure shows the Modbus Plus network terminator plug part number 990NAD2301 1 for the ruggedized Modbus Plus tap maj The following figure shows the Modbus Plus programming cable part number 990NAA21510 for the ruggedized network tap wT 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 703 Misc Components Conversion The following figure shows the 200 series I O conversion connector part number Connector 990XTS00300 4 _
461. lligent Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum 297 WCEclo cC 297 140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module 298 Configuration for 140 20200 304 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module 333 140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module 346 140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module 352 140MSB MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules 357 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander Cable 368 140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module 372 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog Digital Input Output Lyle Li cep 375 Ara Glance RR Se a tally 375 Intrinsically Safe Modules General Information 376 Intrinsically Safe Modules General Description 376 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules 380 AtarGlance osi ss SY a oe re Ue ee eis 380 Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules 381 140 1133000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module 390 140 1133010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module 403 140 1033000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module 409 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules 414 Ata Glance coetu tet tra Sida biete UL deme
462. llowing figure shows the NOE77100 Ethernet module The other NOE771xx Ethernet modules are the same in appearance except for the model number Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display IP Address Writable Area Global Address Label 100 Base Fx MT RJ Cable Connector NOE 771 00 Ethernet 10 100 Active Ready Fault Run Coll Link Tx Act Rx Act 10MB 100MB Fduplex Kernel Appl 10 100 Base T RJ 45 Cable Connector 282 840 USE 100 00 Sep ember 2002 Ethernet Modules Specifications The main specifications for the Quantum 140NOE771xx Ethernet Modules are described in the following table Specifications Communication Ports One auto sensing 10 100Base T shielded twisted pair RJ 45 connector port and one 100Base FX MT RJ connector port Both ports transmit and receive Modbus commands encapsulated in TCP IP protocol Only one port can be used at a time Bus Current Required 750 mA Power Dissipation 3 8 W Fuse None Programming Software Type and version Concept Ver 2 2 or higher NOE77100 10 Concept Ver 2 5 or higher NOE77101 11 Modsoft Ver 2 6 or higher NOE77100 10 ProWORX NXxT Ver 2 1 or higher NOE77100 10 ProWORX Ver 2 2 or higher NOE77101 11 Firmware CPU Type and version Quantum E
463. lobal Data are arranged in a distribution group for the purpose of application variable exchange and synchronization Each Global Data device can publish up to one network application variable and subscribe up to 64 network application variables The Quantum NOE s embedded Web Global Data Configuration Page provides a configuration screen to determine which and how many application variables are exchanged with this service After configuration the exchanges between all stations belonging to the same distribution group are done automatically The Global Data service uses the 4x register space for Global Data exchanges Key Features of The main features for Global Data are Global Data e One Publisher and many Subscribers e A device can publish one network variable of up to 512 registers e A device can subscribe to several network variables of up to 2048 4x registers e A device subscribes to the complete network variable e One distribution group per network IP address e Application defined publication rate e Up to 64 Global Data network variables numbered from 1 to 64 can be part of the data distribution group e An NOE has only one multicast address consequently it can only publish and subscribe inside the group e A device can participate in several distribution groups by using multiple NOEs in the rack Global Data has an advantage over Client Server services when more than one Subscriber is receiving the same data since only
464. ls 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF The relay will de energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 73 Power Supplies 140CPS12400 AC Redundant Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the AC redundant power supply 115 230 Vac 8 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module e UE Model Number Customer Identification Label 115220 Vac Module Description Fold label and place it inside door LED Area Color Code Removable Door Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover its vac vac m afon AAAAAAAAAAA AAAA ACL ACN EE I 19999909 i fa q Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 74 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Specifications power supply module The following table shows t
465. m CPU may support several drops a drop can be either Quantum SY MAX 200 500 or 800 Series I O systems Note As stated above the Quantum provides connectivity to other Modicon products via the same system It will connect to 800 series I O via the J890 J892 P890 or P892 remote I O adapters 200 series I O via J290 and J291 remote I O adapters 500 series I O via 29X J540 remote I O adapters and SY MAX 8030CRM931 For more information on use and installation of Quantum RIO see Modicon Remote Cable System Planning and Installation Guide Part Number 890USE10100 For more information on Hot Standby systems see the Quantum Hot Standby Installation and Planning Guide Part Number 840USE10600 The following figure is an example of a single cable Quantum RIO configuration RIO PS CPU Head O I O o o Local I O Drop o Lo e Up to 31 Drops RIO Tap RIO PS iod VO VO VO VO 5 RIO S prop VO O VO 1 0 5 rere RIO Tap o o o o REST ma eec RIO Drop m A RIO tap is required for every RIO drop in the system B800 Series Drop 21 840 USE 100 00
466. m Modbus and Modbus Plus ports is given in the following table 38 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Network Configurations Modbus and Modbus Plus Services The following table shows the Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus services Type Service Description Native CPU Ports NOM 1 2 Ports NOM 3 6 Ports Modbus Modbus Plus Modbus Modbus Plus Modbus Modbus Plus Modbus Services Default Modbus Port Parameters Configurable Modbus Port Parameters Modbus to Modbus Plus Bridging Local CPU Programming Remote CPU Programming over Modbus Plus Modbus access to local CPU Modbus access to remote CPU over Modbus Plus Modbus Network Slave Support Modbus Master support with XMIT Loadable Executive Firmware Loading Support Modbus Plus Services MSTR read write register messagin g MSTR read write Global Data messaging MSTR get clear local remote statistics Config Extension Global Data Support Config Extension Peer Cop Support Distributed I O Support CPU Programming Executive Firmware Loading Support 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 39 Network Configurations Note 1 2 3 Only supported on the 140CPU42402 140CPU42412 A and 140CPU53414 A Quantum Controllers The native CPU Modbus port can be disabled from bridge mode operation with the na
467. mber On when in Kernel Mode Flashing while in download mode 10MB Green On when the module is connected to a 10 Megabit network 100MB Green On when the module is connected to a 100 Megabit network Fduplex Green On when Ethernet is operating in the full duplex mode Appl Green On when crash log entry exists 284 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules Run LED Status The following table lists each available state of the Run LED indicator and provides diagnostic information for that state Indicator State Status On steady Normal operation The NOE module is ready for network communication Number of flashes in sequence one Not used two Not used three No Link the network cable is not connected or is defective four Duplicate IP address The module will stay off line five No IP address The module is attempting to obtain an IP address from a BOOTP server Six Using default IP address seven No valid executive NOE present eight Invalid IP configuration Likely cause Default gateway is not on the same subnet mask as the NOE gt Key Features The key features of the 140 NOE 771 00 01 10 11 models are listed below 10 1 HTTP Server X FTP Server Flash File System BOOTP Client BOOTP Server SNMP V2 Agent MODBUS Messaging x x x X x x x x X X x Xx I O Scann
468. ment grounding Instrument module Grounding Field Side Jumper Connections See jumper information below 51 Monitor 1 Field I Sink 1 Device Current Out V16A Sinking F1 Jumper Source 1 S2 e Monitor 2 da I Sink 2 S 2 1 16A V 2 ow 2 3 Source 2 Monitor 3 Field I Sink 3 Device 1 16A Current Out Sourcing F3 Source 3 S Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU00600 Qty 10 vg Wickman 3700063041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 q 4 V 4 Jumper Part Number e 140CFX001 10 V 4 4 Jumper Connections e S1 to V1 to 1 GND S3 to V3 e to V3 RET V 4 804 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 For the required jumper options for the 140ACO02000 see the wiring diagrams in ACO02000 Wiring Diagram p 507 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 805 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFJ00400 chassis grounding Chassis module
469. ments Input Voltage 100 276 Vac Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Input Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 1096 of the fundamental ms value Input Current 0 4 A 115 Vac 0 2 A 230 Vac Inrush Current 10 115 Vac 20 A 230 Vac VA Rating 50 VA Input Power Interruption 1 2 cycle full load and minimum rated line voltage frequency No less than 1 second between interruptions Fusing external 1 5 A slo blo recommended Part 043502515 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 3A Minimum Current 0 3A Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506326 Internal Power Dissipation 2 0 3 0 x lour Watts where lour is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 63 Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS11100 LED indicator Pwr ok Note For Closed System installations connector 140XTS00 500 must be used refer to Closed System Installation p 747 The following table shows the CPS11100 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus The following figure shows the CPS11100 wiring diag
470. mitted Data 5 GND Signal Ground 7 RTS Request to Send 8 CTS Clear to Send 194 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules Specifications The following table shows the technical specifications for the 140CRP81 100 Communication Module Specifications Programming software Modsoft version 2 32 or greater Concept version 2 2 or greater Bus current required 1 2A Power dissipation 6 5W Data Interface RS 232C 9 pin D shell non isolated Shielded cable 3 m max 19 2 Kbps default RS 485 Profibus up to 12 Mbps Installation Local backplane only Bus Specifications Bus nodes max 32 Bus lenths transmission rates for 12 Mbps cable max 1 2 km at 9 6 Kbps max 1 2 km at 19 2 Kbps max 1 2 km at 93 75 Kbps max 1 0 km at 187 5 Kbps max 0 5 km at 500 Kbps max 0 2 km at 1 5 Mbps max 0 1 km at 3 Mbps max 0 1 km at 6 Mbps max 0 1 km at 12 Mbps Transmission media shielded twisted pair Connection interface EIA RS 485 Node type Master class 1 Bus access procedure Master slave to dP bus slaves Transmission procedure half duplex Frame length Max 255 bytes Data unit length Max 246 bytes Data security Hamming distance HD 4 Node addresses 1 126 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 195 Quantum Field Bus Modules 140EIA92100 Quantum AS i Master Module
471. modbus abort command error 624H bad modbus state trn int 625H bad modbus state rcv int 626H bad comm state trn_asc 627H transmit underflow error 628H bad comm state trn_tru 629H bad comm state rcv_asc 62aH bad comm state rcv_rtu 62bH bad transmit comm state 62cH bad receive comm state 242 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOMs LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 62dH bad modbus state tmrO evt 62eH bad uart interrupt 631H UPI timeout error 632H bad UPI response opcode 633H UPI bus diagnostic error 634H mbp bus interference error 635H bad mbp response opcode 636H timeout waiting for mbp 637H mbp out of synchronization 638H mbp invalid path 639H peer did not respond with complement of the opcode 63AH peer unable to come out of transitions at power up 681h bad master state 682h bad slave state 683h unknown routing failure to send 684h bad port number in set proc 685h bad port number in reset proc 686h bad port number in getport proc 687h bad port number in bitpos proc 688h bad port number in enable transmit interrupt proc 689h bad port number in enable receive interrupt proc 68ah bad port number in disable transmit interrupt proc 68bh bad port number in 691h privilege flag is not reset in the session timeout proc 692h b
472. mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82bE MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA 118 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm state trn_asc 623 bad comm state trn_rtu 624 bad comm state rcv_rtu 625 bad comm state rcv_asc 626 bad modbus state tmrO evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 119 CPU Modules
473. module GROUP A B C D Note 1 Entity parameters per um um SEENOTE 1 channel Veo 15 5 V lg 123 mA C 0 47 uf Source 1 La 1 0 mH V Sense 1 hermocouple Type J K E LR S See Note 2 Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V I Chassis N C Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair Note 3 If the electrical V Sense 2 Ground cables should be used for parameters of the cable connections Shields should be unknown the following values I Source 3 left open at the field end and Medan used for Ccable and V Sense 3 connected to chassis ground at the ground screws the Capacitance 60 Pf ft backplane Inductance 0 20 uH ft N C N C Source 4 Note 4 Install in accordance 2 on UR may with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 V Sense 4 IE V Sense 4 T Tequireo and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Source 5 Source 5 V Sense 5 A VSense5 s Q Was smk ooo See Note 1 Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must N C extend as close to the terminal Source 6 as possible 1 V Sense 6 Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 Chassis cables of one module must be I Source 7 E d Ground routed separately from I S Note 3 Pins marked N C Not cables of an
474. mon FA 0 8A q dNOY9 Module O NI Group A Power VBF i Group B e VC vC Group C Power Power e VD VD Group D Power DC Input Module Power Module pu Group B Common Module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 767 CableFast Cabling Note The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 768 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CFC03200 wiring for the 140DDO15310 output for DDO15310 module Output Module Module Group A Common Module Field Side Connections Group A Supply Module Group B Common Module Group B Supply Module Output 1 Modul Output 6 Module Output 7 e 24 3 34 9 44 e e 6 7 8 10 11 11 17 17 8 18 e 9 19 20 2 e 9214 e 224 23 e 25 e26 26 BEALI 27 e28 28 9 29 0 30 32 2 e e e 9314 e TTL Inverter V g 9 dnOd9 TTL Nand Gate e 9 Module Output 9 1 10 4 A Fuse Part N
475. mon mode 0 5 kV differential mode Surge Withstand Capability 1 kV common mode Transients IEC 1000 4 5 0 5 kV differential mode Modules The following table shows the Quantum I O modules with operating voltages Table 2 between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc Fast Transients IEC 1000 4 4 1kV Damped Oscillatory Transients 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Surge Withstand Capability Transients 1 kV common mode IEC 1000 4 5 0 5 kV differential mode 44 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 System Specifications 1 0 Modules The following table shows the Quantum I O modules with operating voltages greater Table 3 than 48 Vac or Vdc Fast Transients IEC 1000 4 4 2kV Damped Oscillatory Transients 2 kV common mode 1 kV differential mode Surge Withstand Capability Transients 2 kV common mode IEC 1000 4 5 1 kV differential mode Operating The following table shows the Quantum operating conditions Conditions Temperature 0 60 C 32 140 F Humidity 90 95 percent RH non condensing at 60 Chemical Enclosures and terminal strips are made of Interactions polycarbonates This material can be damaged by strong alkalis and various hydrocarbons esters halogens and ketones in combination with heat Common products containing these include detergents PVC products petroleum products pesticides disinfectanats paint removers and spray paints Altitude 2 000 meters When the
476. moning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 2 The GND ground terminal points are not connected 784 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling 140CFH00800 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The H block is used for analog inputs with individual fusing provided per channel This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations See Features of the CableFast Cabling System p 750 for information on common specifications and features of CableFast cabling blocks Terminal Block The following figure shows the 140CFH00800 terminal block B 20 ta cal 8 7 6 5 e o CableFast 140 008 00 ii O O O O e e e e2e 4 3 2 1 e9 e gt ese 1 41 LT LL CT Cd CLI fod CY Cd 000 ss sseee jeeejeeejeee Application The following are the application notes for the 140CFH00800 module Notes 1 Configuration Eight analog inputs with a common loop supply Each point is allocated four terminals 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides individually 0 063 A fused connection point sets for the 140ACI03000 and 140AVI03000 analog input modules 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 785 CableFast Cab
477. mputer connections Connections for IBNLAT Quant Portable 5 USU Computers 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 RX TX 3 TX DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR DSR RIS 7 RTS CTS CTS NC 9 NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send N C No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 124 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules 140CPU21304 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU21304 Controller module CPU 768 K MATH 1xModbus Plus Max IEC Program 606 K CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its parts LED Area 140 1 CPU 213 04 CONTROLLER Battery Memory Protect and fs Comm parameter mu Slide Switches Modbus Modbus Ed Connector Modbus Plus Modbus Connector 1 HUS 5 Chan A Model Number Module Description Color Code Removable door Part 043513804 lt q Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door Part 043502480 Date r mem ASCII pt P off not used Modbus Modbus Plus 0 U Network lode 840 USE 100 0
478. municating on a local network make sure the default IP network address is not already in use on that network To determine the default IP network address locate the global address label on the front panel of the module Convertthe rightmost eight digits from hexadecimal to decimal The result should be a decimal number in the form 84 xxx xxx xxx where each group of xxx is a number from 0 to 255 This is the default IP network address The following example shows the steps for discovering the default IP network address Step Action 1 Locate the global address label on the front panel of the module IEEE GLOBAL ADDRESS 0000540B72A8 2 Note the rightmost eight digits 540B72A8 ps babes YYYY 84 11 114 168 3 Convert them from hexadecimal to decimal Each pair of hexadecimal numbers will result in a decimal number between 0 and 255 This is the default IP address 4 If you use the default IP network address and if your network uses Ethernet II framing and if you do not need to specify the default gateway or a subnet mask then you may install the module without changing the default configuration 274 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules CAUTION System Error Do not connect this module to your network until you have ensured that its IP address will be unique on the network Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage CA
479. n 250 Vrms Note 9 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA S82 01 Note 10 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval 31001363 Rev 00 140 1133010 Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 407 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module Notes related to UL certification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Vec 24 3 V ls 112 mA Ca 127 nf La 1 5 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 If the electrical parameters of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60Pf ft Inductance 0 20 uH ft Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe l S cables of one module must be routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Vec V max Isc lt max Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Lcable 31001363 Rev 00 HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS I DIVISION I GROUP A D NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION SEE NOTE 1 pa irm e
480. n 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip Refer to the hold up capacitor timing chart above for capacitor values 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 91 Power Supplies 140CPS42400 DC Redundant Power Supply 48 Vdc 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC redundant power supply 48 Vdc 8 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module Model Number Fas VDO Module Description Color Code LED Area Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door 4 Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover 8 4 Alarm Relay 48Vdc 48Vdc cag A Noe ay Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG Note Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding an 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip Refer to the hold up capacitor timing chart above for capacitor values 92 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Specifications power supply module The following table shows the specifications for the 140CPS42400 PS 48 VDC RED
481. n inline connectors with or without service ports and bus terminators Quantum AS i modules provide connectivity between a Quantum controller and Module AS i networks AS i bus cable is an unshielded flat two wire link on which communication and power are transmitted to connected devices The media insulation is self healing to accommodate junction block removal 10 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Overview Quantum Intelligent Special Purpose I O Modules Overview Quantum Intelligent Special Purpose I O modules operate with minimum intervention from the Quantum controller after initially downloading module parameters or programs The Quantum intelligent special purpose I O modules include the following e High Speed Counter modules EHC e ASCII Interface module ESI e High Speed Interrupt module HLI e Single Axis Motion Modules MSx e Multi Axis Motion Modules MMS 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 11 Quantum Overview Quantum Simulator Modules XSM Overview Discrete and There are two types of simulator modules as described below The following table shows discrete and analog simulators Analog 3 Type Description Simulators yp P Discrete 16 Point The Discrete Simulator 16 points is used to generate up to 16 binary Simulator input signals to the 140DAI54000 and the 140DAI74000 AC input 140XSM01000 modules Analog Simulator The Analog Simulator 2 cha
482. nal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4 20 mA range Required Addressing 9 Words In Voltage Input Linear Measuring Range 1 5 Vdc Absolute Maximum Input 50 Vdc Input Impedance gt 20 MQ Current Input Linear Measuring Range 4 20mA Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA Input Impedance 250 Q 0 0396 Resolution 12 Bits Accuracy Error 25 C Voltage Mode Typical 0 05 of full scale Maximum 0 1 of full scale Current Mode Add 0 03 to voltage specification Linearity 0 04 Accuracy Drift w Typical 0 0025 of full scale C Temperature Maximum 0 005 of full scale C Common Mode Rejection gt 72 dB 60Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB cutoff 15 Hz 20 Isolation Channel to Bus 1000 Vdc 3000 Vpp for 1 minute 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 479 I O Modules Specifications Operating Voltage Channel to Channel 30 Vdc max Update Time 5 ms for all channels Fault Detection Broken wire 4 20 mA mode or under voltage range 1 5V Bus Current Required 240 mA Power Dissipation 2W External Power Not required for this module Note Calibration is not required for this module 480 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the A
483. nalog input module Specifications Number of Channels 16 Differential or 16 externally tied single ended LEDs Active Indicates Bus communication is present F Indicates channel fault NOTE This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition in the 4 20 mA range Required Addressing 17 Words In Current Input Linear Measuring Range 0 25 mA 0 25 000 counts 0 20 mA 0 20 000 counts 4 20 mA 0 16 000 counts 4 20 mA 0 4 095 counts Absolute Maximum Input 30 mA Input Impedance 250 Q nominal Accuracy Error 25 0 125 of full scale Linearity 0 to 60 C 6uA max 0 25 mA 0 25 000 counts GA max 0 20 mA 0 20 000 counts 64A max 4 20 mA 0 16 000 counts 12 4 20 mA 0 4 095 counts Accuracy Drift w Temperature 0 0025 of full scale 0 005926 of full scale Typical Maximum Common Mode Rejection gt 90 dB 60Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB cutoff 34 Hz 2596 Isolation Field to bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Operating Voltage Channel to Channel 30 Vdc max Update Time 15ms for all 16 channels Fault Detection Broken wire in 4 20 mA mode Bus Current Required 360 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 483 I O Modules Specifications
484. nce ON 175 264 Vac 9 7 mA max OFF 40 Vac 32 capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 165 264 Vac 11 5 mA max OFF 0 40 Vac 27 capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from an 2 6 mA External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 264 Vac 10s 300 Vac 1 cycle 400 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Group to Group 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation 9 W max External Power Not required for this module 560 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must be sinusoidal with less than 6 THD and 63 Hz maximum frequency 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 561 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAI75300 wiring diagram INPUT 2 0 INPUT 1 N INPUT 4 INPUT 3 5 L INPUT 6 INPUT 5 av INPUTS INPUT 7 N GROUP A COMMON 9o INPUT 10 INPUT 9 INPUT 12 INPUT 11 INPUT 14 B E INPUT 13 INPUT 16 INPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON 9G INPUT 18 INPUT 17 INPUT 20 2 x INPUT 19 INPUT 22 INPUT 21 INPUT 24 INPUT 23
485. nce of the F Status Error 1 and Error Sequence 2 LEDs LEDs and Blinking Sequence F Status Error 1 Error 2 Description F Status Error 1 Error 2 Description OFF ON OFF OFF Programming mode OFF OFF ON N A Serial Port 1 incurred a buffer overrun OFF OFF N A ON Serial Port 2 incurred a buffer overrun N A Blinking See OFF OFF The ASCII module is in kernal mode the next table and may have an error Status LED The following table shows a table of Status LED crash codes Crash Codes Number of Blinks Code in Error one per second hex Steady 0000 Requested kernal mode 4 6631 Bad micro controller interrupt 5 6503 RAM address test error 6 6402 RAM data test error 7 6300 PROM checksum error EXEC not loaded 6301 PROM checksum error 630A Flash message checksum error 630B Executive watchdog timeout error 8 8000 Kernal other error 8001 Kernal PROM checksum error 8002 Flash program error 8003 Unexpected executive return 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 349 Intelligent Special Purpose Front Panel The ESI has two serial ports which it uses to communicate with serial devices The Connectors and following is the pinout connections for the ASCII module serial ports Switches ie 60 20 7 j Connection 30 O No Connection 80 40 90 pe RS 232C Serial The following table shows the pin number and description for the RS 232C serial Ports ports Pin Number Signal N
486. ndicator The following figure shows the CPS12420 LED indicator and Description Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS12420 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS12420 wiring diagram Power loss alarm Install jumper for 115 VAC 1 operation only ACL AC N 060 000 6 CO Qe ee Note A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac 6A 30 Vdc 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF The relay will de energize when input power drops below 8 Vdc Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 79 Power Supplies 140CPS21100 DC Power Supply 24 Vdc 3 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC power supply 24 Vdc 3 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module We Model Number iom EUR Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door u Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Co
487. nel 5 data Register 6 Channel 6 data Register Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data The I O map status is used for the 140ACO13000 output module as follows 3 1415 617 8 lE inns 1 loop broken wire Channel 2 loop broken wire Channel 3 loop broken wire Channel 4 loop broken wire Channel 5 loop broken wire Channel 6 loop broken wire Channel 7 loop broken wire Channel 8 loop broken wire 502 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Modsoft Module Push lt Enter gt to display and select channel ranges and timeout states for each Zoom Selections channel Time out state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped The following figure shows the Channel X timeout state options 4to 20 mA 0 to 16 000 Channel X Range Selection 4to 20 mA 0 to 4 095 Oto 20 mA 0 to 20 000 0 10 25 mA 0 to 25 000 Minimum Output Channel X Timeout State Last Value User Defined Channel X User Defined Timeout Value 0 DEC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 503 I O Modules 140AVO02000 Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Modsoft Module Zoom Selections The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AVO02000 Analog Output module This module requires four contiguous output 4x registers which are assigned as follows
488. net Epoxy AMP 503415 1 Series 20 75 Light Crimp ST Style AMP 503453 1 Series 20 60 C Mechanical Line Splice one 2529 Fiberlok1 II 40 80 C size fits all Note All connectors must have a short boot for strain relief The following table shows the termination kits Kit Type Part Number Description Bayonet ST Epoxy AMP 503746 1 For all epoxy type ST style Light_Crimp XTC AMP 50330 2 For all Light_Crimp Mechanical Line Splice 3M 2530 Fiber Splice Prep Kit complete with cleaving tool 3M Hot Melt 3M 05 00185 110 V Termination Kit 3M 05 00187 220 V Termination Kit 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 267 Modbus Plus NOM Optical Star Passive Couplers Other Tools Cables The AMP Model 95010 4 is a pig tail option and must be used with an enclosure use AMP Model 502402 4 a 19 in rack mount enclosure 1 7 in high The following table shows other tools that may be needed for fiber optic links Product Part Number Description Use 3M Photodyne Optical Source Driver 9XT Hand held optical source driver requires a light source 660 nm visible 3M Photodyne Optical 1700 0850 T 850 nm Light Source ST Connectors for Light Source 9XT 3M Photodyne Power 17XTA 2041 Hand held Fiber Optic Power Meter Meter Optical Light Source 7XE 0660 J Use with 9XT to troubleshoot raw fiber requires FC ST pa
489. ng illustration SW1 is used to specify the module s operating mode 984 or MMDS control SW2 is used to specify the communication characteristics of the Modbus port upon power up The following figure shows the two position Dip switch CLOSED 9 8 OPEN NEE SLIDE SWITCH AREA OF DETAIL The following table shows the settings for the Dip switch settings Switch Setting Function SW1 Closed MMDS control Open PLC control SW2 Closed Programmed baud Open Modbus default Factory setting Note SW1 and SW2 are open when they are switched away from the internal PCB of the module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 367 Intelligent Special Purpose 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable Backplane With the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander you can add a second backplane to a Expander local or remote drop A custom communications cable 3 0 meters maximum provides the data communication transfer The Backplane The following figure shows the components of the backplane expander Expander Model Number Module Description Color Code 10000 T Removable Door Connector 368 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Specifications Words per Drop Specifications for the 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander are below
490. ng figure shows the CPS51100 wiring diagram Not used Not used Not used Not used 125 VDC 125 VDC Common o IG GG QE Note See Power Grounding Considerations for DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 98 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies 140CPS52400 DC Standalone Redundant Power Supply 125 Vdc 8 A The following provides information on the DC Standalone Redundant power supply Overview 125 Vdc 8 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module N Model Number SEED Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door 4 r Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring SA Connector Cover E Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 99 Power Supplies Specifications supply module The following table shows the specifications for the CPS52400 125 VDC power Specifications Input Requirements Inpu
491. ng is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA2620 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT Quantum IBM XT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 1 SHIELD SHIELD 1 SHIELD RX 2 2 RX TX 2 2 RX TX 3 r3 TX RX 3 3 TX DTR 4 4 DTR RTS 4 4 DTR GRND 5 5 GRND CTS 5 5 GRND DSR 6 6 DSH DSR 6 6 DSR RTS 7 r 7 RTS GRND 7 7 RTS CTS 8 8 CTS NC 8 L 8 CTS 9 NC DTR 20 9 NC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 113 CPU Modules Modbus Ports The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin portable Pinout laptop computers Connections for Portable IBM AT Quantum Computers 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 RX TX 3 TX DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR DSR RTS 7 RTS CTS CTS NC 9 NC The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect
492. ngs may vary up to 2 degrees from one end of the block to the other If the application can tolerate this temperature error the block and module remote CJC may be used 754 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling CableFast This table includes descriptions for the following terminal blocks Terminal Blocks Block Number Block Description 140CFA04000 The A block is a straight through point to point connection on the terminal block Wiring of this block is identical to wiring the Quantum I O connector 140XTS00200 140CFB03200 The B block is used for individually fused 2 wire digital inputs This terminal block is designed to prevent a single point failure from affecting the remaining inputs It is not recommended for sourced 1 wire inputs powered from the field 140CFC03200 The C block provides connection for 32 group fused input or output points The block may be used for 1 or 2 wire inputs or outputs and features a fuse per group four groups total Users select input or output mode via four switches located on the module The default is input mode 140CFD03200 The D block is used for sensors requiring either 2 or 3 wire electrical interface A fuse per group is supplied to accommodate the module 4 groups 140CFE03200 The E block provides connection for 32 individually fused 24 Vdc outputs 1 and 2 wire interfacing may be selected Field power must be sup
493. nimum For more information on ProWORX 32 refer to the ProWORX 32 Programming Software for PLCs User Guide 3728PU780 01EMAN ProWORX Plus V 1 0 minimum For more information on ProWORX Plus refer to the ProWORX Plus for Modicon Reference Manual 371SPU68001 PMAN Modicon State Language V1 2 minimum For more information on Modicon State Language refer to the Modicon State Language User Manual GM MSL1 001 14 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum System Configurations At a Glance Overview This part provides information on Quantum system configurations What s in this This part contains the following chapters 2 parta Chapter Chapter Name Page 2 Quantum Configurations 17 3 Network Configurations 29 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 15 Quantum Configurations 16 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Configurations Ata Glance Introduction The following chapter provides information on the Quantum configurations including Local I O Remote I O RIO and Distributed I O DIO What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page Quantum Local I O Remote I O and Distributed I O Configurations 18 Quantum Local I O 20 Quantum Remote I O RIO 21 Quantum Distributed I O DIO 25 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 17 Quantum Configurations Quantum Local I
494. nimum version levels that will support Minimum Version Levels The following table shows the minimum version levels required Modules marked SV PV RL rather than V0X 0X0 exceed the minimum version levels in this table Products Minimum Version Level see label illustration User Action Required CPUs and NOMs lt V02 20 Executive upgrade to gt V02 10 gt V02 20 None RIOs lt V02 00 Module upgrade gt V02 00 and lt V02 20 Executive upgrade to gt V01 10 gt V02 20 None DIOs lt V02 10 Module upgrade gt V02 10 None Modsoft V02 40 Upgrade to V02 40 2 V02 40 None ProWORX NxT gt V02 00 Concept gt V02 00 None 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 575 I O Modules CAUTION Software compatibility When using a DIO drop and the CPU and the NOM executive software is not per the compatibility chart channels 17 24 of this module will be seen as zeroes in the controller when configured as discretes Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Version Label The following figure shows the version label CPU 2M 2XMB 02 20 Note The version label is found on the top front of the module 576 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram INPUT 2 INPUT 4 INPUT 6 INPUT 8 N G N C N G INPUT 10 INPUT 12 N G INPUT 14 INPUT 1
495. nique is used extensively by the Modbus Plus and Ethernet peer to peer network modules The number of option module interfaces supported by each CPU model is described in the following table The following table shows the summary of Quantum CPU option module interface support in standalone configurations Quantum Controller Model Available Option Module Number Interfaces Supported Per CPU 140CPU53414 A 140CPU43412 A 140CPU42402 140CPU21304 140CPU11303 140CPU11302 N N O O O Note Refer to Quantum Modbus and Modbus Plus Communications p 37 for details of available services on 140NOM2XX00 Modbus Plus Network modules 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 33 Network Configurations Map Interface Some network and communication modules are interfaced to the controller through the standard I O map configuration tables In the following table note that some network and communication modules require a Loadable instruction which enhances the standard controller Executive to support certain unique features of individual modules In addition some loadables allow the communication and networking modules to be controlled by means of user application code The number of loadables and associated modules that can be handled by an individual CPU depends upon its memory size the size of the application program and the size of the loadables 34 840 USE 100 00 September 2002
496. nly Current Input Linear Measuring Range 4 20 mA 0 20 0 25 Absolute Maximum Input 25 mA internally limited Input Impedance 100 Q 0 196 between V and signal terminals Resolution 4 20 mA 0 to 4 095 counts 4 20 mAO to 16 000 counts 0 20 mA 0 to 20 000 counts 0 25 mA 0 to 25 000 counts Available Voltage Terminals V V 14 5 Vdc at 25 mA Terminals V Signal 13 6 Vdc at 20 mA Accuracy Error 25 C Typical 0 05 of full scale Maximum 0 196 of full scale Linearity 0 003 of full scale Accuracy Drift w Temperature Typical 0 0025 of full scale C Maximum 0 005 of full scale C Common Mode Rejection gt 100 dB 50 60 Hz Input Filter Single pole low pass 3 dB cutoff 15 Hz 20 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 403 Intrinsically Safe Modules Specifications Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min Update Time 750 ms for all channels Fault Detection Broken wire 4 20 mA mode Bus Current Required 1 5A Power Dissipation 7 5W External Power Not required Hot Swap Not allowed per intrinsic safety standards Fusing Internal not user accessible Programming Software Modsoft Ver 2 61 or higher Field Wiring Field wiring to the module consists of separate shielded t
497. nnector body 360 22 AWG 7 30 drain wire Shield resistance 16 55 Ohms Mft nominal Agency Approval UL 758 AWM style 2517 VW 1 and CSA C22 210 2 AWM 1 11 A B FT1 816 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Cable Lengths The following table shows the cable lengths for the CableFast system Cable Lengths Terminated Pigtail Standard Power High Power High Power 3 ft 0 91 m X X 6 ft 1 82 m X X X 9 ft 2 73 m X X 12 ft 3 64 m X X 15 ft 4 6 m X Inner Wire Color The following table provides the wire color codes for standard power and high power Codes cables Wire AWG for AWG for Color Wire AWG for AWG for Color Pin Standard High Pin Standard High Power Power Power Power Cable Cable Cable Cable 1 26 20 Black 21 26 20 White Blue 2 26 20 Brown 22 26 20 White Violet 3 26 20 Red 23 26 20 White Gray 4 26 20 Orange 24 26 20 White Black Brown 5 26 20 Yellow 25 26 20 White Black Red 6 26 20 Green 26 26 20 White Black Orange 7 26 20 Blue 27 26 20 White Black Yellow 8 26 20 Violet 28 26 20 White Black Green 9 20 18 Black 29 20 18 Yellow 10 20 18 Brown 30 20 18 Green 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 817 CableFast Cabling Cable Selections XTS Wire AWG for AWG for Color
498. nnector for the Quantum system Quantum Quantum I O Connector 50 pin D Connector See cable lengths in the above table XCA102xx Pigtail The following table shows the 140XCA102xx Pigtail cable description Cable Type Part Number Cable Description Standard Power High Power 140XCA10206 X CableFast system cable 6 ft 1 8 m with D sub connector and pigtails 140XCA10215 X CableFast system cable 15 ft 4 6 m with D sub connector and pigtails 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 819 CableFast Cabling Pigtail Leads The following figure shows the color coded pigtail leads 40 Color Coded 50 pin D Pigtail Leads Connector in the above table XTS102xx Pigtail The following table shows the 140XTS102xx Pigtail cables Part Number Cable Type Cable Description Standard Power High Power 140XTS10206 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I O connector 6 ft 1 8 m and pigtail cable 140 XTS10215 X CableFast system cable with Quantum I O connector 15 ft 4 6 m and pigtail cable VO Connector for The following figure shows the I O connector for pigtail leads Pigtail Leads Quantum I O Connector 40 Color Codec Pigtail Leads ee cablelengths e in the above table 820 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling CableFast Accessories Overview Accessories Terminal Bloc
499. nnels 4 LEDs Active F 1 4 Green Module outputs switched on 1 4 Red Broken wire on indicated channels NOTE When the green channel status LEDs are off the loop current is 0 mA Required Addressing 4 Words Out Loop Voltage 12 30 Vdc Up to 60 Vdc with an external loop resistor Outputs are short circuit proof up to 30 Vdc up to 60 Vdc with external loop resistor Loop Resistance Ruin 0 02 dde volts R 7 VdC 002A No external resistor is required for loop voltage supply less than 30 volts Internal Voltage Drop 7 Vdc min 30 Vdc max 20 mA Resolution 12 Bits Accuracy Error 25 0 2096 of full scale Linearity 1 LSB Accuracy Drift w Temperature Typical 0 004 of full scale C Maximum 0 007 of full scale C Isolation Channel to Channel 500 Vac 47 63 Hz or 750 Vdc for 1 minute Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 minute 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 505 I O Modules Voltmeter Monitor Specifications Specifications Update Time 3 ms for all channels simultaneous update Settling Time 900 us to 0 1 of the final value Fault Detection Open circuit in 4 20 mA mode Specific channel is identified when an open circuit is detected through the red channel LED Bus Current Required 480 mA Power Dissipation
500. nnels in 1 channel out module is used 140XSM01000 for simulating 4 20 mA field current loops used with current input Quantum modules 12 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Overview Quantum Battery Backplanes and CableFast Cabling Battery Module The Quantum battery module provides RAM backup power for the Quantum expert XCP module Backplanes Quantum backplanes may be used in all locations of local remote or distributed XBP O There are six backplanes available in 2 3 4 6 10 and 16 slot versions All I O slots are usable with any module able to be used in any slot CableFast The Quantum CableFast wiring system consists of pre wired Quantum field wiring Cabling terminal strips and DIN rail mounted terminal blocks offered in straight through or special application versions 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 13 Quantum Overview Quantum Programming Packages Overview Quantum Editors Quantum controllers support several editors The following table shows the editors for the Quantum controllers Editor Where Discussed Modsoft V2 6 For more information on Modsoft refer to the Modicon Modsoft Programmer User Manual 890USE1 1500 Concept V2 5 For more information on Concept refer to the Concept User Manual 840USE49300 ProWORX NxT V2 1 For more information on ProWorX refer to the ProWorX User Manual 3728PU68001 NMAN ProWORX 32 V 1 0 mi
501. nput 1 Module 4 N L Return 1 11 VA V of a D lt e o o t lt 8 J s e VC e VC e VC 12 e VC 13 VD o 9 dfiOu5 4 eA e VD a dnouo 15 VD o coc V N o 16 VD Fuse Part Numbers Modicon 140CFU40000 Qiy 10 VA e GND Wickman 3701400041 amp 2 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 VB VB e GND lt gt e VC VC e GND VD yD e GND 778 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 2 The GND ground terminal points are not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 779 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following shows the 140CFG01600 wiring for the 140DAO84000 and for Isolated 140DAO84010 output modules isolated output mode Output Mode Field Side F1 4A Connections Module A Output 1 Modue Output 1 Line 3 e 3 d 5 5 4 e g 6 7 8 e n e e VC e VC e VC 12 e VC 13
502. nput Voltage 20 30 Vdc Input Current 3 8 A max Inrush Current 25 A 24 Vdc 14 A 20 Vdc Input Ripple 2 4 Vdc max 94 189 Hz Input Power Interruption 1 ms max 24 Vdc see the hold up capacitor timing chart Fusing external 5 0 A slo blo recommended Part 043502405 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 8A Minimum Current None required Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip Part 043503328 Internal Power Dissipation 6 0 1 8 x lour Watts where lour is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone Summable LED Indicator The following figure shows the CPS21400 LED indicator and Description Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS21400 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus 84 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figures show the CPS214 wiring diagram left and the hold up and Timing Chart capacitor timing chart right Capacitor Size millifarads Optional 20 10 2222 0 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Input Voltage 1 Power EA 100 68 47 e 4 Vd p i l d 5 c Common 70 S 424
503. ns 464 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AC104000 The following information pertains to the 140ACI04000 Analog Input module Map Register This module requires 17 contiguous input registers which are assigned as Assignment follows Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data I Registers 4 13 Register 14 Channel 14 data Register 15 Channel 15 data Register 16 Channel 16 data 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 465 I O Modules Map Register Assignments Register 17 Map Status Byte Modsoft Module Zoom Selections 140ARI03010 The following figure shows the status warnings for register 17 Register 17 Input Status Word __ 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 16 __ 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 15 __ 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 14 __ 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 13 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 12 __ 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 11 __ 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 10 __ 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 9 1 213 14 5 6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA
504. nstead of 1 in between them and the upper and lower modules to allow for air movement Refer to the Spacing Requirements Figure p 722for the spacing required when installing Quantum systems There is no front clearance restriction regarding heat Only sufficient mechanical clearance is required Spacing The following table gives a summary of the spacing requirements for a Quantum Requirements system Minimum Spacing Location 4 in 101 60 mm Between the top of the cabinet and the top of the modules in the upper backplane 4 in Between the cabinet bottom and the bottom of the lower modules in the lower backplane 4 in Between the upper and lower modules when the backplanes are mounted one above the other 1 in 25 40 mm On either side between the cabinet walls and end modules Note Wiring ducts up to 2 in x 2 in 50 80 mm x 50 80 mm may be centered between back planes If the duct extends further than 2 in out from the mounting panel there must bea 4 in space between the modules and duct on the top and bottom 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 721 Hardware Installation Spacing Requirements Figure The following figure shows the Quantum system spacing requirements A 4 101 60 mm 5 1 25 40 mm 4 101 60 mm L 1 25 40 mm _ amp 4 101 60
505. ntain static sensitive components Each module is labeled with the following static sensitive symbol The following figure shows the static sensitive symbol TY 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 47 System Specifications 48 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Module Specifications and Contiguration IV At a Glance Overview This part provides information on Quantum module specifications and software configuration of these modules What s in this This part contains the following chapters Part Chapter Chapter Name Page 5 Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules 51 6 Power Supply Modules 61 7 CPU Modules 103 8 Quantum Field Bus Modules 189 9 Distributed I O DIO for the Quantum Modules 215 10 Quantum Remote I O Communication Modules 227 11 Quantum Modbus Plus Network Option Modules 239 12 Quantum Modbus Plus Networking on Fiber Module 249 13 Quantum Ethernet Modules 271 14 Intelligent Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum 297 15 Quantum Intrinsically Safe Analog Digital Input Output 375 Modules 16 Quantum Simulator Modules 429 17 Quantum Battery Module 437 18 Quantum I O Modules 445 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Specifications 50 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Specifications for the Quantum Modules Quantum Hardware Specifications Overview Power Supply Specifications This sect
506. ntification number 840USE10800 The following figure shows the 5106210 ASCII interface module components Model Number n 0 Module Description Customer Identification Label ESI 062 10 Color Code Fold label and place it inside door LED Area Removable Door lt Pott RERE Port 1 RS 232 E Reset Button Reset O RS 232 Port 2 Port 2 Port 2 RS232C 346 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the ASCII interface two channel module Specifications Data Interface RS 232C 2 serial ports 9 pin D shell non isolated Cabling Maximum cable length 20 m shielded 990NAA26320 Modbus Programming Cable RS 232 12 ft 2 7 m 990NAA26350 Modbus Programming Cable RS 232 50 ft 15 5 m Firmware Specifications Port Performance Burst Speed 19 2 k baud each port Continuous Speed Application dependent Depth of Nested Messages 8 Buffer Size 255 Input 255 Output Number of Messages 255 Maximum Message Length 127 characters plus 1 checksum Memory RAM 256 kb for data and program 2 kb dual port ram Flash ROM 128 kb for program and firmware Power Dissipation 2 W max Bus Current Required 300 mA Fusing Internal None External User
507. ntroller may be N Y From Stop either stopped or Enables running Programmer Programmer may make changes changes starts and start stop the controller controller From Memory Protect Enables programmer changes starts controller if stopped 186 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Port Modem Support Modbus Ports Pinout Connections All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that support Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability Modbus Port 2 RTS CTS connections function properly for normal non modem communications but do not support modems The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT Quantum IBM XT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 1 SHIELD SHIELD 1 1 SHIELD RX 2 2 RX TX 2 2 RX TX 3 T 3 TX RX 3 3 TX DTR 4 4 DTR RTS 45 4 4 GRND 5 t 5 GRND CTS 5 5 GRND DSR 6 6 DSR DSR 6 6 DSR RTS 7 7 RTS GRND 7 r
508. nts for any specific site Questions regarding intrinsic safety wiring requirements for your site should be referred to the approval agencies listed 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 379 Intrinsically Safe Modules 15 2 Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules Ata Glance Overview This section provides information on the intrinsically safe analog modules 140A1I33000 140 1133010 and 140AIO33000 What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules 381 140A1I33000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Input Module 390 140 1133010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module 403 140 1033000 Intrinsically Safe Analog Output Module 409 380 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Analog Modules Overview This section provides information on the I O configuration of the intrinsically safe analog modules 140A1133000 140 1133010 and 140A1O33000 140AII33000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140AII33000 intrinsically safe analog input module Map register Register assignments depend on module configuration This module may be Assignment configured as an RTD Resistance or a Thermocouple input module 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 381 Intrinsically Safe Modules RTD I O Map When the 140 1133000 is configured as a R
509. o equipment or personnel Disconnect the supply voltage to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DDO35301 module Points 9 16 Points 17 24 Fuse Locations 628 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DDO35301 wiring diagram GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT6 OUTPUT8 OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 16 GROUP B SUPPLY OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 24 GROUP C SUPPLY OUTPUT 26 OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY OUTPUT 1 3 4 A OUTPUT 3 WW li OUTPUT 5 3 4 A OUTPUT 7 x GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 15 GROUP B COMMON OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C COMMON OUTPUT 25 OUTPUT 27 FIELD OUTPUT 29 DEVICE OUTPUT 31 200000 GO 0 amp amp 5 5 85 amp OO 9 Co 9 G O GROUP D COMMON 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 629 I O Modules CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module
510. occurrence the unused channels should be configured in the 0 25 mA range All terminals labeled RETURN are common inside the module N C Not connected 512 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AVO02000 Quantum I O Analog Voltage Out Module Overview The Analog Out 4 Channel module outputs voltages in mixed modes and levels These are selected using jumpers on the field wiring connector Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AVO02000 Analog Out 4 channel module Specifications Number of Channels 4 LEDs Active 1 4 Green Indicates module outputs switched on NOTE When the green channel status LEDs are off the module is not generating outputs however an output may still be present if the master override signal is used Required Addressing 4 words out Voltage Output Ranges Bipolar 10 Vac Min load resistance 1 Jumper between Reference Control terminals 5 Vdc Min load resistance 5000 Jumper between Reference Control and Output R terminals Unipolar 0 10 Vdc Min load resistance 1 Jumper between Output R terminals 0 5 Min load resistance 5000 Jumper between Output R and Control R terminals Output Current 10 mA max any range outputs are short circuit proof Source Resistance 0 19 Resolution 12 bits Accuracy Error
511. odbus ports pinout connections 165 rear panel switches 163 RTU communication port parameters 161 specifications 157 SW1 and SW address settings 163 valid communication port parameters 162 CPU53414 ASCII communicaton port parameters 172 CPU front panel switches 172 description 167 key switch 175 LED descriptions 170 LED error codes 170 LED indicators 169 Modbus ports pinout connections 176 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers 177 rear panel switches 174 RTU communication port parameters 172 specifications 168 SW1 and SW2 address settings 174 SW1 and SW2 switches 174 valid communication port parameters 173 CPU53414A ASCII communication port parameters 183 description 178 front panel slide switch 183 illustration 178 key switch 185 LED descriptions 181 LED error codes 181 LED indicators 181 Modbus connector pinouts 187 Modbus ports pinout connections 187 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers 188 rear panel switches 185 RTU communication port parameters 183 specifications 179 SW1 and SW2 address settings 185 valid communication port parameters 184 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xix Index CRA21X10 description 216 illustration 216 LED descriptions 219 LED indicators 219 rear panel switches 220 specifications 217 wiring diagram 218 223 CRA21X20 description 221 illustration 221 LED d
512. odule and ensure that this number is less than the available power in the selected power supply 18 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Configurations Local Remote and Distributed Configuration Depending on the type of configuration Local Remote or Distributed I O a variety of features will apply as shown in the following table Feature Configuration Local I O Remote I O Distributed I O Maximum I O Words Per drop 64 64 out 64 in 64 out 30 in 32 out Per network 1 984 in 1 984 out 500 in 500 out Maximum Physical Discretes Per drop 864 any mix 864 any mix 448 any mix Maximum drops per 31 63 network Media Coax Twisted Pair Speed 1 5 Mhz 1 MHz Maximum distance without repeaters 15 000 ft 4 573 m 1 500 ft 457 m Scan synched I O Yes No servicing Momentum I O No Yes support Hot Standby Yes No support Modbus Plus No Yes compatible Requires use of backplane expander Telefast module excepted 27 modules x 32 points 864 May be limited by bus power requirements 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 19 Quantum Configurations Quantum Local I O Overview Configuration A local I O configuration is contained in one rack and includes all Quantum modules mounted in a standard Quantum backplane Quantum Local I O can be as few as one I O module in a three slot backplane
513. odule is used with source output devices It accepts 24 Vdc inputs It has 32 Sink input points four groups of 8 each with broken wire detection The following table shows the technical specifications for the 14005135300 module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active Green Indicates bus communication present 1 32 Green Indicates point status F Red External Supply missing Required addressing 4 words in Operating Voltage and Current ON voltage 11 Vdc ON current 2 5 mA min OFF voltage 5 Vdc OFF current min 0 3 mA 1 2 mA Absolute Maximum Input Continious 30 Vdc 10 ms 45 Vp Response time OFF ON 2 2 ms ON OFF 3 3 ms Internal Resistance 4 3k Input Protection Resistor limited Isolation Group to Group 500 VAC rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 VAC rms for 1 minute Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation 7 W all points on External Power Supply 20 30 VDC 20 mA group Open Circuit Monitoring Broken wire detection OFF current 0 15 mA Shunt resistor Recommended 56 kQ with 24 Vdc external power supply 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 667 I O Modules Specifications Fusing Internal None External User discretion 668 840 USE 100 00 September 2002
514. of a Quantum CPU or NOM module The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT 9 Pin Female CD 1 RX TX DTR GRND DSR RTS CTS O A CQ Quantum 9 Pin Male SHIELD RX TX DTR GRND DSR RTS CTS 9 NC IBM XT 25 Pin Female SHIELD 1 A sHIELD TX 2 RX 3 RIS 4 CTS 5 DSR 6 GRND 7 NC 8 DTR 20 Quantum 9 Pin Male 2 RX 3 TX 4 DTR 5 GRND 6 DSR r7 RTS L 8 CTS 9 NC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 143 CPU Modules Modbus Ports The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin portable Pinout computers Connections for Portable IBM AT Quantum Computers 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 SHIELD RX 2 TX 3 DTR 4 DTR GRND 5 GRND DSR DSR RIS 7 RTS CTS CTS NC g The following is the abbreviation key for the above figures TX Transmitted Data DTR Data Terminal Ready RX Received Data CTS Clear to Send RTS Request to Send NC No Connection DSR Data Set Ready CD Carrier Detect 144 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules 140CPU43412 CPU Module Overview The following provides information on the 140CPU43412 Controller module CPU 2M 1xModbus Plus Max IEC Program 896 k
515. of eight I O points Each input is allocated three terminals 2 Compatibility This terminal block provides 0 8 A group fusing connection points for 3 wire and 2 wire proximity switches and is used with the following modules 140DAI35300 140DAI45300 140DAI55300 14000135300 and 14000185300 Dimensions The following shows the dimensions for the 140CFD03200 module a 292827 INI TERI EET Aiii iM Tii 8 0 in 203 2 mm AR 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 773 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CFD03200 module Field Side RODA Connections Module Input Module Input je 3 Wire Sensor Module Input Module Input ot 4 Module Input 25 Module Input zo a fee 2 Wire Sensor Module Input 5 5 S e8 Module Input GROUP B 10 910 elit eit 12 ott 12 1 ots ole 14 ott felt 15 oth 15 eis 916 16 moe 618 ot ote e 19 9 9 9 e20 20 e21 eme 27 Fuse Part Numbers i o Modicon 140CFU08000 Qty 10 e23 e2 Wickman 3700800041 eroje p 2 Lm m UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 25 e25 e 25 26 26 1
516. of range or short circuit Channel 5 out of range or short circuit Channel 6 out of range or short circuit Channel 7 out of range or short circuit Channel 8 out of range or short circuit Modsoft Module Use Modsoft s Zoom feature to select the module input type and then configure the Zoom Selections eight channels appropriate to the input type selected RTD Resistance TC mV For RTD Resistance Input For TC mV Input 1 0 Deg 1 0 Deg Resolution Temp Resolution Temp 0 1 Deg 0 1 Deg Celsius Celsius Output Unit Temp Output Unit Temp Fahrenheit Fahrenheit Value Type Temperature Cold Junction Compensator OnBoard Raw Value Channel 1 384 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Configure each channel 1 through 8 appropriate to the module input type selected Channel Enable Disable 4 Wire 3 Wire 2 Wire For RTD Module Input Enable Disable RTD Type Pt Ni 4 Wire R A Pt 3 Wire 2 Wire For TC mV Module Input Thermocouple Type Undefined No J gain 25 Open circuit test 25 gain 25 25 T gain 100 Raw output amplifier gain S gain 100 see Note 100 R gain
517. ogrammer changes changes are controller run disabled User status is not cannot write to changed unlocated variables Start Controller may be N Y From Stop either stopped or Enables running Programmer Programmer may changes starts make changes and controller start stop the From Memory controller Protect Enables programmer changes starts controller if stopped 164 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Port Modem Support Modbus Ports Pinout Connections All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that support Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door of a Quantum CPU or NOM module Modbus Port 1 has full modem interfacing ability Modbus Port 2 RTS CTS connections function properly for normal non modem communications but do not support modems The following figure shows the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin and 25 pin connections IBM AT Quantum IBM XT Quantum 9 Pin Female 9 Pin Male 25 Pin Female 9 Pin Male CD 1 1 SHIELD SHIELD 1 rt 4 SHIELD RX 2 2 RX TX 2 2 RX TX 3 1 3 TX RX 3 3 TX
518. oint groups LEDs Active Green Bus communication is present F Red Group power missing or point faulted 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words out Voltage Operating 19 2 30 ON State Drop Point 0 5 Vdc 0 5 A Maximum Load Current Each Point 0 5A Each Group 4A Per Module 16 A Off State Leakage Point 1 mA 24 Vdc Surge Current Maximum Each Point 2 A Internally limited Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 0 1 ms ON OFF 0 1 ms Output Protection internal Thermal overload and short circuit Load Inductance Maximum 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or 0 5 where L m L Load inductance Henry FF Load current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance Maximum 50 uf Isolation Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 500 Vac rms for 1 minute 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 627 I O Modules Fuse Locations Specifications Fault Detection Group indication Loss of field power faulted point Bus Current Required 250 mA max Power Dissipation 5 W all points on External Power 19 2 30 Vdc Fusing Internal 5A fuse for each group Modicon Part 043502405 For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations p 628 External User discretion CAUTION damage Possible danger t
519. ollows 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Group B Fault Group C Fault Group D Fault Group A Point Fault Group B Point Fault L Group C Point Fault L Group D Point Fault Groupt A Fault Missing field power or blown fues 140DDO35301 overload or short circuit Module only 590 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Module Zoom Push lt Enter gt to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the Selections module Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped The following figure shows the output type and timeout state Output Type BIN BCD Last Value User Defined Timeout State User Defined Timeout State Points 1 16 0000000000000000 User Defined Timeout State Points 17 32 0000000000000000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 591 I O Modules 96 Point Output The 96 point output module is Module e 140DDO36400 DC out 24VDC 6x16 Source Map Register following figures show the register 1 through 6 format for the 14000036400 Assignment output module Register 1 213 14 15 6 789 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Output Point 1 x MSB First Word Register 2 Output 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Point 17
520. om the total available The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word of Register I O must be subtracted from the total available Requires the use of two 140NOM21x00 Option Modules The following figure shows the LED indicators Ready Run Bat1 Low Modbus Modbus Error A Mem Prt 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 147 CPU Modules The following table shows the LED descriptions LEDS Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed power up diagnostics Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic Bat Low Red The battery needs replacing or is not present Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2 Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Error A Red Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port Mem Prt Amber Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU43412 LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82E MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA
521. ommand Bit 4X 1 Low Word 4X 2 High Word 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 3 2 1 Maximum Count for Counter 1 max 7FFFFFFF hex 4X 3 Low Word 4X 4 High Word 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 3 2 1 Setpoint for Counter 1 max 7FFFFFFF hex 4 5 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 3 2 1 Ou put Assert ON Time milliseconds max 3FFF hex noc hange Note Zero set into any 4X register pair for 32 bit values or any 4X register means 310 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose If configured for two 32 bit Counters NO Output Assert the following figures which show the 4X through 4X 4 counters with low and high word are displayed Configured for two 32 bit Counters NO Output Assert 4X 16 15 14 1311211110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 Preset Counter 1 1 Enable Counter 1 1 Disable Counter 1 1 Preset Counter 2 1 Enable Counter 2 1 Disable Counter 2 Load Values Command Bit 4X 1 Low Word 4X 2 High Word 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Maximum Count for Counter 1 max 7FFFFFFF hex 4X 3 Low Word 4X 4 High Word 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Maximum Count for Counter 2 max 7FFFFFFF hex
522. ompatibility Programming Software Modsoft V2 32 or Concept 2 0 at a minimum Quantum Controllers All V2 0 at a minimum Fuse Location 140 ES E Om Fuse B Location The following figure shows the fuse location access to the fuse Note Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 335 Intelligent Special Purpose LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the LED indicators for the EHC20200 High Speed Counter module Active In 1 En 1 Pre C1 Res 01 Out 1A Out 1B F In 2 En2 Pre C2 Res 02 Out 2A Out 2B The following table shows the LED descriptions for the EHC20200 high speed counter LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present F Red Indicates internal fuse blown or loss of output power supply In 1 Green Counter 1 input En 1 Green Enable Counter 1 input Pre C1 Green Preset Counter 1 input Res 01 Green Reset Output 1A 1B In 2 Green Counter 2 input En2 Green Enable Counter 2 input Pre C2 Green Preset Counter 2 input Res 02 Green Reset Output 2A 2B Out 1A Green Counter 1A output Out 1B Green Counter 1B output Out 2A Green Counter 2A output Out 2B Green Counter 2B output
523. on in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe I S cables of one module must be routed separately from I S cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Voc Vmax lsc lt Imax Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Leable 31001365 Rev 00 Input 6 vc e G N C NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION I S Module DII 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip Chassis Ground HAZARDOUS LOCATION CLASS 1 DIVISION 1 GROUP A B C D SEE NOTE 1 I S Field Device Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the ground Screws on the backplane Note 2 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 3 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xxx xx 14001133000 Wiring Diagram 422 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules 140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module Overview The Quantum 140DIO33000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output module switches intrinsically safe power to a variety of components such as solenoid v
524. on in the middle and bottom positions The three position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 ports The following figure shows the three options that are available forthe 140CPU43412 module not used Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking controllers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed ASCII Comm Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Comm Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 150 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3
525. one transaction is necessary for all Subscribers to receive the data This advantage offers two benefits e Reduce overall network traffic e Ensure tighter synchronization of multiple subscribers 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 293 Ethernet Modules Bandwith Monitoring Available Services Bandwidth Monitoring Load Rates Bandwidth Monitoring allows you to monitor the NOE s CPU allocation for each of the following services Global Data I O Scanning and Messaging The Bandwidth Monitoring service retrieves workload data and returns one of two pieces of information whether the module has free resources or whether the module is working at capacity Knowing the resource allocation helps you e Decide about allocating your resources e Determine the number of NOEs needed in a system The services accessed and monitored are e Global Data e O Scanner e Modbus Messaging If you use Bandwidth Monitoring you do not need to develop a new set of access functions The actual NOE CPU load is computed each second The Bandwidth Monitoring service checks once a second and computes four 4 values in private data e Percentage of NOE s CPU allocated to Global Data Percentage of NOE s CPU allocated to the I O Scanner Percentage of NOE s CPU allocated to Messaging Percentage of NOE s CPU allocated to other services and idle Results are returned as percentages CPU time spent in other services is shown as Other or Fr
526. onfiguration Faulty Device Replacement chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for details on configuring your NOE s address Server If you are migrating a BOOTP configuration from a 140NOE771x0 module to the new 140 NOE 771 x1 module see the Address Server Configuration Faulty Device Replacement chapter in the Quantum NOE 771 xx Ethernet Modules User Guide for details on automatic upgrade of your configuration for the new DHCP Server 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 291 Ethernet Modules Note OPERATING ON A CORPORATE NETWORK Before placing the NOE on a corporate network Schneider Automation recommends that you discuss the installation with your MIS department It is likely that your company s corporate network has at least one DHCP Server running already If the NOE s DHCP Server is running on the same network it may disturb the network To avoid any possible problem related to the NOE s DHCP Server on the corporate network you must ensure that the DHCP Server is not running in the NOE by not having address entries in the configuration If there are no configured devices in the address Server configuration page then the NOE will not start the DHCP Server 292 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Ethernet Modules Global Data Global Data service is a real time Publisher Subscriber mechanism providing the most efficient data exchange for PLC application coordination Devices supporting G
527. only on channel 8 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 7 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 6 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 5 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 4 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 3 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 2 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only on channel 1 Note The broken wire detect is set at 2 0 mA map status byte is used as follows 112 3 4 5 6 7 8 L 1 Broken wire 4 20 mA only Push Enter to display and select the channel range 4to20mA 0 to 16 000 410 20mA 0 to 4095 Channel X range selection 410 20mA to 20 000 Oto 25mA 0 to 25 000 The following information pertains to configuration of the 140ARI03010 Analog Input module 466 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Map Register Assignment Register 1 Channel 1 data Register 2 Channel 2 data Register 3 Channel 3 data Register 4 Channel 4 data Register 5 Channel 5 data Register 6 Channel 6 data Register 7 Channel 7 data Register 8 Channel 8 data Register 9 Status Word __ 1 Broken wire or out range on channel 8 1 Broken wire or out range on channel 7 1 Broken wire or out range on channel 6 1 Broken wir
528. onnector door must be closed Remote CJC can be implemented by connecting a TC which monitors the external junction block temperature to channel 1 Types J K and T are recommended for remote CJC 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 491 I O Modules Specifications Resolution TC Ranges Choice of 1 0 C default 0 1 C 1 0 F 0 1 F Millivolt Ranges 100 mV range 3 05 mV 16 bits 25 mV range 0 76 mV 16 bits TC Absolute Accuracy see Note Types J K E T see Note 2 2 C plus 0 1 of reading Types S R B see Note 3 4 C plus 0 1 of reading Millivolt Absolute Accuracy 25 20 uV plus 0 1 of reading Accuracy Drift w Temperature 0 15 uV C plus 0 0015 of reading C max Operating Voltage Channel to Channel 220 Vac 47 63 Hz or 300 Vdc max Isolation Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 minute Update Time 1 s all channels Fault Detection 8 red LEDs to indicate out of range or broken wire conditions Bus Current Required 280 mA Power Dissipation 1 5 W External Power Not required for this module Note 1 Absolute accuracy includes all errors from the internal CJC TC curvature offset plus gain for module temperature of 0 60 C User supplied TC errors not included Q All TC range
529. ons inputs 672 module zoom selections outputs 673 output specifications 689 register assignments 671 topology 688 version levels 691 wiring diagram 692 DDO15310 description 618 fuse locations 620 specifications 618 wiring diagram 621 DDO35300 description 622 fuse locations 624 specifications 622 wiring diagram 625 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xxi Index DDO35301 description 627 specifications 627 wiring diagram 629 DDO35310 description 631 fuse locations 633 specificatons 631 wiring diagram 634 DDO36400 color codes for input groups 639 compatible output adapter sub bases 640 description 636 front view illustration 638 selecting point status indicator LEDs 639 specifications 636 DDO84300 description 641 fuse locations 642 specifications 641 wiring diagram 643 DDO88500 description 644 fuse locations 646 specifications 644 wiring diagram 647 01133000 description 417 specifications 417 terminal strip color keying assignment 418 wiring diagram Cenelec 419 wiring diagram CSA 420 wiring diagram FM 421 wiring diagram UL 422 DIO configuration description 25 dual cable illustration 26 part numbers 27 single cable illustration 25 DIO modules See CRA21X10 or CRA21X20 DIO33000 description 423 specifications 423 terminal strip color and keying assignment 424 wiring diagram Cenelec 425 wiring diagram CSA 426 wiring di
530. ons The following table shows the technical specifications for the DAI55300 115 VAC IN module Specifications Number of Input Points 32 in four 8 point groups LEDs Active 1 32 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 2 words in Operating Voltages and Input Currents 50Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 85 132 Vac 11 1 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 14 4 capacitive 60 Hz Typical Input Impedance ON 79 132 Vac 13 2 mA max OFF 0 20 Vac 12 capacitive Do not use outside the 47 63 Hz range Maximum Allowable Leakage Current from 2 1 mA an External Device to be Recognized as an OFF Condition Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Absolute Maximum Input Continuous 132 Vac 10s 156 Vac 1 cycle 200 Vac Response OFF ON Min 4 9 ms Max 0 75 line cycle ON OFF Min 7 3 ms Max 12 3 ms Isolation Input to Input All inputs in a group must be from the same phase of line input voltage Group to Group 1780 Vac for 1 minute Input to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Fault Detection None 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 553 I O Modules Specifications Bus Current Required 250 mA Power Dissipation 10 9 W max External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Input signals must
531. ons for input output modules Module descriptions include wiring diagrams LED indicators and descriptions illustrations of module figures and for discrete modules true high true low descriptions The following figure shows the I O modules and its components Model Number Module Description P Color Code Customer Identification Label 1080 vic out Fol l and place it inside the door LED Area Field Wiring relieve Terminal Strip Removable Door lt Fuse 4 Cutouts 3 RE NOS 3918 n S Sete Ieo HIO hy QS V lt aU Note When field wiring the I O modules the maximum wire size that should be used on a field wiring terminal is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum size is 20 AWG Note The field wiring terminal strip Modicon 140XTS00200 must be ordered separately The terminal strip includes the removable door and label These tables describe the generic LED blocks used in Quantum I O modules Descriptions of each type I O modules unique LED configuration are included in the individual I O module specifications in this section 448 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions for Dis
532. ontrol of the module is stopped Output Type BCD Last Value Timeout State User Defined User Defined Timeout State Points 1 8 00000000 416 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules 14001133000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module Overview The Quantum 14001133000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input module provides safe power to dry contact closures e g push buttons selector switches float switches flow switches limit switches etc in a hazardous area and receives the proportional current to indicate an on off state The received current is converted into digital signals that is transferred to the PLC Specifications Discrete Input module The following table provides specifications for the DII33000 Intrinsically Safe Specifications Number of Input Points 8 LEDs Active Green 1 8 Green Indicates point status Operating Voltages and Currents No load voltage between 8 Vdc input and input Short circuit current 8mA Switching point 1 2 mA 2 1 mA Switching hysteresis 0 2 mA Switching Frequency 100 Hz maximum Response OFF ON 1ms ON OFF 1ms Isolation Channel to Channel None Channel to Bus 1780 Vac 47 63 Hz or 2500 Vdc for 1 min Internal Resistance 2 5 KQ Input Protection Resistor limited Fault Detection None Bus Current Required 400 mA Power D
533. or has occurred on the INTERBUS IB S Run Green On The INTERBUS is functioning normal data transfer Flashing The INTERBUS is ready cyclically No cyclic No INTERBUS configuration error flashing message Slave Red On An INTERBUS node is indicating a module error The seven segment display is only applicable to the NOA61110 module Display Meaning 0 Interbus is not able to run Interbus is able to run but stopped Interbus is running RBUS LED on Number of the defective remote bus segments LBUS LED on Number of the defective peripheral bus RBUS amp LBUS Bus segment fault interbus comm stopped Faulted bus segment LEDs on number or next segment displayed Slave LED on Bus segment number containing a faulted module 204 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules Front Panel The InterBus module is equipped with an InterBus port and a Modbus Plus port both Connectionsand female 9 pin D connectors see below for pinouts and a reset push button Controls InterBus Port Connect the remote bus cable to the female connector port labeled interbus The following figure shows the InterBus port connection INTERBUS remote bus The following table shows the key to the remote bus Pin Signal Function 1 DO Data Out 2 DI Data In 3 GND Comm 4 GND NOA822 only F O Inter
534. or register 5 Register 5 Status __ 1 Channel 4 input out of range __ 1 Channel 3 input out of range 1 Channel 2 input out of range 1 Channel 1 input out of range __ 1 Reserved always 0 __ 1 Reserved always 0 1 Channel 2 output broken wire C 1 Channel 1 output broken wire 1 213 4 15 6 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Range warning on input channel 4 1 Range warning on input channel 3 1 Range warning on input channel 2 1 Range warning on input channel 1 Not used always 0 A range warning is issued when a channel input is outside the rated input value as shown in the following table Warning bits stay on after out of range bits are set An out of range bit is set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2 4 Out of range bits are also set if inputs drop below 0 5V 1 5V mode or 2 08 mA 4 20 mA mode When configured for current inputs jumper installed between IN and SENSE terminals a broken field wire results in a zero current reading If 4 20 mA is selected fault LEDs and warning out of range and I O Map Status Byte bits are displayed CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure When configured for voltage inputs no jumper installed between In and sense terminals if a broken field wire occurs readings will be non zero and not predi
535. ortant difference from the summable system is the total available system backplane loading If there are N redundant power supplies installed in a backplane the total backplane load must not exceed the capability of N 1 supplies For example e f three 8 A redundant power supplies are installed N 3 the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is the current sourced by N 1 2 supplies which is 16 A e if two 8 A power supplies are installed in the backplane N 2 the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is the current sourced by N 1 1 supplies which is 8 A 742 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide CAUTION Limits to Backplane Load e f two 140CPS12420 power supplies are installed in the backplane the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 10 A e Ifthree 140CPS12420 power supplies are installed in the backplane the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 20 A Use only like redundant power supplies except for 140CPS12420 which can be mixed with one 140CPS22400 or one 140CPS42400 e f one CPS12420 is installed with one 140CPS22400 or one 140CPS42400 in the backplane the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 8 A e f one 140CPS12420 is installed with two 140CPS22400 or two 140CPS42400 in the backplane the maximum backplane load available for redundant operation is 16
536. other module V Sense 7 Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 7 1 5 devices when NIC connected 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions I Source 8 E JO 1 Source 8 esa ackplanes shou Va Cx max V Sense 8 V Sense 8 be used for mounting this module gt a along with the following UL listed gt Ui bl ota 1 5 Module 330 00 l modules a gt Li Leable 5 140 CPU xxx xx Blue Terminal Strip 140 CPS xxx xx 31001362 Rev 00 140 1133000 TC Wiring Diagram 402 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules 140A1I33010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input Module Overview The Quantum 14041133010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module interfaces with eight intrinsically safe analog inputs which are software configurable The module accepts 0 20 mA 0 25 mA and 4 20 mA inputs The module allows any mix and match of current input ranges that can be configured by the software The module provides power to intrinsically safe transmitters located in hazardous areas Specifications are as follows Specifications for the Quantum 14041133010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module Specifications Number of Channels 8 LEDs Active Green F Red 1 8 Red 1 per channel Note This module produces a fault signal F if any one channel detects a broken wire condition or an out of range condition 4 20 mA o
537. ource 8 sey I S All 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 3 Wire RTD Resistor Connection Chassis Ground HAZARDOUS LOCATION Notes Related to FM Certitication Class Div Group A B C D This IS field device should meet Note 5 or should Class II Div I Group E F G be FM approved with entity concept in Note 4 Class III Div 1 appropriate for connection with IS RTD TC IN Module with Concept Parameters listed below The entity parameters are per Channel Voc 15 5 VDC Isc 276 mA Ch Ca 500 nf Ch La 0 3 mH Ch Po 1070 mW Ch Note 1 Only shielded cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and connected to chassis ground at the Module end Note 2 Pins marked N C are not electronically connected to the Module Note 3 Only 140XBPO0xx00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module Note 4 The Entity Concept allows interconnection of intrinsically safe apparatus with associated apparatus not specifically examined in combination as a system when the approved values of Vcc and Isc for the associated apparatus are less than or equal to Vmax and Imax for the intrinsically safe apparatus and the approved values of Ca and La for the associated apparatus must be equal to or are greater than Ci and Li for the intrinsically safe apparatus plus all cable parameters Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Lcable Vcc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax Note 5 Simple Apparatus is
538. output register for command 1 4X 1 4X1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 918 7 6 5 4 3 21 L 0 1 Pulse Quadrature Input Counter 1 L _0 1 Pulse Quadrature Input Counter 2 Two 16 bit counters Output Assertion ON One 32 bit counter Output Assertion ON Two 16 bit counters Output Assertion ON Two 32 bit counters Output Assertion OFF 0 1 Rate Sample Mode OFF ON When 1 automatically sets bits 11 and 12 i e two 32 bit counters no Output Assert 0 1 Comm Lost Output Assert OFF ON When 0 if module communication with the bus is lost outputs are disabled When 1 outputs continue to operate as configured J The following figure shows the 4 2 output register for command 1 4X 2 16 15 14 13 12 11 1009 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Output 2A Operating Mode Output 2B Operating Mode Output 1A Operating Mode Output 1B Operating Mode Bits Mode Description 000 0 Disable Output 001 1 ON if Count Setpoint 010 2 Latched ON if Count Setpoint Hardware RESET required to turn OFF 011 3 ON if Count Maximum Count 100 4 Latched ON if Count Maximum Count Hardware RESET required to turn OFF 101 5 ON when Count Setpoint for time specified in Command 2 register 110 6 ON when Count Maximum Count for time specified in Command 2 register
539. ow Red Error A Red Indicates a communications error on the Modbus Plus network LED Error Codes The Blinking Run LED Error Codes table shows the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group all codes are in hex The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU21304 LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82bE MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA 128 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus diagnostic error 607 modbus cmd buffer overflow 608 modbus cmd length is zero 609 modbus abort command error 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm st
540. ow shows the Pin 1 connector pu Note The Auxiliary LonWorks Communications Port is not intended to be connected to any public telecommunications network Both the Primary and Secondary ports provide standard interfaces to LonWorks networks and are wired in parallel for flexibility The connections are not polarity sensitive NOL Module The NOL module supports three twisted pair media types with different network Media Types topologies or data transfer speeds e 140NOL91100 e 140NOL91110 e 140NOL91120 The following table shows the transceiver types supported by each module are as follows NOL Model Number Transceiver Configuration Data Transfer Type Rate 140NOL91 100 TP FTT 10 Free topology twisted pair 78 000 BPS 140NOL91 110 TP XF 78 Linear topology twisted pair 78 000 BPS transformer isolated 140NOL91 120 TP XF 1250 Linear topology twisted pair 1 25 MBPS transformer isolated Not actively sold after 10 00 212 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules WARNING Incompatibility NOL modules are not compatible in Quantum Distributed I O DIO racks Failure to follow this precaution can result in death serious injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 213 Quantum Field Bus Modules 214 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Distributed I O DIO for
541. ower Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module N mam Model Number Sw Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door 4 Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 89 Power Supplies Specifications supply module The following table shows the specifications for the CPS41400 48 VDC power Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 40 72 Vdc Input Current 1 2 A 48 Vdc Inrush Current 25 A 40 Vdc Input Power Interruption 13 ms 48 Vdc Fusing external 2 0 A medium time lag recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Current 8 A see operating curve Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector 7 point terminal strip Part 043503328 Internal Power Dissipation 156W 8A Operating Mode Standalone Summable LED Indicator and Description Pwr ok The following figure shows the CPS41400 LED indica
542. p 479 and 140AVI03000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module 495 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 797 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the 140CF100800 chassis grounding Chassis module Grounding Field Side Connections See jumper information below Module Input 1 Module Input 1 Current IN Loop Power Required Module Input 2 Module Input 2 Module Input 3 Module Input 3 Current IN Instrument Powered Jumper Part Number 140CFX00110 Jumper Connections S1 to S2 to S3 to S4 to S5 to S6 to S7 to S8 Shield S8 9s 9 5 Ove GND em 1 RET V 798 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVIO3000 see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I O Analog In Module p 479 and 140 103000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module p 495 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 799 CableFast Cabling 140CFJ00400 Quantum CableFast Cabling Block Overview The J
543. p 1780 Vac for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 Vac for 1 minute Bus Current Required 320 mA Power Dissipation 1 60W 1 0 x Total Module Load Current 614 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications External Power Not required Fusing Internal 4 A 250 V fuse Little Fuse 217004 for each group For location of fuses see the Fuse Locations Figure External User discretion Fuse Locations The following figure shows the fuse locations for the DAO85300 module 14074 DAO 853 00 24 230 OUT Points 9 16 Points 25 32 Fuse Locations 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 615 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the DAO85300 wiring diagram omn gy OUTPUT Optional Fuse N L OUTPUT 4 OUTPUTS W C OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 5 OUTPUT 8 G OUTPUT 7 AM GROUP A HOT N C OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 11 4 3 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 16 17 PATER IN GROUP B HOT T N C OUTPUT 18 52 ei SUEDE RET ed 3 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 21 6 5 OUTPUT 24 7 OUTPUT 23 GROUP C HOT N C oe 82 GD OUTPUT 25 OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 27 46463 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 29 86 85
544. panel Switches of the CPU They are used for setting Modbus Plus node and Modbus port addresses Note The highest address that may be set with these switches is 64 SW1 the top switch sets the upper digit tens of the address SW2 the bottom switch sets the lower digit ones of the address The illustration below shows the correct setting for an example address of 11 7 SW1 7 SW2 BOTTOM The following table shows the SW1 and SW2 address settings SW1 and SW2 Address Settings Node Address swi SW2 1 9 0 1 9 10 19 1 0 9 20 29 2 0 9 30 39 3 0 9 40 49 4 0 9 50 59 5 0 9 60 64 6 0 4 Note If 0 or an address greater than 64 is selected the Modbus LED will be on steady to indicate the selection of an invalid address 142 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Modbus Connector Pinouts Modbus Ports Pinout Connections All Quantum CPUs are equipped with a nine pin RS 232C connector that supports Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for nine pin and 25 pin connections Note Although the Modbus ports electrically support existing Modbus cables it is recommended that a Modbus programming cable Part 990NAA26320 or 990NAA26350 be used This cable has been designed to fit under the door
545. peration with redundancy between an AC voltage source and a 24 Vdc voltage source In this case the total load capacity is 8 A 60 C Three redundant supplies can also be mixed in a backplane See Redundant Power Supplies p 741 for details e One 140CPS12420 and one 140CPS42400 power supply may be used for configurations requiring power for uninterrupted system operation with redundancy between an AC voltage source and a 48 Vdc voltage source In this case the total load capacity is 8 A 60 C Three redundant supplies can also be mixed on a backplane See Redundant Power Supplies p 741 for details e Do not mix DC input power supplies into the same backplane as the corresponding AC version e Do not use a standalone power supply in combination with any other supply in the same backplane DIO e While it is possible to use a standalone or a summable power supply with a DIO drop as long as the DIO input is left unpowered it is not possible to use a redundant supply with the DIO drop e The added power supply must not be included in the system I O map e The added power supply need not be of the same type as the DIO adapter AC powered supplies may be used with DC type adapters and vice versa e DIO module current load with an added power supply is typically 200 mA 744 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Grounding Overview Chassis Grounding Power Supply Grounding Modbus Plus M
546. ple of a single cable Quantum Hot Standby Standby configuration Configuration g Primary Controller Standby Controller PS PLC RIO CHS PS PLC RIO CHS o o o o o o o EA T Fiber Optic Cable Self terminating F adapter Self terminating Goatialosble x F aqapter SUE 52 0411 000 for quad shield cable 8810 52 0399 000 RIO Drop 2 for non quad shield cable PS RIO I O VO 5 Trunk Cable Last RIO Drop Tap T I 0185 100 PS RIO VO VO VO Trunk Terminator Tap 3g 52 0422 000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 23 Quantum Configurations Dual Cable Hot The following figure is an example of a dual cable Quantum Hot Standby Standby configuration Configuration Primary PLC Standby PLC PS PLC RIO CHS PS PLC RIO CHS Fiber Optic Cable Self terminating Self terminating F
547. plied to the four groups 140CFG01600 The G block is a high power output block used on both AC and DC circuits requiring up to 2 A Individual fusing is provided and may be used in both 1 and 2 wire installations It is also used for isolated AC modules 140CFH00800 The H block is used for analog inputs with individual fusing provided per channel This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations 140CFI00800 The I block is used for analog inputs This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations 140CFJ00400 The J block is used for analog outputs with individual fusing provided per channel This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations 140CFK00400 The K block is used for analog outputs This interface provides plus minus shield and power supply interface for both field and loop power configurations 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 755 CableFast Cabling CableFast Terminal Block Features CableFast Terminal Block Stacking Convention All CableFast terminal blocks have the following features Marking label for Quantum A standard 50 pin D connector backplane module group and or slot information UL component recognized SHIELD
548. pment 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Overview Quantum CPU Modules Overview The Quantum CPU is a module residing on the Quantum local I O backplane The CPU is a digitally operating electronic system which uses a programmable memory for the internal storage of user instructions These instructions are used to implement specific functions such as Logic Process sequencing Timing Coupling Arithmetic These instructions allow control through digital and analog outputs for various types of machines and processes The Quantum CPU serves as a bus master controlling the local remote and distributed I O of the Quantum system 6 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Overview Quantum I O Modules Overview Quantum I O modules are electrical signal converters that convert signals to and from field devices to a signal level and format which can be processed by the CPU such as e Limit switches e Proximity switches e Temperature sensors e Solenoids e Valve actuators All I O modules are optically isolated to the bus ensuring safe and trouble free operation All I O modules are also software configurable 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 7 Quantum Overview Quantum Communication Interface Modules Overview Nine types of communication interface modules are available and presented in the table below and are described in the followin
549. ptember 2002 I O Modules Configuration for Discrete Input Output Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of 4 In 4 Out and 16 In 8 Out modules 4 Point Input 4 The following shows the 4 In 4 Out module Point Output e 140DDM69000 125 Vdc Input High Power Output Module Map Register 140DDM69000 input output module can be configured as either eight Assignments contiguous 1x references or as one 3x register and either eight contiguous Ox references or one 4x register CAUTION Mapping When I O mapping module inputs using discrete 1x references in remote drops users should not split discrete words between drops The lowest discrete reference for a drop should start on a word boundary Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Map Register following figure shows the input register Inputs Output 4 Fault Output Fault Output 2 Fault Output 1 Fault Input 4 Input 3 Input 2 Input 1 E 112 13 4 15 6 7 8 Map Status There is no input I O map status byte associated with the inputs Byte Inputs 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 671 I O Modules Modsoft Module Push lt Enter gt to display and select the Dual Mode and Filter Select options Zoom Selection Inputs I When Dual Mo
550. ptember 2002 745 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Modbus Plus The following figure shows Modbus Plus grounding information Grounding Figure FRE 209P Clamp Modbus Plus d supplied with Drop Cable Modbus Plus Tap p Ground MB Screws 0 5 in 11 8 in h I 13 mm 80 cm Existi 9 loa xisting backplane Use holes along backplane Eun max ground screw maybe mounting flange to secure clamp Remove outer used if wire space Customer electrical panel may jacket to expose and clearance allows need to be drilled and tapped the shield braid CAUTION European compliance To maintain CE compliance with the European Directive on EMC 89 336 EEC the Modbus Plus drop cables must be installed in accordance with these instructions Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Other Equipment Other equipment in the installation should not share the grounding conductor of the Grounding System Each piece of equipment should have its own grounding conductor returning to the main grounding point from which the equipment power originates Systems with In systems with multiple power feeds the grounding should proceed in the same Multiple Power manner as single feed systems However a zero volt potential difference must be Feeds maintained between the equipment grounding conductors of the separate systems to prevent current flow on communication cables 746 840 USE 100 00
551. put 4 active In 5 Green Digital Input 5 active In 6 Green Digital Input 6 active In 7 Green Digital Input 7 active Drv Fit Red Fault signal from drive Drv En Green Drive enabled Out 1 Green Digital Output 1 active Out 2 Green Digital Output 2 active Out 3 Green Digital Output 3 active Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port Moving Amber Motor is moving In Pos Amber Motion is within the in position of the final target Front Panel There are two connectors located on the front of the module the Modbus Connector Connectors and the Servo Connector 364 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Modbus The MSX modules are equipped with a 9 pin RS 232C connector that supports Connectors Modicon s proprietary Modbus communication protocol The following is the Modbus port pinout connections for 9 pin and 25 pin connections The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts to 9 pin connectors AS W956 xxx Msx Modbus Port Pinouts to 9 Pin Connectors AS W956 xxx MSx Computer _ Signal Pin Pin Signal Function 1 No Connection 1 Shield TXD 2 3 RXD Serial data RXD 3 2 TXD Serial data GND 4 5 GND Ground DTR 5 6 DSR Control line DSR 6 4 DTR Control line RTS 7 e RTS Control line CTS 8 8 CTS Control line The following figure shows the MSX Modbus port pinouts for 25 pin connectors AS W955 xxx MsxModbus Port Pinouts for 25 Pin
552. puts are shorted as shown for channel 8 Note 5 Pins marked N C Not Connected are not electronically connected to the module Note 6 Only Quantum 140 XBP 0X 00 backplanes should be used for mounting this module along with the following UL listed modules 140 CPU xxx xx 140 CPS xxx xx 140 1033000 Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 413 Intrinsically Safe Modules 15 3 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on the intrinsically safe discrete modules 14001133000 and 140DIO33000 What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules 415 14001133000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module 417 14001033000 Intrinsically Safe Discrete Output Module 423 414 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Configuration for Intrinsically Safe Discrete Modules Overview Intrinsically Safe Discrete Input Module Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Modsoft Module Zoom Selections This section provides information on the I O configuration of the intrinsically safe discrete modules 14001133000 and 140DIO33000 The following is the intrinsically safe discrete input module e 14001133000 DC intrinsic safe This 8 point input module can be configured as eithe
553. quirements for the Quantum System 721 Hardware Installation Mounting Quantum Modules 723 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 709 Hardware Installation Hardware Installation Selecting Backplanes Overview Backplanes are designed to mechanically secure and electrically connect all modules used in drops The backplane contains a passive circuit board which permits modules to communicate with each other and to identify their slot numbers without further switch settings Refer to the following tables for front view illustrations and dimensions of the backplanes all backplane dimensions are nominal Note To meet vibration shock specifications the backplane must be mounted using all specified mounting holes The mounting surface should be flat to within 1 0 mm The backplane is mounted using standard hardware described below The recommended length for the mounting screws should be within the following range 0 24 6 mm 0 52 in 13 mm The head height of the screws should not exceed 0 14 in 3 5 mm 1 4 X 20 screws are recommended Backplanes The following table shows the backplanes Part Number Module Slots Weight Old Model Weight New Model 140XBP00200 2 0 5 Ibs 0 23 kg 0 9 Ibs 0 41 kg 140XBP00300 3 0 75 Ibs 0 34 kg 1 35 Ibs 0 62 kg 140XBP00400 4 1 0 Ibs 0 45 kg 1 8 lbs 0 82 kg 140XBP00600 6 1 4 Ibs 0 64 kg 2 7 lbs 1 23 kg
554. r 8 contiguous discrete input 1x references or as one register The following figure shows an I O map register CAUTION Mapping Rules When I O mapping input modules using discrete 1x references in remote drops users should not split discrete words between drops The lowest discrete reference for a drop should start on a word boundary Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage There is no I O map status byte associated with this module Push Enter to display and select the input type The following figure shows the input type display input Type BIN BCD 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 415 Intrinsically Safe Modules Intrinsically Safe The following shows the 8 point discrete output module Discrete Output e 14001033000 DC Intrinsic Safe Module Map Register The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous Assignment discrete output 0x references or as one output 4x register The following figure shows the format for the output modules Map Status There is no I O Map status byte associated with this module Byte Module Zoom Push Enter to display and select the output type and timeout state for the module Selections Timeout state isassumed when system c
555. r Module 495 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 461 I O Modules Analog Input Modules Overview This section provides information on configuration of Analog Input modules These modules include 140AC103000 140AC104000 140ARI03010 140 03000 140 103000 462 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AC103000 The following information pertains to configuration ofthe 140AC103000 Analog Input module Map and The AC103000 eight channel unipolar input module requires nine contiguous input Register 3x registers assigned as follows Assignment Register 1 Channel 1 data 0 4 095 1 5 VDC or 4 20 mA Register 2 Channel 2 data 0 4 095 1 5 VDC or 4 20 mA Register 3 Channel data 0 4 095 1 5 VDC or 4 20 mA Register 4 Channel 4 data 0 4 095 1 5 VDC or 4 20 mA Register 5 Channel 5 data 0 4 095 1 5 or4 20 mA Register 6 Channel 6 data 0 4 095 1 5 VDC or 4 20 mA Register 7 Channel 7 data 0 4 095 1 5 VDC or 4 20 mA Register 8 Channel 8 data 0 4 095 1 5 VDC or 4 20 mA Register 9 Input status word 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 8 1 5 V only 1 Broken Wire 4 20 mA only or Under Voltage on Channel 7 1 5 V only
556. r Output style Differential 5 V Loss of Feedback Detected within 40 ms The following table shows the operational specifications for compatibility Compatibility Programming Software Modsoft V2 32 or Concept 2 0 at a minimum Quantum Controllers All V2 0 at a minimum 360 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Electrical Specifications The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete inputs and high speed input Discrete Inputs and High Speed Input Input Impedance 3 5 kQ Inputs On 15 Vdc min Inputs Off 5 Vdc max Isolation 500 Vac to system bus The following table shows the electrical specifications for discrete o Discrete Output Drive Capability 150 mA at user supplied 19 2 30 Vdc resistive Protection Current limit thermal Isolation 500 Vac to system bus Analog Input Resolution 10 bits Input Impedance 30 kQ Offset 50 mV Accuracy 100 mV plus offset The following table shows the electrical specifications for analog Analog Output Resolution 12 bits Drive Capability 3 mA Offset 50 mV Accuracy 50 mV plus offset Resolver Interface Reference 5 0 05 kHz 1 6 5 5 V rms 50 mA drive capability Sine Cosine Input 3 kQ Impedance Resolution 16 bits to 300 rpm 14 bits to 1350 rpm
557. r RIO drop adapter is designated the Primary backplane and the adjacent backplane is designated the Secondary backplane Each backplane requires its own power supply Backplane Expander Power 140 100 00 CPU or RIO r1 Supply Adapter Cable end nord marked Primary Primary Backplane Backplane Expander Cable 140XCA7170X a Power Supply Backplane Expander Ses 140XBE10000 Secondary Backplane Note Cable must be installed before powering up the backplanes CAUTION Possible communications cable failure Do not Hot Swap a Backplane Expander module into a powered backplane unless the communications cable has first been connected to the module Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 370 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose CAUTION Possible communications failure The cable is polarized Ensure that the cable end marked Primary is connected to the backplane that has the CPU or RIO adapter Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage Backplane Expander Guidelines The same 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander modules are used for the primary and secondary backplanes The end of the Backplane Expander cabl
558. r may also point to a failure of the CPU Real time clock has failed Replace the CPU Bad coil used table This error means that the coil used table does not match user logic Possible causes include 1 This error is often seen when a program is altered offline by non Modsoft users and then reloaded It may be neccesary to update the coil used table manually in order to recover from this error 824 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Error Stpd Codes 2 The battery coil is not configured or configured in correctly This error is not uncommon if the program is being relocated from another PLC 3 There may be a hardware failure of the CPU RIO option has failed The RIO option board 140CRP93x00 has been determined to be unhealthy Replace the board Illegal node type found This error is usually seen when downloading a program to the CPU Some of the things a user should look for include 1 The user is loading relocating logic from a CPU that supported a loadable function block to another CPU that hasn t been configured for the same function block ie HSBY or XMIT 2 A constant or reference is outside the range of that particular CPU s instruction set This may occur when relocating logic from a 24 bit CPU to a 16 bit CPU This error is generally not seen as a hardware failure and the user is advised to examine his user logic for incompatibility with the target PLC RIO Option Has Failed User logic checksum error The calculat
559. r the analog input output module Common Specifications Required Addressing 5 Words In 2 Words Out Bus Current Required module 350 mA Fusing Internal None required External User discretion 526 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram output module The following figure shows the wiring diagram for the 140 9000 analog input CURRENT SOURCE 1 3 MONITOR 1 CURRENT SOURCE 1 N C 1V 4mA N C 5 V 20 L eo uL N C N C Supply CURRENT SOURCE 1 CURRENT SINK 1 Fei le evice CURRENT SOURCE 2 MONITOR 2 unen CURRENT SOURCE 2 T N C 5 N C CURRENT mud P Field Device 4 20 mA 4 Current L IN 1 IN 1 SENSE 1 N C 3 IN 2 IN 2 6 SENSE 2 N C 7 N C N C IN 3 G 6D IN 3 SENSE 3 NIC 63 pee IN 4 IN 4 N C 7 N C N C The following information pertains to the wiring diagram above 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 527 I O Modules Output Section 2 Channels Typical Wiring Outputs Channel 1 The output shows a connection to an external field device and optional monitor Channel 2 The output shows a connection to an external field de
560. r the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVIO3000 see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I O Analog In Module p 479 and 140AVI03000 I O Analog IN 8 Channel Bipolar Module 495 3 The GND ground terminal point is not connected 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 795 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the wiring for the140CF100800 instrument grounding Instrument module Grounding Field Side Connections See jumper information below Module Input 1 Module Input 1 Current IN Loop Power Required Module Input 2 AH MAU Module Input 2 Voltage IN 9v 4 20mA Module Input 3 B Module Input 3 Current IN e Instrument Powered V34 95 9 4 Ova ss Jumper Part Number 9s 140CFX00110 9s 9v Jumper Connections S1 to 1 55 S2 to 2 9s S3 to 3 e Ove 95 7 5 955 9 Ove GND V 796 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Note 1 When using a single power supply there will be no channel to channel isolation of input points 2 For the required jumper options for the 140ACI03000 and the 140AVIO3000 see the wiring diagrams in 140ACI03000 I O Analog In Module
561. ractices for Hazardous classified Locations Instrumentation Part I Intrinsic Safety N C Source 8 V Sense 8 Note 7 Control room eqipment connected to associated 1 5 Module All 330 00 apparatus should not use or generate more than 250 Vrms Blue Terminal Strip Note 8 All modules must be installed in an enclosure that meets the requirements of ANSI ISA SB2 01 Note 9 No revision to this drawing without prior FMRC approval 31001362 Rev 00 140AII33000 TC Wiring Diagram 400 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a UL certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with an RTD resistor connection Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION UL certification Class 1 Division 1 for this module GROUP A B C D SEE NOTE 1 Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Vec 15 5 V lj 123 mA 7 3 Wire RTD Resistor Ca 0 47 uf Source 1 CL Source 1 onnection La 466 uH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Chassis Ground Note 3 If the electrical parameters V Sense 2 of the cable are unknown the following values must be used for Ccable and Lcable Capacitance 60 Pf ft Inductance 0 20 uH ft Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 Source 4 m SEE NOTE 1 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for
562. ram GROUP A SUPPLY OUTPUT 10 OUTPUT 12 OUTPUT 14 OUTPUT 16 GROUP B SUPPLY OUTPUT 18 OUTPUT 20 OUTPUT 22 OUTPUT 24 GROUP C SUPPLY OUTPUT 26 OUTPUT 28 OUTPUT 30 OUTPUT 32 GROUP D SUPPLY GROUP A COMMON OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 1 24 Vdc 3 4 A OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 3 E e ii OUTPUT 6 OUTPUT 5 3 4 A OUTPUT 8 OUTPUT 7 M OUTPUT 9 OUTPUT 11 OUTPUT 13 OUTPUT 15 OUTPUT 17 OUTPUT 19 OUTPUT 21 OUTPUT 23 GROUP B COMMON GROUP C COMMON O amp 2 2 5 C9 C9 OO GROUP D COMMON 8 4 A x OUTPUT 25 LN ANN gt OUTPUT 27 OUTPUT 29 DEMIGE OUTPUT 31 634 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modu les CAUTION Possible Equipment Failure Each group is protected with a 5 A fuse to protect the module from catastrophic failure The group fuse will not be guaranteed to protect each output switch for all possible overload conditions It is recommended that each point be fused with a 3 4 A 250 V fuse Part 57 0078 000 Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 635 I O Modules 140DDO36400 I O DC Output 24VDC 6x16 Telefast Output Module Overview thermally protected The Te
563. ram Not used Not used Not used Not used ACL ACN Gogo oe Note See Power Grounding Considerations for DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 64 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies 140CPS11400 AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A Module Overview The following provides information on the AC Power Supply 115 230 Vac 8 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module rau Model Number CRUS Module Description Customer Identification Label PS 115 230 VAC LED Area Color Code Fold label and place it inside door Removable Door 4 Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 65 Power Supplies Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the CPS11400 115 230 VAC power supply module Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 93 138 Vac 170 276 Vac Input Frequency 47 63 Hz Input Vol
564. rand of cable Cable Port Tab Cable Connection Ring Fiber Cable Clasp 3 m Cable Part 990XCA65609 260 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Fiber Optic Configurations Point to Point Configuration Bus Configuration The following represent four typical configurations that show the wide range of the network architecture Point to Point connection Bus configuration Tree and Star configurations Self Healing Ring configuration Point to point configuration see the following figure allows communication over the distance of up to 3 km through harsh industrial environments The following figure shows the point to point configuration Point to Point Configuration Example Node 1 Node 2 P S CPU NOM NOM CPU I O P S Fiber Optic Cables E B This type of configuration is used when it is required to connect a number of fiber nodes and can be used to increase the distance of a standard Modbus Plus network by changing to a fiber medium This kind of network allows the connection of up to 32 Quantum NOM252 nodes over the distance of 5 km The following illustrations show the NOM25200 module in a mixed fiber optic twisted pairs bus configuration network and a pure fiber optic bus configuration network CAUTION Equipment Failure The loss of a single node in
565. rds In 6 Words Out Baud Rate set by software 300 19200 baud 9600 default The following table shows the operational specifications for the application program Application Program Execution Rate See note below Storage 650 instructions Note A majority of the instructions typically take 1 ms to execute The execution time of an instruction though is not constant The execution time can increase due to factors such as if the Sync Ratio Mode is on how often the position generator must execute to plan out new moves how many whenever s are enabled and the number of sources requesting commands to be executed e g backplane internal program Modbus port etc If timing is extremely critical to an application actual time must be determined experimentally by running the actual application program The following table shows the operational specifications for high speed input High Speed Input Position Capture Time 250 us max Isolation 500 V to system bus Pulse Width 25 us 358 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose High Speed Input Minimum Time Between Successive Captures 20 ms The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete inputs Discrete Inputs Number 7 Scan Time 1 5 ms Isolation 500 V to system bus The following table shows the operational specifications for discrete
566. ref value is 30 Vdc Input pulse on off threshold levels for the 5 24 Vdc Vref range are listed in the module specification table The minimum differential input is 1 8 V The following user logic Configures the module to count up from zero Turns an output on for one count at a setpoint value of 50 Continues counting to 100 Rolls over to zero and turn on a second output for one count Repeats the operation See 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module p 333 for counter timing diagrams illustrating output on times 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 315 Intelligent Special Purpose Module Configuration The following table shows the I O Map register assignments Module Input Ref Output Ref Description 140EHC20200 300001 300006 400001 400006 EHC20200 High Speed In this example block moves are used to load the operating parameters into the module This requires pre defined tables be established Register values are in HEX format The following table shows the module configurations 400101 0140 CONFIGURE command Disable Counter 2 400102 0000 Pulse input two 16 bit counters output assert on Rate Sample OFF disable outputs at bus communication loss 400103 3100 Output 1A on at setpoint Output 1B on at maximum count 1 Output 2A and 2B are disabled 400104 0000 400105 0000 Not used by this command 400106 0000
567. resistive 30 Vdc 0 5 A resistive Current Command Voltages 10 Vdc Current Command Summing Accuracy 0 0 1 Vdc Current Commands 3 mA drive capability The following table shows the electrical specifications for power requirements Power Requirements Main Power Input 5 V 5 750 mA with no encoders or resolvers attached output off 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Power Requirements Main Power Input 5 V 5 1000 mA with maximum encoder and resolver load outputs on Hot Swap Surge Current Less than 5 A Bus Current Required MSB Module 700 mA MSC Module 1000 mA 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 363 Intelligent Special Purpose Front Panel There are 17 LED indicators visible on the front panel The following figure shows Indicators and the front panel LED indicators Descriptions Active Ready Drv Fit Limok Drv En Limok Outi Home Out 2 In 4 Out 3 In 5 Modbus In 6 Moving In 7 In Pos The following table shows the 140MSX10100 LED descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Active Green Bus communication is present Ready Green The module has passed powerup diagnostics Lim ok Green Digital Input 1 active Lim ok Green Digital Input 2 active Home Green Digital Input 3 active In 4 Green Digital In
568. rminal strip This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF or a power supply failure 94 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Operating Curve and Timing Chart The following figures show the CPS42400 operating curve left and the hold up capacitor timing chart right Capacitor size mF 47 22 10 68 47 45 100 10 90 2 2 80 5 8 6 70 1 E 4 E 60 m o 0 2 50 B 40 L 40 45 50 55 60 30 Ambient Temperature C 0 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 Input Voltage Note Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a gt 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor between 5 and 6 of the power terminal strip Refer to the hold up capacitor timing chart above for capacitor values 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 95 Power Supplies 140CPS51100 DC Power Supply 125 Vdc 3 A Module Overview The following provides information on the DC power supply 125 Vdc 3 A module Power Supply The following figure shows the power supply module components Module Q Model Number PEE Module Description Customer Identification Label LED Area Color Code Fold label ang place it inside door Removable Door 4 f u Field Wiring Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover
569. roup 2A Per Module 4A Off State Leakage Point 0 4 mA 30 Vdc Surge Current Maximum Each Point 5 A 500 us duration no more than 6 per minute Load Inductance Maximum Output 0 5 Henry 4 Hz switch frequency or TR 0 5 IPF where L Load Inductance Henry Load Current A F Switching Frequency Hz Load Capacitance Maximum 50 uf The following table shows the common specifications for the DDM39000 module Common Specifications Response Input and Output OFF ON 1 ms max resistive load output ON OFF 1 ms max resistive load output Module Protection Input Protection Resistor limited Output Protection Transient voltage suppression internal Isolation Input and Output Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Group to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Input None 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 683 I O Modules Common Specifications Output Blown fuse detect loss of field power Bus Current Required Module 330 mA Power Dissipation 1 75 W 0 36 x input points 1 1 V x total outputs load currents External Power Module Not required for this module Fusing Input Internal None External User discretion Output Internal 5 A fuse for each group Part 043502405 or equivalent For th
570. roup 600 mA Per Module 2 4 A Surge Current Maximum Each Point 750 mA 500 us duration no more than 6 per minute Response Resistive Loads OFF ON 250 us max ON OFF 250 us max Output Protection internal Transient voltage suppression Isolation Group to Group 500 Vac rms for 1 minute Output to Bus 1780 Vac rms for 1 minute Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of field power Bus Current Required 350 mA 618 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications Power Dissipation 4W External Power Us 4 5 5 5 Vdc continuous Absolute Voltage Us max 15 Vdc for 1 3 ms decaying voltage pulse External Power Supply Current 400 mA Load current per point Fusing Internal 1A fuse for each group Modicon 043508953 For the location of the fuses see Fuse Locations p 620 External None Module States The following table shows the module states for the DDO15310 module External Power Command Active Output LED Fault ON OFF ON 23 2 OFF OFF ON ON ON 0 2 ON OFF OFF X X ON OFF ON ON ON ON X OFF or ON state 440 Q pullup resistor to the power rail CAUTION damage Possible danger to equipment or personnel Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow th
571. rror 614 mbp bus interface error 615 bad mbp response opcode 616 timeout waiting for mbp 617 mbp out of synchronization 618 mbp invalid path 619 page 0 not paragraph aligned 61E bad external uart hardware 61F bad external uart interrupt 620 bad receive comm state 621 bad transmit comm state 622 bad comm state trn asc 623 bad comm state trn rtu 624 bad comm state rcv rtu 625 bad comm state rcv asc 626 bad modbus state tmrO evt 627 bad modbus state trn int 628 bad modbus state rcv int 631 bad interrupt 5 503 ram address test error 52D P O S T BAD MPU ERROR 402 ram data test error 300 EXEC not loaded 301 EXEC Checksum 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 flash prog erase error 8003 unexpected executive return 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 139 CPU Modules Front Panel Two three position slide switches are located on the front of the CPU The left Switches switch is used for memory protection when in the top position and no memory protection in the middle and bottom positions The three position slide switch on the right is used to select the comm parameter settings for the Modbus RS 232 ports The following figure shows the three options that are available for the CPU42402 module mem ASCII pm l Em not off 4 Note The CPU hardware defaults to bridge mode when the front panel switch is setto RTU or ASCII mode When networking con
572. rue high and true low logic circuits True High Current Sink Input Current Source Output Power Current Supply 9 p Sink Input Current Source Output True Low Current Source Input Current Sink Output Current Power _ Supply L o Input l leri Source Input Current Sink Output Current Sinking describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sinks current from the external load Current Sourcing describes a physical implementation of the I O hardware which when in the true state sources current to the external load 458 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Map Status Byte Overview This Quantum I O map menu entry allows you to assign the 3x register that defines the start of a table in which I O mapped module status is available You may either enter the 3x value or the value 0 indicating no choice The value entered is displayed in the summary information on the top of the Quantum I O Map Modules in a backplane report status and fault information in an 8 bit byte therefore one word of the table conveys the status information for two modules The following figure shows an example of the Quantum report status and fault information Enter status reg 0 300001 Tme AS i Quit F5 OFF F9 QUANTUM Re 1 Available 189 x100 ms Module Status
573. rview 8 Point Output Modules Map Register Assignment Map Status Byte Module Zoom Selections This section provides information on configuration of 8 12 16 32 and 96 point output modules The following shows the 8 point output module e 140DRC83000 Relay Ouput 8x1 Normally Open Normally Closed The ouput modules listed above can be configured as either eight contiguous discrete output 0x references or as one output 4x register The following figure shows the format for the output modules There is no I O Map status byte associated with these modules Push Enter to display and select the output type and timeout state for the module Timeout state isassumed when system control of the module is stopped Output Type BIN BCD Timeout State Last Value User Defined User Defined Timeout State Points 1 8 00000000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 585 I O Modules Module Zoom Push lt Enter gt to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the Selections module Timeout state is assumed when sytem control of the module is stopped Outputs Output Type BCD 586 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 12 Point Output Module Map Register Assignment Fault Inputs Module Zoom Selections Inputs Map Register Assignment Outputs Map St
574. rview The following provides information on the 140DSI35300 supervised input 24 Vdc 32 point module Supervised Input following is the supervised input module Module e 140DS135300 DC input 24 Vdc 4x8 sink Map Register 05135300 is configured as four input registers The following diagram Assignment shows the register formats Input Register 1 Ip 2 12 1 us 16 Point 1 Register 2 input 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 2 1 32 Point 17 17 18 19 20 3 5 26 8 29 30 31 Register 3 Broken f 2 3 4 5 67 8 9 10 1 12 13 14 15 16 Wire 1 Register 4 Broken Wire 17 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Map Status The eight bits in the I O map status byte are used as follows Byte 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Group A Voltage Fault Group B Voltage Fault Group C Voltage Fault Group D Voltage Fault Modsoft Module There are no Modsoft Zoom selections Zoom Selections 666 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 14005135300 I O DC 24V Supervised Input Module Overview Specifications The Supervised Input m
575. ry Module 17 Ata Glance Overview The following chapter provides information on the battery module its installation and replacement considerations What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page I O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module 438 140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module 439 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 437 Battery Module I O Configuration for the 140XCP90000 Battery Module Overview The following provides information on the Battery module 140XCP90000 Battery Backup Map Register Assignment There is no I O Map register assignment associated with this module Map Status Byte 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 L Bati Low Bat2 Low The two least significant bits in the I O Map status byte are used as follows Module Zoom Selections There are no Module Zoom selections required for this module 438 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Battery Module 140XCP90000 Quantum Battery Module Overview This section describes the battery module its installation and replacement considerations Battery Module The following figure shows the battery module components 140 Module Number XCP 900 00 Module Description BATTERY BACKUP Color Code
576. s 33 48 User Defined Timeout State Points 49 64 User Defined Timeout State Points 65 80 User Defined Timeout State Points 81 96 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 0000000000000000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 593 I O Modules 140DAO84000 I O AC Output 24 230 Vac 16x1 Module Overview The AC Output 24 230 Vac 16x1 module switches 24 230 Vac powered loads Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the AC Output 24 230 VAC OUT module Specifications Number of Output Points 16 isolated LEDs Active 1 16 Green Indicates point status Required Addressing 1 word out Voltage rms Working 20 253 Vac Absolute Maximum 300 Vac for 10 s 400 Vac for 1 cycle Frequency 47 63 Hz ON State Drop Point 1 5 Vac Minimum Load Current rms 5mA Maximum Load Current rms Each Point 4 A continuous 20 132 Vac rms 3 A continuous 170 253 Vac rms Any Four Contiguous Points 4 A max continuous for the sum of the four points Per Module 16 A continuous See the derating chart Off State Leakage Point max 2 5 mA 230 Vac 2 mA 115 Vac 1 mA 48 Vac 1 mA Q 24 Vac 594 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Specifications The following figure shows the DAO84000 derating chart 16 15 T OON 1 TS L IN
577. s expander Remote I O Maximum I O Words per Drop 64 In 64 Out Maximum Number of Remote Drops 31 Distributed I O Maximum Number of Networks per 3 System Maximum Words per Network For every DIO drop there is a minimum of two words input of overhead 500 In and 500 Out Maximum Words per Node 30 In and 32 Out Watchdog Timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 3 ms kto 1 4 ms k Battery 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 5 loss of capacity per year Battery Load Current Power off Typical 7 uA Maximum 210 uA Communication Modbus RS 232 1 serial port 9 pin D shell Modbus Plus RS 485 1 network port 9 pin D shell 116 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions Specifications General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 790 mA Power Dissipation 3 95 W TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 C Maximum Number of NOM NOE and 2 MMS modules any combination This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I O For each word of register I O configured one word of I O words must be subtracted from the total available The same holds true for each
578. s have an open For Type J and K add 1 5 C inaccuracy for temperatures below 100 C Type B cannot be used below 130 C TC detect and upscale output This results in a reading of 7FFFh or 32767 decimal when an open TC is detected 492 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the ATI03000 wiring diagram Not used 2 0 Not used 4 5 um Not used 6 5 Not used u b Not used Not used Not used 12 GD Not used 3 P Not used G gt Not used 17 ke 7 Not used Not used Not used e2 1 Not used Not used 5 Not used 7 Not used Not used Not used 8 G Not used b Not used 85 Not used 87 Not used Not used L 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 493 I O Modules Note 1 Either shielded or unshielded TCs may be used The user should consider using shielded wire in a noisy environment Shielded types should have a shield tied to earth ground near the signal source end 2 Connections marked Not Used are not electrically connected within the module These points are used as a thermal link to ambient air They are not recommended as electrical tie points as this could affect the accuracy of cold junction compensation 494 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 140AVI03000 I O
579. s set when a channel input exceeds the rated input value by 2 496 or when a broken wire is sensed on the channel The warning bit is cleared when the out of range bit is set The following figure shows the word 10 register Word 10 Internal temperature The I O map status byte is used by the 140ATI03000 Input Module as follows MSB LSB 8 7 6 5 41312 1 L Channel 1 open circuit or out of range Channel 2 open circuit or out of range Channel 3 open circuit or out of range L Channel 4 open circuit or out of range Channel 5 open circuit or out of range Channel 6 open circuit or out of range Channel 7 open circuit or out of range Channel 8 open circuit or out of range 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 471 I O Modules Measurement Ranges in the following table are expressed in degrees C The user can select either Ranges 0 1 or 1 0 C or F for the output data format If the 0 1 format is selected the decimal point is implied i e a reading of 1234 should be interpreted as 123 49 The internal CJC data is reported in the same units as the TC output All TC output data is in signed integer format except as noted for Type B see below Note If the TC is open then the warning bit is cleared and the out of range bit is set If itis over range then the channel s output dat
580. s should be used for mounting this module 3 Wire RTD Resistor Connection ausa GROUND 140 1133000 RTD Wiring Diagram 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 397 Intrinsically Safe Modules The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram for this module when configured with a thermocouple connection Notes related to NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION CSA certification Class 1 Division 1 for this module Group A B C D Note 1 Entity parameters per al um e SEE NOTE 1 channel Vec 15 5 V ls 123 mA 1 Source 1 1 Source 1 Ca 0 47 uf La 1 0 mH V Sense 1 4 V Sense 1 Thermocouple J K E T R S B SEE NOTE 2 Note 2 Maximum non N C hazardous area voltage must 1 Source 2 not exceed 250 V Chassis Ground Note 1 Only shielded twisted pair cables should be used for connections Shields should be left open at the field end and V Sense 2 Note 3 Install accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part I for installation in Canada Toure V Sense 3 V Sense 3 connected to chassis ground at Note 4 Install in accordance the ground screws on the backplane with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 NIC oE N C and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for Note 2 Thermocouple tip may Source 4 Source 4 installation in the United States be grounded if required V Sense 4 Note 5 To maintain intrinsic
581. served 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 About the Book At a Glance Document Scope Validity Note Product Related Warnings User Comments This manual is a reference guide for the Hardware of the Quantum automation system The data and illustrations found in this book are not binding We reserve the right to modify our products in line with our policy of continuous product development The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by Schneider Electric Schneider Electric assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document If you have any suggestions for improvements or amendments or have found errors in this publication please notify us No part of this document may be reproduced in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying without express written permission of Schneider Electric We welcome your comments about this document You can reach us by e mail at TECHCOMM modicon com 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xi About the Book xii 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Automation System Overview Ata Overview This part provides an overview of the Quantum Automation System What s in this This part contains the following chapters 2 parta Chapter Chapter Name Page 1 Modicon TSX Quantum Automation System Overview 3
582. shows the echo response for the configuration command OE Register Value 300001 0100 300002 0000 300003 3100 300004 0000 300005 0000 300006 0000 Read Input The following table shows the read input registers E 40301 0300 READ INPUT COUNTER command 40302 0000 40303 0000 40304 0000 40305 0000 40306 0000 Not used by this command When this command is issued the content of the input pulse counter is retrieved The 3X register content would appear as shown in the following table 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 317 Intelligent Special Purpose 3x Register Content Reset of Latched Outputs Register Value Description 300001 0300 Command echo 300002 XXXX Current input count 300003 0000 Zeros as the count will not exceed 100 For counts above 65 536 this register is a multiplier As an example 30002 has a value of 324 and 30003 a value of 3 The total count is 65 536 x 3 324 196 932 300004 0000 Counter 2 is disabled 300005 0000 Counter 2 is disabled 300006 0X00 X is the field power indicator If register 400103 in the Module Configuration Table has been set to 4200 Output 1A would have been latched on at setpoint and Output 1B latched on at maximum count Wiring Diagrams 2 and 4 show how the encoder Z outputs could be used to reset the latched outputs The minimum pulse width to reset outputs is 1 us 318 840 USE 100 00 September 200
583. ssor The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators Ready Run Modbus Modbus Mem Prt Bat Low Error A The following table shows the LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU has passed powerup diagnostics Run Green The CPU has been started and is solving logic See the following table for Run LED error codes Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus port 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 107 CPU Modules LED Error Codes LED Descriptions Modbus Green Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Mem Prt Amber Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on Bat Low Red The battery needs replacing Error A Red Indicates a communications error on the Modbus Plus network The following table show the number of times the Run LED blinks for each type of error and the crash codes possible for that group all codes are in hex for the 140CPU11302 module LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82bE MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA
584. st be disposed of according to local rules and regulations governing hazardous waste Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 443 Battery Module 444 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum I O Modules 18 At a Glance Introduction The following section provides information on the Quantum Input Output I O modules What s in this This chapter contains the following sections Chapter Section Topic Page 18 1 Overview of I O Modules 447 18 2 Analog Input Modules 461 18 3 Analog Output Modules 499 18 4 Analog Input Output Modules 517 18 5 Discrete Input Modules 529 18 6 Discrete Output Modules 584 18 7 Discrete Verified Output Module 655 18 8 Discrete Supervised Input Module 665 18 9 Discrete Input Output Modules 670 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 445 I O Modules 446 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 18 1 Overview of I O Modules At a Glance This section provides an overview of I O modules used in Quantum What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Quantum I O Modules 448 Map Status Byte 459 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 447 I O Modules Quantum I O Modules Overview Module Quantum I O LED Descriptions The following section contains specificati
585. stic information for Port 502 messaging 4 Bandwidth Monitoring e Throughput measurement of NOE by service Note All these pages are protected by the general HTTP password 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 295 Ethernet Modules 296 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Modules for the Quantum 14 Ata Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the following intelligent special purpose modules e Five Channel High Speed Counter Module e Two Channel High Speed Counter Module e ASCII Interface Module e High Speed Interrupt Module e Single Axis Motion Modules e Hot Standby Module What s in this This chapter contains the following topics 2 Chapter Topic Page 140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module 298 I O Configuration for 140EHC20200 304 140EHC20200 High Speed Counter Module 333 140ESI06210 ASCII Interface Module 346 140HLI34000 High Speed Interrupt Module 352 140MSB MSC10100 Quantum MSX Motion Modules 357 140XBE10000 Backplane Expander and Cable 368 140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module 372 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 297 Intelligent Special Purpose 140EHC10500 High Speed Counter Module Overview Related Documentation EHC10500 Counter Module This section provides specifications and descriptions of the high speed counter modules EHC10500 Five Channel Discrete High Speed Counter The High Speed Coun
586. system for CE Powered System compliance AC Powered System for CE Compliance Quantum Backplane Detailed Installation Illustration 140 XBP200600 BACKPLANE GND SCREWS AC LINE BROWN BROWN GND Lead Quantum Power Supply EARTH GREEN YELLOW GROUND TO GROUND SCREWON Wire to the power supply as follows QUANTUM BACKPLANE Line Brown wire Neutral Blue wire Note Only one ground wire per backplane is required GND Green Yellow wire In redundant and summable systems this lead is not connected for the additional line filter power supply The following table shows the list of parts for the AC Powed System Figure Callout Vendor or Part Number Description Instruction equivalent 1 Offlex Series 35005 Line Cord Terminate the shield at panel 100cy ground the filter end of the shield is not terminated 2 Steward 28 B 0686 200 Ferrite Bead Install next to the filter and Fair Rite 2643665702 Secure with tie wraps at both ends of the ferrite bead 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 733 Pwr amp Grnding Guide Callout Vendor Part Number Description Instruction equivalent 3 Schaffner FvN670 3 06 Line Filter fast on terminals Install next to the power Dimensions supply Length 3 4 85 mm Width 2 2 55 mm Height 1 6 40 mm Mounting Holes 0 2 in 5 3 mm dia 3 in 75 MM centerline mounted Fast on terminals 0 25 in 6 4 mm 4
587. t 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 169 CPU Modules The following table shows the LED descriptions Indication when On The CPU has passed power up diagnostics The CPU has been started and is solving logic The battery needs replacing or is not present Communications are active on the Modbus port 1 or 2 Communications are active on the Modbus Plus port Indicates communications error on the Modbus Plus port LED Descriptions LEDS Color Ready Green Run Green Bat Low Red Modbus Green Modbus Green Error A Red Mem Prt Amber Memory is write protected the memory protect switch is on LED Error Codes The following table shows the run LED error codes for the 140CPU53414 module LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error Continuous 0000 requested kernel mode 2 80B ram error during sizing 80C run output active failed 82bE MB command handler stack error 3 769 bus grant received 72A not master asic on cpu 72B master config write bad 72C quantum bus DPM write failure 72F plc asic loopback test 730 plc asic BAD DATA 170 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 4 604 UPI timeout error 605 bad UPI response opcode 606 UPI bus d
588. t Voltage rms Working 85 253 Vac Absolute Maximum 300 Vac for 10 s 400 Vac for 1 cycle Frequency 47 63 Hz ON State Drop Point 1 5 Vac Minimum Load Current rms 5 Maximum Load Current rms Each Point 4 A continuous 85 132 Vac rms 3 A continuous 170 253 Vac rms Each Group 4 A continuous Per Module 16 A continuous See the derating chart Off State Leakage Point max 2 5 mA 230 Vac 2 0 mA 115 Vac 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 603 I O Modules Specifications The following figure shows the DAO84210 derating chart DAO84210 Operating Curve 17 16 15 14 N ye 13 it X 10 4 N 20 132 V rms N N 170 253 V rms TOTAL MODULE CURRENT A N Q O A V 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE deg C The specifications stated are pending UL CSA approval This module was originally approved at 2 A each point and 12 A 0 50 115 Vac and 0 50 C 230 Vac per module Surge Current Maximum rms Per Point Per Group One Cycle 30A 45A Two Cycles 20A 30A Three Cycles 10A 25 Applied DV DT 400 V us Response OFF ON 0 50 of one line cycle max ON OFF 0 50 of one line cycle max Output Protection RC snubber suppression internal Isolation rms
589. t Voltage 100 150 Vdc including ripple Input Current 0 5 A 125 Vdc Inrush Current 28 A 125 Vdc Input Power Interruption 1 0 ms max Fusing external 2 A slo blo recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 8 60 Minimum Current None required Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506325 Internal Power Dissipation 6 0 1 5 x our Watts where our is Amperes Operating Mode Standalone Redundant LED Indicator and Description Pwr ok The following figure shows the CPS52400 LED indicator The following table shows the CPS52400 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus 100 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS52400 wiring diagram Internally connected Do not connect any external wiring to these points Not used Not used 125VDC 125 VDC Common 060 000 0 6 CO 2 Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information 84
590. t attaching the communications cable In order to install the Backplane Expander in a powered backplane first connect the cable to the Backplane Expander module and then mount the module into the powered backplane 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 371 Intelligent Special Purpose 140CHS11000 Hot Standby Module Overview This section describes the Hot Standby Module 140CHS11000 The Quantum Hot Standby system is designed for use with remote I O networks when downtime cannot be tolerated Related For more detailed information on the use of the Hot Standby module refer to the Documentation Quantum Automation Hot Standby System Planning and Installation Guide part number 840USE10600 Hot Standby The following figure shows the Hot Standby Module components Module N d Medie Dees Bie Customer Identification 1000 u ipti Label Fold label l LED Di Gerd n ot ee Removable door Part 31000264 lt P Keyswitch A B Designation Slide Switch 8 Program Update Button mS Transmit Cable Connector Receive Cable Connector y lt Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the Quantum Hot Standby system Specifications I O Type Qu
591. tage Total Harmonic Distortion Less than 10 of the fundamental ms value Input Current 1 1 A 115 Vac 0 6 A 230 Vac Inrush Current 38 A 115 Vac 19 A 230 Vac VA Rating 130 VA Input Power Interruption 1 2 cycle full load and minimum rated line voltage frequency No less than 1 second between interruptions Fusing external 2 0 A slo blo recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 8 A 60 C See the operating curve below Minimum Current None required Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506326 Internal Power Dissipation 6 0 1 5 x lout Watts where lout is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone 66 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies LED Indicator The following figure shows the CPS11400 LED indicator and Description Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS11400 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus Wiring Diagram The following figures show the CPS11400 Wiring Diagram left and operating curve and Operating right Curve 9900006 Internally connected Do not connect any external wiring to th
592. tal rms value Input Current 1 1 A Q 115 Vac 0 6 A 230 Vac Inrush Current 38 A 115 Vac 19 A 230 Vac VA Rating 130 VA Input Power Interruption 1 2 cycle full load and minimum rated line voltage frequency No less than 1 second between interruptions Fusing external 2 0 A slo blo recommended Part 57 0089 000 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 8 A 60 C Minimum Current None required Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043506326 Internal Power Dissipation 6 0 1 5 x lour Watts where lour is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone Summable 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 69 Power Supplies LED Indicator and Description Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS11410 LED indicator Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS11410 LED description LED Descripton LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus The following figures shows the 140CPS11410 Internally connected Do not connect any external wiring to these points Install jumper for 115 VAC 1 operation only ACL ACN _ e s QQ M Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems
593. tch cord 3M FC ST Patch Cord BANAV FS 0001 Connects FC connector on 7XE to ST 3M Bare Fiber Adapter ST compatible 8194 Permits use of above source and meter to test raw fiber two required It is recommended that you use 62 5 125 um cable such as AMP 503016 1 AMP 502986 1 or equivalent with a maximum attenuation of 3 5 dB km in most of the configurations Note Modicon recommends using the 990XCA65609 cable When passive star couplers are used 100 140 micron cable such as AMP503016 3 AMP502986 3 or equivalent with a maximum attenuation of 5 0 dB km is recommended because higher optical power can be pumped in 100 um cable and as a result greater distance up to 1 km between units can be achieved the terminal side Note All cables must have a maximum cable diameter of not more than 3 mm at 268 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM Connections Adding a New Node to the Network Repairing the Break in the Cable The following information discusses connecting the NOM25200 on fiber cable adding a new mode to the network and repairing the break in the cable Note When a new network is assembled it is recommended that you connect all cables before powering up the system Connect fiber optic cables as described previously in this section If a new node is added to an existing network in order to extend the network at the
594. tems 747 AC DC installation illustration 747 line filter connections 748 protective cover 748 CFA04000 application notes 757 description 757 dimensions 758 terminal block illustration 757 wiring diagram 759 CFB03200 application notes 760 description 760 terminal block dimensions 761 terminal block illustration 760 wiring for input modules 762 CFC03200 application notes 765 description 764 dimensions 765 terminal block illustration 764 wiring diagram for DAI35300 766 wiring diagram for DAI45300 766 wiring diagram for DAI55300 766 wiring diagram for DDI15310 767 wiring diagram for DDI35300 766 wiring diagram for DDI85300 766 wiring diagram for DDO15310 769 wiring diagram for DDO3530X 771 wiring for output module 763 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 XV Index CFD03200 application notes 773 description 773 dimensions 773 terminal block illustration 773 wiring diagram 774 CFE03200 application notes 775 description 775 dimensions 775 terminal block illustration 775 wiring diagram 776 CFG01600 application notes 777 description 777 dimensions 777 terminal block illustration 777 wiring diagram grouped AC output mode 782 wiring diagram grouped DC output mode 783 wiring diagram isolated AC input mode 778 wiring diagram isolated output mode 780 CFH00800 application notes 785 description 785 dimensions 786 terminal block illustration
595. ter module is a discrete counter for proximity and magnetic pickups For more detailed information on the planning installation and use of this module refer to the Quantum Automation Series 140EHC10500 Module User Guide part number 840USE44300 The following figure shows the EHC10500 Five Channel Discrete High Speed Counter module Model Number mm Module Description Customer Identification Label Fug Togog Color Code Fold label and place it inside the door LED Area Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door N 328 NOI Sl KEA NOST xe EI Sto 9 A 9 HI Be V 4 298 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the EHC10500 high speed counter Specifications Number of Channels 5 counter inputs 8 digital inputs and 8 digital outputs LEDs Active F R Green Module is ready 1 8 Green left column Discrete Inputs IN1 IN8 C1 C5 Green middle column Discrete Counter Inputs C1 C5 1 8 Green right column Discrete Outputs OUT OUT8 P Green 24 Vdc is present Required Addressing 13 Words In 13 Words Out Discrete Counter Inputs
596. th the device before trying to install operate or maintain it The following special messages may appear throughout this documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies or simplifies a procedure The addition of this symbol to a Danger or Warning safety label indicates A that an electrical hazard exists which will result in personal injury if the instructions are not followed This is the safety alert symbol It is used to alert you to potential personal A injury hazards Obey all safety messages that follow this symbol to avoid possible injury or death DANGER DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death serious injury or equipment damage N WARNING WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in death serious injury or equipment damage N CAUTION CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 ix Safety Information PLEASE NOTE Electrical equipment should be serviced only by qualified personnel No responsi bility is assumed by Schneider Electric for any consequences arising out of the use of this material This document is not intended as an instruction manual for untrained persons 2002 Schneider Electric All Rights Re
597. th 0 5 loss of capacity per year Battery Load Current Power off Typical 7 uA Maximum 210 uA 136 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Specifications Communication Modbus RS 232 1 serial port 9 pin D shell Modbus Plus RS 485 2 redundant network ports 9 pin D shell General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM RAM Address RAM Address Executive Checksum Executive Checksum User Logic Check User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1 8 A Power dissipation 9 TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 C Maximum Number of NOM 6 NOE and MMS modules any combination This information can be a mix of Discrete or Register I Os For each word of Register I O configured one word of I O words must be subtracted from the total available The same holds true for each block of 8 bits or 16 bits of Discrete I O configured one word of Register I O must be subtracted from the total available Requires the use of the 140NOM2x00 Option Modules LED Indicators The following figure shows the CPU LED indicators and Descriptions SS Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus Error A Error B Mem Prt 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 137 CPU Modules The following table shows the CPU LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The CPU
598. th a with Door Cover door cover part number 140XCP51000 140XCP51000 s fog Terminal Strip The following figure shows the terminal strip jumper kit qty 12 part number Jumper Kit 140XCP60000 140XCP60000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 699 Misc Components Field Wiring The following figure shows the 40 pin field wiring terminal strip part number Terminal Strip 140XTS00200 140XTS00200 Customer Identification Label 1 700 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Misc Components IP 20 Compliant The following figure shows the 40 pin field wiring terminal strip with IP 20 Field Wiring Terminal Strips 140XTS00100 and 140XTS00500 V S 00006605090 9 69 9 69 69 6606900 II Ge 69 G9 69 GG 69 69 69 369 EQ compatible finger safe fixed terminal screw shield part number 140XTS00100 SN Customer Identification Label 1 The following figure shows the 7 pin field wiring I O power connector with IP 20 compatible finger safe fixed terminal screw shield part number 140XTS00500 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 701 Misc Components Battery 990XCP90000 CPU Battery 990XCP98000 ANM Ye Pu
599. the Quantum Modules 9 At a Glance Introduction This chapter provides information on the distributed I O DIO modules This information includes specifications LED indicators and descriptions rear panel switches and wiring diagrams for the following modules e 140CRA21110 e 140CRA21210 e 140CRA21120 e 140CRA21220 What s in this This chapter contains the following topics Chapter Topic Page 140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I O DIO Modules 216 140CRA21X20 Quantum Distributed I O DIO Modules 221 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 215 DIO 140CRA21X10 Quantum Distributed I O DIO Modules Overview This section includes specifications and wiring diagrams for the Modbus Plus Distributed I O AC powered single CRA21110 and dual CRA21210 channel modules DIO Module The following figure shows the parts of the distributed I O DIO module qe Customer Identification Label EE Model Number X Fold label and place it inside door AINT Module Description Part 4043505673 LED Area Color Code Removable Door lal 9 rond Modbus B al Field Wiring Node Connector Field Wiring Connector Cover 4 Notusea 2 Not used 3
600. the 140EHC20200 counter module are shown below EHC20200 Timing Diagrams Tpw 1 lt gt Count Input Thold Tst gt Enable Tpw 2 mi Preset Tpw 1 Reset Tdly1 Tdly2 Output Assertion x The following table shows the EHC20200 timing parameters Timing Parameters Limits Filter No Filter 200 Hz 500 khz Tdly1 Count to Output Assertion Delay MAX 4 8 ms 40 us Tdly2 Preset Reset to Output Delay MAX 4 8 ms 40 us Tpw1 Count Reset Pulse Width MIN 2 5 ms 1 us Tpw2 Preset Pulse Width MIN 2 5 ms 500 us Tst Enable Reset Preset to Count Setup Time MIN 2 5 ms 2 us Thold Enable Reset to Count Hold Time MIN 2 5 ms 2 us Note The timing parameter limits are measures at the module field terminal connector at the logic low threshold level 338 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intelligent Special Purpose Module Functions COUNT UP COUNT DOWN REMOVE ENABLE OUTPUTS COUNTER PRESET COUNTER ENABLE RATE SAMPLE VALUE The following functions apply to the EHC202 high speed counter module The input counter is reset to zero if the count direction input is UP and a preset hardware or software or Load Value command is sent to the module When counting in the UP direction the input counter increments to the maximum value the next input pulse sets
601. the contact is used at rated loads of 5 150 Vdc or 20 250 Vac Each Point 2 A max at 250 Vac or 30 Vdc 9 60 C ambient resistive load Surge Current Maximum Each Point 10 A capacitive load 10 ms Switching Capability 500 VA resistive load Response OFF ON 10 ms max ON OFF 20 ms max Off State Leakage lt 100 HA Relay Contact Life Mechanical Operations 10 000 000 Electrical Operations 200 000 resistive load max voltage and current 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 649 I O Modules Specifications Electrical Operations 30 150 Vdc see note below 100 000 300 mA resistive load 50 000 500 mA resistive load 100 000 100 mA L R 10 msec 100 000 Interposing Relay Westinghouse Style 606B Westinghouse type SG Struthers Dunn 219 x 13 XP Relay Type Form A Contact Protection Varistor 275 V internal Isolation Channel to Channel 1780 Vac rms for one minute Field to Bus 1780 Vac rms for one minute 2500 Vdc for one minute Bus Current Required 1100 mA Power Dissipation 5 5 W 0 5 x N Watts where N the number of points on External Power Not required for this module Fusing Internal None External User discretion Note Relay contact life for inductive loads may be significantly increased by using external contact protection such as a
602. the counter to zero and it continues counting back up to the maximum value The input counter is set to maximum count if the count direction is down and a preset hardware or software or Load Value command is sent to the module When counting in the DOWN direction the input counter is decremented from the maximum value to zero The next pulse resets the input counter to the Maximum value and the increment down starts again This function disables the input counter causing it to stop incrementing and hold the count accumulated prior to disabling When configured in the count mode outputs will turn on for defined times when setpoints or maximum values have been reached No output assertion in two 32 bit counter mode or rate sample Programmed ON time for outputs can be set for one channel one output and one trigger point only In a running controller latched outputs are turned off only by a hardware RESET input If no reset is provided the outputs latched on will turn off when the controller is stopped This is both a hardware and software function In the event that both methods are used the last one executed has precedence An input counter will be automatically preset whenever a new maximum value or rate sample time is loaded Both hardware and software enables are required for an input counter to operate An input counter will be automatically software enabled whenever a new maximum value is loaded or a preset
603. tial inputs e Two FET output switches for each counter turned on when the counter reaches programmed setpoint or maximum values and turned off by changes in counter values software commands or a hard wired reset from the field Note Refer to I O Configuration for 140 20200 p 304 for configuring and operating the EHC202 with Modsoft EHC20200 High The following figure shows the EHC20200 Two Channel High Speed Counter Speed Counter module Module Model Number Module Description 40L 3 1 Customer Identification Label Fold label place it inside the LED Area Field Wiring Terminal Strip Removable Door d T N a iE 3916 EN F J 399 Sor Q 1 LG amp Q Ny 910 Soh Q E RUE E Qo V 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 333 Intelligent Special Purpose Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the EHC20200 High Speed Counter module Specifications Number of Channels 2 with 2 outputs each LEDs Active F 8 Input Status LEDs Green 4 Output Status LEDs Green Count Frequency 500 kHz max with differential inputs 250 kHz max with single
604. tification for this module Note 1 Entity parameters per channel Voc 29 42 V Isc 93 mA Ca 71 nf La 2 0 mH Note 2 Maximum non hazardous area voltage must not exceed 250 V Note 3 Install in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code Part for installation in Canada Note 4 Install in accordance with the NEC ANSI NFPA 70 and ANSI ISA RP 12 6 for installation in the United States Note 5 To maintain intrinsic safety shield for each cable must be grounded and must extend as close to the terminals as possible Note 6 Intrinsically Safe 1 5 cables of one module must be routed separately from 1 5 cables of another module Note 7 1 5 devices when connected to 1 5 terminals must satisfy the following conditions Voc lt Vmax Isc lt Imax Ca gt Ci Ccable La gt Li Leable Note 8 This module is certified as a component for mounting in a suitable enclosure where the suitability of the final combination is subject to acceptance by CSA or an inspection authority having the jurisdiction NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION Monitor 1 Output 1 Monitor 2 Chassis Ground Output 4 N C N C N C Monitor 5 See Note 3 Monitor 6 Output 6 Monitor 7 Output 7 Monitor 8 Output 8 1 5 Module AIO 330 00 Blue Terminal Strip 31001364 Rev 00 The following is a CSA certified wiring diagram
605. tion description 21 dual cable illustration 22 Hot Standby 22 single cable illustration 21 RIO drop modules See CRA93X00 RIO head modules See CRP93X00 RIO in a Hot Standby configuration dual cable configuration illustration 24 single cable configuration illustration 23 RIO modules communication interface modules 9 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xxix Index s signal descriptions EHC20200 343 single cable configuration RIO 21 RIO in a Hot Standby configuration 23 spare parts description 707 specifications ACI03000 479 ACIO4000 483 ACO02000 505 ACO13000 509 All33010 403 AlO33000 409 ARI030010 487 ATI03000 491 AVI03000 495 AVO02000 513 CableFast 751 CHS11000 372 CPS11100 63 CPS11400 66 90 CPS11410 69 CPS11420 72 CPS12400 75 CPS12420 78 CPS21100 81 CPS21400 84 CPS22400 87 CPS42400 93 CPS51100 97 CPS52400 100 CPU11302 106 CPU11303 116 CPU21304 126 CPU42402 136 CPU43412 146 CPU43412A 157 CPU53414 168 CPU53414A 179 CRA21X10 217 CRA21X20 222 CRP81100 195 CRP93X00 229 DAI34000 534 DAI35300 537 DAI44000 540 DAI45300 543 DAI54000 546 DAI54300 549 DAI55300 553 DAI74000 557 DAI75300 560 DAO84000 594 DAO84010 598 DAO84210 603 DAO84220 608 DAO85300 613 00115310 563 DDI35300 566 DDI35310 568 DDI36400 570 DDI67300 574 DDI84110 578 DDI85300 581 DDM39000 682 DDM69000 688 DDO15310 618 DDO35300 622 DDO35301
606. tion module interface technique see Quantum Network Interface Techniques p 33 Note Only two Modbus Plus modules can have full functionality Including Quantum DIO support Watchdog timer 250 ms S W adjustable Logic Solve Time 0 1 ms kto 0 5 ms k 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 179 CPU Modules Specifications Battery Type 3 V Lithium Service Life 1200 mAh Shelf Life 10 years with 0 596 loss of capacity per year Battery Load Current at Power off Typical 14 uA Maximum 420 uA Communication Modbus RS 232 2 serial port 9 pin D shell Modbus Plus RS 485 1 network port 9 pin D shell Programming Software Capability Modsoft Version 2 6 Concept version 2 1 with B2 1 patch exec Concept 2 2 with SR2 ProWorx Nxt version 2 0 ProWorx Plus version 1 05 General Diagnostics Power Up Runtime RAM RAM Address Executive Checksum User Logic Check RAM RAM Address Executive Checksum User Logic Check Processor Bus Current Required 1 25A Power dissipation 6 25 W TOD Clock 8 0 seconds day 0 60 C Operating Temperature 0 50 C 180 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions Ready Run Bat Low Modbus Modbus Error A Mem Prt The following figure shows the LED indicators The following tab
607. tive Modbus Plus Port Modbus ports on NOMs are always in bridge mode with their associated Modbus Plus port Only one programmer connection can be logged in at a time to any CPU and only one program monitor can be attached at a time to any CPU Modbus port parameters on NOMS 3 6 are defined by Modbus Port in Concept and Modsoft when the comm parameter selector switch is in mem Upto 4 MSTR read write register instructions can be serviced per CPU scan per Modbus Plus port 40 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum System Specifications Ata Glance Overview This part provides system specifications for the Quantum automation system What s in this This part contains the following chapters 2 parta Chapter Chapter Name Page 4 System Specifications for the Quantum Module 43 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 41 System Specifications 42 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 System Specifications for the Quantum Module 4 Quantum System Specifications Overview All modules are designed to the following system specifications which include e Mechanical e Electrical e AC DC power supplies It shows the I O modules operating voltages for e Less than 24 Vac or Vdc e Between 24 and 48 Vac or Vdc e Greater than 48 Vac or Vdc Also given are the operating and storage conditions as well as agency approvals Mechanical The following tab
608. to Bus 1780 Vac RMS for 1 minute Group to Group 500 Vac for 1 minute Output Protection internal Transient voltage suppression overload short circuit protection Fault Detection Blown fuse detect loss of power incorrect output state Bus Current Required 500 mA Power Dissipation 2 5 0 1 x No of points ON total load current x 0 4 watts External Power 10 30 Fusing Internal 5 0 Amp fuse per group P N 0043502405 External Not required If desired a 3 4 A 250 V fuse P N 57 0078 00 may be used Programming Software Type and version Concept Version 2 2 or higher Modsoft Version 2 6 1 or higher 662 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Fuse Locations A view of fuse locations on the module is shown below 140 DVO 853 00 10 30 VDC OUT Fuse Locations Points 9 16 Points 17 24 r Points 25 32 CAUTION Possible danger to equipment or personnel Turn off power to the module and remove the field wiring terminal strip to gain access to fuses Failure to follow this precaution can result in injury or equipment damage 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 663 I O Modules Wiring Diagram A wiring diagram for the Quantum 140DVO85300 module is shown below
609. to make an electrical connection with the backplane I O bus connector c Tighten the screw at the bottom of the 2 module to fasten it to the backplane The maximum tightening torque for this screw is 2 4 in Ibs 0 23 0 45 Nm a I 1 z i Module L Hooks N 3 Bus 4 Connector b _ C Side view of installing a en module to the backplane i Screw Module 2 4 nstall the appropriate terminal strip if required the W SM module and with a philips screwdriver tighten the mounting screws at the top and bottom of the terminal Terminal Strip The maximum tightening torque for the mounting V O Screws screws is 10 in Ibs 1 13 Nm 4 Terminal 5 With a philips screwdriver make all I O connections B Strip to the terminal strip as shown in the individual BH Quantum module wiring diagrams z The maximum tightening torque for the terminal Fl strip field wiring screws is 10 in Ibs 1 13 Nm Mounting Screw 724 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation InstallingModule Terminal strip jumper clips see below are installed when contiguous I O points Terminal Strip need to be jumpered i e the AVO 020 00 Analog Voltage Out module Follow the Jumper Clips procedure below for installing jumper clips 4 Turn power off to the system Remove the terminal strip from the module see next page Loosen the terminal strip I O screws of the points that you want j
610. tor The following table shows the CPS41400 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus 90 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the CPS41400 wiring diagram Power Loss Alarm 48 60 Vdc Common 48 60 Vdc QOOOOO E Capacitor t Optional ISI Note A normally closed relay contact rated at 220 Vac 6A 30 Vdc 5A is available on terminals 1 and 2 of the power terminal strip This contact set may be used to signal input power OFF or a power supply failure Note See Power and Grounding Considerations for AC and DC Powered Systems p 730 for power and grounding wiring guidelines and operational information Operating Curve following figures show the CPS41400 operating curve left and the hold up and Timing Chart capacitor timing chart right Capacitor size mF 47 22 10 68 47 12 100 lt 10 Ruc sss 90 2 2 80 5 8 6 70 1 o 2 4 60 m 0 2 E 2 50 40 A e 40 45 50 55 60 30 Ambient Temperature C 20 10 0 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 Input Voltage Note Tolerance to input interruptions may be increased by adding a gt 80 Vdc electrolytic capacitor betwee
611. tput comm state 6849 building 10 byte packet 684A building 12 byte packet 684B building 16 byte packet 684C illegal I O drop number 6729 984 interface bus ack stuck high 6616 coax cable initialization error 6617 coax cable dma xfer error 6619 coax cable dumped data error 681A coax cable DRQ line hung 681C coax cable DRQ hung 6503 ram address test error 6402 ram data test error 6300 prom checksum error Exec not loaded 6301 prom checksum error 8 8001 Kernal prom checksum error 8002 Flash prog erase error 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 231 Networking LED Error Codes Number of Blinks Code Error 8003 Unexpected executive return 232 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Networking 140CRA93X00 Quantum RIO Adapter Drop Single and Dual Channel Module Overview The Remote I O Drop Single and Dual Channel modules are used to transfer data bi directionally over a coaxial cable network between I O modules installed in the same RIO drop backplane and the RIO head installed in the CPU backplane RIO Drop Module The following figure shows the components of the Remote I O RIO drop module The specific module shown is the CRA93200 Version Label Customer Identification Label Model Number Fold label and place it inside door Module Description Part 043504680 LED Area Color Code
612. trollers a panel device connected to the CPU Modbus port can communicate with the controller to which it is connected as well as log into any nodes on the Modbus Plus network Setting the slide switch to the top position assigns ASCII functionality to the port the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed ASCII Comm Port Parameters Baud 2 400 Parity Even Data Bits 7 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting Setting the slide switch to the middle position assigns remote terminal unit RTU functionality to the port the following comm parameters are set and cannot be changed RTU Comm Port Parameters Baud 9 600 Parity Even Data Bits 8 Stop Bits 1 Device Address Rear panel rotary switch setting 140 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CPU Modules Setting the slide switch to the bottom position gives you the ability to assign comm parameters to the port in software the following parameters are valid Valid Comm Port Parameters Baud 19 200 1 200 9 600 600 7 200 300 4 800 150 3 600 134 5 2 400 110 2 000 75 1 800 50 Parity Enable Disable Odd Even Data Bits 718 Stop Bits 1 2 Device Address 1 247 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 141 CPU Modules Rear Panel Two rotary switches refer to the following illustration are located on the rear
613. ty operational specifications 360 description 357 DIP switch settings 367 discrete inputs operational specifications 359 discrete inputs and high speed input electrical specifications 361 discrete output electrical specifications 361 discrete outputs operational specifications 359 drive interface electrical specifications 362 electrical specifications 361 encoder feedback interface electrical specifications 362 front panel indicators 364 high speed input operational XXV 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index specifications 358 illustration 357 incremental encoder feedback 360 LED descriptions 364 Modbus connectors 365 motor temperature input electrical specifications 362 operational specifications 358 power requirements electrical specifications 362 rear panel switches 367 resolver feedback fully configured version 360 resolver interface electrical specifications 361 servo 358 servo connector 366 servo connector signals 366 N network interface techniques CPU interface support 33 description 33 direct CPU driver 33 map interface 34 option module interface 33 network modules MMS interface 10 NOA61110 Seven segment display 204 NOA611X0 LED descriptions 202 LED indicators 202 required loadables 206 reset push button 206 RS 232C port 206 NOA62200 LED descriptions 203 LED indicators 203 NOA6XXXX comparison of feat
614. u must have a LonWorks compliant network management tool such as Metra Vision to install an NOL module on a LonWorks network Related Documentation For more detailed information see the Quantum Automation Series Network Option Module for LonWorks part number 840USE10900 LonWorks Network Option Modules Model Number Module Description Color Code LED Display 140 C O NOL 911 00 CONTROLLER RS 232 Serial Port Service Pin Reset Button Auxiliary LonWorks Comm Port Primary LonWorks Comm Port Removable Door lt The following figure shows the NOL911X0 LonWorks Network Option Module Customer Identification Label Fold label and place it inside door Neuron Domain Subset 1 Subset 2 Node ID m gt lt amp lt 208 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the NOL911X0 module Specifications Data Transfer Frequency 78 Kbps 140 NOL 911 10 Connection Styles Screw terminals telephone jack Bus Current Required 400 mA Quantum Controllers V2 0 at a minimum Remote I O V2 0 at a minimum
615. ule Overview This map provides information on the specifications LED indicators and description and error codes for the 140CPU53414A Controller Module This module is functionally identical to the non A version however the following should be considered e lf you are using the module in a hot standby topology then you must use either two non A models or two A models e The A version requires a new flash executive The A version and non A flash executives are not interchangeable e Schneider Automation software Concept ProWORX and Modsoft supports the A version Any existing or new 140CPU53414 program configuration will load into a 140CPU53414A without any modifications CPU Module The following figure shows the CPU Module and its components N Model Number GPU SETA n Module Description LED Color Code Removable door RET Customer Identification Label Part 4043513804 Fold label and place it inside door Part 31002249 lt q Battery x H Key Switch O i 2 H Slide pum Switch nes Modbus i B L f Connector u Comm Modbus i Connector 2 8 zi o Plus Modbus Plus B Connector RE Network lt 178 840 USE 100 0
616. um Automation Series systems Related For a detailed discussion of the planning installation and use of a Quantum Profibus Documentation system refer to the Modicon TSX Quantum Profibus DP Under Modsoft User Manual P N 840USE46800 Profibus DP Under Concept Manual P N 840USE48700 and the Profibus DP Configutator for CRP 811 P N 840USE46900 190 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Quantum Field Bus Modules Communicatons View of the 140CRP81100 communications module and the Profibus tap Module Customer Identification Label Module Model Fold label and place it inside door Number LED Status Removable Door Display Part 043513804 lt RS 232C port PCMCIA Card 467 911 PROFIBUS RS 485 Port Profibus Tap 490NAE91 1 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 191 Quantum Field Bus Modules LED Status The following figure shows the LED Status display Active Ready Fault Backplane PROFIBUS DP S R Load The following table provides descriptions of the Status LEDs LEDs Color Function Description Active Green On Indicates bus communication is present Flashing The flash ram load operation is active Ready Green On Module is operational Fault Red On Indicates fault Refer to LED fault codes in manual 840USE46800 Backplane
617. umbers Modicon 140CFU40000 Qty 10 Wickman 3701400041 UL VDE SEMK IEC 127 3 a dnou5 d T Group C Power Group D Power Group A Power Group B Power 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 769 CableFast Cabling Note 1 The 140CFC03200 is shipped with Modicon 140CFU08000 0 8 A fuse installed Ensure that the Modicon 140CFU40000 4 A fuse is installed when the 140CFC03200 and the 14000015300 are wired together The terminal block commoning strip Modicon 140CFX00110 Qty 10 can be used to jumper the power between groups 770 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 CableFast Cabling Wiring Diagram The following figure shows the 140CFC03200 wiring for the 14000035300 and for DDO3530X 140DDO35301 output modules Output Module Module Group A Common Module Field Side Connections Group A Supply Module Group B Common Module Group B Supply Module 2 Output 1 934 9 44J 54 6 74 84 Module Output 1 Modul Output FA 4 vc e VDH vD Typical 2 wire 3 4A configuration V dfiOHuO Typical 1 wire configuration 2 C U UJ 2 c U 4 Fuse Part Numbers Modicon st 140CFU40000 Qty 10 W
618. umpered Insert the jumper clip under the loosened Screws see exploded view below Tighten the screws and reinstall the 3 module see previous page Insert Jumper Clip Inserted Jumper Clip Terminal Strip Screw Exploded view of an inserted jumper clip 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 725 Hardware Installation Removing a Quantum I O Terminal Strip The Quantum Automation Series I O terminal strips have been designed with a pry slot to assist in their removal Follow the procedure below to remove the terminal strip Pry Slot dms amp 2 T gt Mounting Screws Pry Slot YV Insert screwdriver Exploded View Loosen the terminal strip mounting screws located at the top and bottom of the terminal strip Located the pry slot at the top of the terminal strip near the top mounting screw From the front and at an angle insert a flat edge screwdriver into the pry slot and lever the top of the terminal strip away from the module Once the top of the terminal strip has been loosened the terminal strip may be completely removed by continuous outward pressure with the screwdriver To reinstall the terminal strip into the module follow the procedure previously described Backplane Module Side view 726 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Removing a The Quantum Automation Series module terminal strips have been designed wit
619. unication is active on the Modbus Plus port Fport1 Green Indicates an optical signal has been received on fiber optic Port 1 Fport2 Green Indicates an optical signal has been received on fiber optic Port 2 FRNGoff Red Indicates the first break in a self healing ring 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 251 Modbus Plus NOM Specifications The following table shows the specifications for the NOM25200 module Specifications General Communication Ports Optical Ports 2 consisting of an optical receiver and transmitter Modbus Port 1 RJ45 phone jack type connector Transmission Data Rate 1 Mbit second for Modbus Plus with Bi Phase S encoded data Optical Interface ST Type connectors Pulse Width Distortions and Jitter 5 ns or better Wavelength 820 nm Power Loss Budget includes 3 dB 50 125 micron fiber 6 5 dB of system margins 62 5 125 micron fiber 11 dB 100 140 micron fiber 16 5 dB Maximum Distance for point to 2 km over 50 micron fiber point connection 3 km over 62 5 micron fiber 3 km over 100 micron fiber Maximum System Length in Self Healing Ring Configuration 10 km over 62 5 micron fiber Optical Transmitter Specifications Optical Power Measured with 1 m test fiber 12 8 19 8 dBm average power in 50 125 micron fiber cable 9 0 16 dBm average power in 62 5 125 micron fiber cable
620. unication port parameters 130 specifications 126 SW1 and SW2 address settings 132 SW1 and SW2 switches 132 valid communication port parameters 130 CPU42402 ASCII communication port parameters 140 description 135 front panel switches 140 illustration 135 LED descriptions 137 LED error codes 138 LED indicators 137 Modbus connector pinouts 143 Modbus ports pinout connections 143 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers 144 rear panel switches 142 RTU communication port parameters 140 specifications 136 SW1 and SW2 address settings 142 SW1 and SW2 switches 142 valid communication port parameters 141 xviii 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Index CPU43412 150 ASCII comm port parameters 150 description 145 key switch 153 LED description 148 LED error codes 148 LED indicators 147 Modbus connector pinouts 154 Modbus ports pinout connections 155 Modbus ports pinout connections for portable computers 155 rear panel rotary switches 152 RTU comm port parameters 150 specifications 146 SW1 and SW address settings 152 SW1 and SW2 switches 152 valid comm port parameters 151 CPU43412A ASCII communication port parameters 161 description 156 front panel slide switch 161 key switch 163 LED descriptions 159 LED error codes 159 LED indicators 158 Modbus connector pinouts 165 Modbus pinout connections for portable computers 166 M
621. upply of important backplane signals related to the health of the power supply and the status of the input power All Quantum power supplies include on board early power fail detection logic which is used to signal all other modules on the backplane that input power has failed This signal is called POK power OK and is active high i e when the signal is high power is OK There is both an internal to the power supply and an external as seen by the backplane and all other modules version of the POK signal The internal POK signal is represented by the Pwr ok LED light emitting diode on the front panel of all power supplies The system POK signal is generated so that there is sufficient time between the negative going edge of system POK power has failed and the actual interruption of power to the backplane This early warning of power failure is necessary for the Quantum executive to perform an orderly system shutdown Standalone Three models of standalone power supplies are offered Power li ower Supplies L OCPS11100 115 230 Vac input 3 A output 140CPS21100 24 Vdc input 3 A output 140CPS51100 125 Vdc input 3 A output CAUTION Equipment compatibility Standalone units must be the only power supply installed in a backplane No fault tolerant or redundant capability exists in systems powered by standalone power supplies In systems powered by a standalone power supply the internal power supply POK is prov
622. ures 207 description 201 front panel conncections 205 illustration 201 InterBus port 205 specifications 202 NOE2X100 description 272 illustration 272 installation 274 installation example 274 LED descriptions 273 LED indicators 273 specifications 272 NOE3X100 description 276 illustration 276 LED descriptions 278 specifications 277 SY MAX addressing 278 NOE5X100 description 279 illustration 279 LED descriptions 281 LED indicators 280 specifications 280 NOE77100 peer cop based I O scanner 286 NOE771x0 BOOTP server 291 NOE771x1 Enhanced Web Diagnostics 295 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 xxvii Index NOE771xx Bandwith Monitoring 294 DHCP server 291 enhanced MODBUS I O scanner 287 FTP server 289 Global Data 293 HTTP server 289 illustration 282 key features 285 LED descriptions 284 LED indicators 284 MODBUS I O scanner 286 MODBUS TCP server 288 Quantum Ethernet TCP IP modules 288 run LED status 285 services 294 specifications 283 NOL911X0 auxiliary LonWorks communication port 212 description 208 front panel connectors 211 front panel push buttons 211 illustration 208 LED descriptions 209 LED error codes 210 LED indicator status 210 LED indicators 209 media types 212 primary LonWorks communication port 212 RS 232 configuration port 211 specifications 209 NOM modules Modbus Plus on Fiber 9 tw
623. us Plus communication cable grounding Diameter 8 mm 0 31 inches Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules Diameter 4mm 0 16 inches A 290 mm 11 42 inches B 270 mm 10 63 inches 175 5 6 91 inches D 94 5 mm 3 72 inches E 10mm 0 39 inches F 15mm 0 59 inches G 265 1 mm 10 44 inches H 235 mm 9 25 inches 714 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Hardware Installation Ten Position The following figure shows the ten position backplane Backplane Gi Figure F E E m Es Ground Screws Mounting Hole Diameter 8mm 0 31 inches O Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding Diameter 8 mm 0 31 inches Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules Diameter 4mm 0 16 inches A 290 mm 11 42 inches 270 mm 10 63 inches 175 5 mm 6 91 inches 94 5 mm 3 72 inches 10 mm 0 39 inches 15 mm 0 59 inches 427 66 mm 16 84 inches 397 56 mm 15 65 inches 198 78 mm 7 825 inches 0mm 00 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 715 Hardware Installation Sixteen Position Backplane Figure gt c Mounting Hole The following figure shows the sixteen position backplane Ground Screws Diameter 8mm 0 31 inches O Optional locations for Modbus Plus communication cable grounding Diameter 8 mm 0 31 inches Threaded mounting holes for half and full height modules Diameter 4mm 0 16
624. us Plus 140NOM25200 module Fiber Module LED Area Modbus Connector Comm Parameter Slide Switch Port 2 TX and RX Connectors Port 1 TX and RX Connectors 1401 252 00 CONTROLLER Modbus j Pus ik g ASCII Model Number Module Description Color Code Customer Identification Label Removable Door Fold label and place it inside door Part 043504417 lt Modbus N 250 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Modbus Plus NOM LED Indicators The following figure shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED indicators and Descriptions Ready Run Modbus Modbus Fport 1 Fport 2 FRNGoff The following table shows the Modbus Plus on Fiber LED descriptions LED Descriptions LEDs Color Indication when On Ready Green The module has passed powerup diagnostics Run Green Indicates that the unit is in kernel mode should always be OFF during normal operations Note The table for the NOM 21X 00 shows the number of times the RUN LED on the Modbus Plus on Fiber Module blinks for each type of error and the crash codes for each all codes are in hex Modbus Green Indicates communication is active on the single RS 232 serial port Modbus Green Indicates comm
625. ut state choices if selected in Output Shutdown State menu Fail States Outputs OFF Last Value User Defined Outputs OFF Group outputs turn OFF Last Value Group outputs remain in the state they were in User Defined Group output states may be individually selected in the User Defined Values column to be ON or OFF Choices If Selected 00000000 0 OFF P d 1 Lowest Numbered Highest Numbered Group Output Ch 1 9 17 25 Group Output Ch 8 16 24 32 658 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Status Input RE I O map register assignments Inputs Status Input Verified Health Verified Fault Input Only Actual Verified Health The associated bit 1 when the point output command and module output state agree Verified Fault The associated bit 1 when the point output command and module output state disagree Input Only Input module operation for diagnostic purposes only When an output point has a high applied the associated 1x bit or 3x register location 1 There are no specifications for output terminals read as inputs and the DVO should not be operated as an input module in a system If the corresponding 4x register point is turned OFF a high will also cause the LED display red F to appear and a group miscompare bit will set in the I O Map status byte If the corresponding 4x point is turned ON no LED ref F or group miscompare will be displayed when a high is
626. ver 4 24Vdc Noe ay 4 lt Note When field wiring the power supply module the maximum wire size that should be used is 1 14 AWG or 2 16 AWG the minimum is 20 AWG 80 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Power Supplies Specifications LED Indicator and Description The following table shows the specifications for the CPS21100 PS 24 VDC power supply module Specifications Input Requirements Input Voltage 20 30 Vdc Input Current 1 6A Inrush Current 30A Input Power Interruption 1 0 ms max 20 V 20 0 ms max 24 V Fusing external 2 5 A slo blo recommended Part 043502516 or equivalent Output to Bus Voltage 5 1 Vdc Maximum Current 3A Minimum Current 0 3A Protection Over Current Over Voltage General Field Wiring Connector included 7 point terminal strip Part 043503328 Internal Power Dissipation 2 0 3x lout Watts where lout is in Amperes Operating Mode Standalone The following figure shows the CPS21100 LED indicator Pwr ok The following table shows the CPS21100 LED description LED Description LEDs Color Indication when On Pwr ok Green Power is supplied to the bus 840 US
627. vice and the input of channel 1 Input Section 4 Channels Typical Wiring Inputs Channel 1 Channel 1 shows 4 20 mA current input controlled by output section Channel 2 Channel 4 The input shows a connection to a voltage output sensor Note 1 Pins 1 20 are outputs Pins 21 40 are inputs 2 N C Not Connected 3 Jumpers are required between IN and SENSE terminals for all current input ranges 528 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules 18 5 Discrete Input Modules At a Glance Overview This section provides information on Quantum discrete input modules What s in this This section contains the following topics Section Topic Page I O Configuration for Discrete Input Modules 530 140DAI34000 Quantum I O 24 VAC IN Module 534 140DAI35300 Quantum I O AC Input 24 Vac Module 537 1400 144000 Quantum I O 48 VAC IN Module 540 140DAI45300 Quantum I O AC Input 48 Vac 4x8 Module 543 140DAI54000 Quantum I O 115 VAC In Module 546 140DAI54300 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 Module 549 140DAI55300 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 4x8 Module 553 140DAI74000 Quantum I O AC Input 230 Vac 16x1 Module 557 140DAI75300 Quantum I O AC Input 230 Vac 4x8 Module 560 14000115310 Quantum I O DC Input 5 V TTL 4x8 Source Module 563 140DDI35300 Quantum I O DC Input 24 Vdc 4x8 Sink Module 566 14000135310 Quantum I O DC Input 2
628. wisted pair wires The acceptable field wire gauge is AWG 20 to AWG 12 Wiring between the module and the intrinsically safe field device should follow intrinsically safe wiring practices to avoid the transfer of unsafe levels of energy to the hazardous area Fixed Wiring The Quantum 140 1133010 Intrinsically Safe Current Input module is designed with System a fixed wiring system where the field connections are made to a 40 pin fixed position blue terminal strip which is plugged into the module Terminal Strip The module s 140XTS33200 field wiring terminal strip is color coded blue to identify Colorand Keying itas an intrinsically safe connector The terminal strip is keyed to prevent the wrong Assignment connector from being applied to the module The keying assignment is given below Module Class Module Part Number Module Coding Terminal Strip Coding Intrinsically Safe 140 1133010 ABD 404 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 Intrinsically Safe Modules Agency The following is a Cenelec certified wiring diagram for this module Approved Wiring Diagrams CENELEC CERTIFICATION HAZARDOUS LOCATION Entity Parameters NON HAZARDOUS LOCATION ZONE 1 per Channel GROUP IIA IIB IIC Vo 23 8 Vdc lo 112 mA ch Po 622mwch rr CR SEE NOTE 1 Co 127 nf ch Lo 2 9 mH ch 1 5 14 5 3 WIRE TRANSMITTER Signal 1 esum V2 N C 9 9
629. ws the I O module keying assignments Secondary Primary Left Side of Right Side of Key Slots Key Slots Terminal Strip Terminal Strip 4 d A l 1 l I B 2 c B l 1 D 3 2 s 4 IL 3 5 4 B rl D i i I B C A O Install the key into the slot round end first Note The primary secondary keys shown in black in this example reflect the recommended coding of a 24 Vdc module in slot 6 to its field wiring terminal strip To support keying all I O modules accepting terminal strips come with 12 customer installable primary keys six yellow keys each for the module and terminal strip and six secondary keys three white keys each for the module and terminal strip In the following table check the Primary Module and Terminal Strip Coding columns for key locations 454 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules I O Module Terminal Strip Keying The following table shows the primary module and terminal strip keying for the I O modules Primary Module and Terminal Strip Keying
630. x register input Type BIN BCD The modules listed above can be configured as 8 Ox references or as 1 output 4x register in the following format 817165143211 L Group B fault L Group A fault 674 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 I O Modules Modsoft Module Push lt Enter gt to display and select the output type and the timeout state for the Zoom Selections module Timeout state is assumed when system control of the module is stopped Outputs Output Type Timeout State BIN BCD Last Value User Defined User Defined Timeout State Points 1 8 00000000 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 675 I O Modules 140DAM59000 Quantum I O AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 Overview Topology Specifications Input Specifications The AC Input 115 Vac 2x8 AC Output 115 Vac 2x4 module accepts 115 Vac inputs and switches 115 Vac loads The following table shows the specifications for the 115 VAC and AC IN OUT module for the Topology Topology Number of Input Points 16 in two 8 point groups Number of Output Points 8 in two 4 point groups LEDs Active F red No power applied to the group s or blown fuse 1 16 Green right two columns Indicates input status 1 8
631. xecutive Ver 2 0 or higher NOE Upgradeable Field Upgradeable via FTP or Programming Panel Operating Conditions Temperature 0 to 60 C Humidity 0 to 95 Rh non condensing 60 C Altitude 15 000 ft 4500 m Vibration 10 57 Hz 0 0075 mm d a 57 150 Hz 1g Storage Conditions Temperature 40 to 85 C Humidity 0 to 95 Rh non condensing 60 C Free Fall 1 m unpackaged Shock shocks axis 15 9 11 ms 840 USE 100 00 September 2002 283 Ethernet Modules LED Indicators and Descriptions The following figure shows the NOE771xx LED indicators Active Ready Fault Run Coll Link Tx Act Rx Act 10MB 100MB Fduplex Kernel Appl The following table describes the meaning of each NOE771xx LED indicator LED Descriptions LED Color Description Active Green Indicates the backplane is configured Ready Green Indicates module is healthy Fault Red During a crash while going through a reset If Duplicate IP address is detected If no link is available While going through BOOTP sequence Run Green Flashes to indicate diagnostic code as described in Run LED Status following table Coll Red Flashes when Ethernet collisions occur Link Green On when Ethernet link is active TxAct Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet transmission RxAct Green Flashes to indicate Ethernet reception Kernel A
632. xtract the required IP address information from its database and place it in BOOTP response messages to the requesting devices The devices will use the assigned IP addresses received from the BOOTP Server for all communication occurring on the network Your NOE Your NOE x0 module comes supplied with a BOOTP Server This feature allows you BOOTP Server to provide IP addresses to all the I O devices being serviced by the NOE771x0 Providing a BOOTP Server that is built into your NOE771x0 module eliminates the need for you to have a dedicated PC on your I O network acting as a BOOTP Server Note The NOE771x0 s BOOTP Server cannot be used to provide its own IP address You can configure your NOE771x0 s BOOTP Server from the module s HTTP Web page Using this feature allows you to add remove and edit devices to the BOOTP Server s database which is maintained on the modules non volatile memory DHCP Server Note The DHCP Server is available on the 140NOE771x1 models Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP is a superset of the BOOTP Protocol Your 140NOE771x1 has a DHCP Server The DHCP Server is compliant with RFC 1531 The DHCP Server can be used to provide the IP configuration to devices using BOOTP or devices using DHCP The DHCP Server has entries that use the MAC address to serve the IP configuration and entries in the Server that use the role name to serve the IP configuration See the Address Server C

Quantum Hardware Reference Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents